table of contents for standard terms

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS

1. Cover Letter and Notice to Bidders ................................................................ .

2. Supplementary General Conditions ............................................................... . A. City's Excluded Parties List. .............................................................. . B. Prevailing Wage Statement .............................................................. .

3. Uniform General Conditions for Construction Contracts ................................ .

4. Approved Forms ............................................................................................. . A. Payment Bond .................................................................................. . B. Performance Bond ............................................................................ . C. Maintenance Bond ........................................................................... . D. Standard Form of Agreement ........................................................... . E. Tax Exemption Certificate ................................................................. . F. New Price Request ........................................................................... . G. Change Order Form .......................................................................... . H. Required Workers' Compensation Coverage ............................. . I. No Award Form ................................................................................. .

5. Plans and Specifications ................................................... .

Cover Letter and Instructions to Bidders Revised 11/11 /14 Bid No. 5040

SIMMS MUNICIPAL BUILDING RENOVATIONS

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

These specifications and accompanying drawings are for the Simms Municipal Building Renovations, 808 S. Buchanan Street in Amarillo, Texas.

A. The bidder will provide all the work, superintendence, labor, tools, equipment, machinery and apparatus and whatever else may be necessary to complete the project as stated in this bid. The Contractor will be supplying all materials, equipment and labor.

B. Bids must be sealed in order to be considered.

C. The estimated budget for the project is $4, 150,000.00.

D. The successful vendor will not start work until Notice to Proceed Letter from the City of Amarillo is issued. After the bid has been awarded by the governing body, the Purchasing Department will send the awarded contractor a Notice of Award. Upon receipt of this notice, the vendor will have 10 calendar days to provide the Purchasing Department with all of the bonds, insurance, signed contracts and any other documentation that is required by the terms and conditions of the bid. The Contracts must be signed by the City, insurance and bonds must be approved and all other conditions required by the terms and conditions of the bid, such as a required pre construction conference must also be met before the Notice to Proceed Letter can be issued.

E. This is a fixed price bid as described in the attached bid documents.

F. A Mandatory PremBid meeting will be held at 2:00 p.m., on Wednesday, April 22, 2015, at the Simms Building, East Entrance, 808 S. Buchanan, Amarillo, TX. You must attend this mandatory informational meeting as a condition for submitting a qualified bid and failure to attend this meeting will result in rejection of any submitted bid.

PROJECT:

A. Name: City of Amarillo Simms Municipal Building Renovations Amarillo, Texas

Page 1 of 9

B. Owner: City of Amarillo Facilities Administration Department P.O. Box 1971 Amarillo, Texas 79105-1971

C. Architect Lavin Associates, Inc. 2810 Duniven Circle, Suite 100 Amarillo, Texas

BID DUE DATE, TIME AND PLACE

A. Sealed bids are due in the Purchasing Department, City of Amarillo, 509 E. ih Room 307, Amarillo, Texas 79101, not later than 4:00p.m. on Thursday, May 7, 2015. Bids delivered after that date and time will not be opened or considered. The envelope should clearly indicate a bid is enclosed, the bid number, opening date and bidder's name. An alternate bid must stand alone, be received in a separate envelope that is sealed and contain all the required bid documentation and addendums as the original bid requires.

Published Dates: April 13, 2015 April 20, 2015

B. A person authorized to bind the company in a contract must sign all bid documents in the appropriate places. Incomplete or unsigned bids are nonmresponsive and will not be considered.

C. Bidders must acknowledge receipt of addendums by acknowledging on the Proposal Form where provided and/or by returning the signature page of the addendum. All addendums must be acknowledged and received by the bid opening date and time in order for the bid to be considered.

D. Bids must be delivered to the: City of Amarillo Attn: Purchasing Agent Purchasing Department, Room 307 509 E. ih Ave. Amarillo, Texas 79101

E. All bids submitted must remain valid for a minimum of ninety (90) days. Bid validity may be extended beyond ninety (90) days through mutual consent of the City and the bidder in writing.

F. All bids must be submitted on the attached bid sheets. Bids submitted on any other forms will not be considered.

Page 2 of 9

G. BID SECURITY: For all contracts above $50,000.00, bidders must submit cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the Owner or an original bid bond from a surety company that is licensed and active in the State of Texas, to act as surety, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Amarillo, Texas in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the bidder's total bid submitted as a guaranty that the bidder will enter into an agreement, execute required bonds and guaranty in the forms provided and provide required Certificate of Insurance within ten (1 0) calendar days after Notice of Award of Contract to him. The bond must be original as no copies or faxed copies will be accepted. Bids without required check or bid bond are considered non-responsive and will not be considered. A separate bid security is required for each proposal submitted.

Checks posted by unsuccessful bidders will be returned after the Standard Form of Agreement has been properly executed by the awarded bidder. Checks will be returned by certified mail or may be picked up by a properly identified person after signing a receipt.

DAVIS-BACON WAGE REQUIREMENT Effective January 1, 2014, House Bill 2015 authorizes a penalty to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and who fails to properly classify their workers. This applies to subcontractors as well. Contractors and subcontractors who fail to properly classify individuals performing work under a governmental contract will be penalized $200 for each individual that has been misclassified. (Texas Government Code Section 2155.001)

VENDOR QUALIFICATIONS After the bids have opened and the apparent low bidder has been identified. The low bidder, in order to document and prove that they are also the "low responsible bidder" shall provide to the Purchasing Agent any requested information and documentation.

INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless City and its officers, employees, agents, successors, and assigns from and against all claims, demands, suits, judgments, damages of every kind and type (bodily injury, death, property loss or destruction), attorney fees, costs, and interest that arise out of or relate to acts or omissions of Contractor or Contractor's officers, agents, employees, or subcontractors in the course of performing the contract.

QUESTIONS, CLARIFICATIONS and CORRESPONDENCE:

All questions and requests for clarification must be submitted to the Purchasing Agent in writing and will be answered by the Purchasing Agent in writing. No

Page 3 of 9

questions will be accepted or answered verbally. Except as provided in this section, upon issuance of this RFP, RFQ or Bid, vendors are specifically directed not to contact other City personnel to include any Engineers or Architects and anyone other than purchasing personnel for answers to questions, clarifications, meeting, conferences, or technical discussions or anything else related to this RFP, RFQ or Bid. Failure to strictly abide by this policy may result in the immediate disqualification of the vendor from this and other bidding opportunities.

Exempted from the no contact rule is the Pre-bid meeting, to which all of the registered vendors are invited. Pre-bid meetings can be either mandatory or non mandatory. All questions presented at a Pre-bid meeting will be addressed in an aggregated Question and Answer document that will then be provided to ill! vendors at the same time.

If the answers do not change the information published in the original documents, they will be sent a clarification only. If the answers do change the information published in the original documents, they will be sent an addendum. Addendums require signed acknowledgement of receipt of the addendum be signed and submitted with the response to the RFP, RFQ or Bid.

It is the responsibility of the vendor to verify if any addendum(s) or clarification(s) have been issued and to make sure the vendor has received all copies. Contact Purchasing at 806-378-3028 to verify if any addendum(s) or clarification(s) have been issued. Bidders may also go to Y'LY'LY~L~~J11J!IH1Q:~flQ_y then to purchasing to bid opportunities to check and see if an addendum has been issued. Addendums and clarifications will be faxed and emailed to the information we have on file. If an addendum(s) or clarification(s) are not able to be faxed due to the size of the addendum or for any other reason, then the addendum(s) or clarification(s) may be mailed, or bidders may be called and asked if they would like to pick up a copy at Purchasing.

All questions must be submitted at least 10 days prior to the bid due date. All questions will be answered at least 7 days prior to the bid due date. If the questions cannot be fully answered by that time then, the opening date of the bid will be extended by amendment to allow sufficient time for all questions to be answered and those answers to be provided to all registered vendors.

Submit your questions to: Trent Davis, Purchasing Agent City of Amarillo P.O. Box 1971 Amarillo, TX 79105

If you wish to e-mail questions send them to PJdLQJJ9§log;2_@_gQJgfiJJQ_~ggy

Page 4 of 9

If you wish to fax your questions, the Fax number is (806) 378-9494.

INDEBTEDNESS TO THE CITY OF AMARILLO:

PER CITY ORDINANCE NO. 6706, THE CITY OF AMARILLO WILL NOT AWARD A BID OR CONTRACT TO VENDORS WHO ARE DELINQUENT IN THE INDEBTEDNESS TO THIS CITY.

CONFLICT OF INTEREST REPORTING:

Per the terms of Chapter 176 of the Local Government Code, should any vendor be awarded all or any part of the goods or services on which this Bid or Proposal solicits a return, then it is the vendor's sole responsibility to provide the City of Amarillo, with an updated Conflict of Interest Questionnaire, Form CIQ. The vendor must file the updated form within 7 days after learning that a prior filing (if any) is no longer accurate. This form and the names of the City Council Members, Mayor, City Manager, Deputy City Manager and Assistant City Managers is available on the City's website located at www.amarillo.gov

BIDDER'S KNOWLEDGE OF CONDITIONS:

Prior to submission of any proposals, each bidder shall have made a thorough inspection of each site of the work, and to have read and made a thorough examination of the plans, standard specifications, and project specifications. Each bidder shall become informed as to the nature of the work, labor conditions, and other matters that may affect the cost and time of completion of the work. The failure or omission of any bidder to examine any form, instrument or document shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation in respect to his bid.

SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE:

This contract will require specific performance on all criteria as stated in your proposal. All specifications as written unless specifically taken exception to by you, and that exception accepted by the City will be strictly adhered to. Any unauthorized substitution or substandard products or construction will not be tolerated.

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS:

For all contracts in excess of $50,000.00, the bidder must furnish a Payment Bond. For all contracts in excess of $100,000.00, the bidder must furnish a Performance Bond. Each bond must be in the amount of one hundred (1 00%) percent of the total contract price from a surety company, that is licensed and active in the State of Texas, to act as surety. The bonds shall cover the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of all obligations arising in the form

Page 5 of 9

the owner prescribes and with such securities as the owner may approve. The period of the performance bond shall extend one year from the date of acceptance of all work performed under the contract. The contractor shall pay the premium for the required bonds.

Contractor shall use forms provided for payment and performance bonds. Do not date bonds.

On contracts without payment and performance bonds, no payment will be made until all the work is satisfactorily completed and accepted by the engineer. Contractor will not be paid until the contractor submits an affidavit to owner that all bills for labor and materials related to the work have been paid.

MAINTENANCE BOND

Contractor shall provide a bond on the Owner's standard one-year maintenance bond form, providing for Contractor's correction, replacement, or restoration of any portion of the Work which is found to be not in compliance with requirements of the Contract during period following Final Completion of the completed Project. Do not date bond. Refer to Article 12. Warranty & Guarantee in the General Requirements for full details.

NON TEXAS RESIDENT BIDDERS:

The City of Amarillo may not award a contract for general construction, improvements, services, or public works projects or purchases of supplies, materials, or equipment to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident's bid is lower than the lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident's principal place of business is located. This subsection does not apply to a contract involving federal funds.

ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF BIDS/PROPOSALS:

The City of Amarillo reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids/proposals or parts of bids/proposals and to waive any formalities and technicalities and to accept the bid/proposal most advantageous to the City. Certain projects do require longer time periods from bid date to award. These projects will be dutifully noted in their bid books.

CONTRACT DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS:

The Contractor shall provide the Purchasing Department with all documentation necessary for the processing of the contract documents within ten (1 0) calendar days of the Notice of Award. Necessary documentation shall include, and not be

Page 6 of 9

limited to, proper insurance certificates, contractor's statement of materials and other charges, and bonds. After all necessary documentation is received; the project contract will be executed.

TAX EXEMPTION:

Materials, which are incorporated into or become part of the project(s), are exempt from sales tax. The successful low bidder that is awarded the contract shall separate the total cost for the incorporated materials from all other cost for each project and include those amounts in the spaces provided on each project sheet provided with the agreement. The sum of the cost of materials and other cost must equal the total price bid for each project. The contract issued by the City of Amarillo shall include those separate amounts for each project. The Contractor shall execute the City of Amarillo exemption certificate for materials that will only become part of each project in the bid book. The contractor shall issue a resale certificate instead of paying the sales tax at the time of purchase.

PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:

A mandatory pre-construction conference with the issuing Division project manager, Contractor, affected City Divisions, and franchised utilities will be held as soon as possible after the project contracts have been executed. The Notice To Proceed shall not be issued until the pre-construction conference has been completed.

CITY EXCLUDED PARTIES LIST:

Please note the City's Excluded Parties List attached and submit your bid accordingly.

EXPLANATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. Scope: These specifications with the accompanying drawings are intended to describe and illustrate all material, labor and equipment necessary to construct the work named in this project as described in this Section, Item 1.

B. Specification Format: In many cases, the specifications, as written, are of abbreviated or short form type and include incomplete sentences. Omission of words or phrases such as "The Contractor shall", "in conformity therewith", "shall be", "as noted on drawings", "A", "an", "the", and "all" are intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference.

C. Correlation of Drawings and Specifications:

Page 7 of 9

In general, the drawings will indicate dimensions, positions, and kind of construction. Any work indicated on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, shall be furnished as though fully set forth in both. Work not particularly detailed, marked, or specified shall be the same as similar parts that are detailed, marked, or specified.

D. Errors: Should an error appear in the drawings or specifications, or in the work done by others affecting this work, the contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer at once, and the Architect/Engineer will issue instructions as to procedure. If the contractor proceeds with the work so affected without instructions from the Architect/Engineer, he shall make any good resulting damage or defect. This includes typographical errors in the specifications, and notational errors on the drawings where doubtful of interpretation.

OWNERS DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE (ODR)

A. See General Conditions, Articles 1.15 and 3.1.2.

SUPERVISION

A. See General Conditions, Articles 1.25 and 1.26.

GENERAL CONDITIONS:

A. Where any article of the General Conditions is supplemented hereby, the Provisions of such articles shall remain in effect. All supplemental provisions shall be considered as added thereto. Any such article is amended, voided, or superseded by provision on these Special Conditions, the provisions of such General Conditions articles not so specifically amended, voided, or superseded shall remain in effect.

LIENS:

A. It is distinctly understood that by virtue of this contract, no mechanic, contractor, material man, artisan or laborer, whether skilled or unskilled, shall ever in any manner have claim or acquire any lien upon the building or buildings, or any of the improvements of whatever nature or kinds so erected or to be erected by virtue of this contract, nor upon any of the land on which said building or any of the improvements are so erected, built or situated, except as set forth in the McGregor Act as amended by the Act of the 561

h

Legislature, 1959.

CONTRACT FORM:

Page 8 of 9

A. The "Standard Form of Agreement, of Amarillo, Texas", for use in a contract of stipulated sum. All other documents including the original bid package together with all bid addendums and clarifications and the successful bidders bid documents will be included by reference.

UTILITIES:

A. The contractor will be solely responsible for all utilities furnished to the worksite that are required for construction purposes.

AFFIDAVIT AND CONSENT SURETY:

A. Before final payment is made, the contractor shall provide the owner with the following:

1. An affidavit that all payrolls, bills of materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the work, have been paid or otherwise satisfied.

2. Consent of Surety to final payment is required.

PROJECT SIGN:

A. The only sign to be erected on the site shall be the project sign designed and approved by the ODR.

MSDS SHEETS

The contractor is responsible for providing and distributing MSDS sheets.

Page 9 of 9

Supplementary General Conditions Revised 6/6/2012

Note: Where there is a conflict between the Uniform General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions, the terms and conditions of the Supplementary General conditions take precedent. (See Section 1.26 of the Uniform General Terms and Conditions) for Building Construction Contracts.

END OF SECTION

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

CITY EXCLUDED PARTIES LIST Updates through 02/25/2015

The information provided in this list is intended for official use only. Any request for the release of this information should first be reviewed by the City Attorney's Office. Every effort is made to maintain this list accurately; however, mistakes may occur. Therefore, you are strongly advised to contact the Purchasing Department to verify current status of any party listed here, before making a decision about a vendor listed here.

As of Monday, January 5, 2015 the following vendors have either failed to comply with their contracts or are serving as a board member and have been debarred from doing business with the City of Amarillo, Texas for the period of time indicated.

Please review the attached list and submit your bid accordingly

A & R DEMOLITION & CLEARANCE

REASON: POOR PERFORMANCE

ASHTON ENTERPRISES


EXPIRATION DATE: REVIEW AFTER 5 YEARS JANUARY 11, 2016


BATTLE & TWIN ROOFING & CONSTRUCTION


BOISE CASCADE OFFICE PRODUCTS

REASON:POORPERFORMANCE

BOYD, RON CITY COUNCIL MEMBER

COMMERCIAL BLINDS & DRAPERIES



EXPIRATION DATE: WHEN APPOINTMENT EXPIRES

OWNER/PRESIDENT-- JEFFREY D STOCKER CITY EMPLOYEE

CPI/ELBERT CROW


CRUZ CONSTRUCTION INC.

JOHN CRUZ

DYNA TEN

POOR PERFORMANCE

DR. BRIAN J. EADES • PHYSICIAN CITY COUNCIL MEMBER


EXPIRATION DATE: WHEN TAX DELINQUENCY HAS BEEN SETTLED.


EXPIRATION DATE: WHEN APPOINTMENT EXPIRES Page 1

LILIA ESCAJEDA

CITY COUNCIL MEMBER EXPIRATION DATE: WHEN APPOINTMENT EXPIRES

GENERAL TRAFFIC EQUIPMENT CORPORATION

POOR PERFORMANCE

ELLEN ROBERTSON GREEN

CITY COUNCIL MEMBER

PAUL HARPOLE

CITY COUNCIL- MAYOR

IDEAL GENERAL CONTRACTING

POOR PERFORMANCE





JAN'S CONCRETE (WORK AS SUBCONTRACTOR ONLY)

POOR PERFORMANCE

MARTY'S CONCESSIONS (MGC FOOD SERVICE)

OWNER- MICHAEL CARDUCCI NON-COMPLIANCE OF CONTRACT

MCBRIDE PLUMBING

POOR PERFORMANCE




PRIDE CONSTRUCTION /PERRY ROWELL DBA

POOR PERFORMANCE

ROOF MAINTENANCE OF AMARILLO

POOR PERFORMANCE

SECOND CHANCE BODY ARMOR INC

UNABLE TO FILL PURCHASE ORDER

SPEEDTECH LIGHT

UNABLE TO FILL PURCHASE ORDER

TASCOSA TOOL SERVICE

OWNER/PRESIDENT-- ANDY BUTT

EXPIRATION DATE: REVIEW AFTER 5 YEARS

JANUARY 11, 2016



EXPIRATION DATE: REVIEW AFTER 5 YEARS AUGUST 15, 2017

CITY EMPLOYEE

Page 2

UNIVERSAL DIE-CUT CORPORATION


WETMORE DITCHING

PER THEIR REQUEST



Page 3

>

General Decision Number: TX150316 03/06/2015 TX316

Superseded General Decision Number: TX20140316

State: Texas

Construction Type: Building

County: Potter County in Texas.

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories).

Note: Executive Order (EO) 13658 establishes an hourly minimum wage of $10.10 for 2015 that applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the solicitation is issued on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.10 (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts.

Modification Number 0 1

BOIL0074-003 01/01/2014

Publication Date 01/02/2015 03/06/2015

Rates

BOILERMAKER ...................... $ 23.14

CARP0665-001 05/01/2014

Rates

CARPENTER ........................ $ 20.81

ELEC0602-007 09/01/2014

ELECTRICIAN (Excludes Low Voltage Wiring and

Rates

Installation of Alarms) .......... $ 25.80

ENGI0178-005 06/01/2014

Rates

POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1) Tower Crane ............. $ 29.00 (2) Cranes with Pile

Fringes

21.55

Fringes

6. 7 6

Fringes

3%+8.70

Fringes

10.60

file:///C:/Users/QUINON~ 1/ AppData/Local/Temp/HAU096AU.htm

Page 1 of 6

4/10/2015

Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above ..... $ 28.75 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under .............. $ 27.50

IRON0084-011 06/15/2014

Rates

IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL ........... $ 22.02

PLUM0404-023 07/01/2013

Rates

PIPEFITTER ....................... $ 24.71 PLUMBER .......................... $ 2 4 . 71

SHEE0049-001 06/01/2014

Rates

SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only) ............... $ 22. 4 9

* SUTX2014-042 07/21/2014

Rates

BRICKLAYER ....................... $ 20.04

CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER ... $ 19.60

ELECTRICAL INSTALLER (Alarms Only) Excludes Wiring ............ $ 18.68

ELECTRICIAN (Low Voltage Wiring Only) ..................... $ 15.65

INSULATOR - MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation) ............... $ 19.77

IRONWORKER, REINFORCING .......... $ 12.27

IRON1fJORKER, STRUCTURAL ........... $ 21. 13

LABORER: Common or General ...... $ 12.10

LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick ... $ 11.36

LABORER: Mason Tender -Cement/Concrete .................. $ 10.58

LABORER: Pipelayer .............. $ 12.49

LABORER: Roof Tearoff ........... $ 11.28

OPERATOR:

10.60

10.60

Fringes

6.35

Fringes

8.60 8.60

Fringes

11.14

Fringes

0.00

0.00

2.87

3.20

7.13

0.00

0.54

0.00

0.00

0.00

2.13

0.00

file:///C:/Users/QUINON~l/AppData/Local/Temp/HAU096AU.htm

Page 2 of6

4/10/2015

Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe ....... $ 14.25

OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader ................ $ 13.93

OPERATOR: Bulldozer ............. $ 18.29

OPERATOR: Drill ......... ... . .... $ 16.22

OPERATOR: Forklift .............. $ 14.83

OPERATOR: Grader/Blade .......... $ 13.37

OPERATOR: Loader ..... ... ........ $ 13.55

OPERATOR: Mechanic .............. $ 17.52

OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete) ......... $ 16.03

OPERATOR: Roller ................ $ 12.70

PAINTER (Brush, Roller and Spray), Excludes Drywall Finishing/Taping ................. $ 14.14

PAINTER: Drywall Finishing/Taping Only ............ $ 14.77

ROOFER ........................... $ 13.75

SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation ........... $ 21.13

TILE FINISHER .................... $ 11.22

TILE SETTER ...................... $ 14.00

TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck ........ $ 12.39

TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck ..... $ 19.65

TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck ............................ $ 12.50

TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck ....... $ 12.00

0.00

0.00

1. 31

0.34

0.00

0.00

0.94

3.33

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

6.53

0.00

2.01

1. 18

8.57

0.00

4.11

WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental.

Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5. 5 (a) (1) (ii)).

file:///C:/Users/QUINON~l/AppData/Local!Temp/HAU096AU.htm

Page 3 of6

4110/2015

The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate).

Union Rate Identifiers

A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014.

Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate.

Survey Rate Identifiers

Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier.

Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted.

Union Average Rate Identifiers

Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in

file:///C:/Users/QUINON~l/AppData/Local/Temp/HAU096AU.htm

Page 4 of6

4110/2015

the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier.

A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based.

WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS

1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be:

* * *

*

an existing published wage determination a survey underlying a wage determination a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling

On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed.

With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:

Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:

Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.

3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:

Page 5 of6

file:/ I /C:/Users/QUINON~ 1/ AppData/Local/Temp/HAU096AU .htm 4/10/2015

Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.

END OF GENERAL DECISION

file:/1/C:/Users/QUINON~ 1/ AppData/Local/Temp/HAU096AU.htm

Page 6 of 6

4/10/2015

Uniform General Conditions for City of Amarillo Building Construction Contracts

Revised 07/08/13

Table of Contents

Article 1. Definitions ........................................................................ 2

Article 2. Laws Governing Construction ........................................................... .4

Article 3. General Responsibilities of Owner & Contractor ................................ 6

Article 4. Bonds & Insurance ........................................................................... 16

Article 5. Contract Documents ......................................................................... 22

Article 6. Construction Safety ........................................................................... 28

Article 7. Quality Control .......................................................................... 29

Article 8. Project Scheduling Requirements ...................................................... 34

Article 9. Payments ............................................................................................ 38

Article 10. Changes ................................................................................... 42

Article 11. Project Completion and Acceptance ................................................ .47

Article 12. Warranty and Guarantee .................................................................. 50

Article 13. Suspension and Termination ............................................. 51

Article 14. Claims and Dispute Resolution ............................................. 54

Article 15. Miscellaneous ................................................................. 56

Article 16. Business Ethics ............................................................... 57

Page 1 of 57

Uniform General Conditions for City of Amarillo Building Construction Contracts

Article 1. Definitions

Unless the context clearly requires another meaning, the following terms have the meaning assigned herein.

1.1 Architect/Engineer (AlE) means a person registered as an architect pursuant to Architect/Engineer or Owner's Engineer means a person licensed as a professional engineer pursuant Tex. Occ. Code Ann., Chapter 1001 and/or a firm employed by Owner or Design-Build Contractor to provide professional engineering services and to exercise overall responsibility for the design of a project or a significant portion thereof, and to perform the contract administration responsibilities set forth in the Contract. Certain portions of the administration of the Contract will be performed by the AE. The AE will be treated as the Owner's representative to the extent set out in the Contract Documents. The AE shall not have the authority to act on behalf of Owner unless such authority is expressly granted in the Contract Documents, not shall such authority be implied from any act or representation of the Engineer. ·

1.2 Change Order means a written modification of the Contract between the Owner and Contractor, signed by the Owner, the Contractor and the AE.

1 .3 Change Order Proposal means a document generated by the Contractor in response to a Change Order Request (COR).

1.4 Change Order Request (COR) means a document, which informs the Contractor of a proposed change in the Work, and appropriately describes or otherwise documents such change.

1.5 Close-out Documents means the product brochures, product/equipment maintenance and operations instructions, manuals, and other documents/warranties, as-built record documents, affidavits of payment, releases of liens and claims, maintenance bonds (if required) and as may be further defined, identified, and required by the Contract Documents.

1.6 Contract means the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreement, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a written modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a Contractual relationship:

1.6.1 between the AE and the Contractor, 1 .6.2 between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Subcontractors or 1.6.3 between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.

The AE shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations of the Contractor under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the AE's duties.

1. 7 Contract Date is the date when the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor becomes effective.

1.8 Contract Documents means those documents identified as a component of the agreement (Contract) between the Owner and the Contractor. These may include, but are not limited to, Drawings, Specifications, Uniform General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, and all pre-bid and/or pre-proposal addenda. Special requirements (a modifier to standard city specifications) and Bid Proposal as a component of the Contract Documents.

1.9 Contractor means the individual, corporation, company, partnership, firm or other entity contracted to perform the Work, regardless of the type of construction contract used, so that the term as used herein includes a Construction Manager-at-Risk or a Design-Build firm as well as a General or Prime Contractor. The Contract Documents refer to Contractor as if singular in number.

Page 2 of 57

1.10 Contract Sum means the total compensation payable to the Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the terms of the Contract.

1 .11 Contract Time means the period between the Start Date identified in the Notice to Proceed with Construction and the Substantial Completion date identified in the Notice to Proceed or as subsequently amended by Change Order.

1.12 Day means a calendar day, unless otherwise specifically stipulated.

1.13 Drawings mean the product of the AE, which graphically depicts the Work.

1 .14 Final Completion means the date determined and certified by the AE and the Owner on which the Work is fully and satisfactorily complete in accordance with the Contract.

1.15 Owner means the City of Amarillo.

1.16 Owner's Designated Representative (ODR) means the individual assigned by the Owner to act on its behalf, and to undertake certain activities as specifically outlined in the Contract. The ODR is the only party authorized to interpret plans and make changes in the scope of work that does not affect time or money.

1.17 Project the completed job as described in the attached plans and specifications.

1.18 Project Site means the geographical area of the location of the Work.

1.19 Samples mean representative physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship, used to confirm compliance with requirements and/or to establish standards for use in execution of the Work.

1.20 Schedule of Values means a reasonable balanced and detailed breakdown of the cost of the labor by category, cost of materials, and equipment, if any, necessary to accomplish the work described in the contract documents, submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Owner and/or the AE.

1.21 Shop Drawings means the drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data prepared by the Contractor or its agents, which detail a portion of the Work.

1.22 Special Conditions means the documents containing terms and conditions, which may be unique to the Project. Special Conditions are a part of the Contract Documents and have precedence over the Uniform General Conditions.

1.23 Specifications mean the written product of the AE that establishes the manufacturer, quality and/or performance of products utilized in the Work and processes to be used, including testing and verification for producing the Work.

1 .24 Subcontractor means a person or entity that enters into an agreement with the Contractor to perform part of the Work or to provide services, materials or equipment for use in the Work.

1.25 Substantial Completion means that the structure or project has been made suitable for use or occupancy and is in conditions to serve its intended purpose, but might require minor work and adjustment, which the Contractor agrees to perform expeditiously.

1.26 Supplementary General Conditions means procedures and requirements that modify the Uniform General Conditions. Supplementary General Conditions, when used, have precedence over the Uniform General Conditions.

1.27 Timely Manner means any goods delivered or services performed promptly and in a time frame that causes no delay to the Project and makes necessary a change order to extend the projected substantial completion date as shown in the original Contract.

1.28 ULCD means a unilateral change directive issued by the Owner without the agreement of the Contractor.

1.29 Unit Price Work means Work or a portion of the Work paid for based on incremental units of measurement.

Page 3 of 57

1.30 Weekend/Holiday Work means any work outside of the normal and customary work hours of lam to 6 pm Monday through Friday or work done on any recognized national holiday. This work must be approved in writing in advance by the ODR. Note: This work may incur an additional cost for security or observation if necessary.

1.31 Work means the administration, procurement, labor, materials, equipment, construction services and all other terms customarily incidental to the main items of work necessary for the Contractor, and/or its agents, to fulfill all of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. The Work includes all labor, parts, supplies, skill, supervision, transportation, services, and other facilities and things necessary, proper or incidental to the carrying out and completion of the terms of the Contract Documents and all other items of cost or value needed to produce, construct and fully complete the Work identified by the Contract Documents.

1.3.2 A "Working Day/Work Day" a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays observed by the Owner, between 7:00a.m. and 6:00p.m. Legal holidays are those holidays for which City Hall is closed. No Sunday, legal holiday or work outside of the designated work hours will be permitted without the ODR'S prior written authorization on any project except to protect work already done or to address an emergency.

Article 2. Laws Governing Construction

2.1. Environmental Regulations. The Contractor shall conduct activities in compliance with applicable laws and regulations and other requirements of the Contract relating to the environment, and its protection at all times. Unless otherwise specifically determined, the Owner is responsible for obtaining and maintaining permits related to storm water run-off. The Contractor shall conduct operations consistent with storm water run-off permit conditions. Contractor is responsible for all items it brings to site, including hazardous materials, and all such items brought to the site by its subcontractors and suppliers, or by other entities subject to direction of the Contractor. The Contractor shall not incorporate hazardous materials into the Work without prior approval of Owner, and shall provide an affidavit attesting to such in association with request for Substantial Completion inspection. In the event that an item containing hazardous material is specified in the Contract, the Contractor, upon discovery will immediately provide written notice to the Owner and ODR and seek specific written approval from the Owner to incorporate said item into the Work.

2.2. Wage Rates. The Contractor and those performing by, through or under the Contractor shall not pay less than the wage scale of the various classes of labor as shown on the "Prevailing Wage Schedule" provided by the Owner. The specified wage rates are minimum rates only. Any contractor who does work for the Owner must comply with the ordinance that outlines the Owner's standard wage scale. In the cases where federal funding is being used for the Project, or if Owner fails to provide a "Prevailing Wage Schedule", the wages and the other terms and conditions of the Davis-Beacon Act apply.

2.2.1 Notification to Workers. The Contractor shall notify each worker, in writing, of the following as they commence work on the Contract: the worker's job classification, the established minimum wage rate requirement for that classification, as well as the worker's actual wage. The notice must be delivered to and signed in acknowledgement of receipt by the employee and must list both the wages and fringe benefits to be paid or furnished for each classification in which the worker is assigned duties. When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish evidence of compliance with the Texas Prevailing Wage Law.

2.2.1 .1 The Contractor shall submit a copy of each worker wage-rate notification to the ODR with the first application only for progress payment for the period during which the worker was engaged in activities on behalf of the Project. After the first wage rate notification, the contractor shall only resubmit prior to any changes in the standard rate.

Page 4 of 57

2.2.1 .2

2.2.1 .3

2.2.1.4

The "Prevailing Wage Schedule" is determined by the Owner in compliance with Tex. Gov't Code, Chapter 2258. Should the Contractor at any time become aware that a particular skill or trade not reflected on the Owner's Prevailing Wage Schedule will be or is being employed in the Work, whether by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor, the Contractor shall promptly inform the ODR of the proposed wage to be paid for the skill along with a justification for same. The Contractor is responsible for determining the most appropriate wage for a particular skill in relation to similar skills or trades identified on the Prevailing Wage Schedule. In no case shall any worker be paid less than the wage indicated for Laborers.

Penalty for Violation. The Contractor and any Subcontractor will pay to the Owner a penalty of sixty dollars ($60) for each worker employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Prevailing Wage Schedule.

Complaints of Violations

2.2.1.4.1 Owner's Determination of Good Cause. Upon receipt of information concerning a violation of Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, the Owner will, within 31 days, make an initial determination as to whether good cause exists that a violation occurred. The Owner will send documentation of the initial determination to the Contractor against whom the violation was alleged, and to the worker involved. Upon making a goodcause finding, the Owner will retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the Prevailing Wage Schedule and any supplements thereto, together with the applicable penalties, such amounts being subtracted from successive progress payments pending a final decision on the violation.

2.2.1.4.2 If the Contractor and claimant worker reach an agreement concerning the claim, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in a written document countersigned by the worker.

2.2.1.4.3 Arbitration Required. If the violation is not resolved within fourteen (14) days following initial determination by the Owner, the Contractor and the claimant worker must participate in binding arbitration in accordance with the Texas General Arbitration Act, Tex. Civ. Prac. & Rev. Code, Chapter 171. For a period not to exceed ten (10) days, after which, if no agreement reached, a district court may be petitioned by any of the parties to the arbitration to appoint an arbitrator whose decision will be binding on all parties.

2.2.1 .4.4 Arbitration Award. If an arbitrator assesses an award against the Contractor, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of said award to the Owner. The Owner may use any amounts retained under Article 2.2.1.4.1 to pay the worker the amount as designated in the arbitration award. If the retained funds are insufficient to pay the worker in accordance with the arbitration award, the worker has a right of action against the Contractor, and/or its surety to receive the amount owed, plus attorneys' fees and court costs. The Owner has no duty to release any funds to either the claimant or the Contractor until it has received the notices of agreement or the arbitration award.

Page 5 of 57

2.2.1.4.5 No Extension of Time. If the Owner's determination proves valid that good cause existed to believe a violation had occurred, the Contractor is not entitled to an extension of time for any delay arising directly or indirectly from the arbitration procedures set forth herein.

2.3. Venue for Suits. The exclusive venue for any suit arising from this Contract will be in a court of competent jurisdiction in Potter County, Texas, unless otherwise specifically designated in the Supplementary General Conditions.

2.4. Licensing of Trades. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of state law related to license requirements for skilled tradesmen, contractors, suppliers and or laborers, as necessary to accomplish the Work. In the event the Contractor, or one of its Subcontractors, loses its license during the term of performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly hire or contract with a licensed provider of the service at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.5 Royalties, Patents & Copyrights. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, defend all suits or claims for infringement of any intellectual property rights and shall save the Owner and the AE harmless from loss of any kind on account thereof.

2.6 State Sales and Use Taxes. The Owner qualifies for exemption from certain State and Local Sales and Use Taxes pursuant to the provisions of Tex. Tax Code, Chapter 151. The Contractor may claim exemption from payment of applicable State taxes by complying with such procedures as prescribed by the State Comptroller of Public Accounts. Owner is not required to reimburse Contractor for taxes paid on items that qualify for tax exemption.

2. 7 Antitrust Claims: As required in State contracts, "Vendor hereby assigns to Purchaser any and all claims for overcharges associated with this Contract which arise under the antitrust laws of the United States, 15 U.S.C.A. Sec.1, et seq. (1973)."

2.8 On the bid documents and the contract, the overall cost of materials must be shown separately from the cost of the labor. The cost of the two added together will be the total price bid.

2.9 Parties In Interest: The Contract does not bestow any rights upon any third party, but binds and benefits the parties hereto only. Any third party beneficiary interests are specifically denied and disclaimed, unless otherwise specifically set forth in this Contract.

Article 3. General Responsibilities of Owner & Contractor

3.1. Owner's General Responsibilities. The Owner is the entity identified as such in the Contract and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

3.1.1 Mandatory Preconstruction Conference. Prior to, or concurrent with, the issuance of Notice to Proceed with Construction, a conference will be convened for attendance by the Owner, Contractor, AE, ODR, and appropriate Subcontractors including those whose work comprises approximately 8% or more of the total Contract Sum. The purpose of the conference is to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work, the operational conditions at the Project Site, and general administration of the Project. Topics include communications, schedules, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, maintaining required records and all other matters of importance to the administration of the Project and effective communications between the project team members.

3.1.2 Owner's Designated Representative. Prior to the start of construction, Owner will identify the ODR, who has the express authority to act and bind the Owner to the extent and for the purposes described in the various Articles of the Contract, including responsibilities for general administration of the Contract.

3.1.2.1 Unless otherwise specifically defined elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the ODR is the single point of contact between the Owner and Contractor. Notice to the ODR, unless otherwise noted, constitutes notice to the Owner under the Contract.

Page 6 of 57

3.1 .2.2 All directives on behalf of the Owner will be conveyed to the Contractor by the ODR in writing.

3.1.3 Owner Supplied Materials and Information.

3.1.3.1

3.1 .3.2

The Owner may furnish to the Contractor those surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal description, limitations of the Project Site, site utility locations, and other information used in the preparation of the Contract Documents. The Owner makes no warranty as to the accuracy, sufficiency or completeness of any supplied information.

The Owner will provide information, equipment, or services under the Owner's control to the Contractor with reasonable promptness.

3.1.4 Availability of Lands. The Owner will furnish, as indicated in the Contract, all required rights to use the lands upon which the Work occurs. This includes rights-of-way and easements for access and such other lands that are designated for use by the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with all Owner identified encumbrances or restrictions specifically related to use of lands so furnished. The Owner will obtain and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities, unless otherwise required in the Contract Documents.

3.1.4.1

3.1.4.2

3.1.4.3

The Contractor and any entity for whom the Contractor is responsible shall not erect any sign on the Project Site without the prior written consent of the Owner.

In the event Owner permits the erection of signs, the ODR will designate an area where signs may be placed. In no event shall Contractor or its subcontractor erect a sign that impairs visibility, safety or security at the Project Site.

The Contractor shall use the minimum area practicable for construction of the facilities, regardless of the type of lands, and shall be governed by the specific requirements for each type of lands. All access to the Owner's property shall be along routes designated.

3.1.5 Limitation on Owner's Duties

3.1.5.1

3.1 .5.2

3.1 .5.3

The Owner will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, technologies, or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incidental thereto. The Owner is not responsible for any failure of Contractor to comply with laws and regulations applicable to the Work. The Owner is not responsible for the failure of Contractor to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, suppliers or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work on behalf of the Contractor.

The Owner will not be obligated to take any action in contravention of a design decision made by the AE in preparation of the Contract Documents, except, when such actions are in conflict with statutes under which the AE is licensed for the protection of the public health and safety.

It is understood and agreed that the relationship of Contractor to Owner shall be that of an independent Contractor. Nothing contained herein or inferable herefrom shall be deemed or construed to (1) make Contractor the agent, servant or employee of the Owner, or (2) to create any partnership, joint venture, or other association between Owner and Contractor. Any direction or instruction by Owner or any of its authorized representatives in respect of the Work shall relate to the results the Owner desires to obtain from the Work, and shall in no way affect Contractor's independent Contractor status described herein.

Page 7 of 57

3.2 Role of Architect/Engineer. Unless specified otherwise in the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor, the AE shall provide general administration services for the Owner during the construction phase of the Project. Written correspondence, requests for information, and shop drawings/submittals shall be directed to the AE for action. The AE has the authority to act on behalf of the Owner to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument, which will be furnished to the Contractor by the ODR, upon request.

3.2.1 Site Visits

3.2.1.1

3.2.1 .2

The AE will make visits to the Project Site at intervals as provided in the AE's contract agreement with the Owner, to observe the progress and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor's executed Work and report findings to the Owner.

The AE has the authority to interpret Contract Documents and inspect the Work for compliance and conformance with the Contract. Except as referenced in Article 3.1.5.1, the Owner retains the sole authority to accept or reject Work and issue direction for correction, removal, or replacement of Work.

3.2.2 Clarifications and Interpretations. It may be determined that clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents are necessary. Upon request by the ODR such clarifications or interpretations will be provided by the AE consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. The AE will issue these clarifications with reasonable promptness to the Contractor as either an AE's Supplemental Instruction (ESI), or similar instrument. If Contractor believes that such clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, the Contractor shall so notify the Owner in accordance with the provisions of Article 10.

3.2.3 Interpretation of Phrases: Whenever the words, Directed, Required, Permitted, Designated, Considered Necessary, Prescribed or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the AE and ODR is intended; and, similarly, the words approval, acceptable, satisfactory or words of like import shall mean acceptable or satisfactory to the AE and ODR.

The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to the AE any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of the Contract Documents.

3.2.4 Interpretation of Specifications: Whenever in the specifications or drawings accompanying this Contract, the terms or description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot from their nature be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said specifications shall be decided by the AE, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms or clauses defining the character of the Work.

3.2.5 Limitations on Architect Engineer Authority. The AE is not responsible for:

3.2.5.1 The Contractor's construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures, safety, or programs incidental to the Project nor will the AE supervise, direct, control or have authority over the same.

3.2.5.2 The failure of Contractor to comply with laws and regulations applicable to the furnishing or performing the Work.

Page 8 of 57

3.2.5.3

3.2.5.4

The AE shall not have the authority to make changes to the Owner's standard terms and conditions. The AE shall not be required to seal those terms and conditions used to bid the job.

The AE shall have the authority to recommend and to reasonably reject subcontractors hired by the Contractor to perform work on or off the Project Site. The request for rejection for cause must be evaluated and accepted by the Owner, prior to taking effect.

3.3 Contractor's General Responsibilities. Contractor shall execute the Work in a good and workmanlike manner, continuously and diligently in accordance with generally accepted standards of construction management and practice for construction of projects similar to the Project, using qualified, careful and efficient workers and in conformity with the provisions of this Contract and the other Contract Documents. The Contractor is solely responsible for implementing the Work in full compliance with all applicable laws, codes and regulations and the Contract Documents and shall supervise and direct the Work using the best skill and attention to assure that each element of the Work conforms to the Contract requirements. The Contractor is solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, safety, sequences, coordination and procedures. Prior to submitting a bid for the project, the Contractor is responsible for visiting the site and being familiar with local conditions such as the location, accessibility, and general character of the Project Site and/or building.

3.3.1 Project Administration. The Contractor shall provide project administration for all subcontractors, vendors, suppliers, and others involved in implementing the Work and shall coordinate administration efforts with those of the AE and ODR in accordance with these General Conditions and as outlined in the Pre-construction Conference.

3.3.2 Contractor's Superintendent. Employ a competent resident superintendent who is fluent in English and competent in the use of construction schedules, who will be present at the Project Site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent is subject to the approval of the ODR. The superintendent may not be changed during the course of the Project without the written approval of the ODR or Owner's AE.

3.3.3 Labor. Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, layout, and construct the Work as required by the Contract Documents. Maintain good discipline and order at the Project Site at all times.

3.3.4 Services, Materials, and Equipment. Unless otherwise specified, provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities, incidentals, and services necessary for the construction, performance, testing, startup, inspection and completion of the Work.

3.3.4.1 Sanitation: Sanitary facilities for the use of laborers on the Project Site, properly secluded from public observation, and sufficient in number shall be provided by and maintained by the Contractor.

3.3.5 Non-Compliant Work. Should the AE and/or the ODR identify Work as non-compliant with the Contract Documents, the ODR will communicate the finding to the Contractor and the Contractor will correct such Work at its sole expense. The acceptance of Work by either the AE or ODR does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents.

3.3.6 Subcontractors. The Contractor will not employ any Subcontractor, supplier or other person or organization, whether initially or as a substitute, against whom the Owner may have reasonable objection. The Owner will communicate such objections in writing. The Contractor is not required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier or other person or organization to furnish any of the Work to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. The Contractor will not substitute Subcontractors without the approval of the Owner. The Contractor may not employ a subcontractor that is on the Owners Disqualified Bidders List without the Owner's prior written permission or in the case of a Federally Funded Job any subcontractor that is on the Federal Excluded Parties List.

Page 9 of 57

3.3.6.1

3.3.6.2

3.3.6.3

3.3.6.4

3.3.6.5

3.3.6.6

3.3.6.7

All subcontracts and supply contracts shall be consistent with and bound to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents including provisions of this Contract.

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with the Contractor. Require all Subcontractors, suppliers and such other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate to the Owner only through the Contractor. Furnish to the Owner a copy of each first-tier subcontract promptly after its execution. The Contractor agrees that the Owner has no obligation to review or approve the content of such contracts and that providing the Owner such copies in no way relieves the Contractor of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, including, without limitation, any provisions of this Contract which require the subcontractor to be bound to the Contractor in the same manner in which the Contractor is bound to the Owner.

Assignment and Subletting: The Contractor will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and will not assign or sublet said contract without the written consent of the Owner. No part of the work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the AE or the Owner. The Contractor further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work, or materials required in the performance of this Contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligation to the Owner under this Contract.

The Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. Should any subcontractor fail to perform the work undertaken by him in a satisfactory manner, the Contractor shall take corrective action.

Nothing contained in this Contract shall create any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the Owner.

If the contractor assigns any of the compensation to be paid under this contract, the instrument of assignment shall agree that the right of the assignee in and to any compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be subject to all prior liens of all persons, firms, and corporations for services rendered or materials supplied for the performance of the work called for in this Contract.

The Contractor shall pay his subcontractors in a timely manner as required per Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code.

3.3.7 Continuing the Work. Carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes, disagreements or alternative resolution processes with the Owner. Do not delay or postpone any Work because of the pending resolution of any disputes, disagreements or processes, except as the Owner and the Contractor may agree in writing.

3.3.8 Cleaning. At all times, keep the Project Site and the Work clean and free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by the construction activities under the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that the entire Project is thoroughly cleaned prior to requesting Substantial Completion Inspection and, again, upon completion of the Project prior to the final inspection.

Page 10 of 57

3.3.9 Acts and Omissions of Contractor, its Subcontractors and Employees. The Contractor is responsible for acts and omissions of its employees and all its subcontractors, their agents and employees. The Owner may, in writing, require the Contractor to remove from the Project any of Contractor's or its subcontractor's employees that the ODR finds to be careless, incompetent, or otherwise objectionable.

3.3.1 0 Indemnification of Owner. The Contractor covenants and agrees to FULLY INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, and HOLD HARMLESS, the Owner and the elected officials, employees, officers, directors, volunteers, and representatives of the Owner, individually or collectively, from and against any and all costs, claims, liens, damages, losses, expenses, fees, fines, penalties, proceedings, actions, demands, causes of action, liability and suits of any kind and nature, including but not limited to, personal or bodily injury, death and property damage, made upon the Owner directly or indirectly arising out of, resulting from or related to Contractor's activities under this Contract, including any acts or omissions of Contractor, any agent, officer, director, representative, employee, consultant or the Subcontractor of Contractor, and their respective officers, agents, employees, directors and representatives while in the exercise of performance of the rights or duties under this Contract. The indemnity provided for in this paragraph does not apply to any liability resulting from the negligence of the Owner, officers or employees, separate Contractors or assigned contractors, in instances where such negligence causes personal injury, death or property damage. IN THE EVENT CONTRACTOR AND OWNER ARE FOUND JOINTLY LIABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, LIABILITY WILL BE APPORTIONED COMPARATIVELY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF TEXAS, WITHOUT WAIVING ANY GOVERNMENTAL IMMUNITY AVAILABLE TO THE OWNER UNDER TEXAS LAW AND WITHOUT WAIVING ANY DEFENSES OF THE PARTIES UNDER TEXAS LAW.

3.3.10.1

3.3.1 0.1

3.3.1 0.3

The provisions of this Indemnification are solely for the benefit of the parties hereto and not intended to create or grant any rights, contractual or otherwise, to any other person or entity.

Contractor shall promptly advise the Owner in writing of any claim or demand against the Owner or the Contractor known to the Contractor related to or arising out of the Contractor's activities under this Contract.

This indemnity shall survive termination, completion and abandonment of this Contract.

3.3.11 Ancillary Areas. Contractor shall promptly advise and maintain operations and associated storage areas at the site of the Work in accordance with the following:

3.3.11.1

3.3.11.2

3.3.11.3

Confine all Contractor operations, including storage of materials and employee parking upon the Project Site, to areas designated on the plans or as designated by the Owner.

The Contractor may erect, at its own expense, temporary buildings that will remain its property. Remove such buildings and associated utility service lines upon completion of the Work, unless the Contractor requests and the Owner provides written consent that it may abandon such buildings and utilities in place.

Contractor shall use only established roadways or construct and use such temporary roadways as may be authorized by the Owner. Contractor shall not allow load limits of vehicles to exceed the limits prescribed by appropriate regulations or law. Contractor shall, as its sole expense, provide protection to road surfaces, curbs, sidewalks, trees, shrubbery, sprinkler systems, drainage structures and other like existing improvements to prevent damage and repair any damage thereto.

Page 11 of 57

3.3.11.4

3.3.11.5

The Owner may restrict the Contractor's entry to the site to specifically assigned entrances and routes.

Without prior approval of the ODR, the Contractor shall not permit any workers to use any existing facilities at the Project site, including, without limitation, lavatories, toilets, entrance and parking areas other than those designated by the ODR. Without limitation of any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall use its best efforts to comply with all rules and regulations promulgated by the ODR in connection with the use and occupancy of the Project Site, as amended from time to time.

3.3.12 Separate Contracts. Additional Contractor responsibilities when the Owner awards separate Contracts;

3.3.12.1

3.3.12.2

3.3.12.3

3.3.12.4

The Owner reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with other portions of the Project.

The Owner reserves the right to perform operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces.

Under a system of separate contracts, the conditions described herein continue to apply except as may be amended by change order.

The Contractor shall coordinate with other contractors employed on the Project by the Owner, including providing access to the Project Site and Project information as requested.

3.4 Cost Reduction Incentive: After the execution of contracts, the Contractor may submit to the AE written proposals for modifying the plans, specifications or other requirements of the Contract for the sole purpose of reducing the cost of construction. The cost reduction proposal shall not impair the essential functions or characteristics of the Project, including but not limited to service life, economy of operation, ease of maintenance, desired appearance, design and safety standards. This provision shall not apply unless the proposal submitted is specifically identified by the Contractor as being presented for consideration as a value engineering proposal and provide a cost reduction to the Owner.

3.4.1 Changes in the basic design of a pavement type, hydraulic capacity of drainage facilities, or changes in grade or alignment that reduce the geometric standards of the project are not eligible for a cost reduction incentive consideration.

The following information shall be submitted by the Contractor with each proposal:

3.4.1.1

3.4.1.2

3.4.1.3

3.4.1 .4

3.4.1 .5

3.4.1.6

Descriptions of existing Contract requirements and the proposed changes with a discussion of the comparative advantages and disadvantages of each, including any effects on the expected life cycle and ongoing maintenance costs;

The Contract requirements that must be changed if the proposal is adopted;

Detailed construction cost estimates performing the work under the existing contract and under the proposed changes;

The latest date by which a change order adopting the proposal must be issued;

A statement of the effect the proposal will have on the contract completion time; and

The Contract items of work affected by the proposed changes, including any quantity variation attributable to them.

Page 12 of 57

3.4.2 The Contractor may withdraw, in whole or in part, any cost reduction proposal not accepted by the AE, within the first two weeks of construction. This time period provision shall not be construed to require the AE to consider any cost reduction proposal which may be submitted.

3.4.3 The Contractor shall continue to perform the work in accordance with the contract requirements until a change order incorporating the cost reduction proposal has been issued. If a change order has not been issued by the date upon which the Contractor's cost reduction proposal specifies that a decision should be made, or such other date as the Contractor may subsequently have requested in writing, such cost reduction proposal shall be deemed rejected.

3.4.4 The AE with confirmation from the City Manager shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of a cost reduction proposal and of the estimated net savings from the adoption of all or any part of such proposal.

In determining the estimated net savings, the AE may disregard the contract bid prices if, in the AE's judgment such prices do not represent a fair measure of the value of the work to be performed or deleted.

3.4.5 The Contractor shall share in the Owner's costs of investigating a cost reduction proposal submitted by the Contractor as a condition of considering such proposal.

3.4.6 The Owner shall deduct the cost of investigating a cost reduction proposal from amounts payable to the Contractor under the Contract.

3.4.7 If the Contractor's cost reduction proposal is accepted in whole or in part, a Change Order shall be executed. The Change Order shall incorporate the changes in the plans and specifications caused by the cost reduction proposal and shall include any conditions upon which the AE's approval is based. The Change Order shall also set forth the estimated net savings attributable to the cost reduction proposal. The net savings shall be determined as the difference in costs between the original contract costs for the involved work items and the costs occurring as a result of the proposed change. The Change Order shall also establish the net saving and shall provide for adjustment in the Contract Sum that will divide the net savings equally between the Contractor and the Owner.

3.4.8 The Contractor's fifty percent (50%) share of the net savings shall constitute full compensation to the Contractor for the cost reduction proposal and the performance of the Work.

3.4.9 Acceptance of the cost-reduction proposal and performance of the cost-reduction work shall not extend the time of completion of the contract unless specifically provided for in the contract Change Order.

3.5 Protection and Restoration of Adjoining Property: The Contractor shall take proper measures to protect the adjacent or adjoining property which might be injured by any process of construction, and, in case of any injury or damage, he shall restore at his own expense the damaged property to a condition equal to or better than that existing before such injury or damage was done, or he shall make good such injury or damage in an acceptable manner.

3.5.1 The Contractor shall exercise all reasonable precautions necessary to avoid restriction of access to adjoining property and shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner from claims, damages and expenses based on allegations of restriction of access, undue delay or negligent performance of the Work.

3.5.2 The Contractor shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage to all trees, driveways, sidewalks, water, sewer, gas or electric lines or appurtenances thereof, and to all other public or private property along or adjacent to the Work.

Page 13 of 57

The Contractor shall notify the proper representative of any public utility, any company, or any individual not less than forty-eight (48) hours in advance of any work, which might damage or interfere with the operation of its property adjacent to the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the manner or method of executing the work or due to his non-execution of the work or at any time due to defective work or materials, and said responsibility shall not be released until the work shall have been completed and accepted.

3.5.3 Care of Existing Facilities:

3.5.3.1

3.5.3.2

Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement of existing facilities including any landscaping, paving, roads, sidewalks and gutters damaged as a result of the performance of this work. Any facilities or finishes damaged shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner, with materials and workmanship equivalent to that employed in executing the original work and to the ODR'S satisfaction.

Contractor shall take care not to overload the existing structure by storing material, erecting shoring, placing equipment, or any other similar activities.

3.5.4 Noise and Dust Control:

3.5.4.1

3.5.4.2

3.5.4.3

Contractor shall note that in cases where the building and adjacent facilities will remain in operation during the entire construction period and shall take all reasonable precautions to eliminate dust and minimize noise.

If required, Contractor shall erect temporary partitions to confine noise and dust.

Radios, Jam-Boxes, CO/Tape Players, or personal sound equipment of any kind will not be permitted anywhere on the construction site.

3.6 Time and Order of Completion: It is the intent of this Contract, except where otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such times and order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the Contractor shall not remove more existing structure than he needs for normal progress. If, in the opinion of the AE, an excessive amount of structure is removed without immediate plans for replacement that will unduly cause hardship on the Owner, all work will be halted immediately. Work will not again proceed without written instructions from the AE. Any work accomplished after halting of construction and before written instructions from the AE to renew construction will not be compensated. The order and time of prosecution of work shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed in accordance with this Contract within the time of completion herein authorized. No work will be performed between 6:00 p.m. and 7:00a.m. without written approval from the Owner.

3.6.1 The Contractor will commence work within ten (1 0) calendar days after written notice to proceed has been given to the Contractor. Written notice to commence work shall not be given until the Contract has been properly executed by the Contractor and the Owner and the Contractor has provided the Owner with the necessary bonds, certificates of insurance, and any special items required, and a preconstruction conference has been held. If the cut sheets have not been approved and/or utility relocations have not been completed, working days will not be charged until the ODR determines work can begin. This determination is at the discretion of the ODR who may instruct the Contractor to begin work on the other portions of the Project.

Page 14 of 57

3.6.1.1

3.6.1 .2

Working days shall commence on the highest valued project in a multiple project agreement either when the Contractor begins work or ten (1 0) calendar days after written notice to proceed has been given to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference. If other circumstances such as utility relocation prevents construction beginning on the highest valued project, the project manager shall determine which project shall start first.

Working days shall commence on the next highest valued project in a multiple project agreement when one of the following first occurs:

3.6.1 .2.1 The Contractor begins work;

3.6.1.2.2 Ten (1 0) calendar days have elapsed after the previous project was determined to be substantially complete by the ODR.

3.6.1.2.3 Ten (10) calendar days have elapsed from the last allowable working day on the previous project.

The Contractor may request to begin work on a lesser-valued project, but the project manager must concur with the selection. Each project in a multiple project agreement shall be independent in terms of either working days established by the project manager or proposed by the Contractor.

3.6.2 A "Working Day" is a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays observed by the Owner, between 7:00a.m. and 6:00p.m. Legal holidays are those holidays for which City Hall is closed. No Sunday, legal holiday or work outside of the designated work hours will be permitted without the ODR'S prior written authorization on any project except to protect work already done or to address an emergency.

3.6.2.1

3.6.2.2

3.6.2.3

3.6.2.4

Should Contractor desire special permission to work on a Saturday, it shall make request of such on the preceding Friday before 12:00 noon, and shall provide an explanation of why it desires such. The ODR and/or AE with the Owner's Division Director shall make a ruling on the Contractor's request by 4:30p.m. of the preceding Friday.

All requests made after 12:00 noon on the preceding Friday shall not be considered.

Any work performed at a time or on a day outside of the declared "Working Day" without permission is subject to removal and replacement.

The Owner shall charge the Contractor for administration, surveying, and observation services, and any other costs incurred by the Owner for nonWorking Day work.

3.6.3 The ODR assigned to the Project will determine if a day is to be counted against the Contract Time. Weather or other unforeseeable conditions the Contractor does not control that preclude any work on the Project for at least seven continuous hours may be the basis for not counting a day. The Contractor shall contact the ODR in writing to question whether a day will be charged or not. Appeals from the ODR'S decision must be in writing and submitted within seven (7) calendar days to the ODR and/or the AE and may be reviewed by the Owner's Division Director.

3.6.4 By the term substantially completed, it is meant that the structure or project has been made suitable for use or occupancy and is in condition to serve its intended purpose, but might require minor work and adjustment, which the Contractor agrees to perform expeditiously.

3.6.5 Certain unique projects may require completion prior to designated dates or to be completed in an Owner determined number of calendar days. These requirements will be readily identifiable in the project proposal, and special notice to bidders.

Page 15 of 57

3. 7 Plan Security and Confidentially Provision: The Contractor and all of the Contractor's subs are required to treat as confidential all plans, specifications and other information and data on this design. Care shall be taken to insure that any confidential materials do not fall into the hands of unauthorized third parties during construction or after completion.

Article 4. Bonds & Insurance

4.1 Construction Bonds. The Contractor is required to tender to Owner, prior to commencing the Work, performance and payment bonds, as required by Texas Government Code, Chapter 2253. On contracts without payment and performance bonds, no payment will be made until all the work is satisfactorily completed and accepted by the engineer. Contractor will not be paid until the contractor submits an affidavit to owner that all bills for labor and materials related to the work have been paid.

4.1.1. A Performance Bond is required if the Contract Sum is in excess of $100,000. The Performance Bond is solely for the protection of the Owner. The Performance Bond is to be for the Contract Sum to guarantee the faithful performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The form of the bond shall be approved by the Amarillo City Attorney's Office. The performance bond shall be effective until the project has been completed, accepted by the owner, and final payment has been made.

4.1.2. A Payment Bond is required if the Contract Sum is in excess of $50,000. The payment bond is to be for the Contract Sum and is required to comply with Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. The form of the bond shall be approved by the Owner's attorney.

4.1.3 Each bond shall be executed by a corporate surety or sureties authorized to do business in the State of Texas and acceptable to the Owner, on the Owner's form, and in compliance with the relevant provisions of the Texas Insurance Code. If any bond is for more than ten percent ( 10%) of the surety's capital and surplus, the Owner may require certification that the company has reinsured the excess portion with one or more reinsurers authorized to do business in the State of Texas. A reinsurer may not reinsure for more than ten percent (1 0%) of its capital and surplus. If a surety upon a bond loses its authority to do business in the State of Texas, the Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days after such loss, furnish a replacement bond at no added cost to the Owner. Each bond given or tendered to the Owner pursuant to the Contract must be on forms approved by the Owner with no changes made by Contractor or its surety, executed, and accompanied by power of attorney stating that the attorney in fact executing such the bond has requisite authority to execute such bond. The date of the bonds shall be left blank.

4.1.4. Power of Attorney. Each bond shall be accompanied by a valid Power-of-Attorney (issued by the surety company and attached, signed and sealed with the corporate embossed seal, to the bond) authorizing the attorney in fact who signs the bond to commit the company to the terms of the bond, and stating any limit in the amount for which the attorney can issue a single bond.

4.1.5. Bond Indemnification. The process of requiring and accepting bonds and making claims hereunder shall be conducted in compliance with Texas Government Code, Chapter 2253. IF FOR ANY REASON A STATUTORY PAYMENT OR PERFORMANCE BOND IS NOT HONORED BY THE SURETY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FULLY INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS OF AND FROM ANY COSTS, LOSSES, OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES IT INCURS AS A RESULT.

4.1.6 Furnishing Bond Information. Owner shall furnish certified copies of the payment bond and the related Contract to any qualified person seeking copies who complies with

Page 16 of 57

Texas Government Code, §2253.026.

4.1.7. Claims on Payment Bonds. Claims on payment bonds must be sent directly to the Contractor and its surety in accordance with Texas Government Code§ 2253.041. All Payment Bond claimants are cautioned that no lien exists on the funds unpaid to the Contractor on such Contract, and that reliance on notices sent to the Owner may result in loss of their rights against the Contractor and/or its surety.

The Owner is not responsible in any manner to a claimant for collection of unpaid bills, and accepts no such responsibility because of any representation by any agent or employee.

4.1.8. Payment Claims when Payment Bond not Required. The rights of Subcontractors regarding payment are governed by Tex. Prop. Code, §§ 53.231 - 53.239 when the Contract Sum is less than $50,000.00. These provisions set out the requirements for filing a valid lien on funds unpaid to the Contractor as of the time of filing the claim, actions necessary to release the lien and satisfaction of such claim.

4.1.9 Sureties: Approved sureties shall be those listed on the US Department of the Treasury's Listing stating companies holding Certificates of Authority as acceptable sureties on Federal Bonds and acceptable reinsuring companies rated "B+" Class VII or better by the AM Best Rating Company

4.1.1 0 Failure to Execute Contract: Should the bidder fail to execute the required bonds or to sign the Contract within ten (1 0) calendar days after the Contract is awarded, bidder will be considered to have abandoned its proposal and the Owner may award the Contract to another bidder, collect the bid security and seek the difference in price between the next lowest bidder's price minus the Contract Sum reduced by the collected bid security.

4.1 .11 If a Performance Bond has been furnished and the Contractor is declared by the Owner to be in default under the Contract, the surety shall promptly remedy the default by completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, or by obtaining a bid or bids in accordance with its terms and conditions. At Owner's election, upon determination by the Owner and the surety of the lowest responsible bidder, the surety will complete the Work or will arrange for a contract between such bidder and the Owner, and make available as Work progresses, sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract Sum, but not exceeding the Penal Sum of the bond and other costs and damages for which the surety may be liable under the bond. The phrase 'balance of the Contract Sum' as used herein shall mean the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Contract and amendments thereto less the amount previously paid by the Owner to the Contractor.

4.2. Insurance Requirements.

The Contractor shall carry insurance in the types and amounts indicated in this Article for the duration of the Contract. The required insurance shall include coverage for Owner's property in the care, custody and control of Contractor prior to construction, during construction and during the warranty period. The insurance shall be evidenced by delivery to the Purchasing Department of the Owner of certificates of insurance executed by the insurer or its authorized agent stating coverage's, limits, expiration dates and compliance with all applicable required provisions. Upon request, the Owner, and/or its agents, shall be entitled to receive without expense, copies of the policies and all endorsements. The Contractor shall insure continuous and uninterrupted insurance coverage and shall provide evidence of any renewals and update all prior to submission for monthly payment in the month of expiration. Failure to update policies shall be a material breach of the Contract. In the event Contractor permits its coverage to lapse, Contractor's Work shall immediately be suspended and Owner shall be entitled to withhold all payments to Contractor until Contractor provides evidence of coverage.

4.2.1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain the insurance coverage with the minimum amounts described below until the end of the warranty period unless otherwise stated in Supplementary General Conditions. Failure to maintain insurance coverage, as required, is grounds for Suspension of Work for Cause pursuant to Article 13. The

Page 17 of 57

Contractor will be notified of the date on which the Builder's All Risk insurance policy per 4.2.2.1.4.may be terminated through Substantial Completion Notices, Acceptance Notices and/or other means as deemed appropriate by the Owner.

4.2.2. Coverage shall be written on an occurrence basis by companies authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and rated B+ Class VII or better by A.M. Best Company or otherwise acceptable to Owner.

4.2.2.1. Insurance coverage required includes:

4.2.2.1.1. Workers' Compensation. Insurance with limits as required by the Texas Workers' Compensation Act, with the Q.Q!l.gy endorsed to provide a waiver of subrogation as to the Owner, Employer's Liability insurance of not less then:

$100,000 each accident

$100,000 disease each employee

$500,000 disease policy limit

4.2.2.1.2. Commercial General Liability Insurance. Including Independent Contractor's liability, Products and Completed Operations and Contractual Liability, covering, but not limited to, the liability assumed under the indemnification provisions of this Contract, fully insuring Contractor's (or Subcontractors) liability for bodily injury and property damage with a combined bodily injury (including death) and property damage minimum limit of:

$1,000,000 per occurrence

$2,000,000 general aggregate

$1 ,000,000 products and completed operations aggregate

Coverage shall be on an "occurrence" basis.

The policy shall include coverage extended to apply to completed operations and explosion, collapse, underground hazards. The policy shall include endorsement CG2503 Amendment-Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Project) or its equivalent.

4.2.2.1.3. Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance, including coverage for liability arising from the encapsulation, removal, handling, storage, transportation, and disposal of asbestos containing materials. *This requirement applies if the Work or the Project includes asbestos containing materials.

The Combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage will be a minimum of $1,000,000 per occurrence.

*Specific Requirement for Claims-Made Form: Required period of coverage will be determined by the following formula: Continuous coverage for life of the contract, plus one (1) year (to provide coverage for the warranty period), and an extended discovery period for a minimum of five (5) years which shall begin at the end of the warranty period.

If this Contract is for asbestos abatement only, the All-Risk Builder's Risk or All-Risk Installation Floater (e) is not required.

4.2.2.1.4. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance, covering owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles, with a combined

Page 18 of 57

bodily injury (including death) and property damage minimum limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence. No aggregate shall be permitted for this type of coverage.

Such insurance is to include coverage for loading and unloading hazards.

4.2.2.1.5 Builder's All Risk Insurance (or All Risk Installation Floater for instances in which the Project involves solely the installation of equipment). Coverage shall be All Risk, including, but not limited to, Wind, Lightning, Hail, Fire, Extended Coverage, Vandalism and Malicious Mischief, Flood, Earthquake, Theft and damage resulting from Faulty workmanship, design or materials. This insurance shall also cover portions of the work stored off site or in transit. It shall also cover the reasonable additional expenses of the Owner as may be required to pay for AE services occasioned by the insured loss. If Builder's Risk, limit shall be equal to One Hundred Percent (100%) of the Contract. If Installation Floater, limit shall be equal to One Hundred Percent (100%) of the contract cost. The policy shall be written jointly in the names of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Subcontractors shall be named as additional insured. The policy shall have endorsements as follows:

4.2.2.1.5.1 This insurance shall be specific as to coverage and not contributing insurance with any permanent insurance maintained on the property.

4.2.2.1.5.2 This insurance shall not contain an occupancy clause suspending or reducing coverage should the Owner occupy, or begin beneficial occupancy before the Owner has accepted final completion.

4.2.2.1.5.3 Loss, if any, shall be adjusted with and made payable to the Owner as trustee for the insureds as their interests may appear; the right of subrogation under the Builder's Risk policy shall be waived as to the Owner. The Owner shall be named as Loss Payee. For renovation projects or projects that involve portions of work contained within an existing structure, refer to Special Conditions for possible additional Builder's Risk insurance requirements.

The policy shall include coverage for Explosion, Collapse and Underground (ECU). Such insurance shall be evidenced by the kind of policy which does not have to be adjusted or reported upon periodically, but provides constant insurance at full one hundred percent (1 00%) of all insurable values as they are created during construction by performance of the contract. The Certificate of Insurance must include the names of the insured Contractor and the Owner.

4.2.2.1.6 "Umbrella" Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain, pay for and maintain umbrella liability insurance during the Contract term, insuring the Contractor for an amount of not less than the greater of Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00) or the amount specified in the Supplementary General Conditions or Special

Page 19 of 57

Conditions that provides coverage at least as broad as and applies in excess and follows form of the primary liability coverages required hereinabove. The policy shall provide "drop down" coverage where underlying primary insurance coverage limits are insufficient or exhausted.

If this Contract is for asbestos abatement only, the "Umbrella" Excess Liability is not required

4.2.3. Policies must include the following clauses, as applicable:

4.2.3.1.

4.2.3.2.

4.2.3.3.

This insurance shall not be canceled, materially changed, or non-renewed until after thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner.

It is agreed that the Contractor's insurance shall be deemed primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self insurance carried by the Owner for liability arising out of operations under the Contract with the Owner.

The Owner, its officials, directors, employees, representatives, the AE their employees and consultants are added as additional insureds as respects operations and activities of, or on behalf of the named insured performed under contract with the Owner. The additional insured status must cover completed operations as well. This is not applicable to the workers' compensation policy.

4.2.3.4. The workers' compensation and employers' liability policy will provide a waiver of subrogation in favor of the Owner, its officials, directors, employees and representatives.

4.2.4 Without limiting any of the other obligations or liabilities of the Contractor, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor performing work under the Contract, at the Subcontractor's own expense, to maintain during the term of the Contract, the same stipulated minimum insurance including the required provisions and additional policy conditions as shown above except Umbrella Insurance. As an alternative, the Contractor may include its Subcontractors as additional insureds on its own coverage as prescribed under these requirements. The Contractor's certificate of insurance shall note in such event that the Subcontractors are included as additional insureds and that Contractor agrees to provide Workers' Compensation for the Subcontractors and their employees. The Contractor shall obtain and monitor the certificates of insurance from each Subcontractor in order to assure compliance with the insurance requirements. The Contractor must retain the certificates of insurance for the duration of the Contract plus 5 years and shall have the responsibility of enforcing these insurance requirements among its subcontractors. The Owner shall be entitled, upon request and without expense, to receive copies of these certificates.

4.2.5. Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage must meet the statutory requirements of the Tex. Lab. Code, §401.011 (44) and specific to construction projects for public entities as required by Tex. Lab. Code, §406.096.

A. Definitions:

Certificate of coverage ("certificate'')- A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project.

Duration of the Project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the Project until the Contractor's work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the Owner.

Persons providinfl services on the project ("subcontractor" in §406.096)- includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has

Page 20 of 57

undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and re~ardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, mdependent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or emrrloyees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. 'Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project.

"Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.

B. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project.

C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the owner prior to being awarded the contract.

D. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the owner showing that coverage has been extended.

E. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the owner:

(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project.

F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter.

G. The Contractor shall notify the owner in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.

H. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report Jack of coverage.

I. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:

(1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;

(2) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;

(3) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new

Page 21 of 57

certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;

(4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:

(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and

(b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;

(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter;

(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and

(7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1)- (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.

J. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.

K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the owner.

Article 5. Contract Documents

5.1. Drawings and Specifications

5.1.1 Copies Furnished. The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, the number of complete sets of the Drawings and Specifications as provided in the Supplementary General Conditions or Special Conditions. Additional complete sets of Drawings and Specifications, if requested, will be furnished at reproduction cost to the one requesting such additional sets.

5.1.2 Ownership of Drawings and Specifications. All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by the AE are to remain Owner's property. These documents are not to be used on any other project, and with the exception of one Contract set for each party to the Contract, are to be returned to the AE, upon request, following completion of the Work.

5.1.3 Interrelation of Documents. The Contract Documents as referenced in the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor are complimentary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. In the event of a conflict, the interpretation or

Page 22 of 57

clause most favorable to the Owner shall control.

5.1.4 Resolution of Conflicts in Documents. Where conflicts may exist between and/or within the Contract Documents, Owner shall take the best-evaluated option available based on the Owner's review. The Contractor shall notify the AE, the Owner, and the ODR of any conflict before executing the work that is in question.

5.1.5 Estimated Quantities:

5.1.5.1

5.1.5.2

5.1 .5.3

The Contract Documents are intended to clearly show all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. The estimated quantities of the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract are approximate and should be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing the proposals offered for the work. The actual amount of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from the estimates, and the basis for payment under this contract may differ somewhat from the estimates, and the basis for payment under this contract shall be the actual amount of work done and material furnished. The Owner will pay for inplace quantities authorized by the AE.

The Contractor agrees that it will make no claim for damages, anticipated profits or otherwise on account of any differences which may be found between the quantities of each item of work actually done and material actually furnished for this contract and the estimated quantities of each item contemplated and contained in the proposal. If the total value of the project varies more than twenty-five (25) percent from the original estimated project value, either the Owner or Contractor upon demand is entitled to revised consideration according to State Law. Both parties shall agree to the revised consideration, otherwise the revised consideration shall be considered under the Extra Work provisions.

Should any contract item be deleted in its entirety, payment will be made only for actual costs incurred prior to notification of such deletion.

5.1.6 Contractor's Duty to Review Contract Documents. In order to facilitate its responsibilities for completion of the Work in accordance with and as reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, prior to pricing or commencing the Work, the Contractor shall examine and compare the Contract Documents, information furnished by the Owner, relevant field measurements made by the Contractor and any visible or reasonably anticipated conditions at the site affecting the Work. This duty extends throughout the construction phase prior to commencing each particular work activity and/or system installation. The Contractor may not make any changes to the Contract Documents without prior written permission of the Owner.

5.1.7 Discrepancies and Omissions in Drawings and Specifications

5.1.7.1

5.1.7.2

5.1.7.3

The Owner does not warrant or make any representations as to the accuracy or completeness of the information furnished to the Contractor by the Owner. The Contractor shall promptly report to the ODR and to the AE the discovery of any apparent error, omission or inconsistency in the Contract Documents prior to execution of the Work.

It is recognized that the Contractor is not acting in the capacity of a licensed design professional, unless it is performing as a Design-Build firm.

It is further recognized that the Contractor's examination of contract documents is to facilitate construction and does not create an affirmative responsibility to detect errors, omissions or inconsistencies or to ascertain compliance with applicable laws, building codes or regulations, unless it is performing as a Design-Build firm or a Construction Manager-at-Risk.

Page 23 of 57

5.1.7.4

5.1.7.5

5.1.7.6

When performing as a Design-Build firm, the Contractor has sole responsibility for discrepancies, errors, and omissions in the drawings and specifications.

When performing as a Construction Manager-at-Risk, the Contractor has a shared responsibility for discovery and resolution of discrepancies, errors, and omissions in the Contract Documents. In such case, the Contractor's responsibility pertains to review, coordination, and recommendation of resolution strategies within budget constraints, but does not establish a liability for design.

The Contractor has no liability for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies unless the Contractor knowingly failed to report a recognized problem to the Owner or the Work is executed under a Design-Build or Construction Manager-at-Risk contract as outlined above. Should the Contractor fail to perform the examination and reporting obligations of these provisions, the Contractor is responsible for avoidable costs, direct, and/or consequential damages.

5.1.8 Coordination of Plans, Specifications, Proposal, and Special Requirements Section:

The plans and specifications, the proposal, special requirements section and all supplementary documents are intended to describe a complete work and are essential parts of the contract. A requirement appearing in any of them is binding. In case of discrepancies, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, plans shall govern over specifications, special requirements shall govern over both general and standard specifications, and the plans and quantities shown on the plans shall govern over those shown in the proposal. The Contractor shall not take advantage of an error or omission in the plans and specifications, and the AE shall be permitted to make such corrections or interpretations as may be deemed necessary for the fulfillment of the intent of the plans and specifications. In the event the Contractor discovers an error or discrepancy, he shall immediately call such error or discrepancy to the attention of the AE.

5.1.9 Lines and Grades:

5.1.9.1

5.1.9.2

5.1 .9.3

Lines and grades shall be furnished by the AE. Whenever necessary, work shall be suspended to permit this work, but suspension will be as brief as practical, and the Contractor shall give the AE at least twenty-four (24) hours notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, and other survey monuments, shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor. In case of destruction or removal by him or his subcontractors, such AE furnished work shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

Contractor shall establish line and grade when a City survey crew is not available.

Contractor shall establish line and grade on portions of a street project such as aprons, curb returns and public side walk access ramps.

5.1.1 0 Quantities and Measurements:

5.1.1 0.1 The Contractor shall exercise proper precaution to verify all figures shown on drawings before laying out the work and will be responsible for any error resulting from his failure to exercise such precaution. Contractor shall immediately notify the ODR of any errors he may discover while laying out the work.

Page 24 of 57

5.1.1 0.2 Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the site. No extra charge or compensation shall be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the drawings unless approved by the AE.

5.2 Requirements for Record Documents

Maintain at the Site one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, addenda, approved Submittals, Contract modifications, and all Project correspondence. Keep current and maintain Drawings and Specifications in good order with postings and markings to record actual conditions of Work and show and reference all changes made during construction. Provide Owner and AE access to these documents.

5.2.1 Maintain this record set of Drawings and Specifications which reflect the constructed Work and conditions and representations of the Work performed, whether it be directed by addendum, Change Order or otherwise. Make available all records prescribed herein for reference and examination by the Owner and its representatives and agents.

5.2.2 Update the Record Drawings and Specifications monthly prior to submission of periodic partial pay estimates. Failure to maintain such records constitutes cause for denial of a progress payment otherwise due.

5.2.3 Prior to requesting Substantial Completion Inspection by the ODR and AE, furnish a complete set of the marked up Record Drawings set maintained at the site and one photocopy of same. Concurrently with furnishing these record drawings, furnish a preliminary copy of each operating and maintenance manual (O&M) required by the Contract Documents, for review by the AE and the ODR.

5.2.4 Once determined acceptable, provide reproducible prints of professionally drafted Record Drawings, along with an electronic copy on CD, in PDF format, Record specifications in bound volume(s) along with electronic copy on CD in PDF format, two sets of color copies or prints of the reproducible Record drawings, two sets of operating and maintenance manuals, two sets of approved submittals, and other record documents as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. All electronic copies shall be provided in a format acceptable to the ODR.

5.3 Subsurface and Physical Conditions.

5.3.1 Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of:

5.3.1 .1 Subsurface Conditions: Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents; and

5.3.1.2 Physical Conditions: those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except Underground Facilities) that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents.

5.3.2 Limited Reliance by Contractor Authorized "Technical Data" Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data: contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner, Engineer or any of Engineer's Consultants with respect to:

5.3.2.1 The completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or

Page 25 of 57

5.3.2.2 Other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings, or

5.3.2.3 Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such data, interpretations, opinions or information.

5.3.3 Notice of Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site that is uncovered or revealed either:

5.3.3.1 Is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided ,is materially inaccurate, or

5.3.3.2 Is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents, or

5.3.3.3 Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or

5.3.3.4 Is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then

Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such conditions or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so.

5.3.4 Engineer's Review: Engineer will promptly review the pertinent conditions, determine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer's findings and conclusions.

5.3.5 Possible Contract Documents Change: If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required as a result of a condition that meets one or more of the categories in paragraph SC-66.C., a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document the consequences of such change.

5.3.6 Possible Price and Times Adjustments: An equitable adjustment in the contract Price or in the Contract Times, or both, will be allowed to the extent that the existence of such uncovered or revealed condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of, or time required for performance of, the Work; subject, however, to the following:

5.3.6.1 Such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in paragraphs SC-66.C.1 through 4, inclusive:

5.3.6.2 A change in the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraph SC-66.E. will not be an automatic authorization of nor a condition precedent to entitlement to any such adjustment;

5.3.6.3 With respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to provisions of the Contract Documents; and

5.3.6.4 Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Times if:

5.3.6.4.1 Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner in respect of Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or

Page 26 of 57

5.3.6.4.2 The existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test or study of the site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding requirements of Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor's making such final commitment; or

5.3.6.4.3 Contractor failed to give the written notice within the time and as required by paragraph SC-66.C.

5.3. 7 If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or as to the amount or length of any such equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, a claim may be made therefore. However, Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

5.4 Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material:

5.4.1 Owner shall be responsible for any Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work and which may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work at the site. Owner shall not be responsible for any such materials brought to the site by Contractor, Subcontractor, Suppliers or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible.

5.4.2 Contractor shall immediately: (i) stop all Work in connection with such hazardous conditions and in any area affected thereby, and (ii) notify Owner and Engineer (and thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such hazardous condition or take corrective action, if any. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such hazardous condition or in any such affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to Contractor special written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for resumption of Work, or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or the amount or extent of an adjustment, if any, in the Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed by Contractor to be resumed, either party may make a claim therefore.

5.4.3 If after receipt of such special written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under special conditions, then Owner may order such portion of the Work that is in connection with such hazardous condition or in such affected area to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or the amount or extent of an adjustment, if any, in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a claim therefore. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others.

5.4.4 To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents, other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or resulting from such hazardous condition, provided that: (i) any such claim, cost, loss or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) nothing in this subparagraph SC-67.0. shall obligate Owner to indemnify any person or entity from and against the consequences of the person's or

Page 27 of 57

entity's own negligence.

Article 6. Construction Safety

6.1. General. It is the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its Subcontractors to be familiar with, enforce and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-596, 29 U.S.C. §§651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto. The Contractor shall always prepare a Safety Plan specific to the Project and submit it to the ODR and AE prior to commencing Work. In addition, the Contractor and all of its Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property to protect them from damage, injury or loss and erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.

6.1 .1 Precaution shall be exercised by the Contractor at all times for the protection of all personnel. Job site safety is the sole responsibility of the Contractor and his subcontractors and cannot be assumed by the Owner, the Engineer, or their agents or employees

6.2. Notices. The Contractor shall provide notices as follows:

6.2.1 Notify owners of adjacent property including those that own or operate utility services and/or underground facilities, and utility owners, when prosecution of the Work may affect them or their facilities, and cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement, and access to their facilities and/or utilities.

6.2.2 Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the site in connection with laws and regulations. Maintain a complete file of MSDS for all materials in use on site throughout the construction phase and make such file available to the Owner and its agents as requested.

6.3. Emergencies. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act to minimize, mitigate, and prevent threatened damage, injury or loss.

6.3.1 Have authorized agents of Contractor respond immediately upon call at anytime of day or night when circumstances warrant the presence of Contractor to protect the Work or adjacent property from damage or to take such action pertaining to the Work as may be necessary to provide for the safety of the public.

6.3.2 Give the ODR and AE prompt notice of all such events.

6.3.3 If Contractor believes that any changes in the Work or variations from Contract Documents have been caused by its emergency response, promptly notify the Owner within 72 hours of the emergency response event.

6.3.4 Owner may, but is not obligated to, immediately and without notice to Contractor, take emergency measures or direct a third party to take emergency measures to prevent the imminent loss or harm to persons or property arising out of or related to Contractor's Work. Owner shall deduct the cost of such emergency response from the sums due Contractor. In the event the amounts withheld are insufficient to reimburse the Owner, Contractor shall immediately pay the difference to the Owner.

6.4. Injuries. In the event of an incident or accident involving outside medical care for an individual on or near the Work, Contractor shall notify the ODR and other parties as may be directed within twenty-four (24) hours of the event.

6.4.1 Record the location of the event and the circumstances surrounding it, by using photography or other means, and gather witness statements and other documentation which describes the event.

Page 28 of 57

6.4.2 Supply the ODR and AE with an incident report no later than 36 hours after the occurrence of the event. In the event of a catastrophic incident (one fatality or three workers hospitalized), barricade and leave intact the scene of the incident until all investigations are complete. A full set of incident investigation documents, including facts, finding of cause, and remedial plans shall be provided within one week after occurrence, unless otherwise directed by legal counsel.

Contractor shall provide the ODR with written notification within one week of such catastrophic event if legal counsel delays submission of full report.

6.5. Environmental Safety. Upon encountering any previously unknown potentially hazardous material, or other materials potentially contaminated by hazardous material, Contractor shall immediately stop work activities impacted by the discovery, secure the affected area, and notify the ODR immediately.

6.5.1 Bind all Subcontractors to the same duty.

6.5.2 Upon receiving such notice, the ODR will promptly engage qualified experts to make such investigations and conduct such tests as may be reasonably necessary to determine the existence or extent of any environmental hazard.

Upon completion of this investigation, the ODR will issue a written report to the Contractor identifying the material(s) found and indicate any necessary steps to be taken to treat, handle, transport or dispose of the material.

6.5.3 The Owner may hire third-party contractors to perform any or all such steps.

6.5.4 Should compliance with the ODR'S instructions result in an increase in the Contractor's cost of performance, or delay the Work, the Owner will make an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and/or the time of completion, and modify the Contract in writing accordingly.

6.6 Trenching Plan. When the project requires excavation which exceeds a depth of five feet, the Contractor is required to submit a trenching plan to the AE prior to commencing trenching operations. The plan is required to be prepared and sealed by an independent professional engineer registered in the State of Texas, and employed by the Contractor. Said engineer cannot be anyone who is otherwise either directly or indirectly engaged on this project. Any trenching plan must also meet all of the requirements of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration. The Owner may require that a copy of the trenching plan be furnished prior to allowing work to proceed.

6.7 Barricades, Watchmen, Safety Measures and Traffic Handling. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of person, property and the work, as may be necessary. Barricades shall be painted in two contrasting colors and, from sunset to sunrise, at least one light shall be maintained at each barricade. The work shall be carried on, at all times, in a manner which will minimize danger to the public or the workmen.

All traffic control patterns and devices shall, at a minimum, comply with that of the Texas Department of Transportation Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

6.7.1 The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, lights and watchmen to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs, lights and for providing watchmen, shall not cease until the date of Owner's Letter of Acceptance.

6.7.2 The Contractor shall plan his work sequence in a manner which will cause the minimum interference with vehicular traffic during construction operations. Construction within or across the limits of roadway pavement of traffic movement areas shall be planned such that one lane of traffic movement will be maintained in each direction. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic handling during the duration of the project.

Page 29 of 57

Article 7. Quality Control

7.1. Materials & Workmanship. The Contractor shall execute Work in a good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall develop and provide a Quality Control Plan specific to this project and acceptable to the Owner.

Where Contract Documents do not specify quality standards, complete and construct all Work in compliance with generally accepted construction industry standards. Unless otherwise specified, incorporate all new materials and equipment into the Work under the Contract.

7.2. Testing

7.2.1 Contractor Testing. The Owner's AE or the ODR is responsible for coordinating all material testing efforts. The owner will pay for all passing material testing. A third party shall be responsible for all test retakes including payment for all test failures. This includes all special tests required to confirm compliance with quality and performance requirements of the Contract Documents. This "quality control" testing shall include any particular testing required by the Specifications and the following general tests.

7.2.1.1.

7.2.1 .2

7.2.1 .3

7.2.1.4

Any test of basic material or fabricated equipment included as part of a submittal for a required item in order to establish compliance with the Contract Documents.

Any test of basic material or fabricated equipment offered as a substitute for a specified item on which a test may be required in order to establish compliance with the Contract Documents.

Routine, preliminary, start-up, pre-functional and operational testing of building equipment and systems as necessary to confirm operational compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

All subsequent tests on original or replaced materials conducted as a result of prior testing failure.

7.2.2 Owner Testing. The Owner reserves the right to subject materials and systems incorporated into the Project to routine tests as may be specified or as deemed necessary by the ODR to ensure compliance with the quality and/or performance requirements of the Contract Documents and/or with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and/or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction. The results of such "quality assurance" testing will be provided to the Contractor and, to the extent provided, the Contractor may rely on findings.

All testing shall be performed in accordance with standard test procedures as recognized by industry, by an accredited laboratory or special consultant as appropriate and acceptable to the Owner. Results of all tests shall be provided promptly to the party designated to the ODR.

7.2.3 All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents, and be made at no additional cost to the owner.

7.2.4 Non-Compliance (Test Results). Should any of the tests indicate that a material and/or system does not comply with the contract requirements, the burden of proof remains with the Contractor, subject to:

7.2.4.1

7.2.4.2

Contractor selection and submission of the laboratory for Owner acceptance.

Acceptance by the Owner of the quality and nature of tests.

Page 30 of 57

7.2.4.3

7.2.4.4

7.2.4.5

7.2.4.6

All tests taken in the presence of the Architect/Engineer and/or ODR, or their representatives.

If tests confirm that the material/systems comply with Contract Documents, the Owner will pay the cost of the test.

If tests reveal noncompliance, the Contractor will pay those laboratory fees and costs of that particular test and all future tests, of that failing Work, necessary to eventually confirm compliance with Contract Documents.

Proof of noncompliance with the Contract Documents will make the Contractor liable for any corrective action which the ODR determines appropriate, including complete removal and replacement of non-compliant work or material.

7.2.5 Notice of Testing. The Contractor shall give the ODR and the AE timely notice of its readiness and the date so the ODR and AE may arrange to observe such inspection and testing.

7.2.6 Test Samples. The Contractor is responsible for providing samples of sufficient size for test purposes and for coordinating such tests with their Work Progress Schedule to avoid delay.

7.2.7 Covering Up Work- If the Contractor covers up any Work without providing the ODR and/or the AE an opportunity to observe, the Contractor shall, if requested by AE and or ODR, uncover and recover the work at Contractor's expense.

7.3 Submittals

7.3.1 Contractor's Submittals. Submit with reasonable promptness consistent with the Project Schedule and in orderly sequence all Shop Drawings, Samples, or other information required by the Contract Documents, or subsequently required by Change Order. Prior to submitting, the Contractor shall review each submittal for compliance with Contract Documents and certify by approval stamp affixed to each copy. Submittal data presented without the Contractor's certification will be returned without review or comment, and any delay resulting from such certification is the Contractor's responsibility.

7.3.1.1

7.3.1 .2

7.3.1 .3

Within twenty-one (21) calendar days of the effective date of the Notice To Proceed with construction, submit to the ODR, and the AE, a submittal schedule/register, organized by specification section, listing all items to be furnished for review and approval by the AE and Owner. The list shall include shop drawings, manufacturer's literature, certificates of compliance, materials samples, materials colors, guarantees, and all other items identified throughout the specifications.

Indicate the type of item, contract requirements reference, and Contractor's scheduled dates for submitting the item along with the requested dates for approval answers from the AE and Owner. The submittal register shall indicate the projected dates for procurement of all included items and shall be updated at least monthly with actual approval and procurement dates. Show and allow a minimum of thirty (30) calendar day's duration after receipt by the AE and ODR for review and approval. If re-submittal is required, allow a minimum of an additional fifteen (15) calendar days for review. Submit the updated submittal register with each request for progress payment. The Owner may establish routine review procedures and schedules for submittals at the preconstruction conference and/or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Failure to update and provide the submittal schedule/register as required shall constitute cause for Owner to withhold payment otherwise due.

Coordinate the submittal register with the Work Progress Schedule. Do not schedule Work requiring a submittal to begin prior to scheduling review and approval of the related submittal. Revise and/or update both schedules monthly to ensure consistency and current project data. Provide to the

Page 31 of 57

7.3.1.4

ODR the updated submittal register and schedule with each application for progress payment. Refer to requirements for the Work Progress Schedule for inclusion of procurement activities therein. Regardless, the submittal register shall identify dates submitted and returned and shall be used to confirm status and disposition of particular items submitted, including approval or other action taken and other information not conveniently tracked through the Work Progress Schedule.

By submitting Shop Drawings, Samples or other required information, the Contractor represents and certifies that they have determined and verified all applicable field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data; and has checked and coordinated each Shop Drawing and Sample with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.

7.3.2 Review of Submittals. AE and ODR review is only for conformance with the design concept and the information provided in the Contract Documents. Responses to submittals will be in writing. The approval of a separate item does not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The approval of a submittal does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract unless the Contractor informs the AE and ODR of such deviation in a clear, conspicuous, and written manner on the submittal transmittal and at the time of submission, and obtains the Owner's written specific approval of the particular deviation.

7.3.3 Correction and Resubmission. Make any corrections required to a submittal and resubmit the required number of corrected copies promptly so as to avoid delay, until submittal approval. Direct attention in writing to the AE and the ODR, when applicable, to any new revisions other than the corrections requested on previous submissions.

7.3.3.1 If a third review and correction of a submittal is required to get it corrected the third submittal will be reviewed at the Contractor's or Subcontractor's expense for the cost of the AE's review.

7.3.4 Limits on Shop Drawing Approvals. The Contractor shall not commence any Work requiring a submittal until approval of the submittal. Construct all such work in accordance with approved submittals. Approval of Shop Drawings and Samples is not authorization to Contractor to perform extra work or changed work unless authorized through a Change Order. The AE's and ODR'S approval, if any, does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for defects in the Work resulting from errors or omissions of any kind on the submittal, regardless of any approval action.

7.3.5 No Substitutions Without Approval. The ODR and the AE may receive and consider the Contractor's request for substitution when the Contractor agrees to reimburse the Owner for review costs and satisfies 7.3.5.1, 7.3.5.2, and 7.3.5.3 in combination with one or more of the items in 7 .3.5.4 through 7 .3.5.11 of the following conditions, as determined by the Owner. If the Contractor does not satisfy these conditions, the ODR and AE will return the request without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. The Owner will not consider the request if the Contractor cannot provide the product or method because of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

7.3.5.1

7.3.5.2

7.3.5.3

7.3.5.4

7.3.5.5

The Contract Documents do not require extensive revisions.

Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents and the design intent of the AE and do not result in an increase in cost to the Owner.

The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted.

The Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of construction within the Contract Time.

The request directly relates to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the

Page 32 of 57

7.3.5.6

7.3.5.7

7.3.5.8

7.3.5.9

7.3.5.10

7.3.5.11

Contract Documents.

The request directly relates to a "product design standard" or "performance standard" clause in the Contract Documents.

The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume.

The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by an authority having jurisdiction, and the ODR can approve the requested substitution.

The Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of construction in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

The Contractor cannot coordinate the specified product, assembly or method of construction with other materials and where the Contractor certifies they can coordinate the proposed substitution.

The specified product, assembly or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.

7.3.6 Unauthorized Substitutions at Contractor's Risk. The Contractor is financially responsible for any additional costs or delays resulting from using materials, equipment or fixtures other than those specified. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any increased design or contract administration costs resulting from such unauthorized substitutions. Contractor shall, at its sole expense, remove and replace any unauthorized substituted material.

7.3.7 Transmittal of Material Data Sheets. One initial submittal and onere-submittal will be reviewed by the Engineer at no cost to the Contractor. Subsequent reviews for resubmittals will be reviewed at a cost to the Contractor at the Engineer's current hourly rates. Fee may be waived by the Engineer.

7.4 Observation During Construction

7.4.1 The Contractor shall provide sufficient, safe, and proper facilities, including equipment as necessary for safe access, at all reasonable times for observation of the Work by the Owner and its agents.

7.4.2 The Contractor shall not cover up any work with finishing materials or other building components prior to providing the Owner and its agents an opportunity to perform an observation of the underlying Work.

7.4.2.1

7.4.2.2

7.4.2.3

7.5 Laboratory Tests

Should corrections of the Work be required for approval, do not cover up corrected Work until the Owner indicates approval.

Provide notification of at least five (5) working days or otherwise as mutually agreed, to the ODR of the anticipated need for a cover up observation. Should the ODR fail to make the necessary observation within the agreed period, the Contractor may proceed with cover up Work, but is not relieved of responsibility for Work to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents.

The Owner's observation of work prior to cover up shall not excuse the Contractor's obligations to comply with the Contract Documents.

7 .5.1 Any specified laboratory tests of material and finished articles to be incorporated in the work shall be made by bureaus, laboratories or agencies approved by the Owner and the AE, and the reports of such tests shall be submitted to the AE. The cost of the testing shall be paid for by the Owner. All required retesting to be paid for by the

Page 33 of 57

Contractor.

7.5.2 The Contractor shall furnish all sample materials required for these tests and shall deliver same without charge to the testing laboratory or other designated agency when and where directed by them.

Article 8. Project Scheduling Requirements

8.1. Contract Time. TIME IS AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT OF THE CONTRACT. The Contract Time is the time between the dates indicated in the Notice to Proceed for commencement of the Work and for achieving Substantial Completion and Final Completion. The Contract Time can be modified only by written Change Order. Failure to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, Final Completion within thirty (30) days following Substantial Completion or as otherwise agreed to in writing will cause damage to the Owner and may subject the Contractor to Liquidated Damages as provided in the Section 8.1 0. The date of beginning and the time of completion as bid by the Contractor are essential conditions of this contract.

8.2 Notice to Proceed. The Owner will issue a Notice to Proceed, which shall state the dates for beginning Work.

8.3. Work Progress Schedule. This Article pertains to construction phase schedules. Additional requirements for design phase scheduling for Construction Manager-at-Risk and Design Build contracts are outlined in a separate Project Planning and Scheduling Specification if needed. Unless indicated otherwise in those documents, Contractor shall submit their initial Work Progress Schedule for the Work in relation to the entire Project not later than twenty-one (21) days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed to the ODR and the AE. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, the Work Progress Schedule shall be computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) with full reporting capability or equal. This initial schedule shall indicate the dates for starting and completing the various aspects required to complete the Work, including mobilization, procurement, installation, testing, inspection, and acceptance of all the Work of the Contract. It will also indicate any non-Contractor milestones. When acceptable to the Owner, the initially accepted schedule shall be the Baseline Schedule for comparison to actual conditions throughout the contract duration. The Work Progress Schedule shall fix the respective dates for the submission of shop or setting drawings, the beginning of manufacturer, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment, and the completion of the various parts of the work. Each such schedule shall be subject to change from time to time in accordance with the progress of the work.

8.3.1 Schedule Requirements. Submit electronic and paper copy of the initial Work Progress Schedule reflecting accurate and reliable representations of the planned progress of the Work, the Work to date if any, and of the Contractor's actual plans for its completion. Organize and provide adequate detail so the Schedule is capable of measuring and forecasting the effect of delaying events on completed and uncompleted activities.

8.3.1.1 Re-submit initial Schedule as required to address review comments from AE and ODR until such Schedule is accepted as the Baseline Schedule.

8.3.1.2 Submittal of a schedule, schedule revision or schedule update constitutes the Contractor's representation to the Owner of the accurate depiction of all progress to date and that the Contractor will follow the schedule as submitted in performing the Work.

8.3.2 Schedule Updates. Update the Work Progress Schedule and the Submittal Schedule monthly, as a minimum, to reflect progress to date and current plans for completing the Work, and submit paper and electronic copy of the update to the AE and ODR as directed. The Owner has no duty to make progress payments unless accompanied by the updated Work Progress Schedule. Show the anticipated date of completion reflecting all extensions of time granted through Change Order as of the date of the update. The Contractor may revise the Progress Schedule logic only with the Owner's concurrence when in the Contractor's judgment it becomes necessary for the

Page 34 of 57

management of the Work. Identify all proposed changes to schedule logic to Owner and to the AE via an Executive Summary accompanying the updated schedule for review prior to implementation of revisions. In the event any update indicates any delays, the Contractor shall propose an affirmative plan to correct the delay, including overtime and/or additional labor, if necessary. In no event shall any update constitute an adjustment in the Contract Time, any Milestone Date or the Contract Sum unless any such adjustment is agreed to by the Owner and authorized pursuant to Change Order.

8.3.3 The Work Progress Schedule is for the Contractor's use in managing the Work and submittal of the Schedule, and successive updates or revisions, is for the information of the Owner and to demonstrate that the Contractor has complied with requirements for planning the Work. The Owner's acceptance of a schedule, schedule update or revision does not constitute the Owner's agreement to coordinate its own activities with the Contractor's activities as shown on the schedule.

8.3.3.1

8.3.3.2

8.3.3.3

8.3.3.4

Acceptance of the Work Progress Schedule, or update and/or revision thereto does not indicate any approval of the Contractor's proposed sequences and duration.

Acceptance of a Work Progress Schedule update or revision indicating early or late completion does not constitute the Owner's consent, alter the terms of the Contract, or waive either the Contractor's responsibility for timely completion or the Owner's right to damages for the Contractor's failure to do so.

The Contractor's scheduled dates for completion of any activity or the entire Work do not constitute a change in terms of the contract. Change Orders are the only method of modifying the completion Date(s) and Contract time.

The process of approving Contractor's schedules and updates to Contractor's schedule shall not constitute a warranty by the Owner that any non-contractor milestones or activities will occur as set out on Contractor's schedule. Approval of a Contractor's schedule does not constitute a commitment by the Owner to furnish any Owner-furnished information or material any earlier than Owner would otherwise be obligated to furnish that information or material under the Contract Documents. Failure of the Work to proceed in the sequence scheduled by Contractor shall not alone serve as the basis for a Claim for additional compensation or time. In the event there is interference with the Work which is beyond its control, Contractor shall attempt to reschedule the Work in a manner that will hold resulting additional time and costs to a minimum.

8.4. Ownership of Float. Unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, the Contractor may be required to develop the schedule and their execution plan to provide a minimum of 10 percent total float at the project level at acceptance of the Baseline Schedule. Float time contained in the Work Progress Schedule is not for the exclusive benefit of the Contractor or the Owner, but belongs to the Project and may be consumed by either party as agreed to on a firstused basis.

8.5. Completion of Work. The Contractor is accountable for completing the Work in the time stated in the Contract, or as otherwise amended by Change Order.

8.5.1 If, in the judgment of the Owner, the work is behind schedule and the rate of placement of work is inadequate to regain scheduled progress to insure timely completion of the entire work or a separable portion thereof, the Contractor, when so informed by the Owner, shall immediately take action to increase the rate of work placement, at its sole expense, by:

8.5.1 .1

8.5.1 .2

8.5.1 .3

8.5.1.4

An increase in working forces.

An increase in equipment or tools.

An increase in hours of work or number of shifts.

Expedite delivery of materials.

Page 35 of 57

8.5.1.5 Other action proposed if acceptable to Owner.

8.5.2 Within ten (1 0) calendar days after such notice from the ODR, the Contractor shall notify the ODR in writing of the specific measures taken and/or planned to increase the rate of progress. Include an estimate as to the date of scheduled progress recovery and an updated Work Progress Schedule illustrating the Contractor's plan for achieving timely completion of the project.

Should the ODR deem the plan of action inadequate, take additional steps or make adjustments as necessary to its plan of action until it meets with the ODR'S approval.

8.5.3 Contractor's Weekly Progress Reports

8.5.3.1

8.5.3.2

8.5.3.3

Submit on forms approved by the AE.

A sample of the required report forms are included hereinafter.

Reports shall be filled out daily by the Contractor's Superintendent. Copies hand delivered to Owner weekly:

City of Amarillo C/0 Owners Designated Representative (ODR) City Hall 509 E. ylh Ave Amarillo, Texas 79101

Copies hand delivered to AE weekly See Plans for AE's Name and Contact information

*Note: Hand delivery shall be within 24 hours of the completion of the report.

8.6 Modification of the Contract Time

8.6.1 Delays and extension of time as hereinafter described are valid only if executed in accordance with provisions set forth in Article 10.

8.6.2 When an excusable delay as defined herein prevents the Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time, the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time. The Owner will make an equitable adjustment and extend the number of Working Days lost because of excusable delay, as measured by the Contractor's progress schedule. All extensions of time will be granted in Working days. In no event, however, will an extension of time be granted for delays that merely extend the duration of non-critical activities, or which only consume float without delaying the Project completion date.

8.6.2.1 "A Weather Day" is a day on which the Contractor's current schedule indicates Work is to be done, and on which inclement weather and related site conditions prevent the Contractor from performing seven continuous hours of Work between the hours of 7:00a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Weather days are excusable delays. When weather conditions at the site prevent work from proceeding, immediately notify the ODR for confirmation of the conditions. At the end of each calendar month, submit to the ODR and AE a list of Weather Days occurring in that month along with documentation of the impact on critical activities. Based on confirmation by the ODR, any time extension granted will be issued by Change Order. If the Contractor and Owner cannot agree on the time extension, the Owner may issue a ULCO for fair and reasonable time extension.

8.6.2.2 Excusable Delay. The Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment of time, issued via change order, for critical path delays caused by the following:

8.6.2.2.1 Errors, omissions and imperfections in design which the AE corrects by means of changes in the drawings and specifications.

Page 36 of 57

8.6.2.2.2 Unanticipated physical conditions at the Site which the AE corrects by means of changes to the drawings and specifications or for which the Owner directs changes in the Work identified in the Contract Documents using the formal change order process.

8.6.2.2.3 Changes in the Work that effect activities identified in the Contractor's schedule as "critical" to completion of the entire Work, if such changes are ordered by the ODR or the AE.

8.6.2.2.4 Suspension of Work for unexpected natural events (sometimes called "acts of God"), civil unrest, strikes or other events which are not foreseeable and are not within the reasonable control of the Contractor.

8.6.2.2.5 Suspension of Work for convenience of the Owner, which prevents Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time.

8.6.3 The Contractor's relief in the event of such delays is the time impact to the critical path as determined by analysis of the Contractor's schedule. In the event that the Contractor incurs additional direct costs because of the delay, they are to be determined pursuant to the provisions of Article 10.

8. 7 Concurrent Delay. When the completion of the Work is simultaneously delayed by an excusable delay and a delay arising from a cause not designated as excusable, the Contractor may not be entitled to a time extension for the period of concurrent delay. An extension of time may be allowed by the ODR.

8.8 Other Time Extension Requests. Time extensions requested in association with changes to the Work directed or requested by the Owner shall be included with the Contractor's proposed costs for such change. Time extensions requested for inclement weather are covered by paragraph 8.6.2.1 above. If the Contractor believes that the completion of the Work is delayed by a circumstance other than for changes directed to the Work or weather, they shall give the ODR written notice, stating the nature of the delay and the activities potentially affected, within five (5) calendar days after the onset of the event or circumstance giving rise to the excusable delay. Contractor must also provide sufficient written evidence to document the delay. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one notice of delay is necessary. Claims for extensions of time shall be stated in numbers of whole Working Days.

8.8.1 Within ten (1 0) calendar days after the cessation of the delay, the Contractor shall formalize its request for extension of time in writing to include a full analysis of the schedule impact of the delay and substantiation of the excusable nature of the delay. All Changes to the Contract Time or made as a result of such claims is by Change Order, as set forth in Article 10.

8.8.2 No extension of time releases the Contractor or the Surety furnishing a performance or payment bond from any obligations under the contract or such a bond. Those obligations remain in full force until the discharge of the Contract.

8.8.3 Contents of Time Extension Requests. The Contractor shall provide with each Time Extension Request a quantitative demonstration of the impact of the delay on project completion time, based on the Work Progress Schedule, including a reasonably detailed narrative setting forth:

8.8.3.1 The nature of the delay and its cause; the basis of the Contractor's claim of entitlement to a time extension.

8.8.3.2

8.8.3.3

Documentation of the actual impacts of the claimed delay on the critical path indicated in the Contractor's Work Progress Schedule, and any concurrent delays.

Description and documentation of steps taken by the Contractor to mitigate the effect of the claimed delay, including, when appropriate, the modification of the Work Progress Schedule.

Page 37 of 57

8.8.4 Owner's Response. The Owner will respond to the Time Extension Request by providing to the Contractor written notice of the number of days granted, if any, and giving its reason if this number differs from the number of days requested by the Contractor.

8.8.4.1

8.8.4.2

The Owner will not grant time extensions for delays that do not affect the Contract Completion Date.

The Owner will respond to each properly submitted Time Extension Request within fifteen (15) calendar days following receipt. If the Owner cannot reasonably make a determination about the Contractor's entitlement to a time extension within that time, the Owner will notify the Contractor in writing. Unless otherwise agreed by the Contractor, the Owner has no more than fifteen (15) additional calendar days to prepare a final response.

If the Owner fails to respond within forty-five (45) calendar days from the date the Time Extension Request is received, the Contractor is entitled to a time extension in the amount requested. Provided that the Contractor can demonstrate actual delivery to the ODR.

8.9 Failure to Complete Work Within the Contract Time. TIME IS AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT OF THIS CONTRACT. The Contractor's failure to substantially complete the Work within the Contract Time or to achieve final completion as required will cause damage to the Owner. These damages may be liquidated by agreement of the Contractor and the Owner, as set forth in the Contract Documents.

8.10 Liquidated Damages. The Owner may collect Liquidated Damages due from the Contractor directly or indirectly by reducing the Contract Sum in the amount of Liquidated Damages stated in the Contract Documents attached. Should the Contractor fail to complete the work within the time specified any extensions of time, the Contractor agrees and stipulates that the Owner may withhold permanently from the Contractor's total compensation $1 ,000.00 as liquidated damages for breach of contract for each and every calendar or working day as stated in each project proposal. Certain projects may have other amounts and conditions for liquidated damages and they will be stated in the Special Requirements Section or Special Notice to Bidders Subsection of the individual projects.

8.1 0.1 The Contractor stipulates and agrees that the time for completion is reasonable and adequate, considering the average climatic conditions and usual industrial conditions prevalent in this locality.

8.1 0.2 The amount of liquidated damages is fixed and stipulated due to the difficulty in ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would sustain, and the damages may be retained by the Owner from partial payments or from the final payment.

8.1 0.3 The Contractor shall be charged for administration, surveying, and inspection services furnished by the Owner when liquidated damages are assessed and when work occurs after the stated time for completion of the Project.

Article 9. Payments

9.1. Schedule of Values. The Contractor shall submit to the ODR and the AE for acceptance a Schedule of Values, or Work Breakdown, accurately itemizing material and labor for the various classifications of the Work based on the organization of the specification sections and using the same activity names and terms as the Work Progress Schedule. The ODR and/or AE may reject any unbalanced or inaccurate schedule of values. Contractor shall promptly resubmit an adjusted schedule. The accepted Schedule of Values will be the basis for the progress payments under the Contract.

9.1.1 No progress payments will be made prior to receipt and acceptance of the Schedule of Values, provided in such detail as required by the ODR, and submitted not less than twenty-one calendar (21) days prior to the first request for payment. The Schedule of Values shall follow the order of trade divisions of the specifications and include costs for general conditions, fees, contingencies, and Owner cash allowances, if applicable, so

Page 38 of 57

that the sum of the items will equal the Contract Sum. As appropriate, assign each item labor and/or material values, the subtotal thereof equaling the value of the work in place when complete.

9.1 .2 The Contractor shall retain a copy of all worksheets used in preparation of its bid or proposal, supported by a notarized statement that the worksheets are true and complete copies of the documents used to prepare the bid or proposal.

The Contractor shall provide the worksheets available to the ODR at the time of Contract execution.

9.2. Progress Payments. The Contractor will receive periodic progress payments for Work performed, materials in place, suitably stored on site, or as otherwise agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor. Payment is not due until receipt by the ODR or his designee of a correct and complete Pay Application in electronic and/or hard copy format as set forth in Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, and signed by the AE.

Progress payments are made provisionally and do not constitute acceptance of work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner will not process progress payment applications for Change Order work until all parties execute the Change Order.

9.2.1 Preliminary Pay Worksheet once each month that a progress payment is to be requested, the Contractor shall submit to the AE and the ODR a complete, clean copy of a preliminary pay worksheet or Preliminary Pay Application, to include the following:

9.2.1.1 The Contractor's estimate of the amount of Work performed, labor furnished and materials incorporated into the Work, using the established Schedule of Values.

9.2.1 .2

9.2.1.3

An updated Work Progress Schedule including the Executive Summary and all required schedule reports.

Such additional documentation as Owner may require as set forth in the Supplementary General Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

9.2.2 Contractor's Application for Progress Payment. As soon as practicable, but in no event later than seven days after receipt of the Preliminary Pay Worksheet, the AE and ODR will meet with the Contractor to review the Preliminary Pay Worksheet and to observe the condition of the Work. Based on this review, the ODR and the AE may require modifications to the Preliminary Pay Worksheet prior to the submittal of an application for progress payment, and will promptly notify the Contractor of revisions necessary for approval. As soon as practicable, the Contractor shall submit its Invoice on the appropriate and completed form, reflecting the required modifications to the Schedule of Values required by the AE and/or ODR. Attach all additional documentation required by the ODR and/or AE, as well as an affidavit affirming that all payrolls, bills for labor, materials, equipment, subcontracted work and other indebtedness connected with the Contractor's invoice are paid or will be paid within the time specified in Texas Government Code, Chapter 2251. No invoice is complete unless it fully reflects all required modifications, and attaches all required documentation including the Contractors Affidavit.

9.2.3 Certification by AE. Within seven (7) calendar days or earlier following the AE's receipt of the Contractor's formal invoice, the AE will review the application for progress payment for completeness, and forward to the ODR. The AE will certify that the application is complete and payable, or that it is incomplete, stating in particular what is missing. If the Invoice is incomplete, the Contractor shall make the required corrections and resubmit the Invoice for processing.

9.3 Owner's Duty to Pay. The Owner has no duty to pay the Contractor except on receipt by the ODR of; 1) a complete Invoice certified by the AE and 2) the Contractor's updated Work Progress Schedule, and 3) confirmation that the Contractor's as-built documentation at the site is kept current.

9.3.1 Payment for stored materials confirmed by the ODR and AE to be on-site, may be limited to 100 percent of the invoice price or 85 percent of the schedule of values for

Page 39 of 57

the materials or equipment, whichever the ODR and the AE approves. Material on Hand invoices shall be provided to the ODR or the Owners AE not later than the twenty-sixth 261

h day of each month. The Contractor shall indicate which bid items the payment for Materials on Hand will apply towards.

9.3.2 Retainage. The Owner will withhold from each progress payment, as retainage, 10 percent for projects having a total earned amount of $400,000 or less; or 5 percent for projects with a total earned amount in excess of $400,000, the amount authorized by law, or as otherwise set forth in the Supplementary General Conditions. Retainage is managed in conformance with Texas Government Code, Chapter 2252, Government Code, subchapter B. No interest will accrue on late payments by the City except as provided under Chapter 2251 of the Government Code.

9.3.2.1

9.3.2.2

9.3.2.3

The Contractor shall provide written consent of its Surety for any request for release of retainage.

Retainage amount will not be reduced as portions of the Project are accepted for beneficial occupancy.

The Owner shall have the sole discretion to reduce retainage.

9.3.3 Price Reduction to Cover Loss. The Owner may reduce any Periodic Invoice, or application for Progress Payment, prior to payment to the extent necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of actions of the Contractor including, but not limited to:

9.3.3.1

9.3.3.2

9.3.3.3

9.3.3.4

9.3.3.5

9.3.3.6

9.3.3.7

Defective or incomplete Work not remedied.

Damage to Work of a separate Contractor.

Failure to maintain scheduled progress or reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time.

Persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid portion of the Contract Sum.

Assessment of fines for violations of Prevailing Wage Rate law; or

Failure to include the appropriate amount of retainage for that periodic progress payment.

9.3.4 Title to all material and Work covered by progress payments transfers to the Owner upon payment.

9.3.4.1 Transfer of title to Owner does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the care and protection of materials and Work upon which payments have been made until final acceptance of the entire Work, or the restoration of any damaged Work, or waive the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all the terms of the Contract.

9.4 Progress payments to the Contractor do not release the Contractor or its surety from any obligations under this Contract.

9.4.1 Upon the Owner's request, the Contractor shall furnish proof of the status of Subcontractor's accounts in a form acceptable to the Owner.

9.4.2 Pay estimate certificates must be signed by a corporate officer or a representative duly authorized by the Contractor.

9.4.3 Provide copies of bills of lading, invoices, delivery receipts or other evidence of the location and value of such materials in requesting payment for materials.

9.4.4 For purposes of Texas Government Code§ 2251.021 (a) (2), the date the performance

Page 40 of 57

of service is complete is the date when the Owner's representative approves the application for payment.

9.4.5 Only materials and equipment which are to be used directly in the Work shall be brought to and stored on the Project site by the Contractor. After equipment is no longer required for the Work, it shall be promptly removed from the Project site.

Protection of construction material and equipment stored at the Project site from weather, theft, fire, vandalism, damage and all other adversity is solely the responsibility of the Contractor.

9.4.6 On the 26th day of each month (unless the 26th is a Saturday, Sunday or Holiday, then on the following working day), the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an application for payment for projects requiring the Contractor to submit monthly payment applications. The Engineer will review the application and the progress of the work, and if found to be in order will prepare a certificate for partial payment showing the amount of partial payment, the total value of the work done by the Contractor throughout the last working day of the month and the value of all sound materials delivered to the work site.

The Contractor will be notified within twenty-one (21) calendar days from receipt of a disputed application of payment and the nature of the dispute in accordance with Section 2251.042, Texas Government Code.

9.4.6.1

9.4.6.2

9.4.6.3

9.4.6.4

On projects where the Engineer prepares the monthly payment estimates, the Contractor shall certify on the appropriate estimate form, the work was accomplished in accordance with the agreement and its relevant specifications.

The Owner will pay the Contractor from the certificate less ten (1 0) percent of the amount thereof, which ten (1 0) percent shall be retained until final payment, on or before the tenth (1 01h) day of the following month.

The Owner will pay the Contractor from the certificate less five (5) percent of the amount thereof, for all contracts with a total amount greater than $400,000.00, which five (5) percent shall be retained until final payment.

On contracts without Payment and Performance Bonds, total payment will be made when all the work is satisfactorily completed, lien and payment affidavits have been received by the issuing department and accepted regardless who prepares the payment estimate.

9.5 Off-Site Storage. With prior approval by the Owner and in the event Contractor elects to store materials at an off-site location, abide by the following conditions, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner.

9.5.1 Store materials in a secured facility approved by AE.

9.5.2 Provide separate Insurance Coverage adequate not only to cover equipment and materials while in storage, but also in transit from the off-site storage areas to the project site. Copies of duly authenticated Certificates of Insurance, made out to fully insure the Owner must be filed with the Purchasing Department, ODR and the AE.

9.5.3 Observation by Owner's representative is allowed at any time. The ODR must be satisfied with the security, control, maintenance, and preservation measures.

9.5.4 Materials for this project are physically separated and marked for the project in a sectioned-off area. Only materials which have been approved through the submittal process are to be considered for payment.

9.5.5 Owner reserves the right to reject materials at any time prior to final acceptance of the complete Contract if they do not meet Contract requirements regardless of any previous progress payment made.

9.5.6 With each monthly payment estimate, submit a report to the ODR and AE listing the

Page 41 of 57

quantities of materials already paid for and still stored in the off-site location.

9.5.7 Make warehouse records, receipts and invoices available to Owner's representatives, upon request, to verify the quantities and their disposition.

9.5.8 In the event of Contract termination or default by Contractor, the items in storage off-site, upon which payment has been made, will be promptly turned over to Owner or Owner's agents at a location near the jobsite as directed by the ODR. The full provisions of Performance and Payment Bonds on this project cover the materials off-site in every respect as though they were stored on the Project Site.

Article 10. Changes

1 0.1. Change Orders. A change order issued after execution of the Contract is a written order to the Contractor, signed by the ODR and the Contractor, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time can only be changed by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement with it, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time.

The ODR may issue written authorization for the Contractor to proceed with work of a change order in advance of final execution by all parties.

1 0.1.1 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, and without approval of the Contractor's Surety, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, and the Contract Sum and the Contract Time will be adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. If such changes cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of the Contract, equitable adjustment shall be made and confirmed in writing in a Change Order.

1 0.1.2 The parties acknowledge that the specifications and drawings may not be complete or free from errors, omissions or imperfections and that they may require changes or additions in order for the work to be completed to the satisfaction of Owner. Therefore, and notwithstanding any other provisions in this Contract, the parties agree that any errors, omissions or imperfections in the specifications and drawings, or any changes in or additions to them or to the work ordered by Owner and any resulting delays in the work or increases in Contractor's costs and expenses, shall not constitute or give rise to any claim, demand or cause of action of any nature whatsoever in favor of Contractor, whether for breach of contract, quantum meruit, or otherwise provided; however, that Owner shall be liable to Contractor for the sum stated to be due Contractor in any Change Order approved and signed by both parties. The parties agree that the Change Order sum, together with any extension of time contained in the Change Order, shall constitute full compensation to Contractor for all costs, expenses and damages to Contractor, whether direct, consequential or otherwise that are incident to, arise out of, or result directly or indirectly from or indirectly from the work performed by Contractor under such Change Order.

1 0.1.3 The Contractor, upon receipt of written notification by the AE of a proposed item of change in the Work, shall prepare as soon as possible a Change Proposal in such form or forms as directed by the AE.

10.1.3.1

10.1.3.2

10.1.3.3

Each separate Change Proposal shall be numbered consecutively and shall include materials, costs, labor costs, fees, overhead and profit. The Proposal shall specify all cost related to the proposed Change in the Work, including any disruption or impact on performance;

The Subcontractor's itemized accounting shall be included with the Change Proposal;

If a Change Proposal is returned to the Contractor for additional information

Page 42 of 57

10.1.3.4

10.1.3.5

10.1.3.6

or if the scope of the proposed change in the Work is modified by additional, deletions or other revisions, the Contractor shall revise the Change Proposal accordingly and resubmit the revised Change Proposal to the Architect;

A revised Change Proposal shall bear the original Change Proposal number suffixed by the letter "R" to designate a revision in the original Change Proposal. If additional revisions to a revised Change Proposal are necessary, each subsequent revision shall be identified by an appropriate numeral suffix immediately following the "R" suffix;

Upon written approval of a Change Proposal by the Owner, the AE will prepare a Change Order authorizing such change in the Work; and

The Contractor shall request extensions of Contract Time due to changes in the Work only at the time of submitting its Change Proposal. Contractor's failure to do so shall represent a waiver of any right to request a time extension.

1 0.1.4 No order, oral statement, or direction of the Owner or his duly appointed representative shall be treated as a change under this article or entitle the Contractor to an adjustment. All change orders must be in writing and approved prior to the commencement of the Work contemplated by the Change Order except for Change Orders adding only extensions of time.

1 0.1.5 The Contractor agrees that the Owner or any of its duly authorized representatives shall have access and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers, and records of the Contractor. Further, the Contractor agrees to include in all its subcontracts a provision giving the Owner or any of its duly authorized representatives access to and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of any subcontractor relating to any claim arising from this Contract, whether or not the subcontractor is a party to the claim. The right of access and examination described herein shall continue for the duration of any claims brought under the Disputes article of the Contract, litigation, or the settlement of claims arising out of the performance of this Contract until final disposition of such claims, appeals or litigation or three (3) years from final payment, whichever is longer.

1 0.1.6 Contractor's records, which shall include but not be limited to accounting records (hard copy, as well as computer readable data if it can be made available), written policies and procedures; subcontract files (including proposals of successful and unsuccessful bidders, bid recaps, etc.); original estimates; estimating work sheets; correspondence; back charge logs and supporting documentation; general ledger entries detailing cash and trade discounts earned; insurance rebates and dividends; and any other supporting evidence deemed necessary by the Owner to substantiate charges related to any matters related to the Contract (including interviews with Contractor's personnel and Subcontractor's personnel) shall be open to inspection and subject to audit and/or reproduction by Owner's agent or its authorized representative to the extent necessary to adequately permit evaluation and verification of (a) Contractor compliance with Contract requirements, (b) compliance with Owner's business ethics policies, and (c) compliance with provisions for pricing or claims submitted by the contractor or any of its payees.

1 0.2. Unit Prices: The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to provide certain work or materials on the basis of unit prices. If the quantity originally contemplated in determining any unit price is materially changed such that application of the agreed unit price to the actual quantity of work required will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit price shall be equitably adjusted as provided in the Special Conditions or as agreed to by the parties and incorporated into Change Order.

1 0.3. Claims for Additional Costs

1 0.3.1 The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Owner and the AE within twenty-one

Page 43 of 57

(21) days of the occurrence of any event or the discovery of any condition that the Contractor claims will cause an increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time that is not related to a requested change. The Contractor shall not proceed with any work for which it will assert a claim for additional cost or time before providing the written notices, except for emergency situations governed by Article 6.3.

Failure to provide the required notices is sufficient grounds for rejecting any claim for an increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time arising from the event or the condition. Any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time for any additional Work shall be authorized by Change Order.

1 0.3.2 The notice provisions of Article 1 0.3.1 apply to, but are not limited to, any claims for additional cost or time brought by the Contractor as a result of: 1) any written interpretation of the Contract Documents, 2) any order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Article 13 where the Contractor was not at fault, or 3) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to Article 1 0.4.

1 0.3.3 Should the Contractor or his Subcontractors fail to call attention of the AE to obvious discrepancies or omissions in the Bid/Proposal Documents during the pre-bid/preproposal period, but claim additional costs for corrective work after contract award, the Owner may assume intent to circumvent competitive bidding for necessary corrective work.

In such case, the Owner may choose to let a separate contract for the corrective work, or issue a ULCO to require performance by the Contractor. Claims for time extensions or for extra cost resulting from delayed notice of contract document discrepancies or omissions will not be considered by the Owner.

1 0.4. Minor Changes. The AE, with concurrence of the Owner or ODR, will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. Such changes shall be effected by written order which the Contractor shall carry out promptly and record on as-built record documents.

1 0.5. Concealed Site Conditions. If, in the performance of the Contract, subsurface, latent or concealed conditions at the site are found to be different from the information included in the bid/proposal documents and were undiscoverable in a site review, or if unknown conditions of an unusual nature are disclosed differing materially from the conditions usually inherent in work of the character shown and specified, the ODR and the AE shall be notified in writing of such conditions upon discovery. Upon such notice, or upon its own observation of such conditions, the AE, with the approval of the ODR, will promptly make such changes in the Drawings and Specifications as they deem necessary to conform to the different conditions, and any increase or decrease in the cost of the Work, or in the time within which the Work is to be completed, resulting from such changes will be adjusted by Change Order, subject to the prior approval of the ODR.

1 0.6. Extension of Time. All Changes to the Contract Time shall be made as a consequence of requests as required under Article 8.6, and as documented by Change Order as provided under Article 1 0.1.

1 0.7. Administration of Change Order Requests

All changes in the Contract shall be administered in accordance with procedures approved by the Owner, and when required make use of such electronic information management system(s) as the owner may employ.

10.7.1 Routine changes in the Construction Contract shall be formally initiated by the AE by means of a Change Request form detailing requirements of the proposed change for pricing by the Contractor. This action may be preceded by communications between the Contractor, AE and ODR concerning the need and nature of the change, but such communications shall not constitute a basis for beginning the proposed Work by the Contractor. Except for emergency conditions described below, approval of the Contractor's cost proposal by the AE and ODR will be required for authorization to proceed with the Work being changed. The Owner will not be responsible for the cost of work changed without prior approval and the Contractor may be required to remove

Page 44 of 57

work so installed.

1 0.7.2 Any unexpected circumstance which necessitates an immediate change in order to avoid a delay in progress of the Work may be expedited by verbal communication and authorization between the Contractor and Owner, with written confirmation following within twenty-four (24) hours. A limited scope not-to-exceed estimate of cost and time will be requested prior to authorizing Work to proceed. Should the estimate be impractical for any reason, the ODR may authorize the use of detailed cost records of such work to establish and confirm the actual costs and time for documentation in a formal Change Order.

1 0.7.3 Emergency changes to save life or property may be initiated by the Contractor alone (see Article 7.3) with the claimed cost and/or time of such work to be fully documented as to necessity and detail of the reported costs and/or time. Emergencies occasioned by the Contractor or a person or entity for which The Contractor is responsible under the Contract or otherwise are non-compensable.

1 0. 7.4 The method of incorporating approved changes into the parameters of the accepted Schedule of Values must be coordinated and administered in a manner acceptable to the ODR.

1 0.8. Pricing Change Order Work

1 0.8.1 All proposed costs for change order work must be supported by itemized accounting of material, equipment and associated itemized installation costs in sufficient detail, following the outline and organization of the established Schedule of Values, to permit analysis by the AE and ODR using current estimating guides and/or practices.

10.8.1.1

10.8.1.2

1 0.8.1.3

Photocopies of Subcontractor and vendor proposals shall be furnished unless specifically waived by the ODR.

Contractor shall provide written response to change request within twenty-one (21) calendar days of receipt.

If the parties cannot agree on an equitable adjustment for labor hours attributable to a change, they shall use the Schedule of Values as a guide for labor hours as a basis of negotiation.

1 0.8.1.4 If the parties cannot agree on an equitable adjustment for equipment rental charges attributable to a change, they shall use the Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Mobilization as a basis of negotiation.

1 0.8.2 Methods used in determining adjustment to the Contract Sum may include those listed below:

10.8.2.1

1 0.8.2.2

10.8.2.3

Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation. Contractor's overhead and profit shall not exceed ten percent (1 0%) of the cost of the Work under any such proposal. Sufficient substantiating data shall include a proposal itemized for the various components of work added or deleted, segregated by labor, material and equipment. Details to be submitted will include detailed line item estimates showing detailed material quality take-offs, material prices by item and of related labor hour pricing information and extension (by line item by drawings as applicable);

Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee not to exceed ten percent

Page 45 of 57

( 1 0%) of the cost of the Work; or

1 0.8.2.4 As provided in Subparagraph 1 0.8.2.1

1 0.8.3 In the absence of agreement between Owner and Contractor on the proper change to the Contract Sum or Contract Time because of a change in the Work, Contractor may treat the matter as a Claim under Paragraph 4.3. In such event, the Contractor shall be entitled to recover only the amount by which its direct costs have been reasonably increased over the direct cost of performing the Work without the change in the Work, plus ten percent (10%) of direct cost to cover home office overhead and fee. In the event that performance of the change order work necessarily extends the date for substantial completion, Contractor shall be entitled to recover its extended General Conditions costs attributable to the time extension. Direct costs shall be limited to the following:

1 0.8.3.1

10.8.3.2

1 0.8.3.3

1 0.8.3.4

1 0.8.3.5

Reasonable Cost of Labor, including Social Security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and worker's compensation insurance;

Materials, supplies and equipment including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

Rental cost of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others at rates that are no greater than market rates in the locale of the Work at the time of the Work. Unless otherwise established in the Contract, the rental value of the Contractor's own equipment shall not be more than normal local rental rates for Contractor owned equipment;

Premiums for all bonds and insurance permit fees and sales, use or similar taxes related to the work; and

Cost of Subcontractor for performing the change Work. The amount allowable for Subcontractors shall be calculated using the same standards set out herein for direct Work by the Contractor.

Contractor and each Subcontractor involved shall furnish evidence of costs such as copies of original invoices for materials, payroll vouchers for labor, etc., upon request by the Architect or Owner. Any increase in Contract Time shall be limited to the amount of time by which activities, critical to overall completion of the Project, are delayed by the change in the Work. If it is reasonably possible to perform the change in the Work, concurrently with Work that is critical to overall completion, no time extension shall be granted by reason of a change in the Work.

1 0.8.3.6

1 0.8.3.5.1 On contracts based on a Guaranteed maximum Price (GMP), the Construction Manager-at-Risk or Design Build Firm shall not be entitled to a percentage mark-up on any change order work unless the Change Order increases the Guaranteed Maximum Price.

For subcontracted Work each affected Subcontractor shall figure its costs, overhead and profit as described above for Contractor's work, all subcontractor costs shall be combined, and to that total subcontractor cost the Contractor will be allowed to add a maximum mark-up of 10 percent if the total of all subcontracted work is less than or equal to $10,000, 7.5 percent if the total of all subcontracted work is between $10,000 and $20,000 and 5 percent if the total of all subcontractor work is over $20,000.

Page 46 of 57

10.8.3.7 On changes involving both additions and deletions, percentages for overhead and profit will be allowed only on the net addition. The Owner does not accept and will not pay for additional contract cost identified as indirect, consequential, or as damages caused by delay.

Article 11. Project Completion and Acceptance

11.1. Closing Inspections

11.1.1 Substantial Completion Inspection. When the Contractor considers the entire Work or part thereof Substantially Complete, it shall notify the AE and ODR in writing that the Work will be ready for Substantial Completion Inspection on a specific date. The Contractor shall include with this notice the Contractor's Punch list to indicate that it has previously inspected all the Work associated with the request for inspection, has corrected items where possible, and includes all items scheduled for completion or correction prior to final inspection. The failure to include any items on this list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. If any of the items on this list prevents the building from the use to which it is intended, the Contractor shall not request a Substantial Completion Inspection. The Owner and its representatives will review the list of items and schedule the requested inspection, or inform the Contractor in writing that such an inspection is premature because the Work is not sufficiently advanced or conditions are not as represented on the Contractor's list.

11.1.1.1 Prior to the Substantial Completion observation, the Contractor shall furnish a copy of its marked-up As-Built Drawings and a preliminary copy of each instructional manual, maintenance and operating manual, parts catalog, wiring diagrams, spare parts, specified written warranties and like publications or parts for all installed equipment, systems and like items. Delivery of these items is a prerequisite for requesting the Substantial Completion Inspection.

11.1.1.2 On the date requested by Contractor, or as mutually agreed upon, the AE, ODR, the Contractor and other Owner representatives as determined by the Owner, will jointly attend the Substantial Completion Inspection, which shall be conducted by the ODR or their delegate. If the ODR concurs with the AE and Contractor in a determination that the Work is Substantially Complete, the Owner will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to be signed by the AE, Owner and Contractor, establishing the date of Substantial Completion and identifying responsibilities for security, maintenance, and insurance. AE will provide with this certificate a list of punch list items (the Pre-Final Punch list) for completion prior to final inspection. This list may include items in addition to those on the Contractor's punch list, which the inspection team deems necessary to correct or complete prior to Final Inspection. If the Owner occupies the facility upon determination of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall complete all corrective Work at the convenience of the Owner, without disruption to Owner's use of the facility for its intended purposes.

11.1.2 Walk Through. The Contractor shall complete the list of items identified on the Pre-Final Punch list prior to requesting a Final Project Review. Unless otherwise specified, or otherwise agreed in writing by the parties as documented on the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall complete and/or correct all Work within thirty (30) days of the Substantial Completion date. Upon completion of the Pre-Final Punch list work, the Contractor shall give written notice to the ODR and AE that the Work will be ready for Final Inspection on a specific date. The Contractor shall accompany this notice with a copy of the updated Pre-Final Punch list indicating resolution of all items. On the date specified or as soon thereafter as is practicable, the ODR, AE and the Contractor will inspect the Work. The AE will submit to the Contractor a Final Punch list of open items that the inspection team requires corrected or completed before final acceptance of the Work.

Page 47 of 57

11.1.2.1 Correct or complete all items on the Final Punch List within seven (7) days and before requesting Final Payment. Upon completion of the Final Punch list, the Contractor will notify the AE and ODR in writing stating the disposition of each Final Punch list item. The AE, Owner and Contractor shall promptly inspect the completed items.

When the Final Punch list is complete, and the Contract is fully satisfied according to the Contract Documents the ODR will issue a certificate establishing the date of Final Completion. Completion of all Work is a condition precedent to the Contractor's right to receive Final Payment.

11.1.3 Annotation. Any Certificate issued under this Article may be annotated to indicate that it is not applicable to specified portions of the Work, or that it is subject to any limitation as determined by the Owner.

11.1.4 Purpose of Observation. Observation is for determining the relative completion of the Work, and does not relieve the Contractor of its overall responsibility for completing the Work in a professional and competent fashion, in compliance with the Contract. Work accepted with incomplete punch list items or failure of the Owner or other parties to identify Work that does not comply with the Contract Documents or is defective in operation or workmanship does not constitute a waiver of the Owner's rights under the Contract or relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for performance or warranties.

11.1.5 Additional Observations

11.1.5.1 If the Owner's observation team determines that the Work is not Substantially Complete at the Substantial Completion Observation, the ODR or AE will give the Contractor written notice listing cause(s) of the rejection. The Contractor will set a time for completion of incomplete or defective work as acceptable to the ODR and will complete or correct all work so designated prior to requesting a second Substantial Completion Observation.

11.1.5.2 If the Owner's observation team determines that the Work is not complete at the Final Observation, the ODR or the AE will give the Contractor written notice listing the cause(s) of the rejection. The Contractor will set a time for completion of incomplete or defective work as acceptable to the ODR. The Contractor shall complete or correct all Work so designated prior to again requesting a Final Observation.

11.1.5.3 The Contract Agreement contemplates three (3) comprehensive observations: the Substantial Completion Observation, the Final Completion Observation, and the Inspection of Completed Final Punch list Items. The cost to the Owner of additional inspections resulting from the Work not being ready for one or more of these inspections is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Owner may issue a Change Order deducting these costs from Final Payment. Upon the Contractor's written request, the Owner will furnish documentation of any costs so deducted. Work added to the Contract by Change Order after Substantial Completion Inspection is not corrective work for purposes of determining timely completion, or assessing the cost of additional inspections.

1.1.5.4 In the event that the Work fails to pass the Substantial Completion Inspection or the Final Completion Inspection, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the ODR and AE the steps taken to remedy each incomplete item before requesting a follow-up inspection. The ODR and AE will review the remedial measure report and make a determination whether to schedule a follow up inspection or direct the Contractor to re-address particular items prior to the follow up inspection.

11.1.6 Phased Completion. The contract may provide, or project conditions may warrant, as determined by the ODR, that designated elements or parts of the Work be completed in phases. Where phased completion is required or specifically agreed to by the parties, the provisions of the contract related to Closing Inspections, Occupancy and Acceptance apply independently to each designated element or part of the Work. For all other

Page 48 of 57

purposes, unless otherwise agreed by the parties in writing, Substantial Completion of the Work as a whole is the date on which the last element or part of the Work completed receives a Substantially Completion certificate. Final Completion of the Work as a whole is the date on which the last element or part of the Work completed receives a Final Completion certificate or notice.

11.1.7 Final Completion. The Contract may recognize only a Final Completion for submission by the Contractor for Final Payment. No Substantial Completion recognition or validation is allowed or permitted.

11.2 Owner's Right of Occupancy. The Owner may occupy or use all or any portion of the Work following Substantial Completion, or at any earlier stage of completion. Should the Owner wish to use or occupy the Work, or part thereof, prior to Substantial Completion, the ODR will notify the Contractor in writing and identify responsibilities for security, maintenance, and insurance. Work performed on the premises by third parties on the Owner's behalf does not constitute occupation or use of the Work by the Owner for purposes of this Article. All Work performed by the Contractor after occupancy, whether in part or in whole, shall be at the convenience of the Owner so as to not disrupt Owner's use of, or access to occupied areas of the project.

11.3 Acceptance & Payment

11.3.1 Request for Final Payment. Following the certified completion of all work, including all punch list items, cleanup, and the delivery of record documents, the Contractor shall submit a certified Application for Final Payment that includes all sums held as retainage and forward to the AE and the ODR for review and approval.

11.3.2 Final Payment Documentation. Prior to or with the Application for Final Payment, Contractor shall submit two (2) final copies of all close out documents, maintenance bond, maintenance and operating instructions, guarantees and warranties, certificates, record documents and all other items required by the Contract. Submit Consent of Surety to Final Payment and an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, subcontracted work and other indebtedness connected with the Work, except as specifically noted, are paid, will be paid, or otherwise satisfied within the period of time required by Texas Government Code, Chapter 2251. Furnish documentation establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of claims and liens arising out of the Contract. The Contractor may not subsequently submit a claim on behalf of a subcontractor or vendor unless the Contractor's affidavit notes that claim as an exception.

11.3.3 Architect/Engineer Approval. The AE will review a submitted Application for Final Payment promptly but in no event later than twelve (12) calendar days after its receipt. Prior to the expiration of this deadline, the AE will either 1) return the Application for Final Payment to Contractor with corrections for action and resubmission or 2) accept it, note their approval and send to Owner.

11.3.4 Offsets and Deductions. The Owner may deduct from the Final Payment all sums due from the Contractor. If the Certificate of Final Completion notes any Work remaining, incomplete, or defects not remedied, the Owner may deduct the cost of remedying such deficiencies from the Final Payment. On such deductions, the Owner will identify each deduction, the amount, and the explanation of the deduction on or by the 21st day after Owner's receipt of an approved Application for Final Payment. Such offsets and deductions shall be incorporated via a final Change Order, including by a ULCO as may be applicable.

11.3.5 Final Payment Due. Final Payment is due and payable by the Owner, subject to all st

allowable offsets and deductions, on the 31 day following the Owner's approval of the Application for Payment. If the Contractor disputes any amount deducted by the Owner,

th

the Contractor shall give notice of the dispute on or before the thirtieth (30 ) day following receipt of Final Payment. Failure to do so will bar any subsequent claim for payment of amounts deducted.

11.3.6 Effect of Final Payment. Final Payment constitutes a waiver of all claims by the

Page 49 of 57

Contractor.

11.3. 7 Waiver of Claims. Submission of an application for Final Payment by the Contractor constitutes a waiver of all claims and liens by the Contractor except those specifically identified in writing and submitted to the ODR prior to the execution of Final Payment.

11.3.8 Effect on Warranty. Regardless of approval and issuance of Final Payment, the Contract is not deemed fully performed by the Contractor and closed until the expiration of all warranty periods.

Article 12. Warranty & Guarantee

The warranties set out in this Article 12 are not exclusive of any other warranties or guarantees set out in other places in the Contract Documents or implied under applicable law.

12.1. Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee. Contractor and its surety by issuance of a bond incorporating this Contract, warrant to the Owner that all Work is executed in accordance with the Contract, complete in all parts and in accordance with approved practices and customs, and of the best finish and workmanship. The Contractor further warrants that unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated in the Work under the Contract are new. The Owner may, at its option, agree in writing to waive any failure of the Work to conform to the Contract, and to accept a reduction in the Contract Sum for the cost of repair or diminution in value of the Work by reason of such defect. Absent such a written agreement, the Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute and is not waived by any inspection or observation by the Owner, AE or others, by making any progress payment or final payment, by the use or occupancy of the Work or any portion thereof by the Owner, at any time, or by any repair or correction of such defect made by the Owner.

12.2. Warranty Period. Except as may be otherwise specified or agreed, the Contractor shall repair all defects in materials, equipment, or workmanship appearing within one year from the date of Final Acceptance of the Work. If less than all of the Work is accepted as substantially complete (Partial Substantial Completion), the warranty period for the Work accepted begins on the date of Partial Substantial Completion, or as otherwise stipulated on the Certificate of Partial Substantial Completion for the Work.

12.2.1 Thirty (30) days before the expiration of the warranty period, Contractor shall walk the Project with ODR and/or Engineer and identify any warranty items needing repair and will promptly undertake corrective measures.

12.2.2 Correction of Defects. Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner, or any agent of the Owner designated as responsible for management of the Warranty Period, of the discovery of a defect, the Contractor shall promptly remedy the defect(s), and provide written notice to the Owner and designated agent indicating action taken. In case of emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage to the Owner, or if the Contractor fails to remedy within 30 days, or within another period agreed to in writing, the Owner may correct the defect and be reimbursed the cost of remedying the defect from the Contractor or its Surety.

12.3 Limits on Warranty. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

12.3.1 Modification or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is not responsible, unless Owner is compelled to undertake maintenance or operation due to the neglect of the Contractor.

12.3.2 Normal wear and tear as determined by Owner after acceptance of the Work by the Owner.

12.4 Events Not Affecting Warranty. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in a good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract

Page 50 of 57

Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

12.4.1 Observations by Owner and/or AE.

12.4.2 Recommendation to pay any progress or final payment by AE.

12.4.3 The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to Contractor under the Contract Documents.

12.4.4 Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner.

12.4.5 Any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so.

12.4.6 Any review of a Shop Drawing or sample submittal; or

12.4. 7 Any inspection, test or approval by others.

12.5 Separate Warranties. If a particular piece of equipment or component of the Work for which the contract requires a separate warranty is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion, the Warranty Period for that equipment or component will not begin until Substantial Completion, regardless of any warranty agreements in place between suppliers and/or Subcontractors and the Contractor. The ODR will certify the date of service commencement in the Substantial Completion Certificate.

12.5.1 In addition to the Contractor's warranty and duty to repair, the Contractor expressly assumes all warranty obligations required under the Contract for specific building components, systems and equipment.

12.5.2 The Contractor may satisfy any such obligation by obtaining and assigning to the Owner a complying warranty from a manufacturer, supplier, or Subcontractor. Where an assigned warranty is tendered and accepted by the Owner which does not fully comply with the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor remains liable to the Owner on all elements of the required warranty not provided by the assigned warranty.

12.5.3 The warranties of Contractor provided in this Article 12 shall in no way limit or abridge the warranties of the suppliers of equipment and systems which are to comprise a portion of the Work and all of such warranties shall be in form and substance as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall take no action or fail to act in any way which results in the termination or expiration of such third party warranties or which otherwise results in prejudice to the rights of Owner under such warranties. Contractor agrees to provide all notices required for the effectiveness of such warranties and shall include provisions in the contracts with the providers and manufacturers of such systems and equipment whereby Owner shall have a direct right, but not a duty, of enforcement of such warranty obligations.

12.6 Certification of No Asbestos Containing Materials or Work. The Contractor shall ensure compliance with the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA- 40 CFR 763-99 (7)) from all subcontractors and materials suppliers, and shall provide a notarized certification to the Owner that all equipment and materials used in fulfillment of their contract responsibilities are non Asbestos Containing building Materials (ACBM). This certification must be provided no later than the Contractor's application for Final Payment.

Article 13. Suspension and Termination

13.1. Suspension of Work for Cause. The Owner may, at any time without prior notice, suspend all or any part of the Work if the Owner determines it is necessary to do so to prevent or correct any condition of the Work which constitutes an immediate safety hazard or which may reasonably be expected to impair the integrity, usefulness or longevity of the Work when completed.

13.1 .1 The Owner will give the Contractor a written notice of suspension for cause, setting forth the reason for the suspension and identifying the Work suspended. Upon receipt of the notice, the Contractor shall immediately cease all activities related to the identified Work. As soon as practicable following the issuance of a suspension notice,

Page 51 of 57

the Owner will conduct an investigation into the circumstances giving rise to the suspension, and issue a written determination of the findings.

13.1.2 If the cause of the suspension is due to actions or omissions within the control of the Contractor, the Contractor will not be entitled to an extension of time for delay resulting from the suspension. If the cause of the suspension is something not within the control of the Contractor and the suspension will prevent the Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time, the suspension is an Excusable Delay and a Time Extension will be granted through a Change Order.

13.1.3 Suspension of work under this provision will be no longer than is reasonably necessary to remedy the conditions giving rise to the suspension.

13.2. Suspension of Work for Owner's Convenience. Upon seven (7) calendar day's written notice to the Contractor, the Owner may at any time without breach of the Contract suspend all or any portion of the Work for its own convenience. Upon resumption of the Work, if the suspension prevents the Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time, it is an Excusable Delay. A notice of suspension for convenience may be modified by the Owner at any time on seven (7) calendar day's written notice to the Contractor. If the Owner suspends the Work for its convenience for more than 60 consecutive calendar days, the Contractor may elect to terminate the contract pursuant to the provisions of the contract.

13.3. Termination by Owner for Cause

13.3.1 Upon thirty (30) days written notice to the Contractor and its Surety of the Owner's intent to terminate the Contract ("Intent to Terminate Notice"), the Owner may, without prejudice to any right or remedy, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor, under any of the following circumstances:

13.3.1 .1

13.3.1.2

13.3.1.3

13.3.1.4

13.3.1.5

13.3.1.6

13.3.1.7

13.3.1.8

13.3.1.9

Persistent or repeated failure or refusal, except during complete or partial suspensions of work authorized under the Contract, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials; and/or

Persistent disregard of laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, including the ODR; and/or

Persistent failure to prosecute the work in accordance with the Contract, and to insure its completion within the time, or any approved extension thereof, specified in this Contract; and/or

Failure to remedy defective work condemned by the ODR; and/or

Failure to pay subcontractors, laborers, and material suppliers pursuant to Texas Government Code Chapter 2251; and/or

Persistent endangerment to the safety of labor or of the Work; and/or

Failure to supply or maintain statutory bonds or to maintain required insurance, pursuant to the contract; and/or

Any material breach of the Contract; and/or

The Contractor's insolvency, bankruptcy, or demonstrated financial inability to perform the work.

13.3.2 Failure by the Owner to exercise the right to terminate in any instance is not a waiver of the right to do so in any other instance.

13.3.3 Upon receipt of an Intent to Terminate Notice, the Contractor or its Surety has thirty (30) days to cure the reasons for the termination or demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner that it is prepared to remedy to the condition(s) upon which the Intent to

Page 52 of 57

Terminate Notice as based. If the Owner is satisfied that the Contractor or its Surety can remedy the reasons for the termination and complete the Work as required, the Intent to Terminate Notice shall be rescinded in writing by the Owner and the Work shall continue without an extension of time.

13.3.4 If at the conclusion of the thirty (30) day cure period the Contractor or its Surety is unable to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner its ability to remedy the reasons for termination, the Owner may immediately terminate the employment of the Contractor, make alternative arrangements for completion of the Work, deduct the cost of completion from the unpaid Contract Sum and recover any shortfall from Contractor's surety or call on the surety to honor its Performance Bond.

13.3.4.1 Recoverable costs include additional Owner expenses for items such as AE services, other consultants, and contract administration.

13.3.5 The Owner will make no further payment to the Contractor or its Surety until all costs of completing the Work are paid. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the costs of administering and finishing the Work, the Contractor will receive the excess funds. If costs of completing the Work exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor or its Surety will pay the difference to the Owner.

13.3.5.1 This obligation for payment survives completion, termination and abandonment of the Contract.

13.3.6 The Owner reserves the right in termination for cause to take assignment of all contracts between the Contractor and its Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers. The ODR will promptly notify the Contractor of the contracts the Owner elects to assume. Upon receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall promptly take all steps necessary to effect such assignment. The Contractor shall include a provision in all of its subcontracts to facilitate this assignment.

13.3.6.1

13.3.6.2

Owner shall only be responsible for compensating Subcontractors for Work done or materials furnished after the date Owner gives written notice of its acceptance of the subcontract agreement.

Each subcontract shall specifically provide that the Owner shall only be responsible to the Subcontractor for those services and materials furnished and approved by the Owner subsequent to the Owner's exercise of any rights under this conditional assignment.

13.4 Termination for Convenience of Owner. Upon written notice to the Contractor and the AE, the Owner may, without breach, terminate the Contract or any part thereof for its convenience.

13.4.1 The notice will specify the reason for and the effective date of contract termination. The notice may also contain instructions necessary for the protection, storage or decommissioning of incomplete work or systems, and for safety.

13.4.2 Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall immediately proceed with the following obligations:

13.4.2.1 Stop all work.

13.4.2.2

13.4.2.3

13.4.2.4

13.4.2.5

Place no further subcontracts or orders for materials or services.

Terminate all subcontracts.

Cancel all materials and equipment orders as applicable.

Take appropriate action to protect and preserve all property related to this Contract which is in the possession of the Contractor.

13.4.3 When the Contract is terminated for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor may recover from the Owner payment for all acceptable Work executed before the notice of termination along with the actual and reasonable cost of any additional work required to secure the project and property related to the Contract following the

Page 53 of 57

notice of termination. The Contractor will not be entitled to recover any other costs or damages arising from the termination for convenience of the Owner including, but not limited to, claims for lost profits or lost business opportunities.

13.4.4 In the event a termination for cause is deemed to be wrongful, it shall be converted to a termination for convenience and the costs recoverable by Contractor shall be calculated in accordance with Paragraph 13.4.3

13.5 Termination By Contractor. If the Work is stopped for a period of ninety (90) days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, such as a declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor, then the Contractor may, upon thirty (30) additional days' written notice to the ODR, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed before the work stoppage and the actual and reasonable cost of securing the project and property related to the Contract during the work stoppage. The Contractor will not be entitled to recover any other costs or damages arising from the work stoppage including, but not limited to, claims for lost profits or lost business opportunities. If the cause of the work stoppage is removed prior to the end of the thirty (30) day notice period, the Contractor may not terminate the Contract.

13.6 Settlement on Termination. Within 180 days of the effective date of Contract termination for any reason, the Contractor shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to the Owner based upon recoverable costs as provided under the contract. If the Contractor fails to submit a settlement proposal within the time allowed, the Owner may unilaterally determine the amount due to the Contractor because of the termination.

13.7 When all or a portion of the Work is suspended for any reason, the Contractor shall do all things necessary to protect the Owner's premises and all persons from damage and injury.

Article 14. Claims and Dispute Resolution

14.1 Definition: A Claim is any demand or assertion by the Contractor that it should be paid more money than the Contract Sum or granted more contract time by the Owner because of action or inaction on the part of Owner, any Owner representative including the ODR, AE, or any party for whom Owner is responsible, or any party with whom Owner has separately contracted for other portions of the Project, including, but not limited to, any demand or assertion that Contractor's performance has been delayed, interrupted or interfered with, that Contractor's performance has been accelerated, constructively accelerated, or suspended, that Contractor's performance has been wrongfully terminated, that the Contract Documents have been misinterpreted, that there has been a failure of payment, that Contractor has encountered concealed or unknown conditions, that Contractor has encountered hazardous materials, that there are problems with the Contract Documents, or the timing of AE approvals or decisions, that actions of the Owner have been intentionally wrongful or deceptive, that Owner is directly or indirectly guilty of negligence or an intentional tort related in any way to the Work, that the amount of time or money granted in a Construction Change Directive is inadequate, that an item treated as a minor change in the Work should have been treated as a Change Order, that a time extension grant was inadequate, that there has been a breach of contract, or that Contractor is entitled to any other relief, on any legal or equitable theory, related to the Work or the Contract. This definition of Claim is not intended to create any right of action where the right of action does not otherwise exist under applicable law or other provisions of this Contract.

14.2 Notice Requirement. Within five (5) days of the first occurrence of an event that Contractor has any reason to believe might result in a Claim, or within five (5) days of Contractor's discovery of the first occurrence of an event that Contractor has any reason to believe might result in a Claim if the first occurrence of the event was willfully hidden from the Contractor, the Contractor shall

Page 54 of 57

file a written document clearly captioned 'Notice of Claim' with the Owner and the AE. The Notice shall clearly set out the specific matter of complaint, and the impact or damages which may occur or have occurred as a result thereof, to the extent the impact or damages can be assessed at the time of the Notice. If the impact or damages cannot be assessed as of the date of the Notice, the Notice shall be amended at the earliest date this is reasonably possible.

Any Claim or portion of a Claim that has not been made the specific subject of a Notice strictly in accordance with the requirements of this section shall be waived. It is imperative that Owner have timely, specific Notice of any potential problem in order that the problem can be mitigated promptly.

14.2.1 In addition to the Notice required by Paragraph 13.2, the Contractor shall also file a document captioned "Claim" with the Owner within ninety-one (91) days of the occurrence of any event resulting in a Claim for damages, giving notice of the Claim. Contractor agrees that this is a reasonable Notice requirement. Any Claim or portion of a Claim that has not been made the specific subject of a Notice strictly in accordance with the requirements of this section is waived.

14.3 Claims Handling During Construction: After receipt of a Notice of Claim, the Owner may elect to refer the matter to the AE or another party for review, Contractor will attend meetings called to review and discuss the Claims and mitigation of the problem, and shall furnish any reasonable factual backup for the Claim requested. The Owner may also elect to defer consideration of the Claim until the Work is completed, in which case the same review options shall be available to the Owner at the Completion of the Work. If a claim is deferred, Contractor shall be entitled to its legal right to interest on any subsequent recovery. At any stage, the Owner is entitled to refer a Claim to mediation under the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and if this reference is made, Contractor will take part in the mediation process. The filing, mediation or rejection of a Claim does not entitle Contractor to stop performance of the Work. The Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract during the pendency of any claim, excepting termination or under Owner's direction to stop the Work Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. The parties shall share the Mediator's fee and any filing fees equally, and the Mediation shall be held in Amarillo, Texas.

14.4 Claims Handling Following Construction. The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Contractor, which have not previously been identified in a Notice of Claim under 14.2 and a Claim under 14.2.1 and specifically reserved in the final Application for Payment.

14.4.1 If a Claim has not been resolved within three (3) months of the date of the final Application for Payment through Claim review procedures, mediation, or other Claim settlement negotiations, then Contractor at that time, but not before, shall be entitled to institute litigation on the Claim in a State Court of competent jurisdiction in Potter County, Texas, and in no other forum.

14.5 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. Only if conditions are encountered at the site which are (a) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, (b) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the contract Documents or (c) in the case of renovation Work, any condition of the preexisting construction to be renovated which was hidden from view prior to demolition Work performed as a part of the renovation, that is materially different from any of the conditions that could reasonably have been expected to be present in preexisting construction of the age and type encountered on the Project, then Contractor shall be entitled to make a Claim if it can satisfy all of the requirements of Article 14. No adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be permitted, however, in connection with a concealed or unknown condition which does not differ materially from those conditions disclosed or which reasonably should have been disclosed by Contractor's (1) prior inspections, tests, reviews and preconstruction services for the Project, or (2) inspections, tests, review and preconstruction services which were given to Contractor by Owner, AE or ODR or which Contractor had the opportunity to make or should have performed in connection with the Project.

Page 55 of 57

14.6 Calculating Claim Amount. In calculating the amount of any Claim, the following standards will apply:

14.6.1 No indirect or consequential damages will be allowed;

14.6.2 No recovery shall be based on a comparison of planned expenditures to total actual expenditures, or on estimated losses of labor efficiency, or on a comparison of planned man loading to actual man loading, or any other analysis that is used to show damages indirectly;

14.6.3 Damages are limited to extra costs specifically shown to have been directly caused by a proven wrong;

14.6.4 The maximum daily limit on any recovery for delay shall be the amount originally estimated by the Contractor for job overhead costs divided by the total number of calendar days of Contract Time called for in the original Contract;

14.6.5 No damages will be allowed for home office overhead or other home office charges, or any Eichlay formula calculation; and

14.6.6 No profit will be allowed on any claim. This clause shall not reduce Contractor's entitlement to profit, if any, on a change order or ULCO.

14.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract sum, written Notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior Notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property.

14.7 .1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the contract Time, written Notice as provided herein shall be given. Any commencement of delayed Work after a delay will serve to terminate that delay for purpose of Notice. Subsequent delays, whether of similar or a different nature and whether based on the same, similar or a different cause, shall require Notice.

14.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

14.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written Notice of such injury of damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party as provided herein. The Notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

Article 15. Miscellaneous

15.1. Supplemental and Special Conditions. When the Work contemplated by the Owner is of such a character that the foregoing Uniform General Conditions of the Contract cannot adequately cover necessary and additional contractual relationships, the Contract may include Supplemental and Special Conditions as described below:

15.1.1 Supplemental Conditions may expand upon matters covered by the Uniform General Conditions, where necessary, provided the expansion does not weaken the character or intent of the Uniform General Conditions.

15.1.2 Special Conditions shall relate to a particular project and be peculiar to that project but shall not weaken the character or intent of the Uniform General Conditions.

Page 56 of 57

15.2. Federally Funded Projects. On Federally funded projects, the Owner may waive, suspend or modify any Article in these Uniform General Conditions which conflicts with any Federal statue, rule, regulation or procedure, where such waiver, suspension or modification is essential to receipt by the Owner of such Federal funds for the project. In the case of any project wholly financed by Federal funds, any standards required by the enabling Federal statute, or any Federal rules, regulations or procedures adopted pursuant thereto, shall be controlling.

15.3. Internet-based Project Management Systems. At its option, the Owner or his representative may administer its design and construction management through an Internet-based management system. In such cases, the Contractor shall conduct communication through this media and perform all project related functions utilizing this database system.

This includes correspondence, submittals, requests for information, vouchers or payment requests and processing, amendment, change orders and other administrative activities.

15.3.1 Accessibility And Administration.

15.3.1.1

15.3.1.2

When used, the Owner or his representative, will make the software accessible via the Internet to all project team members.

The Owner or his representative, authorized in writing, shall administer the software.

15.3.2 Training. When used, the Owner shall provide training to the project team members.

15.4 The contractor shall not assign the contract as a whole, or in part, without written consent of the Owner.

15.5 The invalidity of any part or provision of the Contract Documents shall not impair or affect in any manner whatsoever the validity, enforceability or effect of the remainder of the Contract Documents.

Article 16. Business Ethics

16.1 During the course of pursuing contracts, and the course of Contract performance, Contractor and its Subcontractors and vendors will maintain business ethics standards aimed at avoiding real or apparent impropriety or conflicts of interest. No substantial gifts, entertainment, payments, loans or other considerations beyond that which would be collectively categorized as incidental shall be made to any personnel of the Owner or its AE or to family members of any of them. At any time Contractor believes there may have been a violation of this obligation, Contractor shall notify Owner of the possible violation. Owner is entitled to request a representation letter from Contractor, its Subcontractors or vendors at any time to disclose all things of value passing from Contractor, its Subcontractors or vendors to Owner's personnel and its AE.

End of Uniform General Conditions

Page 57 of 57

THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF

PAYMENT BOND

KNONALLMENBYTHESEPRESENTS,that\1\e ___________________ a

_________ of hereinafter called Principal, and ____ _

__________ , a corporation organized under the laws of hereinafter called Surety, are

held and firmly bound unto the City of Amarillo, a municipal corporation, chartered by virtue of the constitution and laws

of the State of Texas, hereinafter called Obligee, in the amount of dollars($ ) for the

payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors

and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the ____ of.

, to which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as

fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all

claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said

contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas

Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of

said chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF , Principal has caused these presents to be executed

by its authorized attorney in fact and the said __________ , Surety, has caused these presents to be

executed by its , this _day of _____ , A.D.,

ATTEST

PRINCIPAL

By

(Principal Seal) Address

ATTEST

SURETY

By

(Surety Seal) Address

NOTE: DO NOT DATE THE BOND

THE STATE OF TEXAS

COUNTY OF

PERFORMANCE BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we ________________ a.

_________ of ____________ hereinafter called Principal, and ____ _

__________ , a corporation organized under the laws of hereinafter called Surety, are

held and firmly bound unto the City of Amarillo, a municipal corporation, chartered by virtue of the constitution and laws

of the State of Texas, hereinafter called Obligee, in the amount of dollars($ ) for the

payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors

and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the of_

, to which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as

fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OFTHIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall

faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and the contract documents, then, this obligation

shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas

Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of

said chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF __________ , Principal has caused these presents to be executed

by its authorized attorney in fact and the said , Surety, has caused these presents to be

executed by its , this_ day of _____ , A.D., __ _

ATIEST

PRINCIPAL

By

(Principal Seal) Address

ATIEST

SURETY

By

(Surety Seal) Address


11113/2008 CHD

MAINTENANCE BOND (General Contract)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That we, ____________ , as Principal, and ___________ _

a corporation organized under the laws of the State of _______ and authorized to do

surety business in the State of Texas, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Amarillo,

Texas, as Obligee, in the sum of ____________ Dollars ($ _____ ) lawful

money of the United States of America, for the payment of which sum will be made, we bind

ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally,

firmly by these presents:

WHEREAS, Principal has entered into a contract with Obligee, dated _______ to

constmct _____________ , said contract being by reference incorporated herein

for all purposes; and

WHEREAS, the said Principal is required by the contract to guarantee Principal's works

against defects in materials or workmanship which may develop during the period of __ _

years from and after the date of acceptance by said Obligee;

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the

Principal shall faithfully carry out and perform the said guarantee and shall, on due notice, repair

and make good at its own expense any and all defects in materials or workmanship in the said

work that may develop during the period of _____ year(s) from and after the date of

acceptance by said Obligee or shall pay over, make good, and reimburse to said Obligee all loss

and damage which said Obligee may sustain by reason of failure or default of said Principal to

do so, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

The Obligee may notify the Principal in writing (with copy to Surety) of any defect(s)

for which the Principal is responsible and shall specify in said notice a period of time in

which Principal shall correct said defect.

The Surety agrees to perform the corrections within thirty (30) calendar days after the

Obligee notifies the Surety in writing that the Principal has failed to make the required

corrections. If such defect(s) is not corrected within said thirty (30) days, then the Obligee shall

have the right to correct the defect(s) and the Principal and Surety, jointly and severally, shall

pay all costs and expenses incurred by the Obligee in correcting the defect(s); including but not

limited to engineering costs and legal costs, together with any direct and/or consequential

damages the Obligee sustains as a result of the failure of the Principal and/or Surety to correct

the defect(s).

PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this Bond, exclusive venue

shall lie in Potter County, State of Texas.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, __________ , Principal, has caused these presents

to be executed by its authorized attorney in fact and the said ____________ _

Surety, has caused these presents to be executed by its ___________ and attested

by its corporate seal this __ day of _____ 20

Attest:

PRINCIPAL, CONTRACTOR

By: By: Title: Address:

SURETY

By: By: Title: Address:

Phone:


STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT is between the City of Amarillo, a municipal corporation situated in Potter and Randall Counties, Texas, hereinafter called "City" and -----·--------------' hereinafter called "Contractor" upon the following tetms and conditions.

In consideration of the payment to be made from City to Contractor, Contractor agrees to perform all work under City Bid/Proposal No. for City Job No.

_______________ , in accordance with the Contract Documents listed below and in conformance with all applicable federal, state and local laws, rules, regulations and ordinances. The work to be performed by Contractor is described in the Contract Documents listed below.

The "Contract Documents" consist of the following items, which items, except item G, Contractor acknowledges have previously been provided to or created by Contractor and which items are incorporated into this Agreement by reference as though fully set out in this Agreement:

A. City's Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposals, as applicable, including all attachments and all addenda issued prior.to execution of this Agreement.

B. Contractor's response to City's Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposal, as applicable.

C. Uniform General Conditions for City of Amarillo for Construction Contracts or for Public Works Contracts, as applicable (Latest Revision).

D. Supplementary General Conditions, if any. E. All plans and specifications to include all maps, bluep1ints and other drawings

and printed matter. F. All modifications to Contract Documents issued after execution of this

Agreement and accepted by the City and Contractor in writing. G. City's Excluded Parties List. H. Labor Classification and Minimum Wage Scale (Davis-Bacon Wage Rates). L Allrequired Insurance Certificates, Bonds and affidavits. J. Other:

-~------------------------

The Contractor shall commence work within ten (1 0) calendar days after written notice to proceed is received from the City, and complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

In accordance with the award the City agrees to pay the Contractor $ for the performance of the work. Payment will be made as provided in the Contract Documents subject to additions and deductions provided for in said Documents.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have made and executed this Agreement to be effective as of the date of the last of the parties to sign.

ATTEST

Frances Hibbs, City Secretary

CITY OF AMARILLO, TEXAS (City)

By: W. Jarrett Atkinson, City Manager

Date: ----------------~------

(Contractor)

By: __ ~----~~-------------

Printed Name: ------------------

Title:

Date: -------------------------

SUBMITTED FOR.EXECUTION (Initiating Department/Division)

By: __________________________ __

Printed Name: ~-------------------

Title: ----------------------------

Date: ---------------------------

APPROVED FOR EXECUTION (LEGAL DEPARTMENT)

By: ----------------------------

Date: ---------------------------

2 of2

EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE

The undersigned hereby claims an exemption from payment of sales and use taxes under Chapter

20, Title 122A, Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and Rule 3.291, paragraphs (a)(1 ), subsections (b )(3) and

©of Chapter 151 of the Texas Tax Code for the purchase of the tangible personal property described below

or attached or by attached order or invoice, which is made a part hereof, and will be purchased from

This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant to the provision

of Article 20.04, H, of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.

This exemption shall apply only to that material which shall become a permanent part of the City of

Amarillo capital improvement project.

The purchaser will be liable for payment of the limited sales and use tax if the Purchaser uses the

tangible personal property in some other manner or for some other use other than the reasons stated

above, and shall pay the tax based on the price paid for the tangible personal property listed below or

attached.

Description of tangible personal property listed below or attached.

Executed this day the ________ day of __________ _

Description of project for City of Amarillo, Texas.

Name of Business

By _______________________________ ___

Authorized Representative-Signed

Authorized Representative-Typed or Printed

PROJECT JOB#:

CONTRACTOR:

PROJECT DESCRIPTION:

EXPLANATION:

RECOMMENDED:

CITYOFAMARillO FACiliTIES ADMINISTRATION

NEW PRICE REQUEST

Item Description of New Item Unit of Estimated No. Measure Quantity

Unit Estimated Price Total

Amount

Designer: ________________________________________________________________ __

Date

Date

APPROVED:

Contractor: ______________________________________________________________ _

Authorized Representative Signature, Title Date

ACCEPTED:

City of Amarillo: ---------------------------------------------------------Authorized Representative Signature, Title Date

JOB NO.

CONTRACTOR:

CHANGE ORDER NO.

ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION

NET THIS CHANGE ORDER

PREVIOUS CHANGE ORDERS

TOTAL OF CHANGE ORDERS

ORIGINAL CONTRACT TOTAL

REVISED CONTRACT TOTAL

REVISED CONTRACT TIME IN WORKING DAYS- 0

APPROVED:

Contractor

By

City Manager

cc: Departmental Accounting Contractor Project Representative Public Works Project Coord.

CHANGE ORDER CITY OF AMARILLO

FACILITIES ADMINISTRATION

DATE:

DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE

ORIGINAL ESTIMATE

QUAN.

REVISED NET ESTIMATE CHANGE UNIT

QUAN. IN QUAN. MEASURE

RECOMMENDED:

Facilities Manager

UNIT PRICE

$

$

$

$

$

NET CHANGE

IN DOLLARS

0.00

0

0.00

0.00

EQUI D NSATION

The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other services related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee.

Call the Division of Workers' Compensation at 512-804-4345 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage.

NOTICE 8 (REV. 10/05) TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE, DIVISION OF WORKERS' COMPENSATION RULE 110.110

TO THE EMPLOYER/CONTRACTOR:

Pursuant to Workers' Compensation Rule 110.110 (d)(?), a contractor engaged in a building or construction project for a government entity is required to post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered by workers' compensation insurance. The notice required by this does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Act or other Workers' Compensation Rules. This notice must:

(1) be posted in English, Spanish and any other language common to the employer's employee population;

(2) be displayed on each project site; (3) state how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to

provide coverage; ( 4) be printed with a title in at least 30-point bold type and text in at least 19-

point normal type; and (5) contain the exact words as prescribed in Rule 110.110 (d)(?)

The notice on the reverse side meets the above requirements. Failure to post the notice as required by this rule is a violation of the Act and Workers' Compensation Rules. The violator may be subject to administrative penalties. NOTICE 8 {REV. 1 0105) TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE, DIVISION OF WORKERS' COMPENSATION RULE 110.110

TU I E ,

I

La ley requiere que cada persona que trabaja en este Iugar o que proporciona servicios relacionados con este proyecto de construcci6n debe estar cubierta por un seguro de compensaci6n para trabajadores. Esto incluye a personas que proporcionan, transportan, o entregan equipo o materiales, o que proporcionan mano de obra, u otros servicios relacionados con este proyecto, sin importar Ia identidad del empleador o el estado como empleado.

Comuniquese con Ia Division de Compensaci6n para Trabajadores al teh§fono 512-804-4345 para recibir informacion referents a los requerimientos legales de cobertura, para verificar si su empleador ha proporcionado Ia cobertura requerida, o para reportar a un empleador que no proporciona cobertura.

AVISO 8 (REV. 1106) DEPARTAMENTO DE SEGUROS DE TEXAS. DIVISI6N DE COMPENSACi6N PARA TRABAJADORES REGLAMENTO 110.110

Al EMPLEADOR I CONTRATISTA: Segun el Reglamento de Compensaci6n para Trabajadores 110.110 (d)(7), requiere que un contratista que esta involucrado en el proyecto de construcci6n de un edificio de entidad gubernamental muestre este aviso en cada Iugar donde se lleva a cabo el proyecto para asi informar a todas las personas que proporcionan servicios en el proyecto que se les debe proporcionar un seguro de compensaci6n para trabajadores. El aviso presentado aqui no satisface otros avisos de requerimientos impuestos por Ia Ley de Compensaci6n para Trabajadores de Texas u otros Reglamentos de Compensaci6n para Trabajadores. Este aviso debe:

(1) ser mostrado en ingles, espanol y cualquier otro idioma comun para Ia poblaci6n de los trabajadores del empleador;

(2) ser mostrado en cada area de trabajo en el proyecto; (3) explicar como una persona puede verificar Ia cobertura actual del empleador

y como reportar si el empleador no ofrece cobertura; (4) ser impreso con un titulo en por lo menos tamano 30, con letra negrita de

punto, y el texto en por lo menos tamano 19 en punto tipo normal; y (5) contener las palabras exactas como se ha senalado en el Reglamento

11 0.11 0 ( d)(7). El aviso que se muestra al reverso de esta pagina cumple con los requisites senalados arriba. El negarse a mostrar o proporcionar esta informacion, a como es requerido por el reglamento es una violaci6n a Ia Ley y Reglamentos de Compensaci6n para TrabajadorE3s. El infractor puede estar sujeto a penalidades administrativas. AVISO 8 {REV. 1106} DEPARTAMENTO DE SEGUROS DE TEXAS. DIVISION DE COMPENSACION PARA TRABAJADORES REGLAMENTO 110.110

NO AWARD TO DEBARRED OR SUSPENDED VENDOR'S ASSURANCE Revised 7/25/2014

NOTE: The City will not award a contract to:

Any contracting entity or any principals of contracting entities that are presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal, State or Local Government entity may be considered ineligible to be awarded a contract by the City of Amarillo.

Any contracting entity or any principals of contracting entities that are within a three-year period preceding any bid or proposal convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State or Local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property; may be considered ineligible to be awarded a contract by the City.

Any contracting entity or any principals of contracting entities that are presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal, State or Local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph two may be considered ineligible to be awarded a contract by the City.

Any contracting entity or any principals of contracting entities that within a five year period preceding the application of proposal being evaluated had any public transactions, or contracts (Federal, State, or Local) terminated for cause or default, may be considered ineligible to be awarded a contract by the City.

Any contracting entity or any principals of contracting entities that are within a five year period preceding the application or proposal being evaluated had in the course of any public transactions (Federal, State, or Local) forfeited, payment or a performance bond on any contracted job, may be considered ineligible to be awarded a contract by the City.

Any contracting entity or any principals of contracting entities that involve the City in any kind of litigation without the express written permission of the City may be considered ineligible to be awarded a contract by the City.

Any contracting entity that fails to comply with City Policies and Procedures by starting any work without proper authmization from the Purchasing Department in writing and in hand prior to the commencement of the job or project may be disqualified or suspended for failure to comply with City Policies and Procedures. Any entity that knowingly or unknowingly assists or facilitates any employee of the City in avoiding or circumventing any City Purchasing Policy or Procedure may be subject to debarment or suspension for failure to comply with City Purchasing Policies and Procedures.

If in the course of any job or contract, any of the above items occur and the contractor may become, ineligible for public transactions with any Federal, State or Local agency, the City may have the right to take any steps it considers necessary to insure the timely and successful completion of the pending contract. This may include anything from additional monitoring and reporting requirements up to suspension and removal of a contractor or subcontractor from a jobsite.

The System for Award Management and the City's Excluded Parties List must be verified by the Purchasing Department and the recommended vendor must be declared eligible for award in writing, prior to any award.

By signing this form the bidder acknowledges that they have read this entire document and certifies by their signature that none of the above exclusions apply to their company or business entity. Failure to return this executed document with submitted bid documents may cause the bid to be deemed as umesponsive.

Signed _____________________ Title ________________ _

Company _______________________ Date _________________ ___

This document must be signed by a person authorized to bind the company in a contract.

Form of Proposal

CITY OF AMARILLO PURCHASING DEPARTMENT 509 SE 7TH AVE. (791 01) P.O. BOX 1971

SIMMS MUNICPAL BUILDING RENOVATIONS

AMARILLO, TEXAS 79105

To Whom It May Concern:

808 S BUCHANAN AMARILLO, TEXAS 79101

Having carefully examined the Specifications and Drawings for the Simms Municipal Building Renovations as well as the premises and condition affecting the work, I propose to furnish all necessary Superintendence, Labor, Materials, Tools, Equipment, Machinery, Apparatus, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all work covered by this proposal within the time stated, in strict accordance with the Specifications and requirements pertaining thereto for the following sum:

Bid No. 5040 Simms Municipal Building Renovations according to the designs and specifications provided.

To be awarded as total bid with accepted alternates.

TOTAL BID: ___________________ Dollars

$( _________ -&.

ALTERNATE N0.1: LED Downlight/Suspended Cylinder Fixtures

Alternate No. 1: ___________________ Dollars

$( _________ _...

ALTERNATE NO.2: Refinished Existing Cabinets in Room 271 in lieu of New Cabinets

Alternate No. 2: ___________________ Dollars

$( _________ -J..

ALTERNATE NO.3: Glazing Film to Interior Storefront Glass

Alternate No. 3: Dollars --------------------------------------$( _________ -J..

SUBSECTION 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSAL CITY OF AMARILLO, TEXAS

The undersigned hereby declares that he has visited each site and has carefully examined the Contract Documents relating to the work covered by the bid.

Work order proposal form(s) is/are made up of individual items of materials supplied or services performed for a completed project(s). A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for such items. The summation of total amount bid for each item is the total cost of the project and the contract amount per project combination instructions. The City will check bid extensions and summation. Mathematical errors will be corrected by the City.

A summation proposal which may consist of more than one proposal is not made up of individual items but will consist of one all inclusive item as a lump sum for the completed project. The summation item and the project total will be the same.

Upon notice of the acceptance of this bid, the undersigned will execute the formal contract and will deliver the Performance Bond and Payment Bond, and Certificate of Insurance within ten (1 0) calendar days. The bid security attached, without endorsement, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the total bid is to be forfeited to the City of Amarillo, Texas in the event the contract and Bonds and Certification of Insurance are not executed within the time above set forth.

The undersigned agrees to begin work within ten (1 0) calendar days of receipt of a notice to proceed with a crew comparable to the size of the project(s) and will proceed continuously until the final completion of the project(s).

Job #41 0807.17 400.1 040 Simms Municipal Building Renovations

The undersigned hereby acknowledges the receipt of the following addenda.

Addenda #1 Issued ____ (Date) Addenda #2 Issued (Date) Addenda #3 Issued (Date) Addenda #4 Issued (Date) Addenda #5 Issued (Date)

Substantial Completion Date: December 15, 2015

Respectfully submitted,

Name of Business

By __________ ~-~~---Authorized Representative-Signed Date

Authorized Representative-Typed or printed

Business Address-complete

Telephone

Fax

Email

JOB NO. 2013-23

PROJECT MANUAL

Renovations to Simms Municipal Building

City of Amarillo

808 S. Buchanan Street Amarillo, Texas

2015

2810 DUNIVEN CIRCLE, SUITE 100 AMARILLO, TEXAS (806) 358-7069

LAVIN ASSOCIATES, INC.- ARCHITECTURE

Simms Municipal Building Project 2013-23

PROJECT MANUAL

Renovations to

Simms Municipal Building 808 S. Buchanan

Amarillo, Texas 79101

For the City of Amarillo

LAVIN ASSOCIATES, INC.- ARCHITECTURE

2810 DUNIVEN CIRCLE, SUITE 100

AMARILLO, TEXAS

(806) 358-7069

February 6, 2015

2/2015


Simms Municipal Building Renovations -City of Amarillo

TABLE OF CONTENTS -February 6, 2015

(Revised 4-7-2015)

DNISION 0- BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

Asbestos Note Intetior Color Selections

DNISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 0 1100 Section 01230 Section 01250 Section 0131 0 Section 01320 Section 01330 Section 0 1400 Section 01420 Section 0 1500 Section 01600 Section 0 1700 Section 01770 Section 0 1 781 Section 0 1820

Summary Alternates Contract Modifications Project Management Construction Progress Documentation Submittal Procedures Quality Requirements References Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Execution Requirements Closeout Procedures Project Record Documents Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 2- SITE CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Refer to Structural Drawings

DNISION 4- MASONRY

Section 04400 Section 04800

Exterior Stone Masomy Assemblies

DIVISION 5- METALS

Section 05120 Section 05400 Section 05500 Section 05510 Section 05720

Structural Steel Cold Formed Metal Framing Metal Fabrications Metal Stairs Ornamental Handrails and Railings

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

2/2015

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-i (R)


Section 06100 Section 06400

Miscellaneous Carpentry Architectural Woodwork

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07131 Section 07210 Section 07620 Section 07900

Self Adhering Sheet Waterproofing Building Insulation Flashing and Sheet Metal Joint Sealers

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section 08210 Section 08334 Section 08411 Section 08620 Section 08710 Section 08800

Flush Wood Doors Overhead Coiling Gtilles Aluminum Entrance and Storefront Unit Skylights Door Hardware Glazing

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

Section 09111 Section 09250 Section 09310 Section 09402 Section 09512 Section 09650 Section 09651 Section 09681 Section 09912

Non-Load Beating Steel Framing Gypsum Board Assemblies Tile Resinous Mattix Tenazzo Acoustical Panel Ceilings Resilient Flooring Resilient Base and Accessories Carpet Tile Painting

DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES

Section 10211 Section 10522 Section 10523 Section 10530 Section 10801

Toilet Compartments Fire Extinguishers Fire Extinguishers Cabinets Protective Covers Toilet Accessories

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

Section 12366 Section 12484 Section 12494

Solid Surface Countertops Entrance Mats Roller Shades

DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2/2015

NOT APPLICABLE

NOT APPLICABLE

TOC-ii (R)

Simms Municipal Building Project 2013-23 2/2015

DIVISION 14- CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL

Section 15000 Section 15060 Section 1507 5 Section 15080 Section 15310 Section 15325 Section 1541 0 Section 15430 Section 15440 Section 15450 Section 15535 Section 15570 Section 15670 Section 15760 Section 15775 Section 15781 Section 15810 Section 15820 Section 15830 Section 15850 Section 15950

General Provisions for Mechanical Hangers and Supports Mechanical Identification Mechanical Insulation Fire Protection Piping Sprinkler Systems Plumbing Piping Plumbing Specialties Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Equipment Refrigerant Piping and Specialties Furnaces Refrigerant Condensing Units Terminal Heat Heating and Cooling Units Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Ducts Duct Accessories Fans Air Outlets and Inlets Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

Section 160 10 Section 16015 Section 16020 Section 16021 Section 16025 Section 16030 Section 16031 Section 16040 Section 16101 Section 16110 Section 16111 Section 16120 Section 16121 Section 16125 Section 16130 Section 16131 Section 16140 Section 16150 Section 16160 Section 16165 Section 16170 Section 16181

General Provisions Electrical Drawings and Reference Symbols Work Included Work Not Included Codes and Fees Tests Demonstration and Guarantee of Complete Electrical System Identification Basic Materials and Methods - General Conduits - General Conduits (Products) Wires and Cables Wire Connections and Devices Pulling Cables Outlet Boxes Pull and Junction Boxes Switches and Receptacles (Wiring Devices) Motors Circuit Breaker Panelboards Contactors Disconnects Fuses

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-iii (R)

Simms Municipal Building

Section 16190 Section 16500 Section 1651 0 Section 16950

Supporting Devices Lighting - General Lighting- Controls I-IV AC Controls

Project 2013-23

END OFT ABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2/2015

TOC-iv (R)


**************

OF SPECIAL NOTE

**********

ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS ARE PROHIBITED

NOTHING STATED OR IMPLIED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS IS TO BE

INTERPRETED AS REQUIRING OR PERMITTING THE USE OF ANY

ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL OF ANY KIND.

212015

Room

Windows Throughout Building

1001 Stair

1002 Existing Stair

1003 Existing Stair

1004 Existing Stair

1005 Atrium

2013-23 Simms Municipal Building Room Finish Schedule

Surface Finish

Window Stools Solid Surface Formica Designer Series

Floor Terrazzo See I-FP01/1-FP02 For Pattern

Stair Landing Terrazzo See I-FP01/1-FP02 For Pattern

Painted Stringer And Painted Steel Sherwin Williams Handrail Supports

All Walls Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore

Exposed Beams Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore

Floor Existing To Remain

Base Existing To Remain

East Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore

Other Walls Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore

Handrail Painted Steel Benjamin Moore

Doors & Frames Painted Hollow Metal Benjamin Moore



East Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams

Other Walls Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams

Handrail Painted Steel Benjamin Moore

2nd Floor Doors & Painted Hollow Metal Benjamin Moore Frames



South Wall Adj To Elev Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams


Floor Terrazzo See I-FP01/I-FP02 For Pattern

- 1 -February 4th, 2015

Bianco Mineral 758

Colors As Approved

Colors As Approved

Iron Ore SW7069

Horizon OC-53

Chili Pepper 2004-20


Horizon OC-53

Adagio 1593

Adagio 1593

Dignity Blue SW6804

Dignity Blue SW6804

Adagio 1593

Adagio 1593

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved

Room

101 Vestibule

102 Foyer

103 Toilet

104 Men


Surface Finish

Base 4" Rubber Armstrong

West Wall Adjacent To Painted Gyp. Bd. Behind Sherwin Williams Elevator Wood Paneling


Exposed Beams Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore

Cabinet Solid Surface/Plastic LG Hi-Macs/Formica-see Laminate Int. Elevations

Countertop Solid Surface LG Hi-Macs

Floor Entrance Flooring American Floor Mats



Ceiling Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore



Wainscot Behind DF 7' Tall Porcelain Tile Crossville Buenos Aires Mood See A6.1 For Tile Pattern



Floor Terrazzo See 1-FP01/I-FP02 For Pattern

Wainscot 7' Tall Porcelain Tile Crossville Buenos Aires Mood See A6.1 For Tile Pattern


Other Walls Painted Gyp. Bd. Bamjamin Moore



-2-February 4th, 2015

15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53


Fiery Red S025/949-SP White Sculpted Finish Running Vertically

Me rea VL22

Recycled Rubber Module Tile

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved

15 Zinc

Polo VS150 Unpolished W/Ardex Antique Ivory 04 Grout

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved


Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved

Room Surface

Wainscot

East Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

105 Women Floor

Wainscot

West Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

106 Corridor Floor

Base

All Walls

107 9-1-1 Entry Floor

Base

North Wall

West Wall

Other Walls

108 Custodian Floor

Base

Wainscot

All Walls

109 Corridor Floor


Finish

7' Tall Porcelain Tile Crossville Buenos Aires Mood See A6.1 For Tile Pattern

Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams

Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore


Terrazzo See I-FP01/I-FP02 For Pattern





Modular Carpet Interface 25cm X 1m Planks

4" Rubber Armstrong

Painted Gyp. Bd. Match Existing

Modular Carpet Interface 25cm X 1 rn Planks

4" Rubber Armstrong




Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong

8' Tall FRP Panels To Be Selected





Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved


Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Duo Stone 103872 In Ashlar Pattern

15 Zinc


15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53


Room Surface

Base

West Wall

Other Walls

110 Mechanical Floor

Base

All Walls

111 Elevator Lobby Floor

Base

Walls Adjacent To Elevator

Other Walls

Ceiling

112 Elec. Floor

Base

All Walls

113 Plan Exam Floor

Base

East Wall

Other Walls

114 Bldg Safety! Office Floor

Base

West Wall

All Walls

115 Bldg Safety! Office Floor


Finish

4" Rubber Armstrong



Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong


Terrazzo See I-FP01/1-FP02 For Pattern

4" Rubber Armstrong




Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong


Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP01 For Pattern Location Planks

4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong





15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved

15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Duo Stone 103872 W/ On Line Accents

15 Zinc


Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


Room

116 Bldg Safety

117 Plan Exam

1'18 Plan Exam

119 Bldg Safety Office

Surface

Base

West Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Base

East Wall

Other Walls

Cabinet

Countertop

Floor

Base

All Walls

Cabinet

Countertop

Floor

Base

West Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Base

West Wall


Finish

4" Rubber

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Armstrong

Benjamin Moore

Benjamin Moore


4" Rubber Armstrong

Benjamin Moore

Benjamin Moore

15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Duo Stone 103872 WI On Line Accents

15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Solid Surface/Plastic Laminate

LG Hi-Macs/Formica-see Fiery Red S025/949-SP White Sculpted Finish Int. Elevations Running Vertically

Solid Surface LG Hi-Macs Merea VL22


4" Rubber Armstrong

Benjamin Moore


15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53 Painted Gyp. Bd.

Solid Surface/Plastic Laminate

LG Hi-Macs/Formica-see Fiery Red S025/949-SP White Sculpted Finish Int. Elevations Running Vertically

Solid Surface LG Hi-Macs Merea VL22


4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Room Surface

Other Walls

120 Bldg Safety Office Floor

Base

West Wall

Other Walls

121 Bldg Safety Office Floor

Base

West Wall

Other Walls

122 Storage Floor

Base

All Walls

123 Open Office Floor

Base

Northwest Wall

Other Walls

124 Bldg. Inspector Floor

Base

East Wall

Other Walls

125 Open Office Floor

Base


Finish



4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong



Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong



4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong


Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Room

126 North Hall

127 Conference

128 Corridor

129 Com Dev Office

130 Elec.


Surface Finish

South Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams


Floor Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP01 For Pattern Location Planks


East Wall Adj To Coni. Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore 127


N Wall Adj To Foyer 155 Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore


Floor Modular Carpet Interface 25crn X 1m Planks




Floor Modular Carpet Interface 25cm X 1m Planks


North Wall Adj To Coni Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore 127




South Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore


Floor Sealed Concrete


- 7-February 4th, 2015

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc


Dignity Blue SW6804

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc


Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Room Surface

All Walls

131 Com Dev Office Floor

Base

South Wall

All Walls

132 Waiting Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

133 Reception Floor

Base

North Wall

East Wall

Other Walls

Cabinet

Countertop

134 Corridor Floor

Base

South Wall

Other Walls

135 Storage Floor

Base

All Walls


Finish



4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




Solid Surface/Plastic LG Hi-Macs/Formica-see Laminate Int. Elevations

Solid Surface LG Hi-Macs


4" Rubber Armstrong


Painted Gyp. Bd Benjamin Moore

Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong



Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


Merea VL22


15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Room

136 Com Dev Director

137 Corridor

138 Office

140 Office

142 Office


Surface Finish



West Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore


Floor Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP01 For Pattern Location Planks


North Wall Adj To Men Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore 149


West Wall Adj To Recept Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams 133




North Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore












15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Dignity Blue SW6804

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Room Surface

144 Com Dev Admin Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

146 Com Dev Assist Dir Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

148 Office Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

149 Men Floor

Wainscot

South Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

150 Women Floor

Wainscot

North Wall

Other Walls


Finish


4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong








Terrazzo See 1-FP01/1-FP02 For Pattern






15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved



Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved



Horizon OC-53

Room

151 Exist Break Room

152 Open File Area

153 Open Office

154 Equip

155 Exist Foyer

Surface

Ceiling

Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

Cabinet

Countertop

Floor

Base

West Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Base

Wainscot At D.F.

East Wall


Finish

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Premium Vinyl Wood Plank

4" Rubber

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Plastic Laminate

Solid Surface

Modular Carpet

4" Rubber

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Benjamin Moore

Artistek Forestwood

Armstrong

Sherwin Williams

Benjamin Moore

Wilsonart

LG Hi-Macs

Interface 25cm X 1m Planks

Armstrong

Benjamin Moore

Benjamin Moore


Horizon OC-53

51139 Regal Cherry

15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Castle Oak 7928-38

Merea VL22


15 Zinc


Horizon OC-53


4" Rubber Armstrong 15 Zinc

7' Tall Porcelain Tile Crossville Buenos Aires Polo VS150 Unpolished W/Ardex Antique Ivory 04 Mood See A6.1 For Tile Grout Pattern

Painted Gyp. Bd. Lion Heart 306

South Wall Adj To Coni Painted Gyp. Bd.

Benjamin Moore

Benjamin Moore Chili Pepper 2004-20 127

Other Walls

Floor

Base

All Walls

Floor

Base


Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain


Horizon OC-53

Room

156 Exist Vestibule

157 Mechanical

158 Existing

201 Second Floor Lobby


Surface

East Wall Adj To Elev. 2002

Other Walls

Ceiling

Floor

Base

All Walls

Ceiling

Floor

Base

All Walls

Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Floor

Base

North Wall Adj To Elevator

Column Furring Between 201 & 268

Other Walls

Ceiling

Ceiling

Finish

Painted Gyp. Bd Sherwin Williams



Entrance Flooring American Floor Mats

Existing To Remain



Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong


V.C. Tile Match Existing

Match Existing


Painted Gyp. Bd. Match Existing


Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP01/1-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location

4" Rubber Armstrong





Painted Exposed Benjamin Moore Structure

- 12 -February 4th, 2015

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Recycled Rubber Module Tile

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Dignity Blue SW6804

Colors As Approved


15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Room Surface

Furrdown

202 Reception Floor

Base

All Walls

Cabinet

Countertop

Ceiling

203 Conference Floor

Base

All Walls

204 Waiting Floor

Base

All Walls

Ceiling

205 East Hall Floor

Base

East Wall

Other Walls

Doors & Frames

Ceiling


Finish

Painted Gyp. Bd. SheJWin Williams

Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP01/I-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location

4" Rubber Armstrong


Solid Surface/Plastic LG Hi-Macs/Formica-see Laminate Int. Elevations




4" Rubber Armstrong



4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong



Painted Hollow Metal Benjamin Moore



Dignity Blue SW 6804


15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53


Me rea VL22

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Room Surface

206 Electrical Floor

Base

All Walls

Doors & Frames

207 Mechanical Floor

Base

All Walls

Doors & Frames


Base

North Wall

Other Walls

209 Utility Director Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

210 Utility Assistant Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

211 Utility Assistant Floor

Base

South Wall

Other Walls


Finish

Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain



Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




Horizon OC-53

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Adagio 1593


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Room Surface

212 Senior Proj Coord Floor

Base

South Wall

Other Walls

213 Utility Customer Service Floor

Base

North Walt

East Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

214 Storage Floor

Base

All Walls

215 Admin Assist Floor

Base

East Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

216A Open Office Area Floor

Base

East Wall


Finish


4" Rubber Armstrong



Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP0111-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location

4" Rubber Armstrong





Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong



4" Rubber Armstrong





4" Rubber Armstrong




15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Room

216B Project Reps

216C Open Office Area

217 Senior Design

218 Chief Design


Surface Finish

SW & SE Walls Adj To 6 Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore Offices



Ceiling Painted Exposed Benjamin Moore Structure

Floor Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25crn X 1m FP0111-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location


NW Wall Adj To 6 Offices Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore



Door& Frame Painted Hollow Metal Benjamin Moore

Floor Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP0111-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location


NW & NEWall Adj To 6 Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore Offices





Northwest Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore





Lion Heart 306

Chili Pepper 2004--20

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Adagio 1593


15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Room Surface

Southeast Wall

Other Walls

219 C. E. Office Floor

Base

Northwest Wall

Other Walls


Base

Southeast Wall

Other Walls


Base

Northwest Wall

Other Walls


Base

Southeast Wall

Other Walls


Base

South Wall

Other Walls


Finish




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Room

226 Traffic

227 Assist. Traffic Dir.

228A Open Office Area

228B Open Office Area


Surface Finish



West Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams










South Wall Adj. To 231 Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams




Floor Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP01/I-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location



South Wall Adj. To 231 Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams




15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc


Dignity Blue SW6804

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc


Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Room Surface

Ceiling

Cabinet

Countertop

230 Traffic Operations Tech Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

231 Storage Floor

Base

All Walls

232 Traffic Director Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

233 Men Floor

Wainscot

South Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

234 Women Floor

Wainscot

North Wall


Finish


White Oak Stained & Varnished



4" Rubber Armstrong



Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong

Painted Gyp Bd. Benjamin Moore


4" Rubber Armstrong





Painted Gyp. Bd. She!Win Williams



Terrazzo See I-FP0111-FP02 For Pattern


Painted Gyp. Bd. She!Win Williams


Horizon OC-53

Match WilsonArt Castle Oak 7928-38

Merea VL22


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved


Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved


Dignity Blue SW6804

Room Surface

Other Walls

Ceiling

235 M.P.O. Floor

Base

East Wall

Other Walls

236 Corridor Floor

Base

East Wall

West Wall

Ceiling

237 M.P.O. Floor

Base

East Wall

Other Walls

238 Assistant City Engineer Floor

Base

South Wall

Other Walls

239 Plotter Floor

Base

West Wall


Finish

Painted Gyp. Bel. Benjamin Moore



4" Rubber Armstrong



Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP01/1-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location

4" Rubber Armstrong

Painted Gyp. Bd. Behind Benjamin Moore Wood Paneling




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong



Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc


Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc


Room

240 G.IS. Tech

241A Open Office Area

241B Open Office Area

241C Open Office Area


Surface Finish









N Wall Adj. To Planner Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore 245



Floor Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25crn X 1m FP0111-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location


South Wall Adj To Assist Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore City Eng 238





South Wall Adj To Assist Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore City Eng 238

-21 -February 4th, 2015

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc


Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc


Room

241D Open Office Area

242 Office

243 Corridor

244 Corridor

Surface

West Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

Floor

Base

West Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

Floor

Base

West Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Base

North Wall

East Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

Floor

Base


Finish





4" Rubber Armstrong





4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong


Painted Gyp. Bel. Benjamin Moore




4" Rubber Armstrong

N Wall Adj To 250 & 251 Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams


Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Room

245 Planner

246 C.E. Office

247 Planner

248 C.E. Office

249 Planner

Surface


Finish

South Wall Adj To Planner Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore 249

Other Walls Painted Gyp. Bd Benjamin Moore













Other Watts Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore



South Watt Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore





Other Watts Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore

.. 23-February 4th, 2015

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Room Finish Schedule

Room Surface Finish

250 City Engineer Floor Modular Carpet Interface 25cm X 1m Duo Stone 103872 In Ashlar Pattern Planks

Base 4" Rubber Armstrong 15 Zinc

North Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore Adagio 1593

Other Walls Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore Horizon OC-53

251 Senior Planner Floor Modular Carpet Interface 25cm X 1m Duo Stone 103872 In Ashlar Pattern Planks


South Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore Adagio 1593


252 Planning Director Floor Modular Carpet Interface 25cm X 1 m Duo Stone 103872 In Ashlar Pattern Planks


North Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore Adagio 1593


253 Corridor Floor Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m Duo Stone 103872 WI On Line Accents FP01/1-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location


East Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams Dignity Blue SW6804


Ceiling Painted Exposed Benjamin Moore Horizon OC-53 Structure

254 P. Works Director Floor Modular Carpet Interface 25cm X 1m Duo Stone 103872 In Ashlar Pattern Planks


South Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore Adagio 1593


255 Work Room Floor Premium Vinyl Wood Artistek Forestwood 51139 Regal Cherry Plank


Room Surface

Base

All Walls

Cabinet

Countertop

256 Admin Assist Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

257 Waiting Floor

Base

South Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

258 Assist. Public Works Floor

Base

Northeast Wall

All Walls

259 Corridor Floor

Base

Northwest Wall


Finish

4" Rubber Armstrong


Plastic Laminate Wilson art


Modular Carpet See 1- Interface 25cm X 1m FP01 II-FP02 For Pattern Planks Location

4" Rubber Armstrong





4" Rubber Armstrong





4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong



15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Castle Oak 7928-38

Merea VL22


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Room Surface

Other Walls

Ceiling

260 Assist. City Manager Floor

Base

Northeast Wall

Other Walls


Base

East Wall

Other Walls

262 Collaboration Floor

Base

North Wall

Northwest Wall

Southwest Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

263 Custodian Floor

Base

Wainscot

All Walls

264 Women Floor


Finish




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong






Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong

8' Tall FRP Panels To Be Selected




Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc



Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Colors As Approved

Room

265 Men

266 Equipment

267A Ramp

267B Computer Room

268 North Hall

Surface

Wainscot

North Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

Floor

Wainscot

South Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Base

All Walls

Floor

Base

All Walls

Floor

Base

All Walls

Floor

Base


Finish

7' Tall Porcelain Tile

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Terrazzo

7' Tall Porcelain Tile

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain

Match Existing

Match Existing

Painted Gyp. Bd.

Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain

Existing To Remain

Modular Carpet See 1-FP01/1-FP02 For Pattern Location

4" Rubber

Crossville Buenos Aires Polo VS150 Unpolished W/Ardex Antique Ivory 04 Mood See A6.1 For Tile Grout Pattern

Benjamin Moore Chili Pepper 2004-20

Benjamin Moore Horizon OC-53


See I-FP01/1-FP02 For Colors As Approved Pattern

Crossville Buenos Aires Polo VS150 Unpolished W/Ardex Antique Ivory 04 Mood See A6.1 For Tile Grout Pattern

Benjamin Moore Chili Pepper 2004-20


Match Existing Computer Room

Interface 25cm X 1m Planks

Armstrong


15 Zinc

East Wall Adj To Training Painted Gyp. Bd. 275

Benjamin Moore Lion Heart 306

West Recessed Wall@ Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore Door 244



Room

269 Storage

270 Corridor

271 Food Prep

272 Break Room

Surface

South Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

Floor

Base

All Walls

Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Base


Finish

Painted Gyp. Bd. Furring Sherwin Williams Between 201 & 268



Sealed Concrete

4" Rubber Armstrong



4" Rubber Armstrong



Premium Vinyl Wood Artistek Forestwood Plank

4" Rubber Armstrong

East Wing Walls Adj To Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore Break 272


Cabinet Plastic Laminate Wilsonart

Countertop Solid Surface LG Hi-Macs


Floor Premium Vinyl Wood Artistek Forestwood Plank



West Wall Painted Gyp. Bd. Behind Benjamin Moore Wood Paneling



Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Duo Stone ·1 03872 In Ashlar Pattern

15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53

51139 Regal Cherry

15 Zinc


Horizon OC-53

Castle Oak 7928-38

Merea VL22

Horizon OC-53

51139 Regal Cherry

15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306


Horizon OC-53

Room

273 Env. Health

274 File Room

275 Training Room

276 Office

277 Corridor

Surface

Floor

Base


Finish


4" Rubber Armstrong

North Wall Adj To File 274 Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore




Floor Premium Vinyl Wood Artistek Forestwood Plank



Cabinet Plastic Laminate Wilsonart

Countertop Solid Surface Formica Signatures





Furrdown Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore








15 Zinc


Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

51139 Regal Cherry

15 Zinc

Horizon OC-53

Castle Oak 7928-38

Smoke Ice 809


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Hor'1zon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


Room

278 Dept. Head Office

280 Division Director

281 Env. Health Reception

282 Foyer

Surface

Base

South Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Base

North Wall

Other Walls

Floor

Base

South Wall Adj To Training 275

2013a23 Simms Municipal Building Room Finish Schedule

Finish

4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong




4" Rubber Armstrong


East Wall Adj. To Training Painted Gyp. Bd. Benjamin Moore 275

North Wall

Other Walls

Ceiling

Cabinet

Countertop

Floor

Base




White Oak Stained And Varnished



4" Rubber Armstrong


15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Lion Heart 306

Lion Heart 306

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53

Horizon OC-53

Match Wilsonart Castle Oak 7928-38

Merea VL22


15 Zinc

Room

283 Quiet Room


Surface

South Wall Adj To Elev 2002

East Wall Adj To Elev 2002

Other Walls

Floor

Base

Southwest Wall

Other Walls

Finish





4" Rubber Armstrong




Dignity Blue SW6804

Dignity Blue SW6804

Horizon OC-53


15 Zinc

Adagio 1593

Horizon OC-53


SECTION 01100- SUMMARY

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A Section Includes:

1. Project infonnation. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased constmction. 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with Occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporaty use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A Project Identification: Simms Municipal Building Renovations for City of Amarillo, 808 S. Buchanan, Amarillo, Texas.

A Owner: The City of Amarillo, P.O. Box 1971, 509 S.E. 7111 Avenue Amarillo TX 79109.

1. Owner's Representative: Jeny Danforth - Facilities Administration Manager, 509 S.E. i" Avenue, 806 378-9386, [email protected]

B. Architect: The Contract Documents, dated Febmaty 6, 2015 were prepared by Lavin Associates, Inc., 2810 Duniven Circle, Suite 100, Amarillo, Texas 79109, Voice: (806) 358-7069, Fax: (806) 358-8242.

1. Project Manager: Mike Boyett, Architect- l1lQQy(jt@@yin_at}:hitect~~.£9ID

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A Summary: A renovation of the existing building to house Developmental Services of the City. The area included in the work includes approximately 16,000 square feet on the first floor, 28.200 square feet on the second floor. .

1. The existing building consists of steel beam and bar joist framing with load bearing exterior masonry walls. Renovation work will include, flooring, lighting, paint, dtywall

SUMMARY 01100- 1


partltwns on metal studs, structural modifications for a new entry and atrium area, plumbing, electrical, HV AC, and fire sprinkler modifications.

B. Type of Contract.

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract with a Guaranteed Maximum Price as the basis of payment.

1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION

A. The Work shall be conducted in a single phase under a single Lump Sum Contract.

1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work perfonned under separate contracts including demolition work provided by the Owner's own forces that may not be complete prior to award of the Contract.

B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas as agreed with Owner's Representative. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances

serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises dming entire construction petiod, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Existing site conditions and restlictions: The existing building contains the City Office of Emergency Management, Amarillo Emergency Communications Center (911) and the City Care Clinic which will remain occupied dming construction. There are existing utilities, parking, drives, entrances, mechanical & electlical systems, and other facilities that must remain operational. Any disruption of service or building access must be scheduled with the owner.

SUMMARY 01100-2


B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the W ark, prior to Substantial Completion of the W ark, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless pennitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not pennitted.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of ce1iain tenns, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon(:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be perfonned by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Tenninology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic tenns used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as pari of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

SUMMARY 01100-3


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01100

SUMMARY 01100- 4


SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted fi·om the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described m this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessmy to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessoty objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted altemates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

ALTERNATES 01230- 1



PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES:

A. Alternate No. One: Should the Owner accept, provide a lump sum price in addition to the Base Bid to provide LED downlight/suspended cylinder fixtures in lieu of compact fluorescent downlight/suspended cylinder fixtures as scheduled in the base bid.

B. Alternate No. Two: Should the Owner accept, provide a lump sum price in addition to the Base Bid or subtracted from the base bid to provide refinished existing cabinets in room 271 in lieu of new cabinets shown on millwork drawings in the base bid.

C. Alternate No. Three: Should the Owner accept, provide a lump sum price in addition to the base bid to provide Glazing Film to interior storefront glass as scheduled.


ALTERNATES 01230-2


SECTION 01250- CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processmg Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

1.3

A.

A.

Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AlA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

PROPOSAL REQUESTS

Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 14 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs oflabor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Fonn: Use fonns acceptable to Architect.

B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250- 1


1.4

A.

1.5

A.

1.6

A.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, fumish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

Allowance Adjustment: See Division 1 Section "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Arc hi teet will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AlA Document G701 or similar document selected by the Architect.

CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AlA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to detennine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

1.7 OVERHEAD AND PROFIT

A. Allowance for combined overhead and profit included in total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule:

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-2


1. For the General Contractor (aka Construction Manger), for work performed by the contractors own forces to be per the fee percentage in the Owner/Contractor contract but not to exceed a 10% markup.

2. For the Contractor, for work perfonned by the contractor's subcontractor, the same as #1 above of the amount due the subcontractor.

3. For each subcontractor or sub-subcontractor involved, for the work perfonned by that subcontractor's or sub-subcontractor's own forces, a mutually-acceptable fixed fee or a percentage of cost not to exceed a maximum of 10% of the cost.

4. For each subcontractor, for work performed by the subcontractor's sub-subcontractors, a mutually acceptable fixed fee or percentage of cost, maximum of 10% of the amount due the sub-subcontractor.

PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-3


SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices.

3. Division 1 Section "Constmction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of Contractor's constmction schedule.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's constmction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's constmction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than three days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. ArcHitect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 1


2. ArTange the Schedule of Values in tabular fonn with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 1 00 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.



B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AlA Document G702 and AlA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on fmm. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full wmvers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit wmvers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers oflien on forms acceptable to Owner.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminaty if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building pennits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

perfonnance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconsttuction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.



H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and suppmiing documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AlA Document 0706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AlA Document 0706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AlA Document 0707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for conesponding elements of the W ark.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4

Simms Municipal Building Project 20 13-23 2/2015

SECTION 01310- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination drawings. 2. Requests for Infonnation (RFis). 3. Project meetings.


1. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a wtitten summary identifying individuals or finns proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabticated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular fonn:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section( s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 1


2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alann, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2


2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, beating plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility.

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFis)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFis submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFis in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. RFI Forms: AlA Document G716.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, detennine action required, and respond. Allow ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFis received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.



1. The following RFis will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFis or inaccurately prepared RFis.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFis that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFis organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly [Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFis that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as approptiate.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Infonn participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.



3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concemed parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFis. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 1. Distribution of the Contract Documents. J. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of record documents. 1. Use of the premises. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for moisture and mold control. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Construction waste management and recycling. t. Parking availability. u. Office, work, and storage areas. v. Equipment deliveries and priorities. w. First aid. x. Security. y. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect] of scheduled meeting dates.



2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFis. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. 1. Possible conflicts. J. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. 1. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required perfonnance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring infonnation.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to perfonnance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with cunent progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction



behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that cunent and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 1 0) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of conection of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status ofRFis. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring infm1nation.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concunently with the report of each meeting.






SECTION 01320- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes adminish·ative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during perfonnance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction repmis. 4. Site condition reports.


1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for prepanng a combined Contractor's construction schedule.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations detennine when activities can be perfonned and the critical path of Project.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Float: The measure ofleeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following fonnat: 1. Three paper copies.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 1


1.4

B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

C. Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or infonnational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

D. CPM Reporis: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Fonnat for each activity in reporis shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

E.

F.

G.

A.

B.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Repmi: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Repmi: List of all activities smied in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Repmi: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed

until most recent Application for Payment.

Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of diffeting conditions.

COORDINATION

Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and repmiing of separate contractors.

Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress repmis, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

I. Secure time commitments for perfonning ctitical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2


PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity 1s longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times m Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 30 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work perfonned by

Owner. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.

4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work.



2.2

5. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

D. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary repott indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

E.

A.

B.

c.

1. Umesolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Infonnation. 3. Rejected or umetumed submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) fom1at.

Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant constmction activities for the first 90 days of constmction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's constmction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.

a. Failure to include any work item required for perfonnance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for rep01ting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.

3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:



a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility intenuptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. 1. Testing. J. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are pennissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concunent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated repmts showing the following:

I. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).

G. Schedule Updating: Concunent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENT AT ION 01320-5


2.3

A.

6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.

REPORTS

Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction repmi recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. ll. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authmities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed repmi. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concunently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.



B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.




SECTION 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Division 1 Section "Constmction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's constmction schedule.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.3

1.4

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that reqmre Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

A.

A.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by constmction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making conections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those conections.

SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 1


1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requmng coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to pennit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intennediate Review: If intetmediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title

block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Constmction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. 1. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.0l.A).

J. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 1. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2


4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concunent reviewer m addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal fonn. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the

following information:

1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Construction Manager. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 1 0) Category and type of submittal. 11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name

for each of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate infonnation in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061 00.0 1.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to pennanently record Contractor's rev1ew and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.



G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same fotm and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

reVISlOn. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for perfotmance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

1. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copres of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.

2. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing cetiification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital cetiificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy cetiificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect infonnation into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If infonnation must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.



e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time infonnation.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other constmction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concunent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific infonnation, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining constmction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following fmmat: a. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Architect and Constmction Manager will

retain two copies; remainder will be returned.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a compatison of these charactetistics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Genetic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.



3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to detennine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's propetiy, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same matetial to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a wtitten summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Submit product schedule in the following fonnat: a. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless othetwise indicated.

Architect will return two copies.

F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."



H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Repmis and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written infonnation that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact infmmation of architects and owners, and other infmmation specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on A WS fonns. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

0. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Submit repmis written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written repmis indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

U. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."



V. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests perfonned before installation of product, for compliance with perfonnance requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard fonn, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests petfonned before installation of product. Include written recommendations for ptimers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

X. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic infonnation, including, but not limited to, perfonnance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other perfonnance and design critetia and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Perfonnance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific perfonnance and design critetia indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional infonnation to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or cetiified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note conections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Matetial Submittals: See requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."



C.

3.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

ARCHITECT'S ACTION

General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate conections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

Infmmational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 9


SECTION 01400- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures perfonned before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities perfonned by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless othe1wise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify perfonnance characteristics.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections perfonned specifically for Project before products and mate1ials are incorporated into the Work, to ve1ify perfonnance or compliance with specified crite1ia.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 1


1.3

1.4

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are petformed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are perfonned at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factmy, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are perfonned on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/ Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perfonn a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

J.

A.

B.

A.

1. Use of trade-specific tenninology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the fonn of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.



1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature oflaboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written infonnation documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making repmt. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summaty of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what conective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Pennits, Licenses, and Cettificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on perfonnance of the Work.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service perfonnance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A finn expetienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.



D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in constmction with a record of successful in-service perfonnance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those perfonned for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in matetial, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific constmction activities shall be perfmmed by entities who are recognized expetis in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authotities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jmisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratmy Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstmction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perfonn preconstmction testing for compliance with specified requirements for perfonnance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and constmction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and

methods of constmction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do

not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a cetiified written repmi of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.



J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval ofmockups before statting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to petform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a desctiption of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perfmm.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, all tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perfonn additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to petform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be perfonned.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a cettified wtitten report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jmisdiction, when they so direct.



C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, vetification of matelials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal ofwlitten reports.

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether miginal tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perfonn required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of inegularities or deficiencies observed in the Work duling perfonnance of its services.

2. Detennine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each repmi whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified wlitten report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any pmiion of the Work.

6. Do not perfonn any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to pennit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field cming of test samples. 5. Delivety of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Seculity and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.



1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perfonn the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work dming perfonnance of its services.

3. Submitting a cetiified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list ofumesolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

3.2

A.

TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference dming normal working hours.

REP AIR AND PROTECTION

General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repmr damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements."



B. Protect constmction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.




SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

1.2

A.

B.

DEFINITIONS

General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

"Directed": A command or instmction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "pennitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and mles, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the W ark.

"Fumish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchming, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

"Project Site": Space available for performing constmction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

INDUSTRY STANDARDS

Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more sttingent requirements, applicable construction industly standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

REFERENCES 01420- 1


C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

PRIVATE tbl1 AA Aluminum Association (The)

AABC Associated Air Balance Council

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transpmtation Officials

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

ABAA Air Barrier Association of America

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association

ACI American Concrete Institute

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association

AGA American Gas Association

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers

AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute, The

AI Asphalt Institute

AIA American Institute of Architects (The)

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

REFERENCES 01420-2


AISI

AITC

ALSC

AMCA

ANSI

AOSA

APA

APA

API

ARI

ARMA

ASCE

ASCE/SEI

ASHRAE

ASME

ASSE

ASTM

ATIS

AWCMA

AWCI

AWI

AWPA

AWS

REFERENCES

American Iron and Steel Institute

American Institute of Timber Construction

American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated

Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.

American National Standards Institute

Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.

AP A - The Engineered Wood Association

Architectural Precast Association

American Petroleum Institute

Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute

Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association

American Society of Civil Engineers

American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE)

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

ASME Intemational (Ametican Society of Mechanical Engineers Intemational)

American Society of Sanitary Engineering

ASTM Intemational (American Society for Testing and Materials Intemational)

Alliance for Telecommunications Industly Solutions

Ametican Window Coveting Manufacturers Association (NowWCMA)

Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry

Architectural Woodwork Institute

Ametican Wood Protection Association (Formerly: Ametican Wood Preservers' Association)

American Welding Society

01420- 3


AWWA American Water Works Association

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

BIA Brick Industry Association (The)

BICSI BICSI, Inc.

BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International)

BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee

CCC Carpet Cushion Council

CDA Copper Development Association

CEA Canadian Electricity Association

CEA Consumer Electronics Association

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.

CGA Compressed Gas Association

CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association

CISCA Ceilings & Inte1ior Systems Construction Association

CIS PI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute

CPA Composite Panel Association

CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The)

CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council

CSA Canadian Standards Association

CSA CSA International (Fonnerly: lAS- International Approval Services)

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The)

REFERENCES 01420-4

Simms Municipal Building Project2013-23

CSSB

CTI

DHI

ECA

EIA

EIMA

EJCDC

EJMA

ESD

ETL SEMCO

Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau

Cooling Technology Institute (Fonnerly: Cooling Tower Institute)

Door and Hardware Institute

Electrical Components Association

Electronic Industries Alliance

EIFS Industry Members Association

Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee

Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.

ESD Association (Electrostatic Discharge Association)

Intetiek ETL SEMCO (Fonnerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)

FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball (The International Basketball Federation)

FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation)

FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC

FM Global FM Global (Fonnerly: FMG- FM Global)

2/2015

FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.

FSA Fluid Sealing Association

FSC Forest Stewardship Council

GA Gypsum Association

GANA Glass Association of North America

GRI (Pati of GSI)

GS Green Seal

GSI Geosynthetic Institute

HI Hydronics Institute

REFERENCES 01420 - 5


HI/GAMA

HMMA

HPVA

HPW

IAPSC

ICBO

ICEA

ICRI

ICPA

IEC

IEEE

IES

lEST

IGMA

ILI

ISA

ISO

ISSFA

ITS

ITU

KCMA

LGSEA

LMA

REFERENCES

Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association Division of Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI)

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part ofNAAMM)

Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association

H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.

International Association of Professional Security Consultants

International Conference of Building Officials

Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.

International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.

International Cast Polymer Association

International Electrotechnical Commission

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)

Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

Institute of Enviromnental Sciences and Technology

Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance

Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.

Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The

International Organization for Standardization

International Solid Surface Fabricators Association

Intertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO)

International Telecommunication Union

Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association

Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association

Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA)

2/2015

01420-6


LPI

MBMA

MCA

MFMA

MFMA

MH

MHIA

MIA

MPI

MSS

NAAMM

NACE

NADCA

NAGWS

NAIMA

NBGQA

NCAA

NCMA

NCTA

NEBB

NECA

NeLMA

NEMA

NETA

NFHS

REFERENCES

Lightning Protection Institute

Metal Building Manufacturers Association

Metal Construction Association

Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.

Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.

Material Handling (NowMHIA)

Mate1ial Handling Industry of America

Marble Institute of America

Master Painters Institute

Manufacturers Standardization Society ofThe Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

NACE International (National Association of Conosion Engineers International)

National Air Duct Cleaners Association

National Association for Girls and Women in Spmi

North American Insulation Manufacturers Association

National Building Granite Quanies Association, Inc.

National Collegiate Athletic Association (The)

National Concrete Masonry Association

National Cable & Telecommunications Association

National Environmental Balancing Bureau

National Electrical Contractors Association

Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association

National Electlical Manufacturers Association

InterNational Electrical Testing Association

National Federation of State High School Associations

01420-7


NFPA

NFRC

NGA

NHLA

NLGA

NOFMA

NOMMA

NRCA

NRMCA

NSF

NSSGA

NTMA

NWFA

PCI

PDI

PGI

PTI

RCSC

RFCI

RIS

SAE

SCAQMD

SCTE

SDI

REFERENCES

NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)

National Fenestration Rating Council

National Glass Association

National Hardwood Lumber Association

National Lumber Grades Authority

NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)

National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association

National Roofing Contractors Association

National Ready Mixed Concrete Association

NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International)

National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association

National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The)

National Wood Flooring Association

Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute

Plumbing & Drainage Institute

PVC Geomembrane Institute

Post-Tensioning Institute

Research Council on Structural Connections

Resilient Floor Cove1ing Institute

Redwood Inspection Service

SAE International

South Coast Air Quality Management District

Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers

Steel Deck Institute

2/2015

01420-8


SDI

SEFA

SEIIASCE

SIA

SJI

SMA

SMACNA

SMPTE

SPFA

SPIB

SPRI

SSINA

SSPC

STI

SWI

SWPA

TCA

TCNA

TEMA

TIA/EIA

TMS

TPI

TPI

REFERENCES

Steel Door Institute

Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association

Structural Engineering Institute/ American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE)

Security Industry Association

Steel Joist Institute

Screen Manufacturers Association

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association

Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers

Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Fonnerly: SPIISPFD- The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray

Polyurethane Foam Division)

Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)

Single Ply Roofing Industry

Specialty Steel Industry of North America

SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings

Steel Tank Institute

Steel Window Institute

Submersible Wastewater Pump Association

Tilt-Up Concrete Association

Tile Council of North America, Inc.

Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance

The Masonry Society

Truss Plate Institute, Inc.

Turfgrass Producers International

2/2015

01420- 9


TRI Tile Roofing Institute

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association

USAV USA Volleyball

USGBC U.S. Green Building Council

US ITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau

WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA- National Wood Window and Door Association)

WI Woodwork Institute (Fonnerly: WIC- Woodwork Institute of California)

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association

WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association

WWPA Western Wood Products Association

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

PRIVATE tbl2 DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

ICC International Code Council

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

PRIVATE tbl3 COE Army Corps of Engineers

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission

DOC Depatiment of Commerce

REFERENCES 01420- 10


DOD

DOE

EPA

FAA

FCC

FDA

GSA

HUD

LBL

NCHRP

NIST

OSHA

PBS

PHS

RUS

SD

TRB

USDA

USP

USPS

Department of Defense

Department of Energy

Environmental Protection Agency

Federal Aviation Administration

Federal Communications Commission

Food and Drug Administration

General Services Administration

Department of Housing and Urban Development

Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory

National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB)

National Institute of Standards and Technology

Occupational Safety & Health Administration

Public Buildings Service (See GSA)

Office of Public Health and Science

Rural Utilities Service (See USDA)

State Department

Transportation Research Board

Department of Agriculture

U.S. Phannacopeia

Postal Service

2/2015

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list.

PRIVATE tbl4 ADAAG Ame1icans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Architectural BaiTiers Act (ABA)

REFERENCES 01420-11


Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board

CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Depariment of Defense Single Stock Point

DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS)

FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS)

FS Federal Specification Available from Depariment of Defense Single Stock Point

Available from Defense Standardization Program

Available from General Services Administration

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)

MIL (See MILSPEC)

MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Depariment of Defense Single Stock Point

UF AS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


REFERENCES

2/2015

01420- 12


SECTION 01500- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility interruptions.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electtic Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without meteting and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Pennit or authmities having jmisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authmities having jmisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electtic service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 1


B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authmities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Pennanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each pennanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each pennanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

2.2

A.

B.

C.

2.3

A.

B.

MATERIALS

Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2~inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabtic fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch (60-mm-·) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts.

Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2--7/8 inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-- (42-mm-·) OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for nonnal loading.

Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 1 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly.

Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate mate1ials and equipment for construction operations.

EQUIPMENT

Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

HV AC Equipment: Unless Owner authmizes use of permanent HV AC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2


2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of pennanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed pennanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be intenupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a hannful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.



G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for constmction operations.

1. Install electric power service overhead unless othetwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for constmction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate tempormy lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all constmction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following: 1. Productivity Software:

a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher. c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.

2. Ptinter: "Ali-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.

3. Intemet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.

4. Intemet Secmity: Integrated software, providing software firewall, vims, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.



3.3

A.

B.

SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.

Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be pennitted to use pennanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporaty roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

I. Coordinate elevations of tempormy roads and paved areas with per1nanent roads and paved areas.

2. Prepare subgTade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.

4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 2 Section "Asphalt Paving."

D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger pennanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to infonn public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.



a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements."

I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

3.4

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more sttingent and requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing."

Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jmisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stonnwater from heavy rains.

Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extennination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perfonn control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

Site Enclosure Fence: After site demo work is complete and at an appropriate time, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals fi·om easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations or as indicated on Drawings.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel.

F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of secmity. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate banicades, including warning signs and lighting.



H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFP A 241; manage fire prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: A void trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airbome mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather baniers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. 4. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 5. Perfonn work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in dtywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of pennanent HV AC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture

level within 48 hours.



3.6

A.

B.

OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Tennination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authmized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore pennanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Matetials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction petiod. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."




SECTION 01600- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special wmTanties; and comparable products.


1. Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The tenn "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service perfonnance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service perfonnance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional infonnation or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 1


product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Fonn of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements m Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to mmnmze long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to detennine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2


1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concunent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product wananties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written wananty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Wananty: Written wananty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Wananties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate tenns and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated fonn properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, tlim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with wananties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Where products are accompanied by the tenn "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.

B. Product Selection Procedures:



2.2

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products: a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements m "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers: a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

D.

A.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4


1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisiOns to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as perfonnance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified wananty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, ifrequested.





SECTION 01635- SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.


A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Fonn: Use CSI Fonn 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the W ark and to construction perfonned by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the W ark specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as perfonnance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Cetiificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test repmis from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635- 1


1. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES.

J. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

n. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional infonnation or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.


A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

A

SUBSTITUTIONS

Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days ptior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied:

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635-2


a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified wananty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is unifmm and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other pmiions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 1. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is unifonn and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635- 3


SECTION 01700- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching penetrations in

fire-rated construction.


A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perfonn as intended or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 1


3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perfonn as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Matetials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional perfmmance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

3.2

A.

EXAMINATION

Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting perfmmance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactmy conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

PREPARATION

Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2


B.

C.

3.3

A.

B.

3.4

A.

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the existing structure. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

INSTALLATION

General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in conect alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product perfonnance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in pennanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that



3.5

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inseris, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, anange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

A.

CUTTING AND PATCHING

Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perfonn cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or perfonnance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Suppmi: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for pmiions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or



adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections

where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining pmtion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requi1ing cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following pe1fonnance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide mate1ials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall smfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new mate1ials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exte1ior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements st1ictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste mate1ials more than seven days during nonnal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.



3.7

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

A.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.

During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

STARTING AND ADJUSTING

Start equipment and operating components to confinn proper operation. malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

Remove

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."



3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.




SECTION 01770- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2

1.3

1.4

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Wananties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


A.

B.

A.

B.

C.

1. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

3. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.

4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For cleaning agents.

Contractor's List of Incomplete Items (Punch List): Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

Field Report: For pest control inspection.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770- 1


1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Cetiificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy pennits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 1 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, propetiy surveys, and similar final record infonnation.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final cetiifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections, including tools, spare patis, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover infonnation related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2


9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore maned exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to detennine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before cetiificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to detennine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or conected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or conected.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing conection including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, statiing with exterior areas first.



2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written wananties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of wananties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal ofwananties might limit Owner's rights under wan·anty.

B. Organize wananty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. W ananty Electronic File: Scan wananties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmm·ked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each wananty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

MATERIALS

Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

FINAL CLEANING

General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local enviromnental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.



3.2

A.

B.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. A void disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective smfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 1. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. J. Clean transparent materials, including minors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent matetials. Polish minors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electlical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mmiar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

REPAIR OF THE WORK

Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective pmis, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and pennanent facilities used dming construction to specified condition.



1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during constmction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.




SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.


1. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

RECORD DRAWINGS

Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to infonnation on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781- 1


2.2

2.3

c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic infmmation in production of marked-up record prints.

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the W ark at same location.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

A.

B.

A.

1. Record Ptints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give patiicular attention to infonnation on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietmy name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other infonnation necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.

RECORD PRODUCT DATA

Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781-2


B.

2.4

A.

B.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

Fonnat: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.

MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

Fonnat: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during nonnal working hours.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781-3


SECTION 01820- DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


1.3

1.4

A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

A.

B.

C.

A.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Facilitator Qualifications: A finn or individual experienced in trammg or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning perfonnance.

Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training.

COORDINATION

Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820- 1


B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that patiicipant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Ctitetia: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Perfmmance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of nonnal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820-2


a. Statiup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and nonnal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Nonnal shutdown instructions. 1. Operating procedures for emergencies. J. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repatr, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying patis and components. e. Review of spare patis needed for operation and maintenance.



PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

3.2

A.

A.

PREPARATION

Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 1 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data."

INSTRUCTION

Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will fumish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.




SECTION 04400 -EXTERIOR STONE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A Provide exterior natural stone honeycomb reinforced wall cladding system.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.

C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if vmiation of finish is anticipated.


A Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers acceptable to product manufacturer. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

B. Store Matetials protected from exposure to hannful weather conditions. Handle material and components to avoid damage. Protect material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during, and after installation.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER:

A Stone Panels, Inc., 100 S. Royal Lane, Coppell, TX 75019, 800-328-6275

2.02 MATERIALS

A "StoneLite" Natural Stone Honeycomb Reinforced Wall Cladding System

1. Natural stone bonded to lightweight (aircraft quality) aluminum honeycomb having epoxy impregnated glass cloth skins.

2. Facing: 3/16" (4.8mm) ± 1/16" (1.6mm) natural stone. 3. Reinforcing: W' (19tmn) aluminum honeycomb bonded by high strength epoxy

impregnated glass cloth.

EXTERIOR STONE 04400-1


2.03 ACCESSSORIES

A. Connection and anchorage hardware, including interlocking channels, anchor plated, Zsections, angle clips and threaded inserts.

B. Sealants: Sealants specified in Division 7, shall be tested for compatibility with the StoneLite System.

2.04 STONE TYPE AND FINISHES

A. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range submitted samples.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Field verify measurements/openings before fabrication and confinn on shop drawings.

B. Install exterior stone panel system plumb, level and true to line, with manufacturer's prescribed tolerances and installation instructions. Provide supports and anchor in place.

I. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points.

2. Weather Tight Construction: Refer to installation instructions and consult sealant manufachlrer for project specific application. Coordinate installation with other components of construction.

C. Remove and replace damaged units. Clean using methods recommended by stone panel supplier.


EXTERIOR STONE 04400-2

Si1mns Municipal Building Project 2013-23 2/2015

SECTION 04800 -MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide unit masonry construction:

1. Freestanding site masonry walls. 2. Repair and remodeling of existing masonry construction.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used.


1. Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the jmisdiction of the project.



A. Testing: Independent Testing Laboratory.

B. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship.

C. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Face Brick:

1. Manufacturers: Acme Brick, Belden Brick, Endicott Clay Products, Glen-Ge1y Corp., or approved submittal.

2. Size: Standard modular, 3-5/8 inches thick by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 3. Grade: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, severe weathe1ing type for areas subject to freeze-thaw. 4. Grade: ASTM C 216, Grade MW, moderate weathering type. 5. Type: ASTM C 216, Type FBS, for general exposed use. 6. Type: ASTM C 216, Type FBX, for general use in exposed masonry requiring minimum

variations in size and color ranges. 7. Type: ASTM C 216, Type FBA, for special architectural effects resulting from

nonuniformity in individual units. 8. Type: Match existing. 9. Bond Pattern: Match existing.

B. Concrete Masonry Units:

MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04800-1


1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, 1500 f'm compressive strength: a. Light weight. b. Medium weight. c. Nonnal weight.

2. Size: Face dimension of 7-5/8 inches high by 15-5/8 inches long by width required for application.

3. Special Finish: Match existing. 4. Bond Pattern: Running Bond. 5. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric admixture.

C. Mortar and Grout for Brick and Concrete Masomy Unit Assemblies:

1. Mortar Mix: ASTM C 270, Type S, for reinforced masomy, masonry below grade and masonry in contact with earth and ASTM C 270, Type N, for above-grade loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls and parapet walls and for interior loadbearing and nonloadbearing partitions.

2. Mortar Materials: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II. 3. Mortar Materials: Masonry cement, ASTM C 91. 4. Mortar Materials: Ready mixed, ASTM C 207, TypeS. 5. Mortar Aggregate: Natural color, ASTM C 144. 6. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. 7. Color: Natural color. 8. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric admixture.

D. Reinforcing Steel:

1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60.

E. Reinforcing: Welded wire with defonned side rods.

1. Steel Wire: 9 gauge (.1875 inch) galvanized steel. 2. Type: Ladder or truss type.

F. Ties and Anchors:

1. Bent Wire Ties: Galvanized steel. 2. Rigid Anchors: Galvanized steel straps. 3. Masonry to Concrete Frame: Two-piece galvanized steel anchor. 4. Masomy to Steel Frame: Anchor with ctimped wire anchor section for welding to steel. 5. Adjustable Masonry Veneer Anchors: Screw-attached two-piece galvanized triangular or

rectangular wire tie and metal anchor. 6. Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 organic polymer coated steel drill screws. 7. Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 stainless steel. 8. Unit Type Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Malleable iron. 9. Dovetail Slots: Galvanized sheet metal. 10. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, galvanized. 11. Post-installed Anchors: Chemical or expansion anchors.

G. Masonry Accessories:

1. Nonmetallic expansion joint strips. 2. Prefonned control joint gaskets. 3. Bond breaker strips. 4. Plastic tubing for weeps. 5. Open head-joint weeps. 6. Cavity vents.



PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of Masonry Assemblies:

1. Comply with PCA Recommended Practices for Laying Concrete Block, Brick Institute of America BIA Tech Notes, and NCMA TEK Bulletins.

2. Comply with cold weather and warm weather protection procedures as recommended in BIA Tech Notes.

3. Provide fire-rated assemblies complying with ASTM E 119. 4. Sawcut units when required. Maintain uniform joint width. Provide full bed, head and

collar joints except at weepholes. 5. Install lintels and accessories in masonry construction. 6. Coordinate installation of flashings. 7. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for spacmg of ties and horizontal

reinforcing. 8. Provide expansion and control joints in accordance with BIA and NCMA

recommendations. 9. Remove and replace damaged units. 10. Clean brick using bucket and brush method, BIA Tech Note 20. 11. Clean concrete masonry by dry brushing, NCMA TEK No. 28.




SECTION 05120- STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART I- GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

I. Structural steel. 2. Grout.

B. Related Sections include the following:

I. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels not attached to structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other metal items not defined as structural steel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

I. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard A WS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Source quality-control test reports.

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120- I



A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer with not less than 5 years of experience in erection of structural steel.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who pari1c1pates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd. An otherwise qualified fabricator is acceptable if satisfactory evidence of qualifications is submitted prior to contract award. For non-certified fabricators, Contractor shall submit a resume describing plant size, equipment, quality control procedures and personnel, and experience on comparable work in the last 3 years.

C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." 3. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 5. AWS Dl.l, "Structural Welding Code." 6. lndusttial Fasteners Institute, "Handbook on Bolt, Nut, and Rivet Standards." 7. S tee! structure painting council:

a. Painting manual, vol. 1, Good Painting Practice. b. Painting manual, vol. 2, Systems Specifications.


A. Store materials to petmit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other suppotis and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged matetials from erosion and deterioration.

1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubticate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2


B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/ A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with A WS requirements. Use E70 electrodes.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

2.3

2.4

2.5

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

B. Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.

C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 193/ A 193M.

A.

B.

C.

A.

A.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.

PRIMER

Primer for Concealed Framing: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer, applied to a dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#l8, MPI#l9, or SSPC-Paint 20.

Primer for exterior exposed steel: Tnemec "Series 66-1211 Hi-Build Epoxoline" Primer or Carboline "Carboline 858" applied to a dry film thickness of 3 to 5 mils.

NON-SHRINK GROUT

Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Compressive strength in 28 days shall be 5000 psi minimum, but in no case less than the specified strength of the base concrete.

FABRICATION

Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."

1. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.



2. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perfonn thennal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thennally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in A WS D 1.1.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting beating loads.

E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by buming.

2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thennal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

2.7

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with A WS D 1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

A.

1. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces.

a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.

SHOP PRIMING

Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend pnmmg of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean smfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. Concealed Framing: SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. At Exterior Exposed Steel: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."



C.

2.8

A.

Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and exposed surfaces.

GALVANIZING

Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.

1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. 2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located m

exterior walls.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

3.2

A.

3.3

A.

B.

EXAMINATION

Verify elevations of concrete-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been conected.

PREPARATION

Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

ERECTION

Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."

Base Plates: Clean concrete-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates. Clean bottom surface of base plates.

1. Set base plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.



C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in pennanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

E.

F.

G.

I. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

Splice members only where indicated.

Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

3.5

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with A WS D I. I for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in conecting welding work.

A.

B.

C.

I. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces.

a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to A WS D I.I.

I. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to A WS Dl.l and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E I64.

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120- 6


b. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Conect deficiencies in Work that test repotis and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, mst spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories and abutting stmctural steel.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.




SECTION 05400- COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall

height.


A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thiclmesses, and types of cold-fonned metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.


A. Qualification data.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Product test reports.

D. Research/evaluation reports.


A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to A WS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400- 1


C. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Fanned Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Fanned Steel Framing- General Provisions."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/ A 1 003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H (ST230H) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 (1.09 mm) and less; ST50H (ST340H) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and greater.

2.2 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) and as noted on drawings. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vetiical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 1. mmunum.

2.3 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless othetwise indicated.

B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zmc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbonsteel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as detennined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-2


E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant matetials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as detennined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

B.

c.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-112 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

3.2

A.

B.

c.

D.

PREPARATION

Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or tim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing smface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


Install cold-fonned metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more sttingent requirements are indicated.

Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

Install framing members in one-piece lengths.

Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated suppmiing structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.



3.3

E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-fanned metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

F. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 118 inch in 10 feet (1 :960) and as follows:

A.

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus l/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative enor shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped smfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to primary building

structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thiclmess indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-4


3.4

3.5

3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

A.

B.


Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to detennine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

REP AIRS AND PROTECTION

Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-fanned metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.




SECTION 05500- METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Miscellaneous steel tlim. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted·-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masomy. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabtications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide matetials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/ A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/ A 36M or ASTM A 283/ A 283M, Grade C or D.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-fonned steel tubing.

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1


D.

E.

2.3

A.

B.

2.4

A.

2.5

A.

B.

C.

D.

2.6

A.

B.

C.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

Cast hon: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/ A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 4 7 I A 4 7M.

NONFERROUS METALS

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

FASTENERS

General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

FABRICATION, GENERAL

Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

Cut, dtill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove butTs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and conosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.



D.

E.

F.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masomy, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

2.8

2.9

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B.

c.

A.

B.

c.

D.

A.

Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless othetwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.

SHELF ANGLES

Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/LI~inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to suppoti angles from backup masonry and concrete.

Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-inplace concrete.

METAL LADDERS

General:

1. Comply with ANSI Al4.3 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches ( 457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 112"·inch ( 12.7 -by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased

edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4-·inch- ( 19-mm-) diameter steel bars.



2.10

A.

B.

C.

D.

2.11

A.

2.12

A.

B.

2.13

A.

2.14

A.

B.

4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung. 6. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.

MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified m Division 9 Section "HighPerfonnance Coatings."

LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

FINISHES, GENERAL

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

Finish metal fabrications after assembly.



2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A.

B.

Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/ A 123M for other steel and iron products.

Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

3.2

A.


Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perfonn cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and conosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in fonnwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.



B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protmding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

C. Pack grout solidly between bearing smfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.




SECTION 05510- METAL STAIRS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide steel-framed stairs and handrails.

1.02 SUBMITTALS



1. Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project.


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Handrail and Railing Structural Performance: ASTM E 985.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials:

1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. 3. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. 4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40). 5. Cold-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade A. 6. Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570, Grade 30. 7. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366. 8. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 569. 9. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G 90; Grade A coating designation. 10. Fasteners: Plated fasteners, ASTM B 633, zinc-coated.

B. Grout: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic, ASTM C 1107.

PART 3- EXECUTION

INSTALLATION 3.01

A. Take field measurements prior to fabtication, where possible. Fonn to required shapes and sizes with true, straight edges, lines and angles. Provide light-tight, hairline joints.

B. Coordinate with work of other sections; provide inserts and templates as needed. Install work plumb and level with unifonn appearance.

METAL STAIRS 05510-1


C. Stairs: Control access to and use of stair systems. Do not pennit use of stairs until stairs and railing systems are complete and ready to assume design loading. Do not permit overloading of stair systems. Make connections light-proof tight by welding or bolting; conceal fastenings as much as possible. Grind flush and smooth all exposed welds. Fill pans with 3000 psi concrete with welded wire fabric and provide broom finish.

D. Railings and Posts: provide sizes, profiles and dimensions indicated. Provide mitered joints at 90 degree turns and smooth sweeps at bends. Provide wall returns, end caps, brackets, fittings, and toe boards.

E. Restore damaged finishes and protect work.

END OF SECTION

METAL STAIRS 05510-2


SECTION 05720 - ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes omamental metal handrails, cable in-fill, and railings associated with the lobby and the stair locations indicated on the drawings.

B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for handrails and railings associated with metal stairs.


A. Structural Performance ofHandrails and Railings: 1. Capable of withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable

design working stress of materials involved:

a. Top Rail of Guards: Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction, and a unifonn load of 50 lbf/ft. (730 N/m) applied horizontally and concunently with unifotm load of 100 lbt/ft. (1460 N/m) applied vertically downward. Concentrated and unifonn loads need not be assumed to act concunently.

b. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Concentrated load of 2.00 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction, and a uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (730 N/m) applied in any direction. Concentrated and unifonn loads need not be assumed to act concunently.

c. Infill Area of Guards: Horizontal concentrated load of 2.00 lbf (890 N) applied to 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing infill area. Load on infill area need not be assumed to act concunently with loads on top rails.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit fabricator's shop drawings showing sizes, dimensions, details, and installation of

railing fame components, intennediate cable braces, cables, cable hardware, and grommets.

2. Show details of anchoring cable railing system to mounting surface.

C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated.

ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720- 1



A. Single Source Responsibility: Single source shall provide all components required to install the cable railing system.

B. Fabricator's Quality Assurance: Fabricator shall certify that all materials comply with the requirements of this section and are suitable for the intended application.

C. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting approximately two weeks before start of constmction of railing frame component mounting surfaces


A. Deliver materials to site with labels or other markings clearly identifying the products and contractor or fabricator.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry area, away from exposure to the weather until they are ready for installation.

C. Protect materials while handling to avoid damage during installation.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's standard wananty for each product indicated.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

2.2

A.

B.

C.

MANUFACTURERS

Available Manufacturers: The Basis of Design is Ultra-Tek cable railing system as indicated on the drawings, subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering similar products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Stainless Cable & Railing Inc. 2. AGS Stainless, Inc. 3. Johnson Architectural Hardware. 4. Jakob Rope Systems. 5. Feeney, Inc. 6. Hayn Lines.

RAILING FRAME COMPONENTS

Framing: As noted on the Drawings.

Post Mounting: Manufacturer's standard.

Intermediate Cable Braces: As noted on the Drawings.

ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-2


D. Cable Grommets: For prevention of abrasion of intennediate posts, end posts, and cable braces bored for cables. 1. Material: Black, UV-resistant Delrin.

2.3 CABLES AND CABLE HARDWARE

2.4

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

A.

Cables. 1. Material: 1 x 19 Type 316 stainless steel strand, left-hand lay, per dimensional properties

contained in MIL-DTL-87161. 2. Finish: Mill. 3. Diameter: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) min.diameter cable with a minimum breaking strength of

4000 pounds (1814.37 kilograms). 4. Orientation: Horizontal and Slope parallel to stair pitch. 5. Spacing: Minimum 3 inches on center.

Cable Hardware Components. 1. Material: Stainless steel, ASTM A276 and A479, SAE/AMS QQ-S-763, Type 316. 2. Type: Swageless hardware wherever practical. 3. Type: Most economical combinations of fittings that are practical.

Wood Components: 1. Type: Hardwood secured to subrail. 2. Species: White Oak 3. Finish: Transparent stain.

Fasteners: Same basic metal as fastened metal; concealed, unless otherwise indicated or unavoidable, and standard with systems indicated.

Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as detennined per ASTM E 488.

FABRICATION

General: Fabricate to design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

1. Take field measurements prior to fabrication, where possible.

B. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending, mitering, or inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.

C. Nonwelded Connections: Connect handrail and railing members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.

D. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720- 3


3.1

A.

B.

A.

INSTALLATION

Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections.

Coordinate with work of other sections; provide inserts and templates as needed. Install work plumb and level with uniform appearance.

Restore damaged finishes and protect work.


ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-4


SECTION 06105- MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide rough carpentry:

1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 3. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. 4. Backing panels.

1.02 SUBMITTALS



A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Lumber Standards and Grade Stamps: U.S. Product Standard PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard and inspection agency grade stamps.

C. Construction Panel Standards: PS 1, U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood; APA PRP-108.

D. Wood Framing Standards: NFPA House Framing Manual.

1. Intetior Wall Framing: 2 inch by 4 inch (38 tmn by 89 mm actual) studs, 16 inches ( 40 em) on center.

E. Preservative Treatment: A WP A C2 for lumber and A WP A C9 for plywood; waterborne pressure treatment. Provide for wood in contact with soil, concrete, masonry, roofing, flashing, dampproofing and waterproofing.

F. Fire-Retardant Treatment: A WPA C20 for lumber and A WPA C27 for plywood; nonconosive type. Provide at building interior where required by code.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Dimension Lumber:

1. Light Framing: Stud, No. 3 or Standard grade. 2. Structural Framing: Select structural grade. 3. Species: Any species of grade indicated. 4. Exposed Framing: Appearance grade.

B. Boards:

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1


1. Exposed Boards: 19 percent moisture content. 2. Concealed Boards: 19 percent moisture content.

C. Miscellaneous Lumber:

1. Moisture Content: 19 percent. 2. Grade: Standard grade light framing.

D. Construction Panels:

1. Floor Sheathing: APA Sheathing,T & G 32/16. 2. Plywood Backing Panels: AP A C-D Plugged Exposure 1 with exterior glue, fire-retardant

treated.

E. Auxiliary Materials:

1. Framing Anchors and Fasteners: Non-conosive, suitable for load and exposure. Drywall screws are not acceptable.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Wood framing: Comply with recommendations ofNFPA Manual for House Framing, NFPA Recommended Nailing Schedule, and NFPA National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.

B. Plywood: Comply with recommendations of APA Design and Construction Guide- Residential and Commercial.

C. Provide nailers, blocking and grounds where required. Set work plumb, level and accurately cut.

D. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with other work.

E. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for cutting, handling, fastening and working treated materials.

F. Restore damaged components. Protect work from damage.


ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2


SECTION 06402

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide interior architectural woodwork:

1. Standing and running trim and rails. 2. Casework and countertops. 3. Ornamental items.

1.02 SUBMITTALS





A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store matetials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Standards: Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."

C. Preservative Treatment: Nonpressure method, exterior type, NWWDA I.S. 4.

D. Fire-Retardant Treatment:

1. Lumber: A WPA C20, non-corrosive type. 2. Plywood: A WPA C27, non-corrosive type. 3. Particleboard: ASTM E 84, flame spread 20 or less.

E. Formaldehyde Emission Levels:

1. Particleboard: NP A 8 compliance. 2. Medium Density Fiberboard: NP A 9 compliance. 3. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE compliance.

F. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship of each type of architectural woodwork.

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Interior Standing and Running Trim and Rails:

1. Species for Transparent Finish: Plain sawn/sliced white oak. 2. Grade: Premium.

B. Interior Wood Casework:

1. Species for Transparent Finish: Plain sawn/sliced white oak. 2. Grade: Premium. 3. Face Style: Flush overlay. 4. Frame Fabrication: Face frame. 5. Grain Matching: Vertical. 6. Veneer Matching of Leaves: Book. 7. Veneer Matching In Panel Face: Running.

C. Interior Plastic Laminate Clad Casework:

1. Laminate: High pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD-3. 2. Grade: Custom. 3. Face Style: Flush overlay. 4. Frame Fabrication: Frameless.

D. Casework Hardware and Auxiliary Materials:

1. Hardware Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 2. Hardware Finish and Base Metal: Satin stainless steel. 3. Glass: Clear float glass, ASTM C 1036.

E. Interior Plastic Laminate Clad Countertops:

1. Laminate: High pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD-3. 2. Grade: Custom. 3. Core: Particleboard. 4. Edge: Laminate.

F. Solid Surfacing Material Countertops:

1. Type: Synthetic countertops. 2. Grade: Premium. 3. Edge: Decorative.

G. Interior Ornamental Items:

1. Species for Transparent Finish: Plain sawn/sliced white oak. 2. Grade: Premium.

H. Exterior Fasteners:

1. Nails: Stainless steel, aluminum or hot-dip galvanized siding nails. 2. Screws and Anchors: Nonconosive, type required for secure anchorage.

I. Auxiliary Materials:

1. Screws: FS FF-S-111. 2. Nails: FS FF-N-105. 3. Anchors: Type required for secure anchorage.



PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide work to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated. Install work to comply with quality standards referenced. Back prime work and install plumb, level and straight with tight joints; scribe work to fit.

B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Use non-corrosive fasteners for exterior work. Coordinate with work of other sections.

C. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for cutting, handling, fastening and working treated materials.

D. Repair minor damage, clean and protect.




SECTION 07131 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes self-adhering modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.

1.2 PREINST ALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside comers, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other tennination conditions.


A. Sample wananties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard materials-only wananty in which manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing matetial for waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.

1. Wananty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 1


PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil (1.5-mm) nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils ( 1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- (0.1 0-mm-·) thick, polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861.

2. Physical Properties:

a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi (1.7 MPa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.

b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C);

ASTMD 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 118-inch (3-mm) movement;

ASTMC 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 Ibf(l80 N) minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at

70 deg F (21 deg C); ASTM D 570. g. Water Vapor Penneance: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) maximum;

ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water Method. h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 230 feet (60 m) minimum; ASTM D 5385.

3. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.

B. Primer: Liquid solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.

D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or low viscosity.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, modified asphalt coating.

F. Protection Course: J-Drain 400 fanned polystyrene core wrapped in geotextile cloth.


Simms Municipal Building Project 20 13·-23 2/2015

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

Prepare surfaces and install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

Apply and finnly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- ( 64-mm--) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.

1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and plus 5 deg C), install self-adheting, modified bituminous sheets produced for lowtemperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F ( 16 deg C).

D. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, btidging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

E. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing tetminations with mastic.

F. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary matetials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions.

H. Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane.

3.2 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING

A. Do not pennit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, hannful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by pennanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.




SECTION 07210- BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Foam-plastic board insulation.

2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Product test reports.

B. Research/evaluation reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeting products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeting products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1


1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Coming.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

3.2

A.

B.

C.

D.


Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities fanned by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), suppmi unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

5. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:

a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members.

BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2


b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of nonnal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. ( 40 kg/cu. m).

2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instmctions.


BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 3


SECTION 07620- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2. Exposed trim, and fasciae. 3. Copings. 4. Metal flashing. 5. Roof drains, pipes, vents.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and ttim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and fieldassembled work.

1. Include details for fanning, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattem of seams, tennination points, fixed points, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620- 1


PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet (All Exposed Locations): Zinc-coated, commercial-quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A 755/A 755M, G 90 (Z 275) coating designation, coil coated with high-perfmmance fluoropolymer coating; not less than 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.

a. High-Perfonnance Organic Coating Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTMD 4397.

B. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/1 00 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. 2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according

to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50

percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2


2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Fonn sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. 4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints m metal to accommodate

elastomeric sealant.

B. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, fonn expansion joints of intenneshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 tmn) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

C. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, nonconosive metal.

D. Seams: Fabricate nomnoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

E. Seams: Fabricate nonmovmg seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1

A.

3.2

A.

UNDERLA YMENT INSTALLATION

Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-112 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for them1al and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.



3.3

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim tme to line and levels indicated. Provide unifonn, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet rnetal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or conosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other pennanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thennal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intenneshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight constmction.

E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

F.

A.

B.

1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations m SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4


C.

D.

E.

3.4

A.

B.

C.

1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch (400-mm) centers.

Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (1 00 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant.

Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that intetfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.




SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Urethane joint sealants. 2. Latex joint sealants. 3. Acoustical joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.


A. Product test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant (Typical at exterior locations involving brick, block, metal, concrete, stone, etc.): ASTM C 920.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Lymtal, Intemational, Inc. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pacific Polymers Intemational, Inc. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Polymeric Systems, Inc. h. Sonnebome 1. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. J. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.

JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1


k. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S). 3. Grade: nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 25. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T) and Nontraffic (NT).

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant (Typical interior joints): Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. May National Associates, Inc. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. f. Tremco Incorporated.

2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 2


PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

3.2

A.

B.

C.

A.

B.

PREPARATION

Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply ptimer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be pennanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

INSTALLATION

Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce unifonn, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or cming begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to fonn

JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 3


smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate arr pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure SA in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.


JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4


SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid-core doors as follows:

1. Solid-Core Doors with wood-veneer faces and factory finishing.

B. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; mortises, holes, and cutouts; requirements for veneer matching; factory finishing; fire ratings; and other pertinent data.

C. Samples: For each face material and finish.


A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWl's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."

B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.

1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1000 mm) or less above the sill.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. Buell Door Company. 3. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 4. GRAHAM Manufactming Corp. 5. Ideal Wood Products, Inc.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - l


6. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 7. Vancouver Door Company, Inc. 8. VT Industries Inc. 9. Weyerhaeuser Company.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

2.3

A. Doors for Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species and Cut: White Oak, plain sliced. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by

mullions.

B. Intetior Veneer-Faced Solid-Core Doors:

1. Core: Particleboard. 2. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before veneeting.

C. Fire-Rated Doors:

1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated.

2. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance.

3. Pairs: Furnish formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals for pairs of firerated doors, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide blocking as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. For mineral-core doors use composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability.

E.

F.

A.

Provide doors with either glued-block or structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated.

Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard woodveneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated.

FABRICATION

Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2


B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

1. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHING

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

General: Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

Grade: Custom.

Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to A WI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.

Staining: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

Sheen: Satin as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's samples.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

INSTALLATION

Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFP A 80.

B. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

C. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211- 3


SECTION 08334 - OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes open-curtain overhead coiling grilles.


1. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports, angle-framing of grille opening.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling grille and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure.

2. Show locations of controls, locking devices, and other accessories. 3. bclude diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.




A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling grilles shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7

OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334- 1


2.2

A.

OPEN-CURTAIN GRILLE ASSEMBLY

Open-Curtain Grille: Overhead coiling grille with a cmiain having a network of horizontal rods that interconnect with vertical links, controlled to open on power outage or alarm.

]3asis-of~DcsignProduct: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cornell Iron Works Model ERG-IBC "Crossing Guard" upward-coiling grille at corridors and Cornell Iron Works Model ESG-10 upward coiling grille at counters, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. AC::rvlEJ\.ollingDo()rs. b. Ovcrhc(ld [)ogrs,Jnc;. c. AlumaTek, Inc. d. City:Gates. e. <:ooksor1Company. f. Cgme11IIQI1 Works,Jnc. g. [)yn(imic Closures Cgrp. h. Layvrence _Roll-Up [)gors, Inc. 1. IVIahonDogr Corporation. J. IvicK.eon Rolling Door k. 1. Overhead Door m. Raynor.

B. Operation Cycles: G1ille components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000 Grille Curtain Material: Aluminum. 1. ERG-IBC cycle life up to 20 cycles per day. 2. ESG-1 0 cycle life up to 5 cycles per day. 3. Rod Spacing: Approximately 2 inches 4. Link Spacing: Approximately 9 inches (228 apmi in a straight in-line pattern. 5. Spacers: Metal tubes matching curtain material.

C. Bottom Bar: Continuous tubular shape, fab1icated from aluminum extrusion and finished [to match grille.

D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Aluminum. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-tometal contact and to minimize operational noise.

E. Hood: not required.

1. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Electlic G1ille Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Light duty, up to 10 cycles per hour 2. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or

industrial use. 3. Motor Exposure: Interior 4. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type. 5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic electric sensor edge on bottom bar 6. Control Station: Interior mounted



2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

G. Grille Finish:

A.

A.

B.

1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized

MATERIALS, GENERAL

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

Open-Curtain Grilles: Fabricate metal grille curtain as an open network of horizontal rods, spaced at regular intervals, that are interconnected with vertical links, which are fanned and spaced as indicated and are free to rotate on the rods.

Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous shape unless otherwise indicated, finished to match grille.

1. Astragal: Equip gr·ille bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.

2. Provide motor-operated grilles with combination bottom astragal and sensor edge.

C. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard shape having curtain gr·oove with retum lips or bars to retain curtain. Provide continuous integr·al wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise; with removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

A.

B.

1. Removable Posts and Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard.

ACCESSORIES

Push/Pull Handles: Equip push-up-operated or emergency-operated grille with lifting handles on each side of grille, finished to match gr·ille.

Pole Hooks: Provide pole hooks and poles for grilles more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high.

COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance gr·illes by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spting mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use gr·ease-sealed bearings or selflubticating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.



2.7

A.

B.

C.

ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS

General: Electric grille operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by grille manufacturer for grille and operation cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking grille, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Basis-ofDesign Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cornell

Ironworks M-100 electric operator for corridor locations or Cornell Ironworks Tube Motorized electric operator for counter locations.

2. Comply with NFPA 70. 3. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or de.

Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each grille.

Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Single phase. b. Volts: llSV. c. Hetiz: 60.

2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate grille in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

3. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Witing Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

D. Obstruction-Detection Device: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of grille opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward grille travel.

1. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

E. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact pushbutton controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button control labeled "Close."

1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with generalpurpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

F. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334-4


G. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights m compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

3.2

A.

INSTALLATION

Install overhead coiling grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment suppmis, according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

Power-Operated Grilles: Install automatic grille openers according to UL 325.

Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly, so that grilles operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

DEMONSTRATION

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles.




SECTION 08411 -ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and other Division-1 Specifications Sections apply to this Section.

B. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior and Interior storefront systems. 2. Exterior entrance systems. 3. Fixed windows. 4. Inte1ior door frames.


A. Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads and thennal and structural movements indicated without failure when suppmiing full dead loads and without framing members transfening stresses to glazing.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Load: IBC 2012. 2. Seismic Load: IBC 2012.

C. Structural Performance: Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads indicated.

1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 3/41nch (19 mm), whichever is smaller.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: When canying full dead load, not to exceed amount that reduces glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 118 inch (3 .2 mm).

D. Structural Testing: ASTM E 330 at 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures for duration required by design wind velocity without system evidencing material failures, structural distress, deflection failures, or pennanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span.

E. Air Infiltration: Limited to 0.06 ft. (0.3 Lis per sq. m) of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf:lsq. ft. (75.2 Pa).

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-1


F. Water Penetration: No water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design pressure but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa).

G. Temperature Change (Range): Accommodate 120 deg F (67 deg C) ambient and 180 deg F (! 00 deg C) material surfaces.

H. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Not less than 45 per AAMA 1503.1.

I. Average Thermal Conductance (U-Value): Not more than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.57 W/sq. m x K) per AAMA 1503.1.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1.4

1.5

A. Product Data: For each system indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation and attachments to other Work.

C.

D.

E.

A.

B.

A.

1. Prepare data based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

2. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and locations.

Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color required.

Sealant test reports.

Product test reports.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to A WS Dl.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

?reinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

WARRANTY

Special W ananty: Manufacturer's standard fonn in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace systems that fail in materials and worlananship within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond nonnal weathering. 4. Failure of operating components to function normally. 5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas.

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

2.2

2.3


B.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

A.

Basis-of-Design Product: The design for systems is based on Kawneer TriFab VG 450 system for interior locations and Kawneer TriFab VG 451 at exterior locations. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Butler Manufacturing Company; Vistawall Architectural Products. 2. International Aluminum Corporation; U.S. Aluminum. 3. Kawneer Company, Inc. 4. Tubelite Architectural Systems.

MATERIALS

Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) sheet; AST'M B 221 (ASTM B 221M) extrusions.

Glazing: Specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

Glazing Gaskets: Pressure-glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets with sealed corners, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

Gaskets, Sealants, and Joint Fillers:

1. For joints within framing system, as recommended in writing by manufacturer for joint type indicated.

2. For joints at perimeter of systems as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos, cold-applied asphalt mastic paint formulated for 30 mil (0.8-mn1) thickness per coat.

COMPONENTS

Aluminum Doors: 2~inch thick glazed doors with heavy wall, extruded tubular rail and stile members, mechanically fastened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods, and with snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops and prefonned gaskets.

1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.

a. Stile Design: Wide, S·inch width.

b. Bottom Rail: 10 inch minimum width.

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-3


2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and prefonned gaskets. Provide non-removable stops on outside of door.

B. Fasteners, Flashings, and Access01ies: Compatible with adjacent mate1ials, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, and non bleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. Hardware: 1. See Hardware Schedule Section 08710.

2.5 FRAMING SYSTEMS

2.6

2.7

A.

B.

Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 2. Glazing Plane: As indicated. 3. Provide Heavy Wall Frames at Doors.

Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonfenous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard conosion-resistant, nonstaining,

A.

B.

C.

D.

A.

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or tuming out from thennal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

FABRICATION

Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system.

Fabticate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exte1ior.

Doors and Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads and for hardware indicated. Cut, dtill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components.

Fact01y assemble framing and components to greatest extent possible. components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

ALUMINUM FINISHES

Color Anodic Finish: Class I, color anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.

1. Color: Clear Anodized.

Disassemble



PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

3.2

A.

INSTALLATION

Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive subsh·ates, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or ptimer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer.

Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the extetior.

Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing."

Install sealants at system butt joints and pe1imeter to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

Install framing components hue in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances:

1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 118 inch [n 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 114 inch (6 mm) over total length.

2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1116 inch (1.5 mm). For surfaces meeting at comers, limit offset to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to l/8 [nch (3 mm).

Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation.


Water Spray Test: After completing installation of each area, test system for water penetration according to AAMA 50 1.2.

1. Repair or remove and replace Work that fails or is damaged by testing; repair or replace to comply with requirements.




SECTION 08620 -UNIT SKYLIGHTS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A Section Includes:

1. New unit skylights mounted on curbs.


1.3

1.4

A Product Data: For each type of unit skylight indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting structure and other adjoining work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in a representative section of each unit skylight in manufacturer's standard size.

D. Product Schedule: For unit skylights.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A Qualification data.

B. Product test reports.

C. Field quality-control repmis.

D. Sample warranty.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Maintenance data.


A Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or exceed perfonnance requirements indicated and of documenting this perfonnance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08620- 1


1.6

C. Surface-Burning Characte1istics of Plastic Glazing: Provide plastic glazing sheets identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with approptiate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

D.

A.

1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F (343 deg C) or more for plastic sheets in thickness indicated when tested per ASTM D 1929.

2. Smoke-Production Characteristics: Comply with either requirement below:

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 84 on plastic sheets in manner indicated for use.

b. Smoke Density: 75 or less when tested per ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets in thickness indicated for use.

3. Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM D 635.

a. Acrylic Glazing: Class CC2, burning rate of 2~ 1/2 inches (64 mm) per minute or less for nominal thickness of 0.060 inch ( 1.5 mm) or thickness indicated for use.

b. Polycarbonate Glazing: Class CCI, burning extent of l inch (25 mm) or less for nominal thickness of 0. 060 inch (I. 5 mm) or thickness indicated for use.

Unit Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Perfonnance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of perfmmance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.

WARRANTY

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit skylights that fail in matetials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Wananty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

MANUFACTURERS

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, Kalwall S-Line 4" Thermally Broken Skylight with .14 U-Factor (7.14 RValue), or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Glazed Structures Inc. 2. Kalwall Corporation. 3. Major Industries.



2.2

A.

B.

2.3

A.

MATERIALS

Aluminum Components:

1. Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper to suit fonning operations and finish requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of alclad Alloy 3005-H25.

2. Extmded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper to suit stmctural and finish requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of Alloy 6063-T52.

Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other nonconosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened.

PANEL COMPONENTS

Face Sheets

1. Translucent faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thennoset resins, fonnulated specifically for architectural use. a. Thermoplastic (e.g. polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable.

2. Flammability of interior face sheets: a. Flamespread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic

unannounced retesting, with flamespread rating no greater than 50 and smoke developed no greater than 250 when tested in accordance with UL 723.

b. Bum extent by ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1 ". c. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame. d. Face sheets shall not delaminate when exposed to 200°F for 30 minutes per IBC and

NBC (300°F for 25 minutes per UBC and SBC). 3. Weatherability of exterior face sheets:

a. Color stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more than 3.0 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D-2244 after 5 years outdoor South Florida weathering at 5 degrees facing south, detennined by the average of at least three (3) white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching.

b. Erosion barrier: Exterior face shall have a permanent glass erosion batTier embedded beneath the surface to provide long-tenn resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure. Exterior face smface loss shall not exceed .7 mils and 40 mgs when tested in accordance with ASTM D-4060 employing CS 17 abrasive wheels at a head load of 500 grams for 1000 cycles. Sacrificial surface films or coatings are not acceptable erosion barriers.

4. Appearance: a. Exterior face sheets: Smooth, 0.070" thick and Crystal in color. b. Interior face sheets: Smooth, 0.045" thick and White in color. c. Face sheets shall not vary more than+/- 10% in thickness and be unifonn in color.

5. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand held pencil and repel an impact equal to 70 ft. lbs. without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4" diameter, 5 lb. free-falling ball per UL 972.

B. Grid Core



1. Aluminum I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-TS alloy and temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. Width of I- beam shall be no less than 7/16". The I-beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of not greater than+/- .002".

C. Laminate Adhesive

1. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25-years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives."

2. Minimum tensile strength of750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C-297 after two (2) exposures to six (6) cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D-1037.

3. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D-1002 after exposure to five (5) separate conditions: a. 50% Relative Humidity at 73° F: 540 PSI b. 182° F: 100 PSI c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1 037 at room temperature: 800 PSI d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1 037 at 182° F: 250 PSI e. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb by ASTM D-572: 1400 PSI

2.4 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking thennally broken (aluminum) !-beams. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat sharp edge.

1. Thickness: 4" 2. Light transmission: 20%. 3. Solar heat gain coefficient: 0.28 4. U-factor by NFRC certified laboratory: 0.14.

a. Complete insulated panel system shall have NFRC ce1iified U-factor. 5. Grid pattern: Nominal 12" x 24" shoji.

B. Panels shall deflect no more than 1.9" at 30 psf in 1 0' -0" span without a supporting frame by ASTME-72.

C. Panels shall withstand 1200°F fire for minimum one (1) hour without collapse or exterior flaming.

2.5 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM

A. Closure system: Extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-TS alloy and temper clamp-tite screw type closure system.

B. Sealing tape: Manufacturer's standard, pre-applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions.

UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08620-4


C. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners to the building.

D. Finish: Exposed aluminum to be manufacturer's factory applied finish that meets the perfmmance requirements of AAMA 2604.

1. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A.

B.

C.

D.

2.7

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, formulated for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coating.

Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondtying, nonmigrating sealant.

Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.

UNIT SKYLIGHTS

General: Provide factmy-assembled unit skylights that include glazing, extruded-aluminum glazing retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding perfonnance requirements indicated.

Curb: As indicated.

Unit Shape and Size: Rectangular, 4'x20' (field verify curb dimensions.)

Insulating factor: U factor of .14.

Provide 12" x 24" grid pattern

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

INSTALLATION

Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.

Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions for installing unit skylights.

Examine existing exterior caulking at all seams, joints, connections, and pressure bars. Remove and replace with silicone sealant as required.



3.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.


Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but before installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 50 1.2.

Perfonn test for total area of each unit skylight.

Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance ofreplaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

Renovations to Simms Municipal Building City of Amarillo

SECTION 08710- DOOR HARDWARE

A. This Section includes the following:

1 . Commercial door hardware. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware.

B. See Division 8 door sections for astragals and door silencers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, including wiring diagrams.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish.

D. Product certificates, test reports.

E. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the superv1s1on of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame.

2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.

3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer.

4) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.

08710- 1


A. Installer Qualifications: manufacturer.

An employer of workers trained and approved by lock

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

C. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252, UBC Standard 7-2.

1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1 016 mm) or less above the sill.

E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system.

F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1. Owners representative to be designated in keying meeting.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

08710-2

B. replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: one year from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:

a. Exit Devices: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Lever Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Door Hardware: none required 2. Electrical Parts: none required

PART 2 · PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.

2.2 HINGES, GENERAL

A. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Exterior Hinges: Steel with steel Pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin.

08710-3

C. Non removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and outswinging corridor doors with locks.

D. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal

doors, wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

2.3 HINGES

A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A 156.1.

B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A 156.7.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI). 2. Hager Companies (HAG). 3. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 4. PBB, Inc. (PBB). 5. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).

2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than '15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

C. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: NZD Die Cast Zinc w/wrought brass or bronze rose.

D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors.

E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches ('70 mrn), unless otherwise indicated.

F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following:

08710 .. 4

1. Bored Locks: BHMA A 156.2.

B. Bored Locks: BHMA A 156.2 Grade 1 , Series 4000.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).

b. (No Substitutions)

2.6 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3 Grade 1

B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (2 2 N).

C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 1 S lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

F. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3.

G. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested.

H. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder. Material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Manufacturers:

1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 2. (No Substitutions)

2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5 Grade 1.

08710-5

B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Six.

C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; with interchangeable removable cores.

D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:

1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.

F. Manufacturers:

1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY group company (CR).

2. (No Substitutions).

2.8 KEYING

A. Keying System: Complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference in master, grand master, or greatgrand master key system as required. 1. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing Corbin Russwin H3 system (800

Series I.C. cores). 2. All cylinders to be Zero bitted and keyed by City Personnel.

B. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide two cylinder change keys.

2.9 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM (Not Used)

DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6

2.10 OPERATING TRIM

A. Standard: BHMA A 156.6.

B. Materials: Fabricate from brass, bronze or stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 2. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 3. Hager Companies (HAG). 4. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 5. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 6. Trimco (TBM).

2 .11 CLOSERS

A. Accessibility Requirements: requirements:

Comply with the following maximum opening-force

1. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 2. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 1\1) applied parallel to door at latch. 3. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width.

C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

D. Surface Closers: BHMA A 1 56.4 Grade 1. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

(CR). b. (No Substitutions)

2.12 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Size: 'I --'1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets.

B. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from material indicated in door hardware sets.

1. Material: 0.050-inch (1.3 .. mm .. ) thick. 2. Manufacturers:

a. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). b. Hager Companies (HAG). c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

08710- 7

d. McKinney Products Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM ). f. Trimco (TBM).

C. Plastic Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled 4 sides; fabricated from material indicated in door hardware sets.

1. Plastic Laminate: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick; NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 2. Rigid Plastic: 0.060-inch- ('1.5-mm-) thick, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic. 3. Acrylic: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick. 4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Balco Inc. (BAL). b. Construction Specialties, Inc.; a CIS Group company (CS). c. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of lnPro Corporation (IPC). d. Korogard Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of RJF International Corporation

(KWS). e. Paw ling Corporation (PAW).

2.13 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A 156.16, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.

1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.

B. Silencers for Door Frames: BHMA A 156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

C. Manufacturers: 1. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 2. Hager Companies (HAG). 3. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 4. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 5. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 6. Trimco (TBM).

2.14 DOOR GASKETING

A. Standard: BHMA A156.22.

B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

08710-8

C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

G. Manufacturers:

1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 5. Reese Enterprises (RE).

2.15 THRESHOLDS

A. Standard: BHMAA156.21.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 'l /2 inch (13 mm) high.

C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 'I /2 inch (13 mm) high.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 5. Reese Enterprises (RE).

2.16 FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.

B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flathead screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire-rated applications.

08710-9

C. Finishes: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A 115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied door hardware according to ANSI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A 115-W Series.

C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI' s "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI' s "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."

3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

E. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

G. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

08710-10

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS:

Hardware Set 01

Pr. Doors # 1 0 1 A

01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA.

01 EA. 01 EA. 05 EA. 02 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA. 01 SET 02 EA.

01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge KCFM83HD x # 12 Tek (verify w/door supplier) Pemko Continuous Hinge KCFM83HD x QC8 x ACC x # 12 Tek (verify W/dr. supplier Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x K157(CT6) x M52(CT6) x M91 x M94 X 630C Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x K157(CT6) x M52(CT6) x 630C Corbin/Russwin Removeable Mull 907BKM(CT6) x M57 x 600 Corbin/Russwin IC Cores 8000 x 626 Rockwood Offset Pulls BF158C17HD x US32DMS Corbin/Russwin Power Control Unit 782-120 Norton Power Operator 6060RF x 689 Norton Actuator 533 (Location as directed by Architect) Norton Actuator 531 @Switch Post Norton Switch Post# 530 (Location as directed by Architect) Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC821 O-A11-754F25-M54-M72-M77-M85 -689 Pemko Threshold 170A x DW Weatherstripping • By Door Supplier Pemko Door Sweeps- 307 AV x DW

Card Reader (Furnished by Security Contractor)

Hardware Set 02

Pr. Doors # 1 0 1 B Each shall have:

02 EA. 02 EA. 02 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinges KCFM83HD x # 12 Tek (verify w/door supplier) Corbin/Russwin Dummy Push Bars ED5000D8 x 630C Rockwood Offset Pulls 8F158C17HD x US32DMS Norton Power Operator 6010 RF x 689 Norton Actuator 533 (Location as directed by Architect) Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC8230-754F25-M54-M72-689

Hardware Set 03

Sgl. Doors# 1 002A, 10028,10038 Each shall have:

Reuse Existing Finish Hardware

08710-11

Hardware Set 04

Sgl. Doors# 102,1 09C,205,244,262 Each shall have:

01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA. 01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge CFM83HD x # 12 Tek x% WS Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x N957 x CT6 x 630C Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 HES Electric Strike 9600 x 2004M x 2005M3 x 630 Power Supply ( Furnished by Security Contractor) Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A3-597F58-M54-M72-M78-M85 -689 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630 Card Reader (Furnished by Security Contractor)

Hardware Set 05

Sgl. Doors # 103 Each shall have:

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Privacy Locks CL3320-NZD-626C Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x US32D Rockwood Mop Plate K1050 4" x 2" LDW x WS x US32D Rockwood Mop Plate K1 050 4" x 1" LDW x WS x US32D

Hardware Set 06

Sgl. Doors# 105,106,264,265 Each shall have:

01 EA. 01 SET 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge CFM83HD x # 12 Tek x% WS Rockwood Pull Plate Set 111 x 73C/73Clx US32DMS Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC8230-M54-M72-689 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x US32D Rockwood Kickplate K1050 10" x 2" LDW x WS x US32D Rockwood Mop Plate K1 050 4" x 1" LDW x WS x US32D

Hardware Set 07

Sgl. Doors# 107,109A,1098,155 Each shall have:

01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA. 01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge CFM83HD x # 12 Tek x% WS Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x N955 x CT6 x 630C Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A3-597F58-M54-M72-M 78-M85 -689 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630 Rockwood Kickplate K1 050 1 0" x 2" LDW x WS x US32D

08710-12

Hardware Set 08

Sgl. Doors# 108, 110 Each shall have:

06 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 02 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 02 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714NRP 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3357-NZD-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Rockwood Flushbolts 555-12" x 626 Rockwood Dustproof Strike 570 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A1-M 54-M72-M78-689 @active leaf Rockwood Mop Plates K1 050 4" x 1" LDW x WS x US32D

Hardware Set 09

Sgl. Doors # 112,263,266,274 Each shall have:

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3357-NZD-M21-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC6200-M54-M72-689 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630 Rockwood Kickplate K1 050 1 0" x 2" LDW x WS x US32D

Hardware Set 1 0

Sgl. Doors# 114,115,119,124,127,129,132C,138,140,142,144,148,151,208,217,218, 219,220,221,222,225,235,237,242,245,246,247,248,249,255,261 ,275A,27 58 Each shall have:

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Passage Lock CL3310-NZD-626 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630

Hardware Set 11

Sgl. Doors# 116, 132A Each shall have:

01 EA. 01 EA. 02 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge KCFM83HD x # 12 Tek (verify w/door supplier) Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x K157(CT6) x M52(CT6) x 630C Corbin/Russwin IC Cores 8000 x 626 Rockwood Offset Pull BF158C17HD x US32DMS HES Electric Strike 9600 x 2004M x 2005M3 x 630 Power Supply ( Furnished by Security Contractor) Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A3-597F58-M54-M72-M78-M85 -689 Card Reader (Furnished by Security Contractor)

08710-13

Hardware Set 12

Sgl. Doors# 120,121,131,136,146 Each shall have:

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3355-NZD-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630

Hardware Set 13


03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 set

McKinney Butts TA2714NRP 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3357-NZD-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC6210-A4-M54-M72-689 Pemko Smoke Gasketing S88D17

Hardware Set 14

Sgi.Doors #1328 Each shall have:

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714NRP 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL33 57 -NZD-CT6-M 21-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A4-M54-M72-M78-M85 -689

Hardware Set 15

O.H. Doors # 133A, 1338, 133C,201A,201 8 Each shall have:

01 EA. 01 EA.

Key Switch- By Coiling Door Supplier Corbin/Russwin Mortise Cylinder 1 080-114-A02 x 626 (verify cylinder type, length, cam w/Coiling Door Supplier

Hardware Set 16

Sgl. Doors # 135,2738 Each shall have:

08710-14

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714NRP 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3355-NZD-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-M54-M72-M78-M85 -689

Hardware Set 17

Sgl. Doors# 149,150 Each shall have:

01 EA. 01 SET 01 EA.

01 EA. 01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge CFM83HD x # 12 Tek x% WS Rockwood Pull Plate Set 111 x 73C/73CL x US32DMS Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A3-M54-M72-M78-M85 -689 Rockwood Kickplate K1050 10" x 2" LOW x WS x US32D Rockwood Mop Plate K1 050 4" x 1" LOW x WS x US32D

Hardware Set 18

Pr. Doors# 156A Each shall have:

01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA.

01 EA. 01 EA. 05 EA. 02 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA. 01 SET 02 EA. 01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge KDFM83HD x # 12 Tek (verify w/door supplier) Pemko Continuous Hinge KDFM83HD x QC8 x ACC x # 12 Tek (verify W/dr. supplier Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x K157(CT6) x M52(CT6) x M91 x M94 x 613E Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x K157(CT6) x M52(CT6) x 613E Corbin/Russwin Removeable Mull 907BKM(CT6) x M57 x 600 Corbin/Russwin IC Cores 8000 x 606 Rockwood Offset Pulls BF158C17HD x 613E Corbin/Russwin Power Control Unit 782-120 Norton Power Operator 6060RF x 690 Norton Actuator 533 (Location as directed by Architect) Norton Actuator 531 @ Switch Post Norton Switch Post# 530 (Location as directed by Architect) Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC821 O-A11-754F25-M54-M72-M77-M85 -690 Pemko Threshold 1700 x DW Weatherstripping - By Door Supplier Pemko Door Sweeps- 307DV x OW Card Reader (Furnished by Security Contractor)

08710-15

Hardware Set 19

Pr. Doors# 1568 Each shall have:

02 EA. 02 EA. 02 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinges KDFM83HD x # 12 Tek {verify w/door supplier) Corbin/Russwin Dummy Push Bars ED5000DB x 613E Rockwood Offset Pulls BF158C17HD x 613E Norton Power Operator 601 ORF x 690 Norton Actuator 533 {Location as directed by Architect) Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC8230-754F25-M54-M72-690

Hardware Set 20


03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Passage Lock CL331 0-NZD-626 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A4-M 54-M72-M78-M85 -689 Rockwood Kickplate K1 050 1 0" x 2" LOW x WS x US320

Hardware Set 21

Sgl. Doors# 206A,206B,207 Each shall have:

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714NRP 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x N957 x CT6 x M21 x 630C Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A3-M54-M72-M78-M85-689

Hardware Set 22

Sgl. Doors # 209,210,211 ,212,227 ,230,232,238,250,2 51 ,252,2 54,258,260,276,278, 280,281 Each shall have:

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3351-NZD-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630

08710-16

Hardware Set 23

Sgl. Doors # 214,231 Each shall have:

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 SET

McKinney Butts TA2714 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3357-NZD-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC6200-M54-M72-689 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630 Rockwood Kickplate K1 050 1 0" x 2" LDW x WS x US32D Pemko Smoke Gasketing S88D17

Hardware Set 24

Sgl. Doors# 233,234 Each shall have:

01 EA. 01 SET 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge CFM83HD x # 12 Tek x% WS Rockwood Pull Plate Set 111 x 73C/73CL x US32DMS Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC8230-M54-M72-689 Rockwood Kickplate K1050 10" x 2" LDW x WS x US32D Rockwood Mop Plate K1 050 4" x 1" LDW x WS x US32D

Hardware Set 25


03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714 4 % x 4 % x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3357-NZD-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 HES Electric Strike 8000-LBM x 2004M x 2005M3 x 630 Power Supply ( Furnished by Security Contractor) Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC6200-M54-M72-689 Rockwood Kickplate K1 050 1 0" x 2" LDW x WS x US32D Card Reader (Furnished by Security Contractor)

Hardware Set 26


03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 SET

McKinney Butts TA2714 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3357-NZD-M21-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC6200-M54-M72-689 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630 Rockwood Kickplate K1 050 1 0" x 2" LDW x WS x US32D Pemko Smoke Gasketing S88D17

08710-17

Hardware Set 27

Sgl. Doors# 270 Each shall have:

03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714NRP 4 '12 x 4 '12 x US26D Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x N957 x CT6 x 630C Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A4-M54-M72-M78-M85-689 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630 Rockwood Kickplate K1 050 1 0" x 2" LOW x WS x US32D

Hardware Set 28


01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge CFM83HD x # 12 Tek x '12 WS Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x N957 x CT6 x 630C Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 HES Electric Strike 9600 x 2004M x 2005M3 x 630 Power Supply ( Furnished by Security Contractor) Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A3-M54-M72-M78-M85-689 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630 Rockwood Kickplate K1 050 1 0" x 2" LOW x WS x US32D Card Reader (Furnished by Security Contractor)

Hardware Set 29


03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714NRP 4 '12 x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Lockset CL3355-NZD-CT6-626 Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A4-597F58-M54-M72-M78-M85 -689 Rockwood Wall Stop 409 x 630 Rockwood Kickplate K1 050 1 0" x 2" LOW x WS x US32D

08710-18

Hardware Set 30


01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

01 EA.

Pemko Continuous Hinge CFM83HD x # 12 Tek x% WS Corbin/Russwin Rim Exit Device ED5200S x N957 x CT6 x 630C Corbin/Russwin IC Core 8000 x 626 HES Electric Strike 9600 x 2004M x 2005M3 x 630 Power Supply ( Furnished by Security Contractor) Corbin/Russwin Door Closer DC621 O-A3-597F58-M54-M72-M78-M85 -689 Card Reader (Furnished by Security Contractor)

Hardware Set 31


03 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA. 01 EA.

McKinney Butts TA2714 4% x 4% x US26D Corbin/Russwin Cylindrical Privacy Lock CL3320-NZD-626C Rockwood Overhead Stop OH1 003S x US32D Rockwood Mop Plate K1 050 4" x 2" LDW x WS x US32D Rockwood Mop Plate K1 050 4" x 1" LOW x WS x US32D

END OF SECTION

08710-19


SECTION 08800 - GLAZING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Storefront framing. 2. Glazed entrances. 3. Doors.


A. Design: Design glass ICC's 2012 International Building Code using the following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: IBC 2012. 2. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential

shading within individual glass lites.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recmmnendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. 2.

GLAZING

GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Nmih American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

08800- 1


B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Pennanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with approptiate certification label ofiGCC.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Wananty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that detetiorate within specified wananty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from nonnal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of detetioration in coating.

1. W ananty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Wananty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified wananty period. Detetioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under nonnal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a mtmmum. Provide glass lites m thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Thennal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with perfonnance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1.

2.

GLAZING

U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

08800- 2


3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

C. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG Industries "SOLARBAN 60 Solar Control Low-E Glass- SOLARGRA Y + SOLARBAN 60(3) Clear" or comparable product by one of the following: a. Pilkington North America. b. PPG Industries, Inc.

2. Tint Color: Gray. 3. Visible Light Transmittance: 35 percent minimum.

2.3 INSULATING GLASS


1. Pilkington Nmih America.

2. PPG Industries, Inc.

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

2.4 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made fi·om one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain wateriight seal.

GLAZING 08800- 3


2.5

A.

B.

2.6

A.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

GLAZING SEALANTS

General:

I. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

GLAZING TAPES

Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications m which tape is subject to continuous

pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

2.7

A.

B.

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.

MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

GLAZING 08800-4


2.8

C.

D.

E.

F.

A.

Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fireprotection rating indicated.

MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

Glass Type : Tinted heat-strengthened float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Glass Type : Tinted fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.9 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type : Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted heat-strengthened float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 35 percent minimum. 8. Provide safety glazing labeling. 9. Color: PPG Indushies "SOLARBAN SOLARGRA Y".

2.10 GLAZING FILMS

A. Saint-Gobain Solar Gard interior decorative films.

1. Architect to select from full range of textures and pattems.

GLAZING 08800- 5


PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

GLAZING, GENERAL

Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair perfonnance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as detennined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless othetwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at comers of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

GLAZING 08800- 6


F.

G.

3.3

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

3.4

A.

B.

C.

3.5

A.

Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by insetiing dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings.

Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit opemngs exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press finnly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets fanned and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recmmnended by gasket manufacturer.

Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant perfonnance.

Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpennanent labels and clean surfaces.

GLAZING 08800- 7


B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.


GLAZING 08800- 8


SECTION 09111- NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

2.2

A.

B.

A.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide mate1ials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 119.

STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested m assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413.

FRAMING SYSTEMS

Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges, installed with studs fliction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due to deflection of structure above.

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1


a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series. 4) Superior Metal Ttim; Supetior Flex Track System (SFT). 5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.

C. Firestop Tracks: Manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the stmcture while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; m thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. b. Grace Constmction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings].

E. Resilient Funing Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: hat shaped.

F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch ( 1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with mmnnum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- ( 1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.

C. Can-ying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.



D. Furring Channels (Funing Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch ( 19 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: hat shaped.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, matetial, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Sttip at Exterior Walls: Provide asphalt saturated organic felt or foam gasket.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

3.2

A.


Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.



3.3

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead suppotts. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

E.

A.

B.

c.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two metal studs at each jamb with two nested fire treated wood studs unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. Extend nested wood stud jamb framing full height of metal stud framing.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.

Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of suppotting structural or suspension system.



a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 118 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.




SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1

A.

1.2

A.

B.

SUMMARY

Section Includes:

1. Intetior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Texture finishes.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product.

Samples:

1. Textured Finishes: 24" X 24" for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

2.2

A.


Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ametican Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. P ABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland.

GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 1


8. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; W onderboard. b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker. c. National Gypsum Company, Pennabase Cement Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm). 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.

C. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 2


C.

2.6

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

2.7

A.

B.

Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use fonnulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS

Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or JOmt compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

Thennal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

TEXTURE FINISHES

Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; ToughRock Ceiling TexturesNenniculite. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated).

2. Texture: See finish schedule.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

Comply with ASTM C 840.

Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

Isolate pe1imeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partltwns at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge t1im where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

Install t1im with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's w1itten instructions. 1. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.

GYPSUM BOARD 09250-3


E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTMC 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Where heavy texture (spray or hand applied) finish required prior to final

painting as indicated on Finish Schedule. 4. Level4: Where flat paints or light textures, or wall coverings are required as indicated

on the Finish Schedule. Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Level 5: Where gloss, semi-gloss, or enamel flat paints are indicated on Finish Schedule, or critical lighting condition occurs around skylights, indirect cove lighting or otherwise indicated. Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface where indicated .

H. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply ptimer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a unifonn texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

I. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged dming drywall application.

J. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


GYPSUM BOARD 09250-4


SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic Tile. 2. Porcelain Tile 3. Colored grout as selected by Architect.



B. Samples:

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for

each color and finish required. 3. Color selections for each grout.

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Fumish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Fumish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

CERAMIC TILE 09310- 1


PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

A.

TILE PRODUCTS

ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

C. Porcelain and Ceramic Tiles: Square-edged flat tile as follows.

A.

A.

A.

B.

1. The "Basis-of-Design" is the product manufacturers and the product names as listed on the "Room Finish Schedule" and on drawings.

SETTING MATERIALS

Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Laticrete

International, Inc. X254" or "Ardex Engineered Cements X77"

2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

GROUT MATERIALS

Sand Grout: (to be used at all wall and floor tile) 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "ARDEX

FL- Rapid Set, Flexible, Sanded Grout"

ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; TypeS; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; fonnulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. b. c. d. e.

DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Coming 786. GE Silicones, a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.

CERAMIC TILE 09310-2


2.5

A.

f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White. g. Ardex Engineered Cements, SX Silicon Sealant

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based fonnulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

a. Ardex Engineered Cements or similar

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

3.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

3.3

A.

EXAMINATION

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting perfmmance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are finn, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A1 08.01 for installations indicated.

PREPARATION

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recmmnended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A1 08.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per f(Jot (1 :50) toward drains.

Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

Grind slabs to receive tile with terrazzo grinder equipped with coarse stone.

INSTALLATION

Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation

CERAMIC TILE 09310-3


3.4

methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. b. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B. Provide perimeter expansion joints at all wall-to-wall installations according to the TCNA Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation detail EJ-171.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless othetwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately fonn intersections and retums. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattem unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless othetwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless othetwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

H.

I.

A.

1. Porcelain Wall Tile: (verify with the Architect).

Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

Intetior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Tile Installation Fl13: Thin-set mortar; TCA F113.

a. Thin-Set Mmiar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Sand-pmiland cement grout.


CERAMIC TILE 09310- 4


SECTION 09402- RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes thin-set, epoxy-resin tenazzo flooring.



B. Shop Drawings: Include tenazzo installation requirements. Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other work.





A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer who is a contractor member ofNTMA.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instmctions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting tenazzo installation.

B. Control and collect water and dust produced by grinding operations. Protect adjacent constmction from detrimental effects of grinding operations.

RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09402- 1


PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

2.2

A.


NTMA Standards: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" and with written recommendations for terrazzo type indicated unless more stringent requirements are specified.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Terrazzo floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

C.

A.

Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the Califomia Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO

Epoxy-Resin Terrazzo: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" and manufacturer's written instructions for matrix and aggregate proportions and mixing.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

a. Crossfield Products Corp., Dex-0-Tex Division; Terrazzo. b. General Polymers Corporation; Terrazzo 1100. c. Key Resin Company; Key Epoxy Tetnzzo. d. Master Tenazzo Technologies LLC; Morricite. e. Quadrant Chemical Corporation; Quadset Epoxy Tenazzo. f. TEC Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; Tuff-Lite Epoxy Terrazzo. g. Tenazzo & Marble Supply Companies; Terroxy Resin Systems.

2. Thickness: [3/8 inch nominal. 3. Mix Color and Pattem: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors

B. Matetials:

1. Flexible Reinforcing Membrane: Manufacturer's resinous membrane with fiberglass scrim for substrate-crack preparation and reflective-crack reduction.

2. Primer: Manufacturer's product recommended for substrate and use indicated 3. Moisture/ Vapor Barrier: Manufacturer's product recommended for substrate 4. Epoxy-Resin Matrix: Manufacturer's standard recommended for use indicated and

in color required for mix indicated.

a. Physical Properties without Aggregates:

1) Hardness: 60 to 85 per ASTM D 2240, Shore D. 2) Minimum Tensile Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) per ASTM D 638 for a 2-

inch (51-mm) specimen made using a "C" die per ASTM D 412.

RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09402-2


3) Minimum Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi (6.9 MPa) per ASTM D 695, Specimen B cylinder.

4) Chemical Resistance: No deleterious effects by contaminants listed below after seven-day immersion at room temperature per ASTM D 1308.

a) Distilled water. b) Mineral water. c) Isopropanol. d) Ethanol. e) 0.025 percent detergent solution. f) 1.0 percent soap solution. g) 10 percent sodium hydroxide. h) 10 percent hydrochloric acid. i) 30 percent sulfuric acid. j) 5 percent acetic acid.

b. Physical Properties with Aggregates: For resin blended with Georgia white marble, ground, grouted, and cured per requirements in NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide"; comply with the following:

1) Flammability: Self-extinguishing, maximum extent of burning 114 inch (6.35 mm) per ASTM D 635.

2) Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 0.0025 inch/inch per deg F (0.0025 mm/mm per 0.5556 deg C) for temperature range of minus 12 to plus 140 deg F (minus 24 to plus 60 deg C) per ASTM D 696.

5. Aggregates: Comply with NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated and contain no deleterious or foreign matter.

a. Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Less than 40 percent loss per ASTM C 131. b. 24-Hour Absorption Rate: Less than 0.75 percent. c. Dust Content: Less than 1.0 percent by weight.

6. Finishing Grout: Resin based.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Stair Treads and Risers: Provide Wausau Tile E-31 precast epoxy tenazzo combination tread and risers as indicated. Color as indicated in Finish Schedule.

B. Abrasive Strips: Three-line abrasive inserts at nosings. Silicon carbide or aluminum oxide, or combination of both, in epoxy-resin binder and set in channel. 1. Width: 1/2 inch (12.7 2. Depth: As required by terrazzo thickness. 3. Length: Tread length less 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Color: Black



2.4 STRIP MATERIALS

2.5

A. Thin-Set Divider Strips: L-type angle, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) deep.

1. Material: Aluminum 2. Top Width: 118 inch (3,2 mm)

B. Heavy-Top Divider Strips: L-type angle in depth required for topping thickness indicated.

1. Bottom-Section Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Top-Section Material: Aluminum 3. Top-Section Width: 1/8 inch (3,2 mm)

C. Control-Joint Strips: Separate, double L-type angles, positioned back to back, that match material and color of divider strips and in depth required for topping thickness indicated.

D. Accessory Strips: Match divider-strip width, material, and color unless otherwise indicated.

A.

Use the following types of accessory strips as required to provide a complete installation:

1. Base-bead strips for exposed top edge of terrazzo base. 2. Edge-bead strips for exposed edges of terrazzo. 3. Nosings for tenazzo stair treads and landings.

MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

Strip Adhesive: Epoxy-resin adhesive recommended by adhesive manufacturer for this use.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Strip Anchoring Devices: Provide mechanical anchoring devices or adhesives for strip materials as recommended by manufacturer and required for secure attachment to substrate.

C. Patching and Fill Material: Terrazzo manufacturer's resinous product approved and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

D. Joint Compound: Tenazzo manufacturer's resinous product approved and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

E. Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 10 that is biodegradable, phosphate free, and recommended by sealer manufacturer for use on tenazzo type indicated.

F. Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically neutral; does not affect terrazzo color or physical properties; is recommended by sealer manufacturer; and complies with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for terrazzo type indicated

RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09402-4


1. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 according to ASTM D 2047. 2. Acid-Base Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10. 3. Sealers shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

3.2

A.

B.

PREPARATION

Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, and curing compounds, that might impair tenazzo bond. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for tenazzo application.

Concrete Slabs:

1. Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with tenazzo.

a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.

b. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to tenazzo manufacturer's written recommendations. Install flexible reinforcing membrane at substrate cracks in areas to receive terrazzo.

c. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to terrazzo manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.

A.

B.

C.

1. Moisture Testing: Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by terrazzo manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO INSTALLATION

Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for tenazzo and accessory installation.

Place according to manufacturer's written instructions and NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide."

Installation Tolerance: Limit variation in tenazzo surface from level to 114 inch in Hl feet mm in 3m); noncumulative.

D. Primer: Apply to tenazzo substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strip Materials:

1. Divider and Control-Joint Strips:



3.3

F.

A.

a. Locate divider ships in locations indicated b. Install control-joint ships - Submit a recommended control joint plan in

conjunction with indicated pattern for approval by architect. c. Install control-joint strips with (6.4-mm)] gap between strips, and install

sealant in gap. d. Install strips in adhesive setting bed without voids below sttips, or mechanically

anchor strips as required to attach sttips to substrate, as recmrunended by strip manufacturer.

2. Accessmy Strips: Install as required to provide a complete installation 3. Abrasive Strips: Install with surface of abrasive sttip positioned 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)

higher than terrazzo smface.

Repair: Cut out and replace tenazzo areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate. Cut out tenazzo areas in panels defined by strips and replace to match adjacent terrazzo, or repair panels according to NTMA's written recommendations, as approved by Architect.


Cleaning:

1. Remove grinding dust from installation and adjacent areas. 2. Wash surfaces with cleaner according to NTMA's written recommendations and

manufacturer's written instructions; tinse smfaces with water and allow them to dry thoroughly.

B. Sealing:

1. Seal surfaces according to NTMA's wtitten recommendations. 2. Apply sealer according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure that terrazzo is without damage or detetioration at time of Substantial Completion.




SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

B. Acoustical clouds.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product test repmis.

B. Evaluation reports.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-1


B.

C.

2.3

A.

Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

ACOUSTICAL PANELS

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product as Cirrus High-NRC No. 563, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary ofUSG Corporation.

B. Classification: Type III.

C.

D.

E.

F.

2.4

A.

B.

2.5

A.

1. Fonn: 1.

Color: As indicated on drawings

Edge/Joint Detail: Square sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members.

Thickness: 7/8 inch

Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches and 24 by 48 inches or as indicated on drawings

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM -

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Prelude 15/16" grid- white, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Atmstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary ofUSG Corporation.

Roll-Fonned, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

CUSTOM PERIMETER TRIM

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Product/Manufacturer: Axiom-Classic Custom Perimeter Trim; Armstrong World Industries, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Al1nstrong World Industries, Inc.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-2


2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary ofUSG Corporation.

B. Components: Edge trim system for suspended ceiling system, extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel, 1 0 foot straight or curved profiles to minimum (24 inches for 2 through 8 inch high).

1. Axiom Trim Channel: (4") wide face with 3/4 inch horizontal legs, straight sections with special bosses fmmed for attachment to the Axiom tee-bar connection clip or hanging clip; cmmnercial quality, extruded aluminum, factory-finished in COLOR AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM MANUFACTURERS STANDARD RANGE OF COLORS.

2. Accessories: a. Hanging clip, commercial quality aluminum, unfinished, used to align grid

members that extend beyond the lower edge of the trim. b. Hanging clip, commercial quality aluminum, unfinished, used when suspension

wires must be attached directly to the trim sections. c. Splice with set screws, galvanized steel, unfinished, used to attached factory

mitered inside comers d. Splice with set screws, galvanized steel, unfinished, used to attach joints between

sections oftrim. e. T-bar Connector Clip, galvanized steel, unfinished, used to attach channel trim to

supporting suspension members. f. Perimeter Trim Hold Down Clip used to secure cut edges of metal panels at the

Axiom trim.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

INSTALLATION

Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

2. CAULK CEILING WALL ANGLE TO WALL FINISH FOR APPEARANCE.


ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3


SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. PREMIUM VINYL WOOD PLANK



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.


1.4

1.5


A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

A.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile.

Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFP A 25 3 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. em.

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PREMIUM VINYL WOOD PLANK

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: Artistek Forestwood II .120" (3 mm) gauge and 4" x 36" (101.6 mm x 914 mm) minimum size, color and style stated with urethane coating including ceramic bead finish. See Finish Schedule

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A.

B.

Trowelab1e Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated or loose laid according to manufacturer's requirements.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

PREPARATION

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perfmm tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perfonn anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg ofwater/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a unifonn and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 2


E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

3.3

A.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis or as otherwise indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or defonned tiles.

D.

E.

F.

G.

A.

B.

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction or as othetwise indicated.

Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and pennanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates in strict adherence to manufacturer's instructions.


Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.


RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651- 3


SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattem required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As detennined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W /sq. em.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653- 1


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job fonned.

G. Inside Corners: Job fonned.

H. Colors and Patterns: See Finish Schedule

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

2.3

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

A.

Resilient Molding Accessory:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Annstrong

Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering.

Material: Rubber.

Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.

Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

INSTALLATION MATERIALS

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based fonnulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer.



PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

3.2

A.

PREPARATION

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dty and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recmmnended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer[ and as follows].

Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perfonn anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg ofwater/92.9 sq. m) in24 hours.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a unifonn and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

E.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

l. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other petmanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each p1ece, with base 111

continuous contact with horizontal and vettical substrates.

Do not stretch resilient base during installation.



3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.




SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile.

1.2 PREINST ALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Type of subfloor. 3. Type of installation. 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Pattern type, location, and direction. 6. Pile direction.



A. Product test repmis.

B. Sample walTanty.




A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

CARPET TILE 09681- 1


B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Comply with CRI 104.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Wananty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified wananty period.

1. W ananty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but arc not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of face fiber, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

2.2

A.

B.

CARPET TILE

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings and in the Room Finish Schedule in these Specifications. Any proposed substitution must be pre-approved by the Architect prior to bidding:

1. Installation: See Floor Finish Plan and Field verify with Architect.

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

Adhesives (unless loose laid according to Manufacturer's recommendations): Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

CARPET TILE 09681 -2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

INSTALLATION

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile perfonnance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been conected.

Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

Installation Method: Partial glue down; install periodic tiles with releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive.

G. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

H. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

I. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. ·

K. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

L. Perfmm the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes usmg cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yams that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

M. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."


CARPET TILE 09681 - 3


SECTION 09912- PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and other Division-! Specifications Sections apply to this Section.

B. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of all exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.


A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.

1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least I 00 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). 2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 cleg F (7 cleg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F ( 10 and 32 deg C).

C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 cleg C).

D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 cleg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912- 1


A. Fumish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra matetials to Owner.

1. Quantity: 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

2.2

2.3

A.

MANUFACTURERS

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown m parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

A.

B.

C.

D.

A.

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. ICI Paint Stores, Inc. (Dulux Paint). 3. Kelly-Moore Paint Co. (Kelly-Moore). 4. Porter Paints (Porter). 5. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 6. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).

PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

Mate1ial Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

Mate1ial Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory fmmulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

Colors: Match Architect's samples.

No paint containing lead is pennitted.

PREPARATORY COATS

Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.

B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in w1iting by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.



1. Fenous-Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust-inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. Where manufacturer does not recmrunend a separate ptimer fmmulation on substrate

indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.

C. Interior Primer: Intetior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and recmrunended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.

1. Fenous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. Where manufacturer does not recmrunend a separate primer fmmulation on substrate

indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.

2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint:

1. Benjamin Moore; Mom·craft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185. 2. Coronado; 408-Line Supreme Acrylic Satin Exterior. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Satin

Finish. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1245 Aery-Velvet Exterior Low Sheen Acrylic Finish. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2000 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Satin--Acrylic Latex. 6. Sherwin-Williams; A-1 00 Exterior Latex Satin House & Ttim Paint A82 Seties.

B. Extetior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28. 2. Coronado; 80 Line Rust Scat Acrylic Latex High Gloss Enamel. 3. Dulux Paint; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interim'/Extetior Acrylic Gloss Finish. 4. Kelly-Moore; 5780 DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-300 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance

Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels. 6. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Actylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66Wl00 Series.

2.5 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274. 2. Coronado; 30-Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Eggshell Enamel. 3. Dulux Paint; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim

Enamel. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1610 Sat-N-Sheen Interior Latex Low Sheen Wall and Trim Finish. 5. Kelly-Moore; 1686 Dura-Poxy Eggshell Acrylic Enamel. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel. 7. Shetwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W200 Series.

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-3


B. Interior Full-Gloss Urethane Enamel for Concrete, Concrete Block, Drywall, Wood, and similar surfaces: 1. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Cati-Coat HS, B65-400 Series, gloss urethane enamel. 2. Sherwin-Williams; Hi-Solids Polyurethane, B65-300 Series, gloss polyurethane enamel.

C. Interior Full-Gloss Urethane Enamel for metal and similar surfaces: 1. Sherwin-Williams; Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy Primer. 2. Sherwin-Williams; Hi-Solids Polyurethane, B65-300 Series, gloss polyurethane enamel.

D. Interior Alkyd Dry Fog for Decks and Overhead Stmcture:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Sweep-up Spray Alkyd Fog.

2.6 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES

A. Open-Grain Wood Filler:

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. 2. Coronado; none required. 3. Dulux Paint; none required. 4. Kelly-Moore; none required. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; none required. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler. 7. Sherwin-Williams; none recommended.

B. Interior Wood Stain: Alkyd based.

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. 2. Coronado; 3601-Line Quick-Seal Alkyd Stain. 3. Dulux Paint; 1700-XXX WoodPtide Interior Solventbome Wood Finishing Stain. 4. Kelly-Moore; McCloskey Stain. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Oil Stain. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Intetior Oil Stain A-48 Series.

C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Fast-drying alkyd based.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer No. 413. 2. Coronado; 81-10 Dual Seal. 3. Dulux Paint; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Vamish. 4. Kelly-Moore; 2164 E Z Sand Alkyd Q. D. Sealer. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-10 SpeedHide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and

Finish. 6. Shetwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43.

D. Interior Waterbome Clear Satin Vamish: Acrylic-based polyurethane.

1. Benjamin Moore; Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane No. 423, Satin. 2. Coronado; 70-10 Aqua-Plastic Urethane Clear Satin. 3. Dulux Paint; 1802-0000 W oodPride Intetior Waterborne Aquacrylic Satin Vamish. 4. Kelly-Moore; 2097 Kel-Thane II Clear Acrylic Urethane--Satin.



5. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-49 Rez Satin Acrylic Clear Polyurethane. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Satin, A68 Series.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

APPLICATION

Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be painted.

Coordination of W orlc Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish infonnation on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before smface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release

agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet

wall construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of

varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.



a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wirebrush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

E. Material Preparation:

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of unifmm density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when pennanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and fumiture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind pennanently fixed equipment or fumiture with prime coat only.

2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 5. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match

exterior.

G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or vamish coat.

H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. Omit ptimer over metal smfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply

additional coats until paint film is ofunifonn finish, color, and appearance.

I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Minimum Coating Thickness: recommended spreading rate. recommended by manufacturer.

Apply paint matetials no thinner than manufacturer's Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as



K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces and rooftop gas lines and vertical exposed wall mounted gas lines, vandal guards, and electrical conduits. Exposed fire sprinkler lines and tisers require painting; see Mechanical Specifications. All rooftop HV AC units exposed to view from the ground level are to be field painted, color as selected by the Architect.

L. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masomy block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

M. Ptime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a ptime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessaty to provide a smooth, opaque surface of unifonn finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

0. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregulatity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

P. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redisttibute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, inegularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

3.3

A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporaty protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

A.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P 1.

EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

Ferrous Metal:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.

a. Primer: Exterior fetTous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed items). b. Finish Coats: Extetior full-gloss acrylic enamel for fenous and other metals.



3.4

B. Zinc-Coated Metal:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.

a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals.

C. Exte1ior Exposed Piping (Including Rooftop Gas Lines & Wall Mounted Gas Lines, Piping, Electrical Lines, Vandal Guards, Rooftop HVAC Units, etc.):

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over an acrylic latex p1imer.

a. P1imer: Exterior acrylic latex metal primer (not required on shop-primed items). b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic.

INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board:

1. Acrylic Finish (Office type areas): Two finish coats over a primer.

a. P1imer: Inte1ior gypsum board p1imer. b. Finish Coats: Interior egg-shell ac1ylic enamel as scheduled.

2. Epoxy Finish (Toilet room type areas): Two finish coats over a p1imer.

a. Primer: Inte1ior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior high-luster epoxy-enamel as scheduled.

B. Fenous Metal:

l. Alkyd Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal p1imer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.

C. Zinc-Coated Metal:

1. Alkyd Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.

D. Steel Structure and Steel Deck:

1. Alkyd Finish: Two finish coats. a. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd dry-fog paint.

E. Interior Exposed Piping (Including Fire Sprinkler Risers, Gas Lines, Piping, Electrical Lines, etc.):



1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over an acrylic primer.

a. Primer: Interior acrylic metal primer (not required on shop-primed items). b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel.

F. Sealed Concrete Floors:

1. Two coats terrazzo sealer, buffed, plus three coats of floor wax, buffed.

3.5 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE

A. Stain-Vamish Finish: Two finish coats of vamish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.

1. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. 2. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. 3. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. 4. Finish Coats: Interior waterbome clear satin varnish.




SECTION 10211 - SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid plastic toilet compmiments, urinal screens and privacy screens.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and tempormy work requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM Intemational (ASTM): 1. A167- Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 3. E84- Standard Test Method for Smface Buming Characteristics of Building Matetials.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 286- Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Conttibution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Compartment Configurations: 1. Toilet patiitions: Floor mounted, overhead braced. 2. Urinal screens: Floor mounted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review: I. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned layout, elevations, ttim, closures, and accesso

nes. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data for panels, hardware, and accessories. 3. Samples: 2 x 3 inch samples in Manufacturer's full color range.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in manufacture of solid plastic toilet compartments with products in satisfactmy use under similar service conditions.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's 25 year wananty against breakage, conosion, and delamination under nonnal conditions.

SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10211 - 1


PART2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design: Scranton Products. L'-YJ:VVI::~~£lJ!l!!!H!J2I9~clllf!§~,s9 m) B. Accurate Partitions Corp is an acceptable manufacture. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Doors, Panels and Pilasters: 1. High density polyethylene (HDPE), fabricated from polymer resins compounded under

high pressure, forming single thickness panel. 2. Waterproof and nonabsorbent, with self-lubricating surface, resistant to marks by pens,

pencils, markers, and other writing instruments. 3. 1 inch thick with edges rounded to 1/4 inch radius.

4. Fire hazard classification: Class A flame spread/smoke developed rating, tested to ASTM E84.

5. Color: To be selected by Architect.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6463-T5 alloy and temper.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. Hinges: 1. 8 inches long, fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum with bright dip anodized

finish, wrap-around flanges, adjustable on 30-degree increments, through bolted to doors and pilasters with stainless steel, Torx head sex bolts.

2. Hinges operate on field-adjustable nylon cams, field adjustable in 30 degree increments.

B. Door Sttike and Keeper: 1. 6 inches long, fabricate from heavy-duty extruded aluminum with bright dip anodized

finish, with wrap-around flanges secured to pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts.

2. Bumper: Extruded black vinyl.

C. Latch and Housing: 1. Heavy-duty extruded aluminum. 2. Latch housing: Bright dip anodized finish. 3. Slide bolt and button: Black anodized finish.

D. Coat Hook/Bumper: 1. Combination type, chrome plated Zamak. 2. Equip outswing handicapped doors with second door pull and door stop.

E. Door Pulls: Chrome plated Zamak. Provide pulls on both sides of doors.



2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Doors and Dividing Panels: 55 inches high, mounted 14 inches above finished floor.

B. Pilasters: 82 inches high, fastened to pilaster sleeves with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt.

C. Pilaster Sleeves: 3 inches high, [one-piece molded HDPE,] [20 gage stainless steel,] secured to pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt.

D. Wall Brackets: 54 inches long, [Extruded PVC,] [heavy-duty aluminum, bright dip anodized finish,] fastened to pilasters and panels with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts.

E. Headrail: Heavy-duty extruded aluminum, anti-grip design, clear anodized finish, fastened to headrail bracket with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt and at top of pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws.

F. Headrail Brackets: 20 gage stainless steel, satin finish, secured to wall with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install compariments in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Install rigid, straight, plumb, and level.

C. Locate bottom edge of doors and panels 14 inches above finished floor.

D. Provide uniform, maximum 3/8 inch vertical clearance at doors.

E. Not Acceptable: Evidence of cutting, drilling, or patching.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and latches to operate correctly.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10522- FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers.



B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.





A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.FIRE PROTECTION CABINET

B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. Basis of Design: Semi-Recessed steel cabinet -Larsen 2409-R3.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fire End & Croker Corporation. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Constmction Products Group. c. Kidde Residential and Cmrunercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522- 1


d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Modern Metal Products, Division ofTechnico Inc .. f. Moon-American. g. Potter Roemer LLC. h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc ..

C. Cabinet Construction: Unrated.

D. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-114- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth.

F. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

G. Door Material: Stainless steel sheet.

H. Door Style: Flush opaque panel, frameless, with no exposed hinges.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location.

a. Identify fire extinguisher m fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER. II

I) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Silk-screened. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Horizontal.

K. Finishes:

1. Stainless Steel: No.4.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-2


2.2

A.

FABRICATION

Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with tlim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

INSTALLATION

Examine walls and partltwns for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and him style.

Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated.

Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to stmcture, square and plumb.

Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-3


SECTION 10523- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pmiable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.




A. Warranty: Sample of special wananty.


A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special W ananty: Manufacturer's standard fonn in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Wananty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORT ABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 1. Moon-American. J. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. k. Potter Roemer LLC. 1. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical: UL-rated 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523- 2


SECTION 10530- PROTECTIVE COVERS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work in this section includes furnishing and installation of pre-engineered metal canopy structure with aluminum perimeter edge framing.


A. Installer: Shall be approved by canopy manufacturer. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers shop drawings.

1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENT

A. Confinn dimensions prior to preparation of shop drawings.

B. Supply manufacturer's standard literature and specifications for canopies.

C. Submit shop drawings sealed and stamped by a Texas Registered Professional Engineer showing structural component locations/positions, material dimensions and details of construction and assembly.


A. Canopy must confonn to IBC 2012 and local building code amendments.

1.5 DELIVER, STORAGE, HANDLING

A. Deliver and store all canopy components in protected areas.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's one year wananty.

B. Warranty: Includes coverage of materials and workmanship.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

PROTECTIVE COVERS 10530- 1


A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

2.2

A.

AVAdek Walkway Covers & Canopies, 12130 Galveston Rd. Bldg. 1, Webster, TX 77598, 800-777-4031, ww_w.ay~lQt::k,c:gm.

The Aluminum Members of the Canopy System shall be 6063, 6061 or 6005 alloy and temper. All sections shall be formed true to detail and free from defects impairing appearance, strength or durability.

Deck Panel thickness: .080 inches minimum

Flashing thickness: .040 inches minimum.

Bolts and fasteners to be stainless steel or finished to match adjacent components.

FINISHES

Anodized aluminum selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Confinn that surrounding area is ready for the canopy installation. Installer shall confinn dimensions and elevations to be as shown on approved shop drawings.

B. Erection shall be perfonned by an approved installer and scheduled after all concrete, masonry and roofing in the area completed

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. Particular attention should be given to protecting the finish during handling and erection.


PROTECTIVE COVERS 10530-2

Simms Municipal Building Project2013-23 2/2015

SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Drawings and general provlSlons of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and other Division-! Specifications Sections apply to this Section.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Toilet and bath accessmies.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use room and product designations indicated on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

2.2

A.

A.

B.

MANUFACTURERS

Basis-of-Design Products: The design for toilet and bath accessories described in Part 2 are based on the products indicated on the schedule in the drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the companies named.

MATERIALS

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No.4 finish (satin), 0.0312-·inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: fabtication.

ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessmy unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

D. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of twenty keys to Owner's representative.

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1


2.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

A. See the "Toilet Accessories Schedule" in the drawings.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.

B. Adjust accessmies for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

END OF SECTION 1080 1

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-2


SECTION 12366- SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes. 2. Solid-surface-material window sills.


A. Product Data: For countertop and window sill materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.

B. Countertops and sills: 1/4-inch- (6.4--mm-) thick, solid surface material laminated to 3/4-inch(19-mm-) thick particleboard with exposed edges faced with l/4-inch- ( 6.4--mm-) thick, solid surface material.

C. Backsplashes: l/2-inch (12.7-mm) thick, solid surface material.

2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

SOLID SURF ACE COUNTER TOPS 12366- 1


C. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SSl.

1. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated. 2. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Zl24.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without

a precoated finish. 3. Colors and Patterns: See finish schedule on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fasten countertops by screwing through comer blocks of base units into underside of countetiop. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.


SOLID SURF ACE COUNTER TOPS 12366- 2


SECTION 12484- ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Entrance floor mats, including fibered modular tile entrance systems

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM Intemational,

1. D 2859 Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials

B. Other referenced documents

1. Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC) FF 1-70: Pill Test 2. Department of Commerce (DOC) FF 1-70: Pill Test

1.03 ADMINISTRATNE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Install entrance matting after finishing operations, including painting and ceiling operations, have been completed.

B. Preinstallation Meetings: Meet to confirm project requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements in compliance with Division 1 requirements.


A. Product Data: For specified products, submit latest edition of product supplier's technical specifications data.

B. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples showing the required finishes, colors, designs, and textures for flooring, as well as samples of adhesives and applicable accessories such as nosing, frames, etc.

C. Manufacturer Instructions: For specified products, submit latest editions of product supplier's installation and cleaning & maintenance instructions.


A. Wananty documentation: For specified products and accessories, submit product supplier's wananty documents.


A. Storage and Handling Requirements: Store material-- including any adhesive and accessmies --in the original packaging (as delivered) in areas that are enclosed and weather tight with the pennanent HV AC system set at a temperature of between 65°F and 80°F for a minimum of 48 hours prior to commencement of installation. In addition, comply with storage and handling requirements listed on product packaging, and desctibed in the latest edition of the product's installation instructions.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS 12484- 1


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings and in the Room Finish Schedule in these Specifications. Any proposed substitution must be pre-approved by the Architect prior to bidding:

1. Installation: See Floor Finish Plan and Field verify with Architect.

B. Product: Entrance Mat Construction: Tile size: Thickness:

Rubberized fabric strips cut from recycled tires 12" X 12" 3/8"

C. Performance: Physical propetiies of the entrance matting shall conform to the following minimums: Surface flatmnability ASTM D2859 Pass (equal to CPSC FF 1-70 and DOC FF 1-70)

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

2/2015

A. Verification of Conditions: Subfloors shall be clean and dry. Inspect all substrates and subfloors for proper tolerances, and report any discrepancies to the general contractor in wtiting.

B. Preinstallation Measurements: Vetify actual measurement by field measuring before any onsite cutting, if applicable. To avoid construction delays, coordinate field measurements based upon construction progress.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Concrete subfloors: Where concrete subfloors are present, all work required to put the concrete subfloor in acceptable condition shall be the responsibility of the general contractor.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Follow the latest edition of the manufacturer's installation. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls or general entrance area, discounting minor offsets, so that the tiles at opposite edges of flooring area are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 112 tile at room petimeters. Begin in center and install the corner of the first tile with the cross of the caulk center line. Quarter-tum tiles using directional arrows as marked on the underside of the tile. When done properly, directional atTows printed on the back of each tile should point in two directions only. Do not quarter-turn haphazardly, as the resulting pattern may not exactly match, and this is noticeable, particularly in larger areas. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and to prevent hipping hazards.

3.04 CLEANING

A. General: Clean up job site, including sweeping or dust mopping the floor to remove all dirt or gtit, and put all waste in general contractor's dumpster. Follow overall cleaning guidelines described in Division 01.



B. Initial Maintenance: Conduct a full initial maintenance following the latest edition of the manufacturer's maintenance instructions. Instruct owner's cleaning staff in proper maintenance procedures.


2/2015



SECTION 12494 - ROLLER SHADES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes manual - operated roller shades for windows.



1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabtication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


D. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Product certificates.

B. Product test reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mock:ups: Build mock:ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

ROLLER SHADES 12494- 1


2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

2.2


A.

1. Draper Inc. 2. Hunter Douglas Contract. 3. MechoShade Systems, Inc. 4. Nysan Solar Control Inc.; Hunter Douglas Company. 5. OEM Shades Inc. 6. SWF Contract 7. Shade Techniques, LLC. 8. Silent Gliss USA, Inc.

ROLLER SHADES

Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; pennanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted.

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades.

a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg) or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever c1iteria are more stringent.

B. Rollers: Couosion-resistant steel or extmded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with pennanently lub1icated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shade bands for service.

1. Roller Mounting Configuration: Single roller. 2. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade. 3. Direction of Shade band Roll: Regular, from back of roller. 4. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, couosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

ROLLER SHADES 12494-2


2.3

2.4

D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

E. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shade band material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Installation Accessories:

A.

B.

A.

B.

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband

when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches (76 mm).

2. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.

a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches (76 mm).

3. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

4. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

SHADEBAND MATERIALS

Shade band Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer. 2. Type: PVC-coated fiberglass. 3. Weave: Mesh. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION

Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C):



1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation (as applicable): Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2-inch (13-mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm).

2. Outside of Jamb Installation (as applicable): Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at center lines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting perfmmance of the Work.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactmy conditions have been conected.

Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

D. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

E. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.



Section 15000 15060 15075 15080 15310 15325 15410 15430 15440 15450 15535 15570 15670 15760 15775 15781 15810 15820 15830 15850 15950

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

808 S. Buchanan Renovation

Amarillo, Texas

Title Pages General Provisions for Mechanical .................................................................................. 1 0 Hangers and Supports ...................................................................................................... 7 Mechanical Identification .................................................................................................. .4 Mechanical Insulation ........................................................................................................ 8 Fire Protection Piping ........................................................................................................ 5 Sprinkler Systems .............................................................................................................. 4 Plumbing Piping ................................................................................................................. 8 Plumbing Specialties ......................................................................................................... 3 Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................................................................ 11 Plumbing Equipment ......................................................................................................... 4 Refrigerant Piping and Specialties .................................................................................... 3 Furnaces ............................................................................................................................ 5 Refrigerant Condensing Units .......................................................................................... .4 Terminal Heating and Cooling Units .................................................................................. 3 Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems ................................................................................. 1 0 Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units ..................................................................... 11 Ducts ................................................................................................................................. 6 Duct Accessories ............................................................................................................... 6 Fans ................................................................................................................................... 5 Air Outlets and Inlets ......................................................................................................... 3 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing ..................................................................................... 9

Prepared by: BROWN CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC.

3505 Olsen, Suite 110 Amarillo, Texas 791 09

(806) 354-0141 TEXAS REGISTERED ENGINEERING FIRM F-683

February 6, 2015

Specifications© 2015 Brown Consulting Engineers, Inc. These specifications are a part of the design documentation for this particular project and are not to be used or reproduced, in whole or in part, for any other purpose.

SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SPECIAL NOTE:

A. The Architectural, Structural, and Electrical Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Engineer, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical plans. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, for examination by all bidders. Omission of drawings will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation.

1.2 CHECKING DOCUMENTS:

A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Check all drawings and specifications thoroughly and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect or Engineer will provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications.

1.3 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES:

A. Performance all work in accordance with the codes listed below as well as the codes of any other legal body having jurisdiction, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. 1. 2012 International Building Code (IBC) 2. 2012 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 3. 2012 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 4. 2012 International Energy ConseNation Code (IECC) 5. 2012 International Fire Code (IFC) 6. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 7. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 8. US Department of Labor

a) Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

B. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, report the matter to the Engineer for clarification.

1.4 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) I TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS (TAS)

A. Install all work to conform with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). Where conflicts occur between these two standards, theTAS shall govern.

B. Obtain documentation referencing these standards, and install work in strict accordance with them. Before installing any work where it is unclear as to the exact requirements of the standards, obtain a ruling from the Architect or Engineer for an interpretation of the requirements.

15000-1

C. The following is a general outline of requirements for mechanical and plumbing items. These items are for general reference only. Consult the original standard for exact requirements. These items include but are not limited to the following: 1. Thermostats and other controls:

a) Maximum mounting height to the top of the device is 48 inches. 2. Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers:

a) Adults - primary users are 16 years and older: Lower fountain spout mounted at 36 inches above floor.

3. Water Closets- wall mounted fixtures a) Adults- primary users are 16 years and older: Mount fixture with

rim 17-1/2 inches above floor. Rough-in waste with center line of fixture 18 inches from side wall.

4. Water Closets -flush controls a) In all cases, whether the flush device is a flush valve or a flush

tank, install the device such that the flush controls are mounted on the wide side of the toilet area.

b) Install so that flush controls are no higher than 44 inches above the floor.

5. Urinals a) Adults- primary users are 16 years and older: Mount fixture with

rim 17 inches above floor. Fixtures have 14 inch tapered elongated rim.

6. Lavatories and Sinks a) Adults- primary users are 16 years and older: Mount fixture with

rim 34 inches above floor. Maintain 29 inches clearance under rim. 7. Lavatories and Sinks- exposed pipes and surfaces

1.5 GENERAL:

a) Insulate water supplies and risers as well as p-traps and tailpieces with pre-formed insulating covers.

b) Install offset tailpieces to maintain knee clearance at least 27 inches high and 19 inches deep.

A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards.

B. All piping and ductwork for the mechanical trade shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed.

C. Piping and ductwork may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required.

D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this

15000-2

requirement.

E. The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. Carefully lay out work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation.

F. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. Determine the exact location of each item by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections.

G. The Contractor is responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Engineer. The Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his own expense.

H. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, and material in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 2. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 3. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and

whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. 4. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as

diffusers, grilles, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site.

I. The Contractor understands that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings results in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not.

J. Examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M" or "P" drawings, notify the Engineer in sufficient time to clarify before bidding.

1.6 DIMENSIONS:

A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, verify all dimensions, including elevations, and be responsible for the correctness of the same. Submit any difference found to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the work.

1.7 INSPECTION OF SITE:

A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical installations. Inspect the existing installations and be thoroughly acquainted with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and

15000-3

underground serving to and from that structure.

1.8 ELECTRIC CONTROL WIRING OF HVAC MOTORS AND MOTOR-OPERATED EQUIPMENT:

A. Control wiring of HVAC motors and motor-operated equipment:

B. General requirements: 1. It is the intent of these specifications to provide a clear delineation of

responsibilities for the providing of electrical control wiring. 2. Coordinate divisions 15 and 16 with each other to insure that all control

wiring is provided as described. 3. Furnish all required items under the contract, with responsibilities of

specific items as described hereafter, or in Division 16 Specifications. 4. While these specifications indicate the contract responsibilities of the

various Divisions, they do not prevent job-site mutually agreed upon revisions or modifications to these responsibilities provided that ultimate contract responsibilities are retained as described in the Specifications.

C. Responsibilities of Division 15 (Mechanical): 1. Furnish and set in place, ready for electrical connection, all HVAC motors

and motor-operated HVAC equipment unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Provide and set in place all HVAC control devices, such as relays,

thermostats, electrically operated valves and related items. 3. Provide and install all HVAC and energy management system control

wiring as indicated on drawings.

D. Responsibilities of Division 16 (Electrical): 1. Furnish, mount and connect to safety and disconnect switches for heat

pumps, fan-coil units, and similar HVAC equipment not furnished from the factory with integral safety or disconnect switches.

2. Connect to speed switches factory furnished on fractional horsepower fancoil units, convectors and similar equipment. Division 16 is not required to provide field installed speed switches unless specifically noted on the Drawings.

3. Refer to the Drawings for specific or unusual connection arrangements.

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:

A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:

A. All materials are new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label.

B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, submit a sample to the Engineer before proceeding.

C. The Engineer reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the

15000-4

Engineer's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection.

1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS:

A. Where a definite material of a specific manufacturer is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard of quality of the product or item to be used on the project.

B. It is recognized that acceptable materials are offered by manufacturers other than those named in the specifications. All request for substitution of materials, products and equipment shall be made in writing to the Engineer at least five working days prior to the bid date. Requests made after that time or not made in writing will not be considered. 1. Furnish complete descriptive literature and complete operation and

performance data on all substitute materials. 2. Include in the information a complete list of deviations of the requested

item from the specified item. 3. The Engineer will investigate such requests for substitutions, and issue

any acceptance of substitution by addendum. 4. Substitutions which are requested and which are allowed will be made

known by the Engineer in addendum form prior to bid. 5. Approval to substitute an item does not constitute acceptance of the

product to be used on the project or the omission of the submittal process.

1.12 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

A. NOTE: Submittals not in compliance with the following requirements will be summarily rejected.

B. The Engineer reserves the right to directly charge the Contractor for time and material costs, at standard hourly rates, if more than two (2) submittals of the same class, type of materials, or equipment is required to obtain approval.

C. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer. Coordinate submission of related items.

D. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.

E. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

F. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

G. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

H. Submittal Format: 1. Submit all shop drawings at one time. 2. The contractor may submit hard copies of submittals or electronic files as

directed by the architect. In either case, the contractor shall be

15000-5

responsible for providing the owner with a complete and corrected submittal at the end of the contract incorporating any and all review comments.

3. Hard Copies of Submittals: a) Bind in a three-ring binder with each section indexed according to

the specifications and separate from other sections. 4. Electronic Submittals:

a) Submit on a single CD or USB Flash Drive. b) All files shall be compiled into a single pdf portfolio with each

section indexed according to the specifications. 1) Individual files will NOT be accepted, and the entire

submittal will be summarily rejected. 5. Identify Project, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, subcontractor and

supplier. 6. Index each section according to the specifications and separate from

other sections. 7. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying that review,

approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

8. Provide a 2 inch x 5 inch space for the Engineer's review stamp on hard copies of submittals.

I. Product Data 1. Product data to be job specific.

a) Catalogue cut sheets providing only generic information will not be accepted

b) Equipment selections shall indicate actual performance of equipment, corrected for jobsite conditions, altitude, temperature and pressures.

2. Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. Provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes.

3. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer.

4. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

5. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

6. After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article above and provide copies for record documents.

J. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed

instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect/Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data.

2. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or

15000-6

installation.

K. Manufacturer's Field Reports 1. Submit reports for the Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract

administrator or for the Owner. 2. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for

information. 3. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance

with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

1.13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS:

A. Take precautions necessary to properly protect new apparatus from damage. Erect temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site. Crib apparatus above the floor of the construction. Cover apparatus in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any equipment or component which has not been properly protected.

1.14 PERMITS, FEE, ETC.:

A. Arrange for a permit from the local authority. Arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. Pay any charges made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. Pay any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications.

1.15 TESTING:

A. Perform the various tests as specified and required by the Engineer and as required by the State and local authorities. Furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests.

1.16 CLEANING

A. At all times during the progress of the work, keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. Clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all debris and construction dust.

1.17 COORDINATION OF TRADES:

A. Items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details

15000-7

B. Coordinate items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc.

C. Insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish.

D. Coordinate items installed in/on finished ceilings with the ceiling construction. Conform to the reflected ceiling plan and secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility.

E. Install all items specified tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades.

1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Perform all construction modification and cutting required to install the work. No cutting of any structural member is permitted without specific permission from the Engineer.

B. Patching shall be done by the Contractor under the section for which the trade is specified.

1.19 PAINTING:

A. All painting shall be done by the Contractor under Division 9. Following is a general outline of the required work for Divisions 15. 1. When the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, touch

up and give one coat of half flat half enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces.

2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports and miscellaneous metal.

3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment,

etc. Size surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. 5. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare

metal or insulation surface is visible. 6. Paint all surfaces above or behind perforated return air grilles or other

open spaced air outlet devices with flat black paint.

1.20 SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS, ETC.:

A. Seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with Dow Corning No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions.

1.21 ACCESS PANELS:

A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, provide Milcor Style "M" access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc.

15000-8

1.22 USE OF SYSTEMS:

A. New Installations: 1. Do not operate mechanical equipment during construction to provide

heating or cooling to the space. Make provisions to provide temporary heat during the construction process.

2. Under no circumstances shall the air handling equipment be run while wall construction is underway in any portion of the building. Take any precautions required to prevent the dust from drywall construction from contaminating the ductwork or other portions of the air handling system.

3. In order to provide protection to ducts, plenums, etc. install temporary filters over air openings until all finished painting is completed. Protect outlets, coils, etc. as necessary in each case.

4. Except for operation of equipment to prove its performance and to adjust and balance the systems, that equipment will not be operated for comfort of construction workers.

B. Immediately prior to the time that the systems are to be accepted by the Owner, carefully examined each system and if ductwork is dirty, clean by men skilled in that type of work. 1. Duct cleaning methods shall be approved by the Engineer. 2. Replace all filters and put in first class condition.

1.23 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:

A. Portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system will remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interference with the installations of new work. Relocate existing installations which interfere with new installations. 1. Relocate existing plumbing piping where it interferes with the installation

of new work. 2. Relocate existing piping, ductwork where it interferes with the installation

of new work.

1.24 ROUGH-IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT:

A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. Rough-in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. Refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment.

B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Engineer and finally connect as directed by the Engineer.

1.25 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:

A. In cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system during the balancing and

15000-9

adjusting of systems.

1.26 OPERATING MANUALS:

A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers.

B. Include the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor.

1.27 GUARANTEE:

A. Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period shall be repaired and/or replaced. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate.

1.28 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS:

A. Before acceptance and final, furnish: 1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished

for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work.

2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Commissioning report for variable refrigerant flow systems. 5. Test and Balance Report.

END OF SECTION

15000-10

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A Section includes pipe and equipment supports, hangers, anchors, bases sleeves and the sealing of work to adjacent construction.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 3 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Execution requirements for

placement of inserts and sleeves in concrete forms specified by this section.

2. Division 3- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A ASME B31.5 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)- Refrigeration Piping

B. ASTM F708- Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

C. MSS SP58 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry)- Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

D. MSS SP69 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry)- Pipe Hangers and Supports- Selection and Application.

E. MSS SP89 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry)- Pipe Hangers and Supports- Fabrication and Installation Practices.

F. NFPA 13 (National Fire Protection Association)- Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

C. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.

15060-1


A. Perform Work in accordance with code for piping support and in conformance with NFPA 13 for support of sprinkler piping.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson Inc. 2. Creative Systems Inc. 3. Flex-Weld, Inc. 4. Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc. 5. Michigan Hanger Co. 6. Superior Valve Co. 7. Hilti. 8. Grinnell.

B. Fire Protection Piping: 1. Conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes% to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel,

split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and over: Carbon steel, adjustable,

clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and

hanger rods. 5. Wall Support: Welded steel bracket. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor

flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

C. Plumbing Piping - DWV: 1. Conform to MSS SP69. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes% to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel,

split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,

clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and

hanger rods. 5. Wall Support: Welded steel bracket.

15060-2

6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor

flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 8. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring.

D. Plumbing Piping -Water: 1. Conform to MSS SP69. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes Yz to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel,

split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,

clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers,

hanger rods, and tubing clamps. 5. Wall Support: Welded steel bracket. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut,

nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 8. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe

saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring.

E. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Conform to MSS SP69. 2. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and

hanger rods. 3. Pipe/Strut Tubing clamps: Zinc plated steel strut clamp, bolt with nylon

insert locknut, neoprene pipe cushion insert to surround pipe and isolate clamp from pipe.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. ASTM F593.

2.3 ANCHORS

A. Expansion anchors are flush or shell type meeting Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group VIII Type 1, for expansion shield anchors.

B. ASTM B633, zinc plated.

C. Hilti HDI; HDI-L.

2.4 INSERTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hilti.

B. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

15060-3

2.5 FLASHING

A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq. ft sheet lead.

D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.

2.6 EQUIPMENT CURBS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Thycurb. 2. Custom Curb. 3. Approved Equal.

B. Fabrication: 18 inch tall, welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, variable step to match roof insulation, factory installed wood nailer.

2.7 ROOF MOUNTED UTILITY HUBS

A. Manufacturers: 1. REACH Manufacturing Inc., No Exceptions.

B. Utility Hub: 1. Hub shall be constructed of steel with bolt down removable access lid.

Unit shall be 14" x 14" x 17" completely insulated using 1/2" armaflex. 2. Hub shall have factory mounted safety disconnect switch to serve each

condensing unit as indicated on drawings. Coordinate electrical service requirements with actual equipment provided.

3. Hub shall have integral 120V, 20 amp GFCI receptacle with weather cover.

4. Hub shall have factory installed Swagelok connections for refrigerant liquid and suction piping to serve each outdoor unit as indicated on drawings. Coordinate size of refrigerant piping connections and fuses with equipment manufacturer.

C. Channel: 1. Utility hub shall be mounted on 1 0-3/4" diameter steel channel. 2. Channel shall extend 20 inches above finished roof. 3. Channel shall be factory insulated with 1/2" armaflex to provide a smooth

raceway for field installation of all electrical work and refrigerant piping. 4. Secure channel to structural members as detailed on drawings. 5. Stainless Steel pipe clamps to secure boot to cover and pipe.

2.8 PIPING ON ROOF

A. Manufacturer:

15060-4

1. Mapa Products MS-10SA7.

B. Product: 1. Fiberglass reinforced 6/6 nylon base with 3/8" stainless steel threaded

rod. 1 0" x 1-5/8" unistrut support Provide each support with MWP series 1 /2" walk pad and adhesive.

C. Installation: 1. Support refrigerant piping on roof. 2. Install as per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Maintain 8 inches of clearance between roof deck and pipe. 4. Spacing:

a) Pipe 3/4 inches to 1 inch: 8 feet. b) 1-1/4 inch to 1-5/8 inches: 10 feet.

2.9 DUCT HANGERS

A Support ductwork in finished areas with strap hangers in accordance with SMACNA

B. Support exposed spiral pipe ductwork with Gripple stainless steel wire rope hangers, secured with Gripple wire rope locking devices. 1. Size wire rope in accordance with manufacturer's loading

recommendations.

2.10 SLEEVES

A Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe.

C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.

D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

F. Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.

G. Sealant: Acrylic Intumescent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ANCHORS

A Install in holes drilled by carbide tipped bits.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

15060-5


A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

B. Install hangers to provide minimum% inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Broom finish with chamfered corners.

B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

3.4 FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash, and seal.

C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.

15060-6

D. Seal floor and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials.

E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 12 inches minimum high above finsihed roofing surface. Flash and counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach Counterflashing mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.

F. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.

3.5 SLEEVES

A. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

C. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

3.6 SCHEDULES

A. Steel and Copper Pipe Hanger Spacing

PIPE SIZE Inches Yz to 1-1/4 1-1/2 to 2 2-1/2 to 4

MAX. HANGER SPACING Feet 6.0 10 10

B. Cast Iron Pipe Hanger Spacing

PIPE SIZE Inches 2 to 3 inch 4 to 5 inch

MAX. HANGER SPACING Feet 5 8

ROD DIAMETER Inches 1/4 3/8 1/2

ROD DIAMETER Inches 3/8 1/2

END OF SECTION

15060-7

SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes nameplates, tags, stencils and pipe markers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting

specified by this section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.


A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Identification Systems. 2. Safety Sign Co. 3. Seton Identification Products. 4. Marking Services Inc.

B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on black background. Minimum 1-1/2" x 4" size with 16 point Helvetica font.

2.2 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Seton Identification Products. b) Marking Services Inc.

15075-1

2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches with smooth edges.

B. Information Tags: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Seton Identification Products. b) Marking Services Inc.

2. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

C. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame.

2.3 STENCILS

A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch high letters. 2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch high

letters. 3. Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high

letters. 4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.

B. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A13.1.

2.4 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A 13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Seton Setmark. b) Craftmark Identification Systems. c) Marking Services Inc.

2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Seton Identification Products. b) Craftmark Identification Systems. c) Marking Services Inc.

2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

2.5 PIPE IDENTIFICATION COLORS:

A. Exposed non-insulated piping identified by color painting along entire exposed length. Painting by Division 9.

15075-2

1. Gas: safety yellow with black stenciled letters. 2. Fire Protection: black with white stenciled letters.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Division 9 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Division 9.

B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.

F. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape pipe markers. 1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. 2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including

risers and drops. 4. Locate identification adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of

penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

H. Identify fire dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers with stenciled painting.

I. Identify duct mounted control dampers with plastic nameplates. Indicate damper service.

J. Equipment Identification: Use plastic nameplates to identify all equipment, including but not limited to: 1. Outside Air Unit 2. Rooftop Units 3. Fan Coil Units 4. Furnace and Coil Units 5. Condensing Units 6. Heat Pumps

15075-3

7. Branch Circuit Controllers 8. Fans 9. Pumps

K. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

END OF SECTION

15075-4

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes

SECTION 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION

1. Ductwork insulation 2. Duct liner 3. Thermal insulation for piping systems 4. Vapor retarders, jackets and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting

insulation jackets and covering specified by this section. 2. Section 15060- Hangers and Supports: Execution requirements for

inserts for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C177- Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus.

B. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.

C. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.

D. ASTM C518- Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

E. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.

F. ASTM C552- Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.

G. ASTM C553- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

H. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation.

I. ASTM C592- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type).

J. ASTM C612 -Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

15080- 1

K. ASTM C1 071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material).

L. ASTM C1126- Standard Specification for Preformed Closed Cell Phenolic Foam Pipe and Board Insulation.

M. ASTM C1136- Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.

N. ASTM D1784- Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

0. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

P. ASTM E96- Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

Q. ASTM E162- Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

R. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.

S. NAIMA (North American Insulation Manufacturers Association)- National Insulation Standards.

T. SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association) -HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

15080- 2

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install insulation outside ambient conditions required by manufacturer of each product.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE

A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Duct Wrap 2. Johns-Manville Microlite 3. Owens-Corning

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value : ASTM C518, 0.27 at 75 degrees F . 2. Density: 1.0 pcf 3. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F . 4. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Compac Model FSK. b) Ideal Model FSK.

2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.

3. Tape shall be minimum 3" wide.

E. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Childers Model CP-1 0. b) F asters Model 36-1 0. c) Marathon Model 650.

2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.

F. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.

15080- 3

2.2 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE

A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Duct Liner 2. Johns-Manville Permacote Linacoustic 3. Owens-Corning

B. Insulation: ASTM C1 071; flexible, noncombustible blanket with acrylic polymer meeting ASTM G21 impregnated surface and edge coat. 1. 'K' Value: ASTM C1 071, maximum 0.25 at 75 degrees F . 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 fpm . 4. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: 0.70 for 1 inch thickness.

C. Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Childers Model CP-89. b) Fosters Model 85-23. c) Marathon Model 224.

2. Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type.

D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, impact applied with integral head.

2.3 GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf 2. Johns-Manville 3. Owens-Corning

B. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F . 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F . 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to

aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.

D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Childers CP-82 b) Fosters 85-20

2. Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

2.4 CELLULAR FOAM PIPE INSULATION

A. Manufacturer: Armstrong AP Armaflex

15080-4

B. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177; 0.27 at 75 degrees F . 2. Minimum service temperature: -40 degrees F . 3. Maximum service temperature: 220 degrees F . 4. Maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D1 056; 3.5 percent (pipe) by

volume, 6.0 percent (sheet) by volume. 5. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.10 perm-inches.

C. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

D. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: 1. Manufacturer: Armstrong 520 2. Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.

2.5 JACKETS

A. Aluminum Jacket - Outdoor: ASTM B209 . 1. Thickness: 0.024 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Embossed. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.024 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached

protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.020 inch thick stainless steel. 6. Joint Sealer: Silicon

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION- PIPING

A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers,

flexible connections and expansion joints.

D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with

self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.

3. Install PVC fitting covers and vapor barrier adhesive.

15080- 5

E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, without vapor. Secure with self-sealing

longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.

3. Install PVC fitting covers. 4. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate

flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

F. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and

inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish

jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and

contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density

insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. a) Hamfab 20 lb. density H-blocks

G. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Fire Stopping Specifications.

H. Exterior Applications: 1. Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with

insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at the 3 or 9 o'clock position on the side of horizontal piping with the overlap facing down to shed water or on the bottom side of horizontal equipment.

3.3 INSTALLATION- DUCTWORK

A. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct

penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers,

flexible connections, and expansion joints.

B. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and

seal ends of insulation.

C. External Duct Insulation Application:

15080- 6

1. Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retarder adhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical

fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.

4. Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retarder adhesive.

5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

D. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. SMACNA Standards

for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow.

Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.

3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Ductwork and Air Handling Systems: 1. Concealed Outside Air Intake Ducts- Wrapped:

a) Glass Fiber, flexible- 2 inches thick b) Vapor seal all joint and penetrations.

2. Rectangular Supply Ducts - Lined: a) Glass Fiber Duct Liner, flexible- 1-1/2 inches thick to achieve R-6

3. Concealed Round Supply Ducts- Wrapped: a) Glass Fiber, flexible - 2 inches thick b) Vapor seal all joint and penetrations.

4. Return Ducts - Lined: a) Glass Fiber Duct Liner, flexible - 1-1/2 inches thick to achieve R-6

B. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply- 140 deg F and lower:

a) Glass Fiber Insulation: b) Pipe Size Range: 1-1/2 inches and less.

1) Thickness: 1 inch c) Pipe Size Range: 2 inches and larger

1) Thickness: 1-1/2 inches 2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation- 140 deg F and lower:

a) Glass Fiber Insulation: b) Pipe Size Range: 1-1/2 inches and less.

1) Thickness: 1 inch c) Pipe Size Range: 2 inches and larger

1) Thickness: 1-1/2 inches 3. Domestic Cold Water:

a) Glass Fiber Insulation: b) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.

1) Thickness: 1/2 inch.

15080- 7

C. Cooling Systems: 1. Chilled Water:

a) Glass Fiber Insulation: b) Pipe Size Range:1-1/2 inches and smaller- thickness: 1-1/2

inches. c) Pipe Size Range: 2 inches and larger- thickness: 2 inches.

2. Exposed Chilled Water (at outdoor connections to chillers) a) Rigid Polyisocyanurate Insulation: b) Pipe Size Range: all sizes- thickness: 2 inches c) Cover piping with additional aluminum jacket piping cover d) Piping to be heat traced

3. Refrigerant Liquid (VRF Systems Only): a) Cellular Foam Insulation: b) Pipe Size Range: All sizes- thickness: 3/4 inch.

4. Refrigerant Suction: a) Cellular Foam Insulation: b) Pipe Size Range: All sizes- thickness: 3/4 inch.

5. Refrigerant Hot Gas: a) Cellular Foam Insulation: b) Pipe Size Range: All sizes- thickness: 3/4 inch.

6. Cold Condensate Drains: a) Cellular Foam Insulation: b) Pipe Size Range: All sizes- thickness: 3/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

15080- 8

SECTION 15310 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 9- Painting: Preparation and painting of fire protection piping systems.

B. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Piping identification.

C. Section 15325 -Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler systems design.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME B16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800.

B. ASME B16.3- Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300.

C. ASME B16.4- Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250.

D. ASME B16.5- Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

E. ASME B16.9- Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.

F. ASME 816.11- Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded.

G. ASME B16.25- Buttwelding Ends.

H. ASME B36.10- Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.

I. ASTM A 135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.

J. ASTM A47- Malleable Iron Castings.

K. ASTM A53- Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless.

L. ASTM A234- Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.

M. ASTM A795 - Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use.

N. NFPA 13- Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

0. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

15310-1

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 15000: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section five years experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to UL and FM.

B. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and AWS D1 0.9.

D. Valves: Bear ULand FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 UL listed, threadable; Schedule 10 black for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.

15310- 2

1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; ASME B16.25, buttweld ends; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded.

2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B 16.4, threaded fittings.

3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings ASTM A47. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to

engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.

5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and 0-ring pocked and 0-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe.


A. Refer to Section 15060.

2.3 GATE VALVES

A. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, solid wedge or disc,

threaded ends.

B. Over 2 inches: 1. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper

switch, handwheel, OS&Y, solid rubber covered bronze or cast iron wedge, grooved ends.

2.4 BALL VALVES

A. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Manufacturers: 2. Bronze two piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel

ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, threaded ends with union.

2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Cast or Ductile Iron Body 1. Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum

bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive

2. Integral indicating device 3. Internal tamper switch rated.

2.6 DRAIN VALVES

A. Compression Stop: 1. Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap.

B. Ball Valve:

15310-3

1. Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.

B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.

H. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

I. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.

J. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.

K. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

L. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.

M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings after installation.

N. Provide gate or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service.

15310 - 4

0. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.

END OF SECTION

15310-5

SECTION 15325 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART1 GENERAL


A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.

B. System design, installation, and certification.


1.3

1.4

A. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification.

B. Section 15310- Fire Protection Piping

REFERENCES

A. NFPA 13- Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

B. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

D. UL- Fire Resistance Directory.

E. UL 199 - Automatic Sprinklers.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Modify existing building sprinkler system to provide coverage for the entire renovated portion of the building as indicated on the drawings.

B. Provide system to NFPA 13 light hazard occupancy requirements as noted on the drawings.

C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data.

D. Interface system with building fire alarm system as required.


A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15000.

B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler

locations coordinated with ceiling installation.

15325-1

2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls.

D. Submit shop drawings, product data and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to ArchitecUEngineer.


A Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and code requirements.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot.

D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.

D. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Texas.


A Conform to UL and FM.

B. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.

C. Equipment and Components: Bear UL or FM label or marking.

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

15325-2

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13.

B. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type.

C. Provide metal storage cabinet located adjacent to alarm valve.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRINKLERS

A. Suspended Ceiling: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Central b) Grinnell

2. Type: Listed quick response type, Concealed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate.

3. Finish: Enamel, color white. 4. Escutcheon Plate Finish: color white. 5. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

B. Exposed Area Type: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Central b) Grinnell

2. Type: Listed quick response type, upright. 3. Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

C. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13.

B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.

D. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.

E. Center sprinklers in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements.

F. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers.

G. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.

15325-3

H. Install guards on sprinklers within 7 feet above floor.

I. Hydrostatically test entire system.

J. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshall or authority having jurisdiction.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.

END OF SECTION

15325-4

PART1 GENERAL


SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING

A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 3. Natural gas.


A. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports

B. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification.

C. Section 15080- Mechanical Insulation.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AGA Z21.22- Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems.

B. ASME B16.1- Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.

C. ASME B16.3- Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.

D. ASME B16.4- Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250.

E. ASME B16.18- Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

F. ASME B16.22- Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

G. ASME B16.23- Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings- DWV.

H. ASME B 16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.

I. ASME B16.29- Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

J. ASME B16.32- Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Sovent Drainage Systems.

K. ASME B31.2- Fuel Gas Piping.

L. ASTM A53- Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

M. ASTM A74- Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

15410-1

N. ASTM A234/A234M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.

0. ASTM 832 - Solder Metal.

P. ASTM 842- Seamless Copper Pipe.

Q. ASTM 868 - Seamless Copper Tube

R. ASTM 875 - Seamless Copper Tube

S. ASTM 888- Seamless Copper Water Tube

T. ASTM 8251 -Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube

U. ASTM 8302 -Threadless Copper Pipe (TP).

V. ASTM 8306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

W. ASTM C564- Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

X. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

Y. ASTM F809 - Large Diameter Polybutylene Plastic Pipe.

Z. AWS A5.8- Brazing Filler Metal.

AA. AWWA C651 -Disinfecting Water Mains.

BB. CISPI 301 -Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

CC. CISPI 310- Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

DD. MSS SP58- Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

EE. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.

FF. UL 1479- Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.



B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.


A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.

15410-2


A. Perform Work in accordance with International Plumbing Code, International Building Code and local amendments.

B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX.

D. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, water pressure rating.


A. Perform Work in accordance with International Plumbing Code and local amendments.


A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564

neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum.

2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CIS PI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and

shield assemblies.

2.3 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

15410-3

2.4 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM 888, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.5 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, forged

steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1

2.6 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 3 inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

2.7 BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco Model T-585-66-LF 2. Milwaukee #UPBA-400S

B. Construction, 2 inches and smaller: NSF/ANSI 61, Lead Free, MSS SP-11 0, Class 150, 600 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, stainless steel, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stainless steel stem, lever handle threaded ends.

2.8 GAS VALVES:

A. Indoor Application: 1. Manufacturer:

a) Up to and including 2 inches: McDonald Figure 10552 1) AGA Certified, 25 lb WOG, Flat/Tee head, top check, plug

type, Bronze body and plug, threaded ends

B. Outdoor Application: 1. Manufacturer:

a) Up to and including 1-1/2 inches: Homestead Figure 601, 1) AGA Certified, 200 lb WOG, wrench operated square

head, lubricated plug with check, semi-steel, threaded ends

b) 2 inches and above: Homestead Fig. 612, Resun R-1431 1) AGA Certified, 200 lb. WOG, straightway, wrench

operated, lubricated plug, rectangular port, semi-steel, flanged ends

2. Description: a) ANSI B2.1 -American Standard Taper Pipe Threads.

15410-4

b) Faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1 125# Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

c) ANSI B16.1 0- Face to Face Dimensions of Ferrous Flanged End Valves; Class 125. multiple port and round port valves not covered by this specification.

d) ASTM - A-126 Grade B - Body and Plug Material e) lubricated plug type, without taper, and with close tolerance

between the plug and body sealing surfaces. f) stem seal of reinforced Teflon. g) leak-proof, spring loaded ball and lubricant sealed check valve; h) combination lubricant screw and button head fitting to prevent

foreign matter from being forced into lubricant system. i) Valve plugs floated on low-friction Teflon surfaces j) port area equal to 100% of the area of standard pipe (or standard

opening if desired). k) constructed that lubricant system has sufficient pressure to force

lubricant over all seating surfaces. I) Extruded Lubricant around stem is to be positive indication that

lubricant system is full, and that there had been a minimum contamination of line fluids.

2.9 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Up To and Including 3 inches: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Nibco Model T-413-Y-LF b) Milwaukee. c) Crane.

2. NSF/ANSI 61, Lead Free, MSS SP-80, Class 150, bronze body and cap, PTFE swing disc with renewable seat, threaded ends.

2.10 DOMESTIC HOT WATER BALANCING VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett series CB 2. NSF/ANSI 61, brass body ASTM B283, 304 stainless steel balancing

valve, memory stops, rated for 250 psi at 225 degrees F, with 2 P/T ports for differential pressure measurement.

2.11 RELIEFVALVES

A. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Watts Model 1 OOXL. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and

springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F , capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labelled.

2.12 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS

A. General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Hilti CS 240

15410-5

2. Silicon based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 14 79.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15080.

H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

I. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

K. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Division 9.

L. Excavate in accordance with Division 2 for work of this Section.

M. Backfill in accordance with Division 2 for work of this Section.

N. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

15410-6

0. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

P. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.

Q. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

3.4 APPLICATION

A Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

D. Provide ball valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment.

E. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.

B. Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points.

3.6 TESTING

A Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible.

B. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing.

C. Domestic Water Lines Interior: 1. Hydrostatically test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks

whatsoever.

D. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: 1. Test with water before the fixtures are installed. 2. Water test applied to the drainage and venting system either in its

entirety or in sections. a) Entire system testing:

1) tightly close all openings in piping system except the highest opening

2) Fill system with water to the point of overflow. b) Sectional system testing:

1) Plug each opening except the highest opening of the section under test

2) Fill system to be tested with water to achieve a 10 foot head on the portion under test.

3. Keep water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts.

15410-7

4. Water shall not drop more than 1 inch in 8 hours.

E. Gas Lines: 1. Test with 50 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except

for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest.

3.7 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.

D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.

E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.

H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 2 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

I. After domestic water lines have been sterilized and flushed, they shall be tested and certified by the City of Amarillo Environmental Laboratory. A copy of the test results shall be forwarded to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

15410-8

SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIAL TIES

PART1 GENERAL


A. Floor drains.

B. Floor sinks.

C. Cleanouts.

D. Water hammer arrestors.

E. Thermostatic mixing valves.


A. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.

B. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures.

C. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME A112.21.1- Floor Drains.

B. ASME A112.26.1- Water Hammer Arrestors.

C. PDI WH-201 -Water Hammer Arrestors.



B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.


A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow preventers, gas pressure regulators.

B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.


A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

15430-1

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR DRAINS- FD

A. Manufacturers: 1. WadeModeiW-1100. 2. Zurn Model Z-415-B.

B. ANSI A 112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickelbronze strainer.

C. Accessories: 1. Provide each floor drain with elastomeric PVC duckbill insert as

manufactured by Trap Guard®.

2.2 FLOOR SINKS- FS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Wade Model W-9110 2. Zurn Model Z-1910

B. 8x8x6 lacquered cast iron body with aluminum dome strainer, A.R.E. interior and seepage flange with 3/4 satin nickel bronze top.

C. Accessories: 1. Provide each floor drain with elastomeric PVC duckbill insert as

manufactured by Trap Guard®.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Interior Finished Floor Areas: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Wade Model W-6000 b) Zurn Model Z-1400

2. Cast iron body with anchor flange, threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with plug and secured nickel bronze scoriated top. a) Carpeted areas: with carpet flange

1) Wade W-6000-CF b) Poured or synthetic floor areas: wide flange top

1) Wade W-6000-D c) Tile floor: square top

1) Wade W-6000-TS d) Terrazzo Floor: no flange

1) Wade W-6000-U

B. Interior Finished Wall Areas: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Wade Model W-8460-R. b) Zurn Model Z-1446

2. Line type with cast iron body with brass plug and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.

15430-2

2.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Manufacturer: Sioux Chief, PPP

B. ANSI 101 0-2004; piston type, type L copper tube construction, poly-piston with EPDM a-rings.

C. Sized in accordance with manufacturer requirements suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F maximum 250 psi working pressure.

2.5 THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Manufacturer: 1. Zurn model ZW1 017XL. 2. Aqua-Gard Tempering Mixing Valve: ASSE 1017, lead-free design, cast

bronze body ASTM B 584, polysufone piston, low lead brass internal components, nitrile elastomer seals, 1 inch connections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in 12"x12"x4" concrete slab, flush with grade.

D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to each group of fixtures.

END OF SECTION

15430-3

SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART1 GENERAL


A. Water closets.

B. Urinals.

C. Lavatories.

D. Sinks.

E. Service sinks.

F. Electric water coolers.


A. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports

B. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.

C. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties.

D. Section 15450- Plumbing Equipment.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ARI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers.

B. ASME A 112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.

C. ASME A 112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.

D. ASME A 112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.

E. ASME A 112.19.3- Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use).

F. ASME A112.19.5- Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.



B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.

15440- 1


A. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.

B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WHEEL HANDLE %TURN STOPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Brass Craft model KTCR19 C 2. No substitutions.

B. Operating Temperature: 1. 40-150 degrees F. Intermittent to 180 degrees F.

C. Operating Pressure: 1. 125 psi maximum.

D. Material Specifications: 1. Body and brass components: Chrome plated C36000 brass. 2. Stem: Plated C36000 brass. 3. Seats: Pure PTFE. 4. Ball: Chrome plated C36000 brass. 5. 0-Ring: Nitrile. 6. Handle: Chrome plated zinc die cast. 7. Handle Screw: Zinc plated steel. 8. Compression Sleeve: C36000 brass.

2.2 FLEXIBLE SUPPLY RISERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Brass Craft Speedi Plumb Plus

15440-2

B. Operating Temperature: 1. 40-150 degrees F. Intermittent to 180 degrees F.

C. Operating Pressure: 1. 125 psi maximum.

D. Material Specifications: 1. Nuts: C36000 brass. 2. End fittings: C36000 brass. 3. Braiding: Polyvinyl chloride coated polyester yarn. 4. Tubing: EPDM rubber. 5. Washers: Nitrile rubber.

2.3 CHROME PLATED BRASS P-TRAP

A. Manufacturers: 1. Brass Craft 2. McGuire 3. Dearborn Brass

B. Chrome-plated 17 -gauge brass tubing p-trap with clean-out. Provide with brass quarter bend, brass clean-out plug, fiber clean-out washer, rubber washers, die cast nuts.

C. Size: 1. 2.

Lavatory: 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch. Sink: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch.

2.4 OFFSET WASTE WITH PERFORATED OPEN STRAINER

A. Manufacturers: 1. Brass Craft part number 0702. 2. McGuire part number 155WC.

B. Polished chrome cast brass offset lavatory strainer, ADA compliant, cast brass solid top open grid strainer, cast brass elbow and 1-1/4 inch 17 gauge offset tailpiece.

2.5 P-1- FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS, WALL MOUNTED- TAS

A. Bowl: 1. 2.

3.

4. 5.

Manufacturer: American Standard 2257.101 Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) Kohler ASME A 112.19.2; wall hung, siphon jet, white vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch top spud, china bolt caps, minimum 2" passageway. Mount rim at 17-1/2 inches 1.6 gallons per flush maximum

B. Sensor Operated Flush Valve: 1. Manufacturer:

15440- 3

C.

a) Zurn ZER6000PL-HET-CPM. b) Sloan.

2. ASME A112.19.2; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with battery operated solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over-ride button in chrome plated plate, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker, adjustable tailpiece, vandal resistant stop cap with set screw, sweat solder adapter with cover tube and cast set screw wall flange, maximum 1.28 gallon flush volume, 11-1/2 inch riser.

Seat: 1.

2.

Manufacturer: a) Bemis Model 1955 SSG b) Beneke 523 SS Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts.

D. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturer: Wade Model 310,330,340. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a) Zurn 1203, 1204 3. ASME A 112.6.1; heavy duty adjustable cast iron frame rated for 500 lbs,

integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers.

2.6 P-2- WATER CLOSET, FLOOR MOUNT, FLUSH VALVE- ADULT TAS

A. Bowl: 1.

2.

Manufacturers: a) American Standard Model 3043.001 b) Kohler. ASME A112.19.2M; floor mounted, siphon jet 16-1/2 inch bowl height, TAS accessible, vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch top spud, china bolt caps, minimum 2 inch passageway.

B. Sensor Operated Flush Valve:

C.

1. Manufacturer: a) Zurn ZER6000PL-HET -CPM. b) Sloan.

2. ASME A 112.19.2; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with battery operated solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over-ride button in chrome plated plate, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker, adjustable tailpiece, vandal resistant stop cap with set screw, sweat solder adapter with cover tube and cast set screw wall flange, maximum 1.28 gallon flush volume, 11-1/2 inch riser.

Seat: 1.

2.

Manufacturer: a) Bemis Model 1955 SSG b) Beneke 523 SS Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, and brass bolts.

15440-4

2.7 P-3- FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS, WALL MOUNTED

A. Bowl: 1. 2.

3.

Manufacturer: American Standard 2257.101 Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) Kohler ASME A 112.19.2; wall hung, siphon jet, white vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch top spud, china bolt caps, minimum 2" passageway.

4. Mount rim at 15 inches 5. 1.6 gallons per flush maximum

B. Sensor Operated Flush Valve:

C.

1. Manufacturer: a) Zurn ZER6000PL-HET-CPM. b) Sloan.


Seat: 1.

2.

Manufacturer: a) Bemis Model 1955 SSC b) Beneke 523 SS Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts.

D. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturer: Wade Model 310,330,340. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a) Zurn 1203, 1204. 3. ASME A 112.6.1; heavy duty adjustable cast iron frame rated for 500 lbs,

integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers.

2.8 P-4- WATER CLOSET, FLOOR MOUNT, FLUSH VALVE

A. Bowl: 1.

2.

Manufacturers: a) American Standard Model 2234.001 b) Kohler. ASME A 112.19.2; floor mounted, siphon jet 15 inch bowl height, Child TAS accessible, vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch top spud, china bolt caps, minimum 2 inch passageway.


a) Zurn ZER6000PL-HET-CPM.

15440-5

C.

b) Sloan. 2. ASME A 112.19.2; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with battery

operated solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over-ride button in chrome plated plate, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker, adjustable tailpiece, vandal resistant stop cap with set screw, sweat solder adapter with cover tube and cast set screw wall flange, maximum 1.28 gallon flush volume, 11-1/2 inch riser.

Seat: 1.

2.

Manufacturer: a) Bemis Model 1955 SSC b) Beneke 523 SS Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, and brass bolts.

2.9 P-5- WALL HUNG URINALS- TAS

A. Urinal: 1. Manufacturers:

a) American Standard 6590.001 b) Kohler

2. ASME A 112.19.2; vitreous china, wall hung washout action urinal with shields, 14 inch extended lip, integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud.

3. 0.5 gallons per flush maximum. 4. Mount rim at 17 inches.


a) Zurn ZER6003PL-CPM-EWS. b) Sloan.


C. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Wade W-400. b) Zurn Z-1221

2. ASME A 112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger.

2.10 P-6- WALL HUNG URINALS

A. Urinal: 1. Manufacturers:

a) American Standard 6590.001 b) Kohler

15440- 6

2. ASME A 112.1 9.2; vitreous china, wall hung washout action urinal with shields, 14 inch extended lip, integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud.

3. 0.5 gallons per flush maximum. 4. Mount rim at 24 inches.


a) Zurn ZER6003PL-CPM-EWS. b) Sloan.

2. ASME A 112.1 9.2; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with battery operated solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over-ride button in chrome plated plate, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker, adjustable tailpiece, vandal resistant stop cap with set screw, sweat solder adapter with cover tube and cast set screw wall flange, maximum 0.5 gallon flush volume, 11-1/2 inch riser.

C. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Wade W-400. b) Zurn Z-1221

2. ASME A 112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger.

2.11 P-7- UNDERCOUNTER MOUNT LAVATORY- TAS

A. Vitreous China Under-Counter Mount Basin: 1. Manufacturers:

a) American Standard Model 0497.221. b) Kohler

2. ASME A 112.1 9.2/CSA B45.1; vitreous china under-counter mount lavatory 1 9x15 inch bowl size, integral overflow, installation clamps.

B. Supply Fitting: 1. Manufacturer: American Standard 7385.004 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a) Kohler. b) Zurn.

3. ASME A 112.18.1; chrome plated brass, 4-5/8" vandal resistant single lever supply fitting with open grid strainer, 0.5 gpm aerator, ceramic disk cartridge.

C. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap. 2. Offset waste with perforated open grid strainer. 3. Wheel handle stops. 4. Flexible supplies.

2.12 P-8- LAVATORY, WALL MOUNTED- TAS

A. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin 1. Manufacturer: American Standard 0124.131 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

15440- 7

a) Kohler b) Eljer

3. ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory 19-1/4 inch x 17-1/4 inch, Ledge-back, 4 inch centers, rectangular basin with splash lip, rear overflow, and soap depression.

4. Mount with rim height at 32 inches.

B. Supply Fitting: 1. Manufacturer: American Standard 7385.004 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a) Kohler. b) Zurn.

3. ASME A 112.18.1; chrome plated brass, 4-5/8" vandal resistant single lever supply fitting with open grid strainer, 0.5 gpm aerator, ceramic disk cartridge.

C. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with

escutcheon. 2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer 3. Wheel handle 1)! turn stops. 4. Flexible supplies. 5. True-Bro handicap insulation kit.

D. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturer: Wade W-520 2. ASME A 112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor

and wall attachment, threaded studs for fixture hanger, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs.

2.13 P-9- WALL HUNG WASHFOUNTAIN- ADULT TAS

A.

B.

C.

Unit: 1.

2. 3.

Bowl: 1. 2. 3.

4.

Base: 1.

2. 3.

Bradley Model L VRD2-I R-DCD-6315-KTOOOO-TMA a) No substitutions Multiple lavatory system with two hand washing stations Each station complies with Texas Accessibility Standards.

Constructed of Evero Geo Series quartz surface. Refer to architectural for installation height. Color as selected by the Architect from the "Pearl" tier as shown on manufacturer's website. Provide color chart with submittal data. Fixture shall be complete with battery IR metering soap dispenser kith with batteries and 1 ,000-shot soap.

Pedestal frame and access panel shall be constructed of heavy gauge type 304 stainless steel. Front access panel shall be removable using only a hex key. Support hand washing stations to ANSI Z124.3 load ratings.

15440-8

4. Bowl assembly and panel shall be secured to a heavy gauge stainless steel support frame for wall mounting.

D. Service: 1. Independent solenoid valves actuated by an infrared sensing module with

single conical transmitting beam not exceeding bowl perimeter. 2. Each sensor to have 2-3 second turn off delay and 30-45 seconds of

continuous operation. 3. System provided complete with waste and supply fittings, thermostatic

mixing valves with stop, strainer and check valves. 4. Transformer: Class II UL/CSA listed, 100/24 VAG plug in type. 5. Provide fixture with AC adapter model P19-231 F to serve soap dispenser.

2.14 P-10- SINK- SINGLE COMPARTMENT- ADULT TAS

A. Single Compartment Bowl:

B.

1. Manufacturer: Elkay LRAD 2521-55 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a) Just 3. ASME A112.19.3; 25 x 21 x 5-1/2 inch deep outside dimensions, 18 gage

thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self-rimming and undercoated, ledge back, 3 drillings for trim.

Trim 1. 2.

3.

Manufacturer: American Standard 6540.175 Other manufacturers offering equivalent products: a) Zurn b) Royal Brass c) Speakman d) Chicago ASME A 112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with high rise gooseneck spout, vandal proof water economy aerator with maximum 0.5 gpm flow, indexed lever handles and :4 turn ceramic disk valve cartridges.

C. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with

escutcheon. 2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer 3. Wheel handle :4 turn stops. 4. Flexible supplies. 5. Tru-Bro handicap insulation kit.

2.15 P-11-MOPBASIN

A.

B.

Bowl: 1. 2.

Trim: 1.

Fiat Model TSBC 1611; 32x32x12 corner terrazzo, 6" drop front. 2 inch wide shoulders, stainless steel threshold, 3" stainless steel cast integral drain body, stainless steel strainer.

Manufacturer: T & S Brass B-0665-BSTR

15440- 9

2. ASME A 112.18.1 exposed wall type supply with lever handles, spout wall brace, pail hook, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral loose key stops and adjustable threaded wall flanges.

C. Accessories: 1. 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced rubber hose. 2. Hose clamp hanger. 3. Mop hanger. 4. Head with integral wall bracket, built-in 2.5 gpm flow control.

2.16 P-12- RECESSED DUAL HEIGHT ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

A. Fountain: 1. Manufacturer: Elkay LRPBGRNM28K. 2. ARI 101 0; recess mounted dual height electric water cooler with stainless

steel fountain body, contoured basins, lustrous satin finish, elevated antisquirt flexible bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator, Watersentry VII filter system, push button controls, wall mounting frame, refrigerated with integral air cooled condenser.

3. Capacity: 8.3 gph of 50 degree F water with inlet at 80 degree F and room temperature of 90 degree F.

4. Electrical: Maximum 410 watt compressor, electrical junction box rated for 120V 1 OA circuit shall be provided inside chiller cabinet.

5. T AS Compliance: a) Refer to architectural elevations for mounting heights.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.

B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

B. Verify rough-in heights before installation. Secure ruling on heights ofT AS fixtures before rough-in.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.

B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with stops, reducers,

15440- 10

and escutcheons.

C. Install components level and plumb.

D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports, wall carriers and bolts.

E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant

F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place.


A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.

3.5 T AS COMPLIANCE

A. Obtain ruling on mounting heights of all fixtures.

B. Mount flush valves for TAS compliant fixtures so the handle is facing the open portion of the stall.

C. Install pre-formed insulating covers on all exposed tailpieces, traps, and water service beneath T AS compliant sinks, lavatories, etc.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit use of fixtures.

END OF SECTION

15440 - 11

PART1 GENERAL


A. Water Heaters.

B. Pumps. 1. Circulators.

1.2 REFERENCES

SECTION 15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

A. ASHRAE 90A- Energy Conservation in New Building Design.

B. ASME Section 8D - Pressure Vessels.


D. UL 1453- Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters.

E. UL 17 4 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters.



B. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and

connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Provide heater type, capacity, and efficiency. 3. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. 4. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics

with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.

5. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings, and performance

data. 2. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments,

lifting points, tappings, and drains.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.

B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

15450- 1


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified.

C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 3. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

D. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.


A. Conform to NSF, NFPA and UL requirements for water heaters.

B. Conform to ASME Section 8D for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers.

C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

1. 8 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.

B. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for in-line circulators.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Manufacturer: 1. AO Smith 2. State 3. Lochinvar

B. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage.

C. Performance: 1. Refer to schedule on drawings

15450- 2

D. Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with one inch thick glass fiber; encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish.

E. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature range from 110 to 170 degrees F, flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed controls and electrical junction box. Wire double element units so elements do not operate simultaneously. 1. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve,

magnesium anode, and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve.

2.2 DOMESTIC HOT WATER EXPANSION TANKS

A. Manufacturer: 1. State 2. Amtrol 3. AO Smith

B. IAPMO certified, welded steel construction with butyl rubber diaphragm, suitable for potable water installation, 150 psig maximum working pressure, %" mpt connection, 5 year warranty.

2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Grundfos 2. Bell and Gossett 3. Taco 4. Armstrong

B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 145 psig working pressure.

C. Impeller: Stainless Steel.

D. Shaft: Aluminum Oxide Ceramic and supported by two radial bearings mounted in a stainless steel bearing plate and rotor can.

E. Motor: cooled and lubricated by the pumped fluid and shall require no scheduled maintenance.

F. Performance: 1. Refer to drawings for schedule

G. Provide a manual starter and aquastat to cycle the pump on a 20 degree F. temperature drop.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to NSF, NFPA 54, UL requirements.

B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and electrical work to achieve operating system.

15450- 3

C. Domestic Water Heaters: 1. Support vent and intake piping independently of water heater. 2. Extend discharge from T&P valve to floor drain. 3. Install isolation valves on inlet and discharge of water heater. Provide

unions at connection to water heater. Provide heat trap in water connections on systems which are not circulated.

4. Install expansion tanks on system with circulators. Install expansion tanks between cold water inlet check valve and heater.

D. Pumps: 1. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized

soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge. 2. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. 3. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump

casings. 4. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without

vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean all construction debris and dust from equipment rooms. Leave equipment clean. Blow out all construction dust from all internal portions of equipment, control cabinets, pump motors, and burners.

END OF SECTION

15450- 4

SECTION 15535 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIAL TIES

PART1 GENERAL


A. Piping.

B. Moisture and liquid indicators.


A. Section 15080- Mechanical Insulation.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE 15- Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

B. ASME B16.22- Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

C. ASME B 16.26- Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes.

D. ASME B31.5- Refrigeration Piping.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Refrigerant piping system to connect outdoor condensing unit with indoor fan coil unit.

B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM B31.5 unless indicated otherwise.


A. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.


A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.

B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with

15535- 1

melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F.

2.2 REFRIGERANT

A Refrigerant: ASHRAE 34; 1. R-410a.

B. Contractor shall provide additional refrigerant for each system as required for proper system charge. Refer to specification section 15775.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

B. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

C. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.

D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

E. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

F. Insulate piping; refer to Section 15080.

G. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant.

H. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.

B. Pressure Test: 1. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. 2. Let stand for 24 hours. 3. Test to no leakage.

15535- 2

C. System Dehydration: 1. Isolate refrigeration compressor using valves. 2. Evacuate system to 200 microns using vacuum gauges calibrated in

microns. 3. Break vacuum with dry nitrogen. 4. Evacuate again to 200 microns and let system stand for 24 hours. 5. Maximum allowable pressure rise to 250 microns. 6. Conduct test at 70 degree ambient or above.

D. After system is leak tested and dehydrated, charge with refrigerant, operate system and verify proper refrigerant charge.

END OF SECTION

15535- 3

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

SECTION 15570 FURNACES

A. Section includes forced-air furnaces, refrigerant cooling coils.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15075- Mechanical Identification. 2. Section 15410- Plumbing Piping. 3. Section 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties. 4. Section 15810- Ducts.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ARI 210/240 (Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute)- Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment

B. ARI 270 (Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute)- Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment

C. ARI 520 (Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute)- Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors, Compressor Units and Condensing Units

D. ASHRAE 15 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers)- Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

E. ASHRAE 103-1982 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers)- Heating Seasonal Efficiency of Central Furnaces and Boilers, Methods of Testing

F. NEMA MG 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)- Motors and Generators

G. ANSI Z223.1-NFPA 54 (National Fire Protection Association)- National Fuel Gas Code

H. UL 207 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Non-Electrical

I. UL 303 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing and Compressor Units

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 15000: Procedures for submittals

B. Product Data: Submit rated capacities, efficiencies, weights, required clearances, and location and size of field connections, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.

15570- 1

C. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit rigging, assembly, and installation instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, service instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience.


A Accept furnaces, and thermostats on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.


A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.8 WARRANTY

A Provide ten year manufacturers limited warranty for heat exchangers.

B. One-year warranty on all other components

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A Provide service and maintenance of furnace and accessories for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Supply two filters for each furnace.

15570-2

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS FIRED FURNACES

A Manufacturers: 1. Carrier 2. Trane 3. Lennox

B. Direct Vented condensing gas furnace, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, gas heat exchanger and burner, controls, filter rack, air filter and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer. 1. Air Flow Configuration: Four-way convertible. 2. Fuel: Natural gas fired 3. Venting Kit: Provide with concentric direct vent termination kit. 4. Electric Refrigeration: Refrigerant cooling coil

C. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access panels with safety interlock switches for furnaces installed indoors, insulation.

D. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct drive, multi-speed motor, statically and dynamically balanced.

E. Heat Exchanger: 1. Primary:

a) Aluminized steel, clamshell type crimped or welded construction. 2. Secondary:

a) Aluminum fins fitted to stainless steel tubes 3. components

a) condensate drain header box assembly located on front of coil b) all components mounted in heavy gauge steel frame c) condensate drain and trap for connection to Yz inch PVC.

F. Gas Burner: 1. aluminized steel inshot burners with hot surface igniter 2. Direct vented type 3. Gas valve provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining

pressure regulation, safety ignition system, manual On-Off valve, pilot filtration, automatic electric valves.

4. Corrosion resistant combustion air blower with permanently lubricated motor

G. Gas Burner Safety Controls: 1. Thermocouple sensor: Prevents opening of gas valve until pilot flame is

proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. Ignition and flame- sensing safety controls to prove adequate combustion air supply and stop gas flow on ignition failure.

2. Flame rollout switch: Installed on burner box and prevents unsafe operation.

15570-3

3. Blocked Vent shutoff system: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and prevents operation, manual reset.

4. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de-energizes burner on excessive outlet air temperature, automatic resets.

H. Operating Controls 1. Each unit shall have standard terminal strip for termination to 3'd party

control system.

I. Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber, disposable type arranged for easy replacement.

J. Performance: 1. Ratings: Seasonal Efficiency Rating not less than requirements of

ASHRAE 103. 2. Refer to Furnace Schedule. Gas heating capacities are at 3600 feet

elevation. 3. Heating Capacity: See schedules on drawings

a) Heating output at installed altitude: 3600 feet elevation b) Annual fuel utilization efficiency (AFUE): 95.0 percent.

2.2 EVAPORATOR COIL UNITS

A Manufacturers: 1. Carrier 2. Trane 3. Lennox

B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240

C. Evaporator Coil: 1. Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymeric drain pan,

drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted distributor or thermostatic expansion valve, steel cabinet with baked enamel finish and insulation.

2. Horizontal or vertical application as required

D. Cooling Capacity: 1. See Mechanical Schedules

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Verify that building is ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Install in accordance with references below.

B. Install gas fired furnaces in accordance with ANSI Z223.1 (NFPA 54).

15570-4

C. Suspend attic units from structure on all thread rod and trapeze hangers.

D. Install combination concentric terminal vent kits through roof. Install Schedule 40 PVC combustion air and vent piping between concentric vent and furnaces.

E. Install copper condensate drain from furnace and cooling coils. Provide and install P-traps at each condensate drain connection.

F. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE 15.

G. Connect furnace to gas fuel piping. Provide gas cock, dirt leg and flexible connector at each connection. Install rigid steel pipe nipple at furnace to prevent flexible connector from contacting furnace housing.

H. Connect units to electric supply and connect controls that are separate from units.

I. Connect return air and supply air duct to system ductwork with flexible duct connection. ·

J. Install furnaces with filters in place. Do not operate furnaces while building is under construction.

END OF SECTION

15570- 5

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

SECTION 15670 REFRIGERANT CONDENSING UNITS

A. Section includes refrigerant condensing package unit, charge of refrigerant and oil, controls and control connections, motor starters, electrical power connections.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties: Product requirements

for connection to condensing units.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ARI 210/240 (Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute)- Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.

B. ASHRAE 15 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers)- Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

C. ASHRAE 20 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers)- Methods of Testing for Rating Remote Mechanical Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers.

D. ASHRAE 90A (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers)- Energy Conservation in New Building Design.

E. NEMA 250 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1 000 Volts Maximum).

F. UL 207 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Non-electrical.

G. UL 303 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Condensing and Compressor Units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 15000 -Submittal Procedures

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loading,

required clearances, and location and size of field connections. 2. Include schematic layouts showing condenser, refrigeration compressors,

cooling coils, refrigerant piping and accessories required for complete system.

3. Summary of all auxiliary utility requirements including electricity, gas, water etc. Indicate quantity and quality of each utility

4. Single Line schematic drawing of power field connection requirements

15670- 1

5. Schematic diagram of control system indicating points for field interface and I or connection.

6. Installation manuals


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit start-up instructions, maintenance instructions, parts lists, controls, and accessories.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten years experience.


A. Units delivered to the jobsite with a factory holding charge and factory charged with oil.

B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units.

C. Protect units on site from physical damage.



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for entire unit, covering material and workmanship that prove defective within the warranty period.

B. Provide an extended 5 year parts only compressor warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDENSING UNITS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier 2. Trane 3. Lennox

B. Equipment: 1. Factory-assembled, single-piece, air-cooled air conditioner unit.

Contained within the unit enclosure is all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor, refrigerant charge (R-41 Oa), and special features required prior to field start-up.

C. Unit Cabinet: 1. Unit cabinet will be constructed for galvanized steel, bonderized, and

coated with a powder coat paint.

15670- 2

D. Fans: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

Condenser fan will be direct-drive propeller type, discharging air upward. Condenser fan motors will be totally enclosed, 1-phase type with class B insulation and permanently lubricated bearings. Shafts will be corrosion resistant. Fan blades will be statically and dynamically balanced. Condenser fan openings will be equipped with steel wire safety guards.

E. Compressor: 1. Compressor will be hermetically sealed. 2. Compressor will be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. 3. Compressor will be scroll type. 4. Provide with crankcase heater.

F. Condenser Coil: 1. Condenser coil will be air cooled. 2. Coil will be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper

tubes which are then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. 3. Provide with hail screen guards to cover condenser coil

G. Refrigeration components: 1. Refrigeration circuit components will include liquid line shutoff valve with

sweat connections, suction line shutoff valves with sweat connections, low ambient kit, system charge of refrigerant R-41 Oa, and compressor oil.

H. Electrical Requirements: 1. Unit electrical power will be single point connection. 2. Control circuit will be 24v. 3. Provide units with hard start kit including capacitor and relay.

2.2 HEAT PUMPS


B. Equipment: 1. Factory-assembled, single-piece, air-cooled heat pump unit. Contained

within the unit enclosure is all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor, refrigerant charge (R-41 Oa), and special features required prior to field start-up.

C. Unit Cabinet:

D.

1. Unit cabinet will be constructed for galvanized steel, bonderized, and coated with a powder coat paint.

Fans: 1. 2.

3.

Condenser fan will be direct-drive propeller type, discharging air upward. Condenser fan motors will be totally enclosed, 1-phase type with class B insulation and permanently lubricated bearings. Shafts will be corrosion resistant.

15670-3

4. Fan blades will be statically and dynamically balanced. 5. Condenser fan openings will be equipped with steel wire safety guards.

E. Compressor: 1. Compressor will be hermetically sealed. 2. Compressor will be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. 3. Compressor will be scroll type.

F. Condenser Coil: 1. Condenser coil will be air cooled. 2. Coil will be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper

tubes which are then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. 3. Provide with hail screen guards to cover condenser coil

G. Refrigeration components: 1. Refrigeration circuit components will include liquid line shutoff valve with

sweat connections, vapor line shutoff valve with sweat connections, system charge of refrigerant R-41 Oa, reversing valve, crankcase heater, freeze thermostat, low ambient kit, and compressor oil.

H. Electrical Requirements: 1. Unit electrical power will be single point connection. 2. Control circuit will be 24v.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Connect to refrigeration piping and electrical service.

B. Install units on vibration pads.

C. Adjust and level unit on supports. Bolt unit to curb.

D. Evacuate the system and charge with refrigerant in accordance with standard practice. Refer to Section 15535.

E. Install control wiring between outdoor unit and indoor unit in conduit. Conduit to be installed in accordance with Division 16.

3.2 STARTUP

A. Check and assure proper system charge of refrigerant and oil.

B. Provide testing and starting of the system

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Demonstrate proper operation of unit.

B. Instruct Owner on proper operation and maintenance.

END OF SECTION

15670- 4

SECTION 15760 TERMINAL HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fan-coil units.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ARI 410 (Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute)- Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.

B. UL 1096 (ANSI/Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Electric Central Air Heating Equipment.

C. SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association)HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 15000: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cross sections of cabinets, bracing and reinforcing, and typical elevations. Indicate schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers

C. Product Data: Submit coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and rough-in dimensions. Submit mechanical and electrical service locations, capacities and requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS




A. Accept units on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage. Store under roof.

B. Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and by storing indoors. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs.

15760-1

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide 1 year manufacturer's warranty for fan-coil unit.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Supply two filters for fan-coil unit.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FAN-COIL UNITS


B. Packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, DX cooling coil, electric strip heater, controls, filter rack, air filter and accessories; wired for single power connection kit with control transformer. 1. Air Flow Configuration: Upflow I Horizontal convertible. 2. Factory slip-in electric strip heater for field installation. 3. Electric Refrigeration: Refrigerant cooling coil.

C. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access panels for fan coil units installed indoors, insulation.

D. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct drive, multi-speed motor, statically and dynamically balanced.

E. Operating Controls 1. Provide each fan coil unit with standard terminal strip for termination to 3rd

party control system.

F. Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber, disposable type arranged for easy replacement.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify wall construction and ductwork are ready for installation.

B. Verify concealed blocking and supports are in place and connections are correctly located.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install coils in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

B. Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins.

15760-2

C. Install coils level.

D. Provide sight glass in liquid line within 12 inches of coil.

E. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceilings are finished and painted. Avoid damage.

F. Protection: Provide finished cabinet units with protective covers during balance of construction.

END OF SECTION

15760- 3

SECTION 15775 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A Section includes indoor air conditioning units, outdoor heat pump units, branch circuit controllers, and controllers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A ARI 410 (Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute)- Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.

B. UL 1096 (ANSI/Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Electric Central Air Heating Equipment.

C. SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: 1. Submit coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows,

connections, and rough-in dimensions. 2. Submit mechanical and electrical service locations, capacities and

requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Submit special procedures and assembly of components.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section. Contractor shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer prior to bidding the work described in this section.

C. Startup: Factory representative shall verify installation of all system components including controls prior to starting system. After representative verifies all components have been properly installed and controls have been setup correctly, he/she shall remain on-site for startup and verify proper system operation.

15775- 1

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's warranty for a period of one ( 1) year from date of installation with additional compressor warranty for six (6) years from date of installation.

B. Contractor shall provide As-Built Diamond System Builder model and all support documentation required by manufacturer for extended warranty.



1.7 BIDDING

A. The contractor shall provide a base bid price for the complete installation of the Mitsubishi City Multi System and all associated components as shown on the drawings and described within the specifications.

B. The contractor shall provide the owner with an alternate price, as indicated on the bid form, for the complete installation of an LG VRF system and all associated components for the owner's review. The contractor is responsible for providing complete installation drawings and coordinating changes that impact Division 16 with that contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HEAT PUMP UNITS

A. Manufacturer: 1. Mitsubishi - Base Bid 2. LG -Alternate

B. R2-Series Outdoor Unit: 1. General:

a) The R2-Series PURY outdoor unit shall be used specifically with CITY MUL Tl VRFZ components. The R2-Series shall consist of the PURY outdoor unit, Branch Circuit (BC) Controller, indoor units (-E models), and MNET DOC (Direct Digital Controls).

b) The PURY outdoor units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The outdoor unit shall have a powder coated finish. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. 1) The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air

handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of outdoor rated capacity.

2) Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 60 dB(A).

15775-2

3) Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the BC (Branch Circuit) Controller shall be insulated.

4) The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls.

5) The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over-current protection and DC bus protection.

6) The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 164 feet and have total refrigerant tubing length of 984-1312 feet. The greatest length is not to exceed 492 feet between outdoor unit and the indoor units without the need for line size changes or traps.

7) The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in heating down to -4°F ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls.

8) The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained.

2. Unit Cabinet: a) The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel,

bonderized and finished with a powder coated baked enamel.

3. Fan: a) The unit shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable

speed propeller type fan. b) The fan motor shall have inherent protection, have

permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed.

c) The fan motor shall be mounted for quiet operation. d) The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent

contact with moving parts. e) The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow.

4. Refrigerant:

5.

a) R41 OA refrigerant shall be required for outdoor unit systems.

Coil: a)

b) c)

d)

The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor. The outdoor coil shall include 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit, except for the last stage.

15775-3

6. Compressor: a) The compressor shall be a high performance, inverter driven,

modulating capacity scroll compressor. b) A crankcase heater shall be factory mounted on the compressor. c) The outdoor unit compressor shall have an inverter to modulate

capacity. The capacity shall be completely variable down to 16% of rated capacity.

d) The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload.

e) The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

7. Electrical: a) The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 460 volts, 3 phase, 60

hertz. b) The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. c) The control circuit between the indoor units, BC Controller and the

outdoor unit shall be 12VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

8. Coil Hail Guards: a) Contractor shall fabricate and install hail guards to protect

condenser coil. Hail Guard shall be fabricated from 1/2 inch #18 flattened expanded metal. Hail guards shall be painted to match equipment.

C. Branch Circuit (BC) Controllers: 1. General:

a) The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall be specifically used with R41 OA R2-Series systems. These units shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish. The BC Controller shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of rated capacity.

b) Each BC Controller branch shall connect to indoor unit(s) (-E models) not exceeding 54,000 Btu/h per branch.

2. BC Unit Cabinet: a) The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel. b) Each cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator and multiple

refrigeration control valves. c) The unit shall house two tube-in-tube heat exchangers.

3. Refrigerant: a) R41 OA refrigerant shall be required for BC Controllers in

conjunction with outdoor unit systems. 4. Refrigerant valves:

a) The units shall be furnished with multiple two position refrigerant valves for each circuit on the controller, whether connected to an indoor unit or not.

15775- 4

b) Each circuit shall have one (54,000 Btu/h or smaller indoor unit section) two-position liquid line valve and a two-position suction line valve.

c) When connecting a 54,000 Btu/h or larger indoor unit section, two branch circuits shall be joined together at the branch controller to deliver an appropriate amount of refrigerant. The two refrigerant valves shall operate simultaneously.

d) Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant flow.

5. Integral Drain Pan: a) An integral condensate pan and drain shall be provided.

6. Electrical: a) The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. b) The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage

limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz). c) The BC Controllers shall be controlled by integral

microprocessors. 7. The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be

12VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

8. Provide BC Controllers with factory isolation valves.

D. Ceiling Concealed Duct Fan Coil Unit: 1. General:

a) The unit shall be a high performance ceiling concealed ducted indoor fan coil that mounts above the ceiling with a fixed rear return and a horizontal discharge supply, and shall have a modulating linear expansion device. The unit shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers.

2. Indoor Unit: a) The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested.

Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.

3. Unit Cabinet:

4.

a) The unit shall be space saving, ceiling concealed, ducted. b) The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered

outside air intake. Fan: a)

b)

c)

d)

The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with one or two Sirocco fan(s) direct driven by a single motor. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall consist of four (4) speeds, High, Mid1, Mid2, and Low, 2 of which are selectable on the room controller. The indoor unit shall have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air system.

5. Filter:

15775-5

a) Provide units with factory return air filter bank and include long-life filter, as indicated on drawings.

6. Coil: a) The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth

plate fins on copper tubing. b) The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat

exchange. c) All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. d) The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. e) A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. f) The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil. g) Both refrigerant lines to the PDFY indoor units shall be insulated.

7. Electrical: a) The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. b) The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within

voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz). 8. Control System:

a) This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric to perform functions necessary to operate the system.

E. Four-Way Throw Ceiling Cassette: 1. General:

a) The unit shall be a high performance ceiling cassette indoor fan coil. The unit shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers.

2. Indoor Unit: a) Factory assembled and wired. b) Unit fits in the ceiling with the capability of attaching a branch

supply duct as well as a fresh air duct. c) Unit covered with a flat panel which protrudes only 1 inch below

the ceiling to provide a neat and clean installation. d) Evaporator fan:

1) High performance, fan direct driven by a single motor. 2) Statically and dynamically balanced with permanently

lubricated bearings. e) Adjustable air outlet system:

f)

1) 4-way air flow, 3-way air flow, or 2-way air flow. 2) Auto air swing vanes automatically swing up and down for

uniform air distribution. Filter: 1) Return air long-life filter to provide approximately 2,500

hours of use in a normal office environment before cleaning.

g) Coil: 1) Nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to

copper tubing. 2) Tubing has inner grooves for high efficiency heat

exchange. 3) All tube joints brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4) Coil pressure tested at the factory.

h) Condensate Drain:

15775-6

1) Condensate pan provided under the coil and piping. 2) Integral drain pan pump capable of lifting condensate 23

inches provided. 3. Electrical:

a) The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. b) The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within

voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).

4. Control System: a) This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric to

perform functions necessary to operate the system.

F. One-Way Throw Ceiling Cassette: 1. General:

a) The unit shall be a one-way cassette indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille and shall have a modulating linear expansion device. The unit shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers.

2. Indoor Unit: a) Factory assembled and wired. b) Unit fits in the ceiling with the capability of attaching a fresh air

duct. c) Unit covered with a flat panel which protrudes only 1 inch below

the ceiling to provide a neat and clean installation. d) Evaporator fan:

e)

1) High performance, fan direct driven by a single motor. 2) Statically and dynamically balanced with permanently

lubricated bearings. Filter: 1) Return air long-life filter to provide approximately 2,500

hours of use in a normal office environment before cleaning.

f) Coil: 1) Nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to

copper tubing. 2) Tubing has inner grooves for high efficiency heat

exchange. 3) All tube joints brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4) Coil pressure tested at the factory.

g) Condensate Drain: 1) Condensate pan provided under the coil and piping. 2) Integral drain pan pump capable of lifting condensate 23

inches provided. 3. Electrical:

a) The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. b) The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within

voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).

4. Control System a) This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric to

perform functions necessary to operate the system.

15775-7

G. Controls: 1. General:

a) The CITY MUL Tl Controls Network (CMCN) shall be capable of supporting remote controllers, schedule timers, system controllers, and centralized controllers.

2. Electrical Characteristics a) General:

1) The CMCN shall operate at 24VDC. Controller power and communications shall be via a common non-polar communications bus.

b) Wiring: 1) Control wiring shall be installed in a system daisy chain

configuration from indoor unit to indoor unit, to the BC controller and to the outdoor unit. Control wiring to remote controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that unit. Control wiring for schedule timers, system controllers, and centralized controllers shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to system controllers, to the power supply.

c) Wiring type: 1) Wiring shall be 2-conductor ( 16 AWG), twisted shielded

pair, stranded wire. 3. Centralized Controller- AG-150A

a) The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall be capable of controlling a maximum of 50 indoor units across multiple CITY MUL Tl outdoor units. The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall be approximately 7.5" x 12" in size and shall be powered from a Power Supply Unit (PAC-SC50KUA). The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall support operation superceding that of the remote controllers, system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall have five basic operation controls which shall be applied to all indoor units. This basic control set of operation controls for the AG-150 Centralized Controller shall include on/off, operation mode selection (cool, heat, auto, and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting. Since the AG-150 provides centralized control it shall be able to enable or disable operation of local remote controllers. In terms of scheduling, the AG-150 Centralized Controller shall allow the user to define both daily and weekly schedules with operations consisting of ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature setting, and permit/prohibit of remote controllers. All AG-150 Centralized Controllers shall be equipped with one RJ-45 Ethernet port to support interconnection with a network PC via a closed/direct Local Area Network (LAN). The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall be capable of performing initial settings via the keypad and display on the controller.

4. Power Supply:

15775-8

a) The system shall be provided with one PAC-SC51 KUA. The power supply shall deliver 12VDC for the AG-150A centralized controller and 24VDC voltage for the central control transmission.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Support indoor unit from structure as directed by manufacturer in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install indoor unit and coordinate with ceiling layout.

C. Install outdoor units on equipment platform as indicated on drawings. Install units level and mount on neoprene isolation pads.

D. Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins.

E. Install refrigerant lines as directed by the manufacturer. Insulate suction, liquid, and hot gas lines along their entire length. Secure refrigerant lines and provide proper support. Make connections to indoor and outdoor units- check for leaks.

F. Provide condensate drain connection for cooling coils and BC controllers. Extend as indicated on the drawings to drain. Provide pipe supports from structure and slope down in direction of flow. Insulate condensate drain line.

G. Install wiring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Install remote controller in location shown. Terminate all control wiring.

I. Set Dl P switches on units. Demonstrate to Owner/User. Coordinate settings with User's requirements.

3.2 SET UP AND COMMISSIONING

A. General: 1. Commissioning report forms have been received from distributor or

manufacturer. 2. All components are installed according to specifications, local codes, and

manufacturer's instructions. 3. Once commissioning has been completed, a manufacturer's

representative will be present for system start up.

B. Electrical: 1. Verify wiring is complete and connections are made to each unit.

C. Control Wiring: 1. Verify control wiring is completed and connected properly to all system

components required. Control wiring shall be 16 AWG stranded, two conductor, shielded cable.

2. Controller with approved power supply tied into TB7 of outdoor units. 3. Transmission cable connected to TB3 of outdoor units and shield is

grounded only at outdoor unit.

15775-9

4. Transmission cable daisy chained to BC controller at TB02 and indoor units at TB5.

5. Shields interconnected to S terminals of indoor units. 6. Control wiring lengths do not exceed maximum length specified by

manufacturer.

D. Addressing: 1. All system components are addressed properly.

a) Rotary switches on outdoor units and BC controllers are set to proper address.

b) Rotary switches SW11 and SW12 at the indoor units are set to the proper address.

c) Rotary switch SW14 at the indoor units are set to proper refrigerant branch.

d) Rotary switches on controllers set for corresponding indoor units.

E. RefrigeranUCondensate Piping: 1. Closed shipping gasket has been removed from suction service flange at

outdoor units and new open gasket has been applied. 2. Refrigerant piping has been pressure tested and found to be air tight. 3. Both refrigerant lines have been properly insulated (separately) with

correct insulation thickness as specified in Section 15080. 4. Refrigerant piping has been evacuated per manufacturer's instructions. 5. Additional refrigerant charge has been calculated and added to the

system per manufacturer's instructions. 6. Refrigerant piping lengths do not exceed maximum length specified by

manufacturer both for total piping lengths and lengths between components.

7. All condensate lines have been installed and insulated as specified in Section 15080.

3.3 CLEANING

A. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets.

B. Clean filters.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate operation to Owner/User.

END OF SECTION

15775- 10

SECTION 15781 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Packaged roof top gas/electric air conditioning units.

B. Roof mounting curb and base.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ARI 210 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.

B. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.


D. NFPA 90A- Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.



B. Product Data: 1. Indicate capacity of manufactured products and assemblies specific to

this project. 2. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection

requirements. 3. Indicate dimensions, weights and duct connections of each unit.


A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include

start-up instructions.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions,

installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Quality Check-Off form: 1. Contractor to complete for each unit installed. 2. Bind in folder, indicating project site. Submit with O&M data.

1.5 AS-BUlL T DRAWINGS

A. The contractor shall provide the owner with a roof plan indicating the exact location of all new equipment, unit number, model number, and serial number.

15781-1


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in place, ready for immediate installation of units.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year parts and labor warranty for each unit.

B. Provide additional four year warranty for compressors.

C. Provide ten year warranty on gas fired heat exchanger.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONVERTIBLE GAS/ELECTRIC PACKAGED UNITS


B. General: 1. Convertible discharge units 2. Minimum Efficiency ratings:

a) 5 ton: 16.0 SEER b) 6 ton: 13.0 EER.

3. Factory assembled, single-piece, outdoor packaged unit, electricallycontrolled heating and cooling unit utilizing a hermetic compressor for cooling duty, and gas combustion for heating duty.

4. Units are factory wired, fully charged with refrigerant charge (R-41 Oa), and 100% run tested before leaving factory.

5. Cooling performance rated in accordance with ARI Standards 210/240 or 360 and 270. a) Unit capable of starting and running at 115 F ambient outdoor

temperature, meeting maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 210/240 or 360.

b) Compressor with standard control capable of operation down to 40 deg F ambient outdoor temperature.

6. Wiring internal to unit colored and numbered 7. UL-tested and certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 Standards, UL

1995 and CSA No. 236-M90.

C. Unit Cabinet: 1. Constructed of zinc coated heavy gauge galvanized steel, coated with a

baked enamel finish.

15781-2

D.

2. All panels insulated with minimum 1/2 inch thick foil faced glass fiber insulation. Unit base insulated with 1/2 inch 1 pound density closed cell insulation.

3. Unit top: a) One piece construction or seamed with double-hemmed and

gasket sealed construction 4. Unit base:

a) For water integrity, unit base pan constructed of one piece material or with liquid tight welded seams. Duct penetrations have minimum 1 inch high curb built into base pan.

5. Hinged Access Doors: a) Provide factory installed hinges on Filter/Evaporator Access Door,

Indoor Fan/Heat Exchanger Door, and Compressor Control Access Door

6. Holes provided in the base rails for rigging shackles to facilitate maneuvering and overhead rigging.

Fans: 1.

2.

3.

Evaporator Fan: a) Fan wheel: steel double-inlet, forward-curved blades with

corrosion-resistant finish b) Fans are dynamically balanced. c) Direct drive with multi-speed motors for 3 thru 5 ton units. d) Belt drive with adjustable sheaves for 6 thru 10 ton units. Provide

with adjustable idler arm assembly. e) Motor:

1) Permanently lubricated with built-in overload protection. 2) Meet US Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT)

Condenser Fan a) Direct-driven propeller type, draw through configuration, vertical

air discharge. b) Construction: aluminum blades riveted to corrosion resistant steel

spiders, dynamically balanced. c) Motor:

1) Permanently lubricated with built-in overload protection. 2) Meet US Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT)

Induced-draft blower: a) direct-driven, single inlet, forward-curved centrifugal type, made

from steel with a corrosion-resistant finish, dynamically balanced.

E. Compressor(s): 1. Hermetically sealed, direct drive, scroll type 2. Built in internal over current, over temperature protection as standard. 3. Provide with centrifugal oil pump. 4. Compressors resiliently mounted on neoprene isolators.

F. Refrigerant circuit: 1. Provide with Thermal Expansion valves, service pressure ports, and

refrigerant line filter driers

G. Coils:

15781-3

1. Evaporator and condenser coils: aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes with all joints brazed.

2. Tube sheet openings belled to prevent tube wear. 3. Evaporator coil: full face active design. 4. Evaporator tested at 250 psig; condenser coil tested to 400 psig. 5. Double sloped condensate drain pan under evaporator section

H. Heating Section: 1. Induced-draft combustion type with energy saving direct-spark ignition

system and redundant main gas valve. 2. Tubular-section type constructed of a minimum of 20-gage steel coated

with a nominal 1.2 mil aluminum-silicone alloy for corrosion resistance. 3. Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of stainless steel. 4. All gas piping shall enter the unit cabinet at a single location.

I. Controls and Safeties: 1. Unit provided with self-contained low-voltage control circuit protected by

an auto-reset device. 2. Heating section provided with the following minimum protections:

a) High-temperature limit switch. b) Induced-draft motor speed sensor. c) Flame rollout switch. d) Flame proving controls.

J. Filter Sections: 1. Factory-installed, low velocity, throwaway 2 inch thick pleated fiberglass

filters of commercially available sizes.

K. Roof Curb: 1. Curb shall be 18 inches tall. 2. Roof curb designed to conform to NRCA Standards. 3. Formed galvanized steel with wood nailer strip and capable of supporting

entire unit weight. 4. Allows for installing and securing ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit

on the curb. 5. Curbs configured so that the unit will be level when installed on the roof.

Make necessary provisions when installing curb to allow for level installation.

L. Outside air provisions: 1. Rooftop Units:

a) Outdoor Economizer with 0-100 percent, fully modulating opposed blade dampers with electric actuator.

b) Provide with minimum position setting device, preset linkage and wiring harness with plug.

c) Fixed Dry bulb control d) Powered Exhaust:

1) Direct driven propeller fan mounted at return air plenum. 2) Field wired to unit power supply.

M. Condenser Coil Hail Guard Assembly:

15781-4

1. Close mesh design to prevent small hail from penetrating the screen. 2. Stand off from the condenser coils by at least one inch.

N. Electrical Access with Disconnect Switch: 1. Factory installed 3 pole molded case disconnect switch with provisions for

through the base electrical connections. 2. Disconnect switch installed inside unit with water tight enclosure with

access through swinging door. 3. Factory wired from switch to high voltage terminal block. 4. Switch sized per NEC and UL. 5. Switch UL/CSA agency recognized. 6. Powered Convenience Outlet:

a) Factory installed GFCI, 120 VAC, 2 plug convenience outlet.

0. Condensate Overflow Switch: 1. Provide each unit with factory installed condensate overflow switch to

shut down unit operation upon rising level of fluid level in factory pan.

P. Controls: 1. Provide unit with conventional thermostat interface board for connection

to third party control system. 2. RTU1-15:

a) Provide rooftop unit with duct mounted carbon dioxide sensor and factory installed control wiring for field installation.

3. RTU 2-15: a) Provide rooftop unit with factory mounted and wired return air

smoke detector.

2.2 PACKAGE ROOFTOP VENTILATORS WITH ENERGY RECOVERY

A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck, No Exceptions.

B. General: 1. Unit shall be fully assembled at the factory and consist of an insulated

metal cabinet, downturn outdoor air intake with metal mesh filter assembly, exhaust air blower, evaporator coil, condensate drain pan, Energy wheel, indirect gas furnace, packaged OX system, phase and brownout protection, motorized dampers, sensors, 18" tall curb assembly, service receptacle, filter assembly for intake air, supply air blower assembly, exhaust/relief blower assembly and an electrical control center. All specified components and internal accessories factory installed are tested and prepared for single-point high voltage connection.

C. Unit Cabinet: 1. Formed, double wall insulated metal cabinet, fabricated to permit access

to internal components for maintenance. 2. Outside casing: 18 gauge, galvanized steel, all components on exterior of

unit shall be painted with a baked industrial enamel finish. 3. Internal assemblies: 24 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel, except for motor

supports which shall be minimum14 gauge galvanized (G90) steel.

15781-5

D.

E.

4. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and erosion requirements of UL 181. a) Materials: Fiberglass insulation. If insulation other than fiberglass

is used, it must also meet the Fire Hazard Classification shown below.

b) Thickness: 2 inch. c) Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread of 25 and

smoke developed of 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411.

5. Access panels I doors: Unit shall be equipped with insulated, hinged doors to provide easy access to all major components. Doors and access panels shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized painted galvannealed steel.

Fans: 1.

2.

Motors: 1. 2.

Supply Fan: a) Airfoil plenum fan statically and dynamically balanced, AMCA

certified for air and sound performance, mounted on ground and polished steel fan shafts with ball bearing pillow blocks. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum L 10 life in excess of 50,000 hours at maximum catalogued speeds.

b) Blower assembly shall consist of an electric motor and a directdrive fan. Assembly shall be mounted on heavy gauge galvanized steel rails and further mounted on 1.125 inch thick neoprene vibration isolators.

c) Blower section motor source quality control: Blower performance shall be factory tested for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed and efficiency. Ratings are to be established in accordance with AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

Exhaust Fan: a) Airfoil plenum fan statically and dynamically balanced, AMCA

certified for air and sound performance, mounted on ground and polished steel fan shafts with ball bearing pillow blocks. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum L 10 life in excess of 50,000 hours at maximum catalogued speeds.

b) Blower assembly shall consist of an electric motor and a directdrive fan. Assembly shall be mounted on heavy gauge galvanized steel rails and further mounted on 1.125 inch thick neoprene vibration isolators.

c) Blower section motor source quality control: Blower performance shall be factory tested for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed and efficiency. Ratings are to be established in accordance with AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

Blower motors greater than% horsepower shall be "NEMA Premium™". Compliance with EPAct minimum energy-efficiency standards for single speed ODP and TE enclosures is not acceptable.

15781-6

3. Motors shall be heavy-duty, permanently lubricated type to match the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure.

F. Evaporator Coil: 1. Evaporator coil shall be AHRI Certified and shall be (silver) soldered or

brazed into the compressed refrigerant system. Coil shall be constructed of copper tubing, permanently bonded to aluminum fins and enclosed in a galvanized steel frame.

2. Evaporator coil shall be of "interlaced" configuration, permitting independent operation of either compressor without conflict with the other compressor.

G. Condensate Drain Pan: 1. Pan shall be formed of welded austenitic stainless steel sheet material

and provided with a welded stainless steel drain connection at the front for connection to a P trap.

2. Drain pan shall be sloped in two directions to provide positive draining and drain connector shall be sealed at penetration through cabinet wall.

H. Energy Recovery Wheel Assembly: 1. Energy wheel shall be of total enthalpy, rotary air-to-air type and shall be

an element of a removable energy wheel cassette. The cassette shall consist of a galvanized steel framework (designed to produce laminar air flow through the wheel), an energy wheel as specified and a motor and drive assembly.

2. The cassette shall incorporate a pre-tensioned urethane drive belt with a five year warranty.

3. The wheel media shall be a polymer film matrix in a stainless steel framework and be comprised of individual segments that are removable for servicing.

4. Silica gel desiccant shall be permanently bonded to the polymer film and is designed and constructed to permit cleaning and servicing.

5. Performance criteria are to be as specified in AHRI Standard 1060, complying with the Combined Efficiency data in the submittal.

6. The energy wheel is to have a five year warranty.

I. Indirect gas furnace: 1. Shall be ETL Certified as a component of the unit. 2. Shall have an integral combustion gas blower. 3. Shall be ETL Certified for installation downstream of a cooling coil. 4. Shall have fault sensors to provide fault conditions to optional digital

controller or building controls. 5. Shall have 4-pass tubular heat exchangers, constructed of type 409

stainless steel. Heat exchanger tubes shall be installed on the vest plate by means of swaged assembly, welded connections are not acceptable. Heat exchanger tubes shall be supported by a minimum of two fabricated assemblies that support the tubes and also permit expansion and contraction of the tubes.

6. Heat exchanger shall have a 10 year extended warranty. 7. Furnace control shall be 4:1 Modulating.

15781-7

8. Shall be encased in a weather-tight metal housing with intake air vents. Large, metal lift-off door shall provide easy access to the enclosed vest plate, control circuitry, gas train, burner assembly and exhaust blower.

9. Shall have solid state controls permitting stand-alone operation.

J. Packaged DX System: 1. Unit shall have an integral compressors and evaporator coil located within

the weather-tight unit housing. 2. Condenser coils and appurtenant condenser fan assemblies shall be

factory installed as integral subassemblies of the unit and mounted on the exterior of the unit. Condenser fan motors shall be three phase, type 56 frame, Open Air Over and Shaft Up. Each condenser fan motor shall have a vented frame, rated for continuous duty and be equipped with an automatic reset thermal protector. Motors shall be UL Recognized and CSA Certified.

3. The refrigerant compressors shall be digital hermetic scroll-type and shall be equipped with liquid line filter drier, thermostatic expansion valves (TXV), manual reset high pressure and low pressure cutouts and all appurtenant sensors, service ports and safety devices.

4. Compressed refrigerant system shall be fully charged with R-41 OA refrigerant.

5. Each compressor shall be factory-equipped with an electric crankcase heater to boil off liquid refrigerant from the oil.

K. Packaged DX Control and Diagnostics:

L.

1. The Packaged DX system shall be controlled by an onboard digital controller (DDC) that indicates both owner-supplied settings and fault conditions that may occur. The DDC shall be programmed to indicate the following faults:

Coils: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

a) Global alarm condition (active when there is at least one alarm) b) Supply Air Proving alarm c) Dirty Filter Alarm d) Compressor Trip alarm e) Compressor Locked Out alarm f) Supply Air Temperature Low Limit alarm g) Sensor #1 Out of Range (outside air temperature) h) Sensor #2 Out of Range (supply air temperature) i) Sensor #3 Out of Range (cold coil leaving air temperature)

Evaporator and condenser coils: aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes with all joints brazed. Tube sheet openings belled to prevent tube wear. Evaporator coil: full face active design. Evaporator tested at 250 psig; condenser coil tested to 400 psig. Double sloped condensate drain pan under evaporator section

M. Heating Section: 1. Induced-draft combustion type with energy saving direct-spark ignition

system and redundant main gas valve.

15781-8

2. Tubular-section type constructed of a minimum of 20-gage steel coated with a nominal 1.2 mil aluminum-silicone alloy for corrosion resistance.

3. Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of stainless steel. 4. All gas piping shall enter the unit cabinet at a single location.

N. Dampers: 1. Unit shall be provided with factory motorized dampers serving the intake

air and exhaust air. 2. Motorized dampers shall be insulated low leakage type.

0. Controls and Safeties: 1. Unit provided with self-contained low-voltage control circuit protected by

an auto-reset device. 2. Heating section provided with the following minimum protections:

a) High-temperature limit switch. b) Induced-draft motor speed sensor. c) Flame rollout switch. d) Flame proving controls.

P. Filter Sections: 1. Unit shall have permanent metal filters located in the outdoor air intake

and shall be accessible from the exterior of the unit. 2. Supply air stream shall be furnished with low velocity, throwaway 2 inch

thick pleated fiberglass filters of commercially available sizes.

Q. Roof Curb: 1. Curb shall be 18 inches tall. 2. Roof curb designed to conform to NRCA Standards. 3. Formed galvanized steel with wood nailer strip and capable of supporting

entire unit weight. 4. Allows for installing and securing ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit

on the curb. 5. Curbs configured so that the unit will be level when installed on the roof.

Make necessary provisions when installing curb to allow for level installation.

R. Condenser Coil Hail Guard Assembly: 1. Close mesh design to prevent small hail from penetrating the screen. 2. Stand off from the condenser coils by at least one inch.

S. Electrical Access with Disconnect Switch: 1. Control panel I connections: Rooftop Ventilator units shall have an

electrical control center where all high and low voltage connections are made. Control center shall be constructed to permit single-point high voltage power supply connections.

2. Factory installed 3 pole molded case disconnect switch with provisions for through the base electrical connections.

3. Disconnect switch installed inside unit with water tight enclosure with access through swinging door.

4. Factory wired from switch to high voltage terminal block. 5. Switch sized per NEC and UL.

15781-9

6. Switch UL/CSA agency recognized. 7. Powered Convenience Outlet:

a) Factory installed GFCI, 120 VAC, 2 plug convenience outlet. 8. Phase and brownout protection:

a) Unit shall have a factory-installed phase monitor to detect electric supply phase loss and voltage brown-out conditions. Upon detection of a fault, the monitor shall disconnect supply voltage to all motors.

T. Condensate Overflow Switch: 1. Provide each unit with factory installed condensate overflow switch to

shut down unit operation upon rising level of fluid level in factory pan.

U. Controls: 1. The unit shall be constructed so that it can function as a stand-alone

heating and cooling system controlled by factory-supplied controllers, thermostats and sensors or it can be operated as a heating and cooling system controlled by a Building Management System (BMS). This unit shall be controlled by a factory-installed microprocessor programmable controller (DOC) that is connected to various optional sensors. 3rd party control system shall provide digital input to the unit mounted controller enabling and disabling the system based on an owner defined schedule.

2. Unit shall incorporate a DOC controller with integral LCD screen that provides text readouts of status. DOC controller shall have a built-in keypad to permit operator to access read-out screens without the use of ancillary equipment, devices or software.

3. Supply fan shall be configured for Constant Volume (ON I OFF) control. 4. Exhaust fan shall be configured for Constant Volume (ON /OFF) control. 5. Outside Air I Return Air damper control shall be field adjustable two

position. 6. Dirty filter sensor shall be factory-installed. 7. Operating protocol: The DOC shall be factory-programmed for BACnet

IP. 8. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD):

PART 3 EXECUTION

a) Unit shall have factory installed variable frequency drives for modulation of the supply air blower assembly and exhaust air blower assembly. The VFD's shall be factory-programmed for unit-specific requirements and shall not require additional field programming to operate.

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and illustrated by the manufacturer.

B. Verify that proper power supply is available.

15781-10

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A.

C. Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level, regardless of roof slope. Field verify exact depth of roof insulation prior to ordering roof curbs, and order roof curbs to maintain 8 inches minimum from finished roof to base rail of rooftop unit.

D. Install a type L copper condensate P-trap on each rooftop unit and discharge into 18"x18"x6" galvanized steel drain pan. All seams of drain pan shall be welded. Pan shall be set in pitch.

E. Hail screens shall be installed on unit when unit is installed on the roof.

F. Set limits on motorized outside air damper for required outside air.

G. Provide initial start-up, including routine servicing and check-out.

3.3 CLEANING

A. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets.

B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer.

C. Install new 2 inch pleated filters.

3.4 STARTUP (OAU 1-15 Only)

A. Contractor shall engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, to include electrical and piping connections. Complete inspection and start-up report shall be submitted to Engineer by the factory authorized service representative. Inspection must include a complete startup checklist to include (as a minimum) the following: Completed Start-Up Checklists as found in manufacturer's 10M.

END OF SECTION

15781-11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

SECTION 15810 DUCTS

A. Section includes metal ductwork and nonmetallic ductwork.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for Weld

priming, weather resistant, paint or coating specified by this section. 2. Section 15060- Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for

hangers, supports and sleeves for placement by this section. 3. Section 15080- Mechanical Insulation: Product requirements for duct

liner for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.

B. ASTM A568- Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled.

C. ASTM A569- Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.

D. NFPA 90A (National Fire Protection Association)- Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

E. NFPA 90B (National Fire Protection Association)- Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

F. SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association)HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

G. SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association)HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible.

H. SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association) -Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.

I. UL 181 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.


A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is permitted except by written permission.

B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

15810- 1

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A Section 15000: Submittal procedures.

B. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures for glass fiber ducts.


A Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.


A Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA- HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and flexible.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years experience.


A Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT MATERIALS

A Galvanized Steel Ducts: G90 or better galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality (LFQ), chem treat.

B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

C. All ductwork exposed in finished areas, other than mechanical rooms, shall have paint grip finish.

15810- 2

2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

B. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

C. All duct sizes indicated on the drawings are clear inside dimensions. Increase sheet metal size as required to accommodate duct liner where required. Refer to Section 15080.

D. Transverse duct joints: Refer to manufacturers guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing and joint reinforcements. 1. TDC® (T-25a) I TDF® (T-25b) I T-24 joints are not acceptable for duct

pressure classes over 2 in w.g. or duct sizes over 40 inches.

E. Make longitudinal seams with appropriate lock joint, sealed with mastic sealant. 1. Use Pittsburgh lock on fittings 2. Snaplock allowed on straight duct joints. Secure each end of joint with

sheet metal screw.

F. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-112 times centerline duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. 1. Harper double wall turning vanes fabricated from same material as duct. 2. Tab spacing in conformance with SMACNA Standard. Use all tabs.

G. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

H. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standard with minimum 4-inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded, with the following exceptions: 1. Joints 0 inches-20 inches diameter: interior slip coupling beaded at

center, fastened to duct, with sealing compound applied continuously around joint before assembling and after fastening.

2. Joints 21 inches -72 inches diameter: 3 piece gasketed, flanged joints consisting of two internal flanges with integral mastic sealant split to accommodate minor differences in duct diameter, and one external closure band designed to compress gasketing between internal flanges. a) Ductmate Spiralmate or equal.

I. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90-degree conical tee connections may be used.

J. All ductwork shall be minimally sealed as defined for a Class C sealant class, according to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, regardless of actual pressure class. Class A and Class B sealant classes still apply to applicable pressure classes.

15810- 3

2.3 TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM

A Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate

B. Application: 1. Ducts where either dimension is 30 inches or larger.

C. SMACNA "E" rated, SMACNA "F" rated or SMACNA "J" rated rigidity class connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips. 1. Gasket meets Mii-C 18969B, Type II Class B.

2.4 FLAT OVAL DUCTS

A Machine made from round spiral lock-seam duct with light reinforcing corrugations; fittings manufactured of at least two gages heavier metal than duct.

2.5 DOUBLE WALL INSULATED FLAT OVAL DUCTS

A Machine made from oval spiral lock-seam duct with light reinforcing corrugations, galvanized steel outer wall, 2 inch thick fiberglass insulation, perforated galvanized steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.

2.6 DOUBLE WALL INSULATED ROUND DUCTS

A Round spiral lock-seam duct with galvanized steel outer wall, 2 inch thick fiberglass insulation, perforated galvanized steel inner wall; fitting with solid inner wall.

2.7 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS:

A UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helical wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. 2. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F.

2.8 SEALERS

A Flexible water based adhesive sealant designed for use in all pressure duct systems.

B. UL Listed and conforming to ASTM E 84.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.

15810- 4

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

C. Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller.

D. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

E. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands plus adhesive.


A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide Pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

B. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with three feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.

3.5 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTING

A. Test ductwork prior to installation of access doors, take-offs, and other taps.

B. All leak testing to be witnessed by the engineer. Provide 72 hours notice prior to testing.

C. Perform testing on first section of ductwork installed to verify quality of workmanship before majority of ductwork is installed.

D. Perform testing in accordance with HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 1. Use a certified orifice tube for measuring leakage. 2. Define section of duct to be tested, blank off and seal. 3. Determine percentage of system being tested. 4. Determine allowable leakage (cfm) for the section being tested, in

relation to the percentage of the duct being tested. 5. Pressurize to operating pressure and repair and significant or audible

leak. 6. Re-pressurize and measure leakage. 7. Repeat until measured leakage is less than allowable leakage.

15810-5

3.6 ALLOW ABLE LEAKAGE

A. Constant Volume Systems 1. Supply Ductwork 2. Operating Pressure: 0-2 inches wg

a) Allowable leakage: 2 percent of design CFM

3.7 SCHEDULES

AIR SYSTEM Supply Return and Relief General Exhaust Outside Air Intake

DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE MATERIAL

Galvanized Steel Galvanized Steel Galvanized Steel Galvanized Steel

DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS

Supply 2 inch wg Return and Relief 2 inch wg General Exhaust 2 inch wg

END OF SECTION

15810- 6

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Section includes back-draft dampers, combination fire-and-smoke dampers, duct access doors, volume control dampers, flexible duct connections and duct test holes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A (National Fire Protection Association)- Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

B. NFPA 92A (National Fire Protection Association) - Smoke Control Systems.

C. SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association) -HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible.

D. UL 33 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.

E. UL 555 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.

F. UL 555S (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers, duct access doors, duct test holes, and hardware used. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for Fire and Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers.

15820- 1

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.


A Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.



1.8 COORDINATION

A Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS- DUCT MOUNTED

A Manufacturers 1. Ruskin Model FSD36. 2. United Air Model D-502. 3. Pottorff Model FSD-42

B. Fire Rating: UL 555 classified and labeled as a 1-1/2 hour fire damper.

C. Smoke Rating: UL 555S classified and labeled as a Leakage Class II Damper for use in smoke control systems. 1. Leakage Class II: 10 cubic feet per minute per square foot at 1 inch w.g.

D. Air Flow Rating: UL approved for dual directional air flow.

E. Frame: 1. 5 inches x minimum 16 gage roll formed, galvanized steel hat-shaped

channel, reinforced at corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gage Uchannel.

F. Blades:

G.

1. Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves. 2. Action: Parallel 3. Orientation: Horizontal. 4. Material: Minimum 16 gage (1.6 mm) equivalent thickness, galvanized

steel. 5. Width: Maximum 6 inches (152 mm). 6. Bearings: Self-lubricating stainless steel sleeve, turning in extruded hole

in frame.

Seals: 1. Blade: Inflatable silicone coated fiberglass material for smoke seal to

450 degrees F (232 degrees C) and galvanized steel for flame seal to

15820- 2

1,900 degrees F (1 ,038 degrees C). Mechanically attached to blade edge.

2. Jamb: Stainless steel, flexible metal compression type.

H. Linkage: Concealed in frame.

I. Axles: Minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically attached to blade.

J. Actuator: 1. Electric: 120 V AC, 60 Hz, two-position

K. Fifteen Second Criteria: Meet UBC 15 second operation requirement.

L. Duct Transition Connection: round or rectangular.

M. Finish: Mill galvanized.

N. Assembly: Factory assemble damper, actuator, and accessories and furnish as a single unit conforming to UL 555 and UL 555S.

0. Performance Data: 1. Elevated Temperature Qualified: Damper and actuator assembly

qualified in accordance with UL 555S to elevated temperature of 250 degrees F.

2. Capacity: Demonstrate capacity of damper and actuator assembly to operate, by opening and closing, in HVAC system operating conditions.

3. Closed Position: Maximum pressure of 4 inches w.g. 4. Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 2,000 feet per minute. 5. Leakage Class: Leakage Class II, when applied in systems with

maximum pressure of 4 inches w.g.

P. Picture Frame Mounting Angles: 1. One-piece, roll formed retaining angles 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inches 2. Factory matched and shipped on individual damper. 3. Factory prepunched screw holes. 4. Requires factory sleeve.

Q. Factory Sleeve: 1. Minimum 20 gage thickness, minimum 17 inches length. 2. Silicone caulk factory applied to sleeve at damper frame to comply with

leakage rating requirements.

2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction StandardsMetal and Flexible, and as indicated.

B. Fabrication: Rigid and close fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches square, secure with sash locks.

15820- 3

2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches 4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. 5. Access panels with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.3 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS


B. Rectangular Manual Damper: Ruskin MD15 1. Up to 36 inches x 12 inches: 22 gage galvanized steel frame, 22 gage

galvanized steel blade with center V groove for reinforcement, 3/8 inch square shaft, with molded synthetic bearings and 2 inch stand off bracket.

2. Over 36 inches x 12 inches: 18 gauge galvanized steel formed hat channel frame, 18 gauge galvanized steel single skin blade with 3 longitudinal grooves for reinforcement, hexagonal steel shaft locked into damper blade, with molded synthetic bearings and 2 inch stand off bracket.

C. Round In-Line Butterfly dampers: Flexmaster or Buckley 1. Flexmaster Model SLB03 manual damper. 2. Constructed of 26 ga. G-90 galvanized steel with 3/8 inch square shaft

and nylon bushings. 3. Overall length - 7 inches 4. Round outlet fabricated with rolled stiffener bead for strength. 5. Provide with 2 inch stand-off brackets and locking hand quadrant.

D. Round Runout Balancing Dampers: 1. Flexmaster or Buckley. 2. Equal to Flexmaster STOD dampers with insulation build out brackets. 3. Constructed of 26 ga. G-90 galvanized steel with 3/8 inch square shaft

and nylon bushings. 4. Round outlet fabricated with rolled stiffener bead for strength. 5. Provide with 2 inch stand-off brackets and locking hand quadrant.

E. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade

dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting

brackets, bases, or adapters.

F. Concealed Damper Operators: 1. On ducts behind non-removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction

that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, provide devices equal to Young Regulator Co. 927C miter gear with 315 concealed regulator.

15820-4

2.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS:

A. Provide where indicated on the drawings. Provide with or without actuators as indicated.

B. Manufacturer: Ruskin CDRS25 low leakage control damper, heavy gage aluminum airfoil shaped blades, extruded vinyl blade seals, stainless steel flexible jamb seals, molded synthetic bearings, ~ inch diameter control shaft, opposed blade operation.

C. Actuator: 1. Electric: 120 V AC, 60 Hz, two-position

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS


B. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric

conforming to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 6 inches wide. 3. Metal: 3 inch, 24 gage galvanized steel

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.

B. Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Provide and install a manual balancing damper in every runout to individual diffusers.

3.3 INSTALLATION.

A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15810 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Install manual balancing dampers in round duct runouts with shaft horizontal, parallel with air stream.

C. Provide duct access doors for inspection at combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication.

D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

15820- 5

E. Provide combination fire and smoke dampers at locations indicated on contract drawings. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

F. Install combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.

END OF SECTION

15820- 6

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

SECTION 15830 FANS

A. Section includes roof exhausts, cabinet fans, ceiling exhaust fans, motors, drives and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation: Product requirements for power

ventilators for placement by this section. 2. Section 15810 - Ducts: Product requirements for hangers for placement

by this section. 3. Section 15820 Duct Accessories: Product requirements for Back-draft

Dampers for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ABMA STD 9 (American Boiler Manufacturers Association)- Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. ABMA STD 11 (American Boiler Manufacturers Association) - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. AMCA 99 (Air Movement and Control Association)- Standards Handbook.

D. AMCA 210 (Air Movement and Control Association)- Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

E. AMCA 300 (Air Movement and Control Association)- Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.

F. AMCA 301 (Air Movement and Control Association)- Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

G. NEMA MG1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Motors and Generators.

H. UL 705 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)- Power Ventilators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size and configuration of fan assembly, mountings, weights, ductwork and accessory connections.

C. Product Data: Submit data on all fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

15830- 1

D. Test Reports: Indicate performance data for adjustable axial fan blades for at least five blade settings, including maximum.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit fan manufacturers instructions.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS




A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.


A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.



1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for fans.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Manufacturers: 1 . Loren Cook 2. Greenheck 3. Twin City Fans

B. Product Requirements: 1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA

Certified Rating Seal. 2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA

Certified Sound Rating Seal. 3. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

15830- 2

4. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705.

C. General: 1. Roof exhaust fans are centrifgual, belt-driven type. 2. Construction of the fan housing is heavy gauge aluminum. 3. Include built in lifting lugs incorporated into the frame of the fan.

D. Housing: 1. All spun parts shall have a rolled bead for added rigidity 2. Spun so as to seal the pores of the aluminum providing greater

resistance against oxidation and deterioration. 3. Removable top cap with stainless steel quick release catches.

E. Fan 1. Fan wheel is all-aluminum, centrifugal blower type with backward inclined

blades and a tapered inlet shroud. 2. Wheels are statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Inlet cone of aluminum.

F. Motor and Drive 1. Motor enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separate from the

exhaust airstream. 2. Air for cooling the motor shall be supplied to the motor compartment by

way of an air passage, from an area free of contaminated exhaust fumes.

3. Motors: heavy duty, permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing type. 4. Drives: heavy duty cast iron type, keyed to the fan and motor shafts,

variable pitch 5. Fan shaft: steel construction, turned, ground and polished to precise

tolerances in relationship to the hub and bearings. 6. Drive belts: oil-resistant, non-static, non-sparking type with life

expectancy of over 24,000 hours. 7. Bearings: flanged and of the permanently lubricated, permanently sealed,

ball bearing type capable of over 200,000 hours bearing life. 8. The entire drive assembly and wheel shall be removable, as a complete

unit, from the support structure without disassembling the external fan housing.

9. The complete drive assembly shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolation.

10. Direct drive units a) Identical construction as belt drive units, except for drives, belts,

and fan shaft bearings. b) Type B construction.

G. Accessories: 1. Roof Curb: 18 inch galvanized steel with continuously welded seams,

built-in cant strips, one inch insulation and curb bottom and factory installed nailer strip.

2. Disconnect Switch: Factory-wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor

15830- 3

3. Back-draft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked.

4. Provide direct drive fan with factory wired fan speed controller.

2.2 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Loren Cook 2. Greenheck 3. Twin City Fans

B. Construction 1. Direct drive, forward curved, centrifugal blower type. 2. Fan wheel: galvanized steel, dynamically balanced. 3. Housing: galvanized steel and acoustically insulated for quiet operation. 4. Integral aluminum backdraft damper. 5. Blower and motor assembly shall be easily removable from the housing

without disturbing the ductwork. 6. Motor: permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection,

factory tested prior to shipment. 7. Internal wiring box and receptacle. 8. Furnished standard with a powder-painted white steel grille.

C. Certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air and Sound Performance.

D. Accessories 1. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload

protected motor. 2. Factory wired fan speed controller.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads.

B. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

C. Provide sheaves required for final air balance.

D. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.

E. Do not operate fans in normal operation until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

F. Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb.

G. Roof mounted fans to be installed level. Shim curb as required, regardless of roof slope.

15830- 4

H. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. Counterflash duct to roof opening.

I. Install backdraft dampers on roof exhausters.

J. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans.

END OF SECTION

15830- 5

SECTION 15850 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes diffusers, registers/grilles, and louvers

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ADC 1062 (Air Diffusion Council) - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.

B. AMCA 500 (Air Movement and Control Association)- Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

C. ASHRAE 70 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers)- Method of Testing for Rating the Airflow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.

D. SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association) -HVAC Duct Construction Standard- Metal and Flexible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 15000- Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit data outlets and inlets sizes, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

A. Manufacturers 1. Titus 2. Ruskin 3. Metalaire 4. EH Price 5. Kruegar

B. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated;

15850- 1

constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

C. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses and throw and pressure drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data in accordance with ARI Standards.

D. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. Field verify existing conditions and ceiling type for renovation work that does not require complete ceiling replacement.

E. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, performance and with accessories and finishes as listed on Air Distribution Schedule, or approved equal.

F. RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS 1. Type: Square and rectangular, multi-louvered diffuser to discharge air in

pattern as indicated on drawings. 2. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame

and ceiling frame. 3. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish.

G. CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES 1. Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers. 2. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid

ceilings. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. 3. Fabrication: Aluminum with factory baked enamel off-white enamel

finish. 4. Filter return grilles shall have a filter frame that will accommodate a 2 inch

filter. Grille face shall have 1/4 turn fasteners.

H. WALL RETURN GRILLES 1. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 1/2 inch maximum

spacing, horizontal face. 2. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. 3. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum

blades, with factory off-white enamel finish.

2.2 LOUVERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin 2. Greenheck 3. NCA

B. Type: 6 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope, heavy channel frame, bird screen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake.

15850-2

C. Fabrication: 12 gage thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory anodized finish. Color to be selected by architect.

D. Mounting: Furnish with exterior angle flange for installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify inlet/outlet locations.

B. Verify ceiling and wall systems are ready for installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.

B. Provide rigid elbows at inlet of round neck diffusers. Do not connect flexible duct directly to diffusers. If rigid elbows are not installed on ALL diffusers, the contractor shall be responsible for paying the engineer, at a standard hourly rate of $120, to babysit them as they reinstall every device on the project.

C. Install return air duct directly over return air grilles. Plenums on top of return air grilles not less than 6 inches before transition to return duct connection.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles and registers.

E. Paint all exposed sheet metal, including duct liner fasteners visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.


A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

END OF SECTION

15850- 3

SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems, measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AABC (Associated Air Balance Council)- National Standards for Total System Balance.

B. ASHRAE 111 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers)- Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.

C. NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau) - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms, or NEBB Report forms.

B. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

C. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required.

D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.

E. Provide reports in binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

F. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty or Copy of NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification prior to commencing system balance.


A. Perform Work in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems

15950- 1

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC or Certified by NEBB.

B. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer, NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.

1.6 SEQUENCING

A Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 SERVICES OF MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR:

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall have all systems complete and in operational readiness prior toT AB services.

B. Complete operational readiness prior to commencement of TAB services shall include the following: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, etc. to

obtain projected operating conditions. 2. Air Distribution Systems:

a) Verify installation for conformity to design. All supply, return and exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as required by specifications.

b) All volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation.

c) All supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers, and diffusers installed.

d) Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc. shall be blanked and/or sealed to eliminate excessive by-pass or leakage of air.

e) All fans (supply, exhaust) are to be operating and verified for freedom from vibration, total air quantities.

f) Drive belts shall be of proper size and tension. Heater elements shall be of proper size and rating. Provide record of motor amperage and voltage and verify that they do not exceed nameplate ratings.

3. Automatic Controls: a) Check that all control components are installed in accordance with

project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlock damper sequences, air resets, POC detectors.

b) All controlling instruments calibrated and set for designed operating conditions with the exception of the room thermostats which shall be calibrated at the completion of test and balance.

C. As a part of work under Division 15 the Contractor shall make any changes in the sheaves, belts, motors and dampers as required for correct balance as

15950- 2

required by the TAB firm. The contractor under Division 15 shall make all corrections to the mechanical installations as required to correct all deficiencies found during the TAB.

D. The Contractor shall provide and coordinate work under all sections of the specifications as required to correct, repair or replace any and all deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting and balancing period.

E. In order that all systems may be properly tested, balanced and adjusted as required herein by these specifications, the Contractor shall operate said systems for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB and during the TAB period.

F. Project contract completion schedules shall provide time frame allowance to permit the completion of TAB services prior to occupancy. Provide simulated design condition loads as necessary.

G. Documents: The Contractor shall transmit one copy of the following records for review and comment by the TAB firm. 1. As-installed drawings 2. Approved fixture brochures, wiring diagrams and control diagrams. 3. Shop drawings 4. Instructions

H. Permanently mark all dampers, volume controls, and other settings after TAB.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in

addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, which prevent system balance.

15950- 3

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 1 0 percent of design.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.

D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.

F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.

3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities [at site altitude].

B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.

15950- 4

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes as required to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

3.6 SCHEDULES

A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1. Furnace and Coil Units 2. Fan Coil Units 3. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers 4. Heat Pumps 5. Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units 6. Fans 7. Air Filters 8. Air Inlets and Outlets

3.7 Report Forms

A. Title Page: 1. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency 2. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency 3. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

Agency 4. Project name 5. Project location 6. Project Architect 7. Project Engineer 8. Project Contractor 9. Project altitude 10. Report date

B. Summary Comments: 1. Design versus final performance 2. Notable characteristics of system 3. Description of systems operation sequence 4. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building

pressurization 5. Nomenclature used throughout report 6. Test conditions

15950- 5

C. Instrument List: 1. Instrument 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Range 6. Calibration date

D. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP and kW 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 5. RPM 6. Service factor 7. Starter size, rating, heater elements 8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

E. V-Belt Drive: 1. Identification/location 2. Required driven RPM 3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM 4. Belt, size and quantity 5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM 6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual

F. Combustion Test: 1. Manufacturer 2. Model number 3. Serial number 4. Firing rate 5. Overfire draft 6. Gas meter timing dial size 7. Gas meter time per revolution 8. Gas pressure at meter outlet 9. Gas flow rate 10. Heat input 11. Burner manifold gas pressure 12. Percent carbon monoxide (CO) 13. Percent carbon dioxide (C02) 14. Percent oxygen (02) 15. Percent excess air 16. Flue gas temperature at outlet 17. Ambient temperature 18. Net stack temperature 19. Percent stack loss 20. Percent combustion efficiency 21. Heat output

G. Air Cooled Condenser: 1. Identification/number

15950- 6

2. Location 3. Manufacturer 4. Model number 5. Serial number 6. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual 7. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual 8. Number of compressors

H. Cooling Coil Data: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer 5. Air flow, design and actual 6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual 7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual 8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual 9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual 10. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual 11. Air pressure drop, design and actual

I. Heating Coil Data: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer 5. Air flow, design and actual 6. Water flow, design and actual 7. Water pressure drop, design and actual 8. Entering air temperature, design and actual 9. Leaving air temperature, design and actual 10. Air pressure drop, design and actual

J. Electric Duct Heater: 1. Manufacturer 2. Identification/number 3. Location 4. Model number 5. Design kW 6. Number of stages 7. Phase, voltage, amperage 8. Test voltage (each phase) 9. Test amperage (each phase) 10. Air flow, specified and actual 11. Temperature rise, specified and actual

K. Air Moving Equipment 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number

15950- 7

5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Air flow, specified and actual 7. Return air flow, specified and actual 8. Outside air flow, specified and actual 9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 10. lnletpressure 11. Discharge pressure 12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 13. Number of Belts/Make/Size 14. Fan RPM

L. Return Air/Outside Air Data: 1. Identification/location 2. Design air flow 3. Actual air flow 4. Design return air flow 5. Actual return air flow 6. Design outside air flow 7. Actual outside air flow 8. Return air temperature 9. Outside air temperature 10. Required mixed air temperature 11. Actual mixed air temperature 12. Design outside/return air ratio 13. Actual outside/return air ratio

M. Exhaust Fan Data: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Air flow, specified and actual 6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 7. Inlet pressure 8. Discharge pressure 9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 10. Number of Belts/Make/Size 11. Fan RPM

N. Duct Traverse: 1. System zone/branch 2. Duct size 3. Area 4. Design velocity 5. Design air flow 6. Test velocity 7. Test air flow 8. Duct static pressure 9. Air temperature 10. Air correction factor

15950- 8

0. Air Distribution Test Sheet: 1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Terminal type 4. Terminal size 5. Area factor 6. Design velocity 7. Design air flow 8. Test (final) velocity 9. Test (final) air flow 10. Percent of design air flow

END OF SECTION

15950- 9

SECTION NO. 16050 16060 16111 16123 16130 16140 16170 16440 16442 16461 16491 16500 16505 16510 16721 16740 16950

TITLE

DIVISION 16

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RENOVATIONS TO SIMMS MUNICIPAL BUILDING

808 S. BUCHANAN CITY OF AMARILLO, TEXAS

DATE: FEBRUARY, 2015

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK GROUNDING RACEWAYS WIRES AND CABLES 600V AND BELOW BOXES WIRING DEVICES MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS COORDINATION AND ARC-FLASH STUDY PANELBOARDS DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS FUSES LIGHTING FIXTURES LAMPS AND LIGHT SOURCES LIGHTING CONTROL FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Reynolds Engineering Associates, Inc. Electrical Engineers and Consultants 3505 Olsen, Suite #222 Amarillo, TX 79109 Texas Engineering Firm #F-497 Tel: (806)353-2423 Fax: (806)353-2465 e-mail: [email protected]

PAGE NO. 16050-1 16060-1 16111-1 16123-1 16130-1 16140-1 16170-'1 16440-1 16442-1 16461-1 16491-1 16500-1 16505-1 16510-1 16721-1 16740-1 16950-1

Specifications© 2015 Reynolds Engineering Associates, Inc. These specifications are a part of the design documentation for this particular project and are not be to be used or reproduced, in whole or in part, for any other purpose.

SECTION 16050

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

PART 1 ·GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Examine all Drawings, Specifications, and associated Contract Documents and coordinate them with work described in this Division of the Specification.


A. The work covered by Division 16 of the Specifications includes the furnishing of all materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits and fees, and incidentals necessary for the complete installation of all electrical work required in the Contract Documents.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every respect. All items noted, indicated, and called for herein and on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor unless noted to be furnished by others. These items may include wiring, conduit systems, electrical equipment, and other electrical systems required for a complete system.

D. In the event that additional or special construction is required, the Contractor is responsible for providing all material and equipment which are usually furnished with such construction in order to complete the installation, whether indicated or not.

E. The Contractor is advised to visit the premises and thoroughly familiarize himself with existing conditions including any conditions on which his work might depend. Advise the Architect of any discrepancy or conflict prior to bidding.

F. The submission of bids is deemed evidence of the Contractor's coordination of all existing conditions and the inclusion of all considerations for existing conditions into his bid.

1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. These Specifications are accompanied by Drawings and details of the installations indicating the locations of equipment, outlets, controls, circuits, and related items. The Drawings and these Specifications are complimentary to each other, comprising the Contract Documents, and what is required by one is as binding as if required by both. Where conflicts may occur between the Drawings and the Specifications, the most stringent interpretation of the design concept is binding unless the Engineer waives this provision.

B. If the Contractor deems it necessary to change or depart from indications, requirements, or similar instructions of the Drawings or Specifications, submit to the Architect or Engineer for review details of and reasons for the proposed departures. Do not make changes or departures without prior approval.

1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND FEES

A. General code compliance: 1. In general, comply with the current editions of the standards issued by the

following organizations or governing bodies:

16050-1

a) General code requirements: 1) National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA 70). 2) International Building Code (IBC). 3) International Fire Code (IFC). 4) Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

b) Manufacturer's standards: 1) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 2) American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3) Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM).

c) Governmental standards and codes: 1) Occupational Safety and Health Acts (OSHA). 2) Federal Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 3) State of Texas Elimination of Architectural Barriers Act (Texas

Civil Statutes). 4) City Electrical Codes and Ordinances.

d) Any other authorities that may have lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work specified.

2. Refer to the individual Specification Sections for detailed references to applicable standards. Where specific codes or standards are listed individually in other sections of these Specifications, the intent is to call attention to the requirements of these particular codes or standards and not to imply that the previously listed codes or standards do not apply.

B. None of the terms or provisions of this Specification waive any of the rules, regulations, or requirements of authorities with standards governing the construction work. In any instance where these Specifications call for materials for construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the codes, the provisions of these Specifications take precedent.

C. In case of direct conflict between applicable Codes and the Contract Documents, the Codes govern.

D. The Contractor is responsible for all permits, fees, and licenses required due to or because of this project. Include costs of all such permits or fees in the bid. No additional compensation will be made for any required inspection, permit, license, or fee.

1.5 SUPERVISION AND OBSERVATION OF THE WORK

A. Supervision of the work: 1. Provide a competent foreman at the building site to receive instructions and to act

for the Contractor. 2. The Contractor is solely responsible for work methods, jobsite safety

considerations, and contract compliance at the project site. 3. The Engineer has no authority to exercise any control over work, health, or safety

precautions. All such items are the Contractor's sole responsibility.

B. Observation of the work: 1. The Engineer or Engineer's representative reserves the right to observe the work

at any time. 2. Give assistance, as may be required, to the Engineer or Engineer's

representative or observer during inspection of the work. 3. The observation of the work and other professional activities of the Engineer shall

not relieve the Contractor of his obligations, duties, and responsibilities including

16050-2

construction means, methods, sequences, techniques, or procedures necessary for performing, superintending, or coordinating all portions of the construction work.

4. The presence of the Engineer or Engineer's representative at the job site or his observance of the Contractor's work does not relieve the Contractor of any safety or work related responsibilities.

5. The Engineer's periodic inspections do not constitute a warranty by the Engineer, nor do they imply a fiduciary duty on the part of the Engineer to certify that the work is complete in all respects or performed completely in accordance with all Contract Documents. The responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents rests with the Contractor.

1.6 REVISIONS TO THE WORK

A. All addendum and change order items are governed by the same terms and conditions as the Contractor's initial contract with the Owner.

B. Expeditiously carry out, in a timely manner, authorized changes or recommendations made by appropriate persons.

C. Change orders: 1. Refer to the General and Special Conditions for the appropriate manner for

submitting any change orders. 2. All proposed change orders shall be presented in written form to the Architect for

acceptance or denial by the Owner. 3. Contractor initiated change orders shall be formally made only after discussion

with the Engineer regarding reasons for the anticipated change. 4. Provide complete break-downs of costs in all change orders with details of

material quantities, quantity costs, man-hours required, cost per man-hour, overhead, and profit clearly set out in the change order. Provide a clear indication of any overall cost increase or decrease.

5. Minor changes in the work, which require little or no increase in the cost of construction and which will not require a change in the construction contract, do not require formal change orders. However, these changes must be approved by all parties concerned.

6. Unless specifically authorized otherwise, the Contractor must present each proposed change order as the matter comes up and not present omnibus change orders at the completion of the project.

D. Replace or revise any materials or workmanship that are deemed unsatisfactory due to improper selection or placement of equipment or materials, or due to incomplete installation.

1 . 7 WARRANTY

A. General warranty: Guarantee all materials and workmanship for proper operation and service for a period of one year after the final acceptance of work.

B. Warranty work includes furnishing both materials and labor to replace the defective items.

C. Extended warranty:

16050-3

1. Where noted in another Section or Division of the Specifications, such as for lighting fixture ballasts, extend warranty past twelve months to the time limit noted.

2. Magnetic ballasts shall be warranted for a period of at least 2 years from time of acceptance.

3. Electronic ballasts shall be warranted for a period of at least 5 years from time of acceptance.

4. Surge protective devices shall be warranted for a period of at least 2 years from time of acceptance.

5. Occupancy sensors shall be warranted for a period of at least 2 years from time of acceptance.

D. Lamps: 1. Lamps shall be warranted for the manufacturer's standard published average

lifetime, or the project one year warranty period, whichever is less. 2. Lamp lifetime shall be measured from the time of the Owner's acceptance of the

project and not from the time of first energization. 3. If lamps do not meet this lifetime criteria, they shall be replaced at the

Contractor's expense during the warranty period. 4. Where questions arise as to the actual "burn time" of the lamps, the Owner shall

furnish to the Contractor estimates of the actual lamp burn time. 5. Replacement lamps shall be new and not drawn from the Owner's spare stock.

1.8 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICES

A. Division 16 is solely responsible for the installation and removal of temporary electrical service unless approved otherwise by the Architect or Engineer.

B. The installation and removal of temporary electrical service shall not be excluded from the contract.

C. Refer to NEC Article 590 for additional information.

D. Payment for costs of energy usage: 1. For existing buildings, the Owner will pay the reasonable and necessary energy

charges for the operation of electrical construction equipment, including lighting fixtures, hand tools, concrete finishing equipment, etc., through the established utility electrical metering equipment for the building. Energy use of special equipment requiring building or utility service, such as large electrical hoisting and moving equipment, shall be paid for by the Contractor unless the Owner waives this requirement.

2. Division 16 shall not be responsible for paying for any additional metered utility energy charges unless agreed to with the other trades.

D. Scope of temporary electrical services required: 1. Provide reasonable and necessary power and lighting services for construction. 2. It is not the intention of these Specifications to require that electrical service be

mandated for specific types of equipment (such as hoists, elevators, or pumps) that can be or have been served by other means.

3. Temporary lighting levels for construction: a) At least 20 footcandles, as measured on the floor or work surface. b) As uniform as practical given job conditions and layout of construction.

16050-4

c) Provide in areas and at such times as adequate natural light is not available during construction hours.

4. Receptacle layout, ground fault protection, grounding testing, and similar items must equal or exceed those prescribed by OSHA.

5. Any permanently installed receptacles used for temporary construction services shall be ground fault protected per NEC.

6. Refer to NEC Article 305 for additional requirements of temporary wiring systems.

E. Utilization of permanent lighting for construction services: 1. Clean fixtures used for temporary service during construction and bring up to new

equipment condition. 2. Replace lamps which are utilized for temporary service during construction and

have significant burn times with new lamps within five (5) days of final inspection or when directed by Architect.

F. Existing buildings that remain in operation while electrical system replacement and reconstruction proceeds: 1. Survey existing buildings with present electrical service to determine if the

existing systems will provide adequate extension for temporary service. 2. Any loads attached to existing electrical systems shall not cause damage to the

existing systems. 3. The temporary electrical connections must not cause interruption, overloading, or

undue disturbance to the existing electrical service if the Owner continues to occupy portions of the remodeled facility.

4. Immediately disconnect any temporary service connection that compromises the Owner's existing electrical service or causes undue disturbance.

5. Note that this facility includes critical and emergency departments whose power usage shall be maintained at all times, either through the normal utility system or the existing emergency generator. Coordinate all outages and electrical reconnections with building personnel and City facilities staff.

6. All connections to existing electrical systems are at the sole discretion of the Contractor.

7. If inadequate spare capacity for temporary service is available, a separate construction service will be required.

G. Establishment of construction services: 1. Temporary construction services may include the installation of temporary utility

transformers and services, use of portable generators, or other suitable means. 2. If utility construction services are required, the contractor is responsible for

contacting the utility and paying for any costs associated with the establishment and removal of the construction service.

3. Utilize construction service until the permanent service is installed and available for use.

4. Site temporary facilities so that they do not conflict with permanent construction or remove as soon as practical when permanent construction moves into their area.

1.9 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AND LAYOUT OF WORK

A. Consult all Drawings and Specifications to thoroughly familiarize oneself with the type and quality of construction to be provided on this project.

16050-5

B. The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in character. Installation details are subject to the requirements of structural and architectural conditions as well as code and ordinance provisions.

C. Plan the installation so that work will be concealed in walls, ceilings, chases and related portions of the building unless specifically noted or indicated to be exposed.

D. The location of electrical items is indicated approximately on the Electrical Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and exact details in regard to location of outlets, equipment, and other items. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements and equipment shop drawings. Symbols or notes for equipment starters, disconnects, and similar items are provided to alert the Contractor of the need for such equipment and are not be construed to identify the exact placement of the required items.

E. Consult the Architectural Details to determine wall finishes and locations of wall mounted signs, boards, mirrors, and similar items to insure that electrical outlets do not interfere with wall finishes or materials attached to walls.

F. Any switch, receptacle, lighting fixture, outlet, junction box, panelboard, and similar type of equipment that interferes with existing or new finishes, conflicts with other equipment, or compromises the use of the facilities by the Owner, may be moved up to 10 feet without additional cost to the Owner, Architect, or Engineer.

1.10 EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The Contractor is responsible for any damage to the existing facilities caused by him and his workmen, and must repair or replace damaged materials or surfaces with items acceptable to the Architect.

B. Receive permission from the Owner before beginning work in existing areas. Make necessary arrangements required for the care, protection, and in-service maintenance of all electrical services for existing facilities.

C. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing electrical equipment or systems, remove the equipment or systems to provide this access and reinstall upon completion of work in the areas affected.

D. Relocate or extend to appropriate locations any electrical equipment and wiring on existing surfaces that may be modified or removed.

E. Attachments and modifications to existing electrical systems: 1. The contractor shall field survey all electrical systems to which new or revised

wiring and equipment will be attached. 2. Inspection shall be via visual means, use of megger type conductor tester, and

equipment for sensing elevation temperatures during operation. 2. The contractor shall report to the Engineer any conditions discovered in the field

which may any way impact the proper, full, complete, and correct operation of the electrical systems after the modifications or revisions.

3. Field survey shall include, but not be limited to, inspection for the following: a. Circuit continuity. b. Proper labeling. c. Mismatch of conductor size with overload or short circuit protection. d. Loose or improperly torqued wiring connections. e. Stripped terminal screws or lugs.

16050-6

f. Improper termination of conductors. g. Cracked insulation. h. Any evidence of overheating at joints, lugs, or terminals. i. Inadequate clearance to energized conductors from grounded or

grounding conductors, grounded conduit, or grounded equipment housings.

j. Damaged or dislodged conduits or couplings. k. Damaged or improper circuit breaker operation (damaged springs,

broken or cracked handles, cracked breaker housings, loose connections, frozen operating parts, missing trip plugs, etc.).

I. Damaged or improper switch operation (damaged springs, broken or damaged handles or housings, loose connections, twisted shafts, missing or cracked arc shutes, etc.).

m. Evidence of water damage or infiltration.

F. Outages of services: 1. Outages of existing services shall occur only as required by the new installations. 2. All outages shall be coordinated with the Owner and shall be performed at a time

approved by the Owner after adequate advance notice. 3. Do not schedule outages during Owner's normal working hours unless specifically

approved otherwise by the Owner. 4. If the Contractor partially occupies a building or area while the Owner still retains

occupancy over another portion of the building or area, critical or important existing services that have an impact on the utilization by the Owner of the building or immediate area shall remain in use until such time as the permanent replacement systems are installed. Critical or important services include, but are not limited to, the following: a) Fire alarm systems. b) Security systems. c) Building electrical service, distribution, and lighting. d) Egress lighting. e) Securitylighting. f) Telephone and communication systems.

5. If the Contractor receives complete possession of the building or area, outages of existing services that do not impact the Owner's utilization of other structures, buildings, or property may be made in whatever order the Contractor deems appropriate for the orderly schedule of the work. However, removal of existing systems shall only commence after careful study of the impact of the removal of the affected systems on the Owner's remaining systems.

6. If feeders or branch circuits connected to existing three phase equipment are removed, replaced, rearranged, or similarly disturbed, the Contractor shall: a) Establish rotation sequence of all existing equipment that remains.

Determine correct rotation prior to disconnection of existing service to the equipment.

b) Verify rotation prior to establishing new service to the equipment. Do not energize existing equipment prior to determining correct rotation.

c) Reverse phase wiring if required to allow for correct rotation of equipment.

7. Include all costs of outages, including overtime charges for labor, temporary materials, rental equipment, and similar items with the bid.

16050-7

1.11 SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL OF MATERIALS

A. Within a minimum of 30 days after the contract has been awarded, submit for approval complete data covering equipment and materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish and for which submittal information is required. Consult the General, Supplementary General, and Special Conditions of the Contract Documents to determine if a faster response time than 30 days is required.

B. General submittal requirements: 1. Before submitting shop drawings or any related material to the Engineer,

Contractor shall: a) Thoroughly review safety practices, precautions, and programs for the

construction process and determine if any proposed or indicated construction or sequences of construction will or may possibly cause undue hazards, fail to properly protect workers, or otherwise violate the letter or intent of applicable safety practices. Any such question of compromise of safety shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect.

b) Review each submission for conformance with the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and operations of construction.

c) Coordinate all items to determine if the physical sizes of the submitted items are in accordance with the allowable sizes or dimensions as indicated on the Drawings and as called for on any dimensioned Architectural plans.

d) Approve each submittal prior to submission. Stamp or otherwise acknowledge that the submission has been reviewed and approved prior to submission.

e) Notify and document in the submittal index any deviation from specified materials.

f) Furnish complete, and as specified (both on the Drawings and in the Specifications), any minor or miscellaneous items not submitted for review. Otherwise, all items will be assumed to be furnished complete and as specified.

2. Submit data in three ring hard back binders sized for 8-1/2" X 11" enclosures. Larger format submittals, such as equipment layouts or special shop drawings, shall be edge bound and folded to fit 8-1 /2" X 11" size and adequately attached with the submittal.

3. Submit all data at one time. Partial submittals may only be made for large projects and only with the prior approval of the Engineer.

4. The Engineer reserves the right to directly charge the Contractor for time and material costs, at standard hourly rates, if more than two (2) submittals of the same class or type of materials or equipment is required to obtain substitution approval.

5. The Engineer, Architect and Owner will each retain one copy of each submittal. Provide sufficient additional copies for the Contractor's use and the use of his suppliers.

C. Telephone and data qualification and certification submittals: 1. Submit, before the start of the project, certification of installers to be utilized on

the project. 2. Submit, at the completion of the installation, cabling and wiring system

certification and compliance with Section 16740.

16050-8

D. Submittal documents: 1. Provide a cover sheet with the following information:

a) Title of the submittal. b) Name and location of the building or project. c) Name of the entity making the submittal. d) Supply house(s) supplying the equipment. e) Date of the submittal. f) Space on cover sheet or associated area that can accept a submittal

review stamp from the Engineer. 2. Follow the Specification format with each major category of equipment having its

own manila divider referenced to the particular section of the Specifications. Provide a separate detailed listing included at the front of each section of the submittal listing each item by item as follows:

PRODUCT SPECIFIED: MFG. NAME AND NUMBER PRODUCT PROPOSED: MFG. NAME AND NUMBER

The detailed listing may be omitted for lighting fixtures if the subsequent catalogue cut sheets properly indicate all features of the lighting fixtures including type, complete catalogue number, ballasts, etc.

3. Equipment requiring submittal: a) Lighting fixture assemblies including submittal data for:

1) Enclosures and housings. 2) Photometries reports. 3) Lenses. 4) Lamps. 5) Magnetic ballasts. 6) Electronic ballasts.

b) Panelboards. c) Transformers. d) Disconnect and safety switches including the individual loads that they

supply. e) Lighting control panel. f) Fuses. g) Wiring devices and plates. h) Floor boxes and covers. i) Occupancy sensors and systems. j) Other special system components and equipment.

4. At the Engineer's request, the following equipment and items must also be submitted: a) Conduit, raceways, and fittings. b) Wires and cables. c) Boxes.

E. Submittal approval and review: 1. Submittals which are submitted in the manner outlined previously will be reviewed

by the Engineer. 2. The Engineer will make a good faith effort to check and review the submittals

during the normal course of business. 3. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any time constraints for equipment

order placement, release, or similar issues that make or may make expeditious submittal approval required.

4. The Engineer's approval and review process is provided under the following conditions:

16050-9

a) Review of a manufacturer's engineered systems or manufactured components, whose design is under the sole control of the manufacturer, will not be made.

b) The Engineer may require additional documentation, tests, information, or other data in order to finalize the approval process.

c) If additional documentation or information is not provided, is provided in an unsatisfactory manner, or is not provided in a timely manner, the affected materials and equipment shall be furnished as specified, complete in all respects.

d) The approval review will be performed only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents.

e) No attempt to check quantities of equipment will be made. The Contractor is solely responsible for providing the correct numbers of all items.

f) Modifications or comments made on or attached to the shop drawings or submittals do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.

g) Approval of a specific item does not necessarily convey approval of the assembly of which the item is a component.

1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. General requirements: 1. The listing of product manufacturers, catalog numbers, etc., on the Drawings and

in the various sections of the Specifications is generally intended to establish a standard of quality for those products.

2. Selection of items or equipment specified or indicated to be furnished is based on engineering judgment regarding application, physical sizes or shapes, dimensions, performance levels, efficiencies, maintenance conditions, colors, materials available, comparison to similar products, and other attributes and conditions that may not be obvious or apparent to those wishing to obtain approval for substitution.

B. Prior approvals: 1. All manufacturers listed on the Drawings or in a particular Section of the

Specifications as "Approved Manufacturers" are pre-approved to furnish the specified products only provided that their offered products meet the Specifications.

2. Manufacturers not listed on the Drawings or in a particular Section of the Specification as "Approved Manufacturers" require prior approval to furnish their products on the project.

3. Where the Specifications refer to "or equal," "Engineer approved equal," or similar language, the intent of the Specifications is to require approval of substituted items prior to bidding and not after bidding.

4. The Engineer may waive the prior approval requirement due to unusual project conditions, such as lack of qualified vendors, if requested.

5. Substitution requests must be received by the Engineer at least 10 working days before bid date.

6. Requests must include a detailed listing of all products with adequate data sheets for the Engineer to make detailed comparison with specified products.

16050-10

7. Unless special or modified construction is required, all substituted products must be standard manufactured items normally produced by the manufacturers requesting substitution.

8. Unsuccessful attempts to provide adequate or acceptable samples will cause the proposed substitution to be rejected.

9. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review all items he wishes to substitute with the Engineer to determine if such substitutions meet the requirements and intent of the Specifications and the Drawings.

10. It is the right of the Engineer to review any and all substitutions and to reject any items that the Engineer deems unacceptable.

C. The Contractor may request substitution materials or methods (unless such substitution is prohibited on the Drawings or in the Specifications) which he feels are equal or superior to those specified. If the Contractor does submit alternate materials or methods, it is understood that the Contractor: 1. Has investigated the substitute product and determined that it has all the same

accessories and is equal to or superior in all respects to the product specified. 2. Has investigated the substitute product and determined that while it is not

superior to the product specified, it offers other features or options that the Engineer may consider to be advantageous to the product or equipment specified.

3. Has coordinated the installation of the equipment which he proposes to substitute with all trades and includes the costs for any changes required for the substitution.

4. Waives any and all claims for additional costs related to the substitution. 5. Will secure authorization for substitution from the Engineer prior to ordering and

installing the substitute.

D. Uniformity of equipment selection and application: 1. Categories of equipment require that uniformity across the equipment line be

maintained and providing related products from more than one manufacturer of similar equipment will not meet the intent of these Specifications.

2. Unless noted otherwise, the following categories of items shall each be furnished by a single manufacturer: a) Panelboards, transformers and disconnect switches (Square D only). b) Lighting fixture lamps. c) Fuses. d) Electronic linear fluorescent ballasts. e) Wiring devices and plates.

3. The Contractor is advised that lighting fixtures may require uniformity in areas such as number of louvers per fixtures, louver finish, downlight cone appearance, aperture size, or similar constraints.

4. The Engineer reserves the right to disqualify a manufacturer from supplying a portion of the items in a category if the manufacturer cannot furnish all items in a category or if the proposed items in the category do not meet uniformity or appearance conditions.

1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Keep a set of Drawings on the job, noting all changes made in these Drawings in connection with the final installation including dimensioned locations of all lines and utilities outside the building.

16050-11

B. Turn over to the Architect, for delivery to the Owner, at least one clean, neatly marked set of blue line drawings showing "as-installed" work.

1.14 FIRESEALING

A. All electrical penetrations through fire rated walls, floors, and ceilings shall be fire sealed to prevent the propagation of smoke and fire, regardless of whether they are enclosed in raceways or are free-wired.

B. Provide fire sealing in all locations required by applicable Codes.

C. Utilize materials suitable for the intended service.

D. See Section 16111 (Raceways) for fire sealing requirements and methods. Fire sealing shall be provided for both raceway and free-wired low voltage cabling through fire walls or fire barriers.

PART 2 • PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS

A. Standards for materials and equipment are minimum standards. Materials and equipment selected for use in the project may be required to exceed the minimum testing and labeling standards.

B. Minimum standards shall include the following (where standards for the particular material or equipment are available): 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

C. Labels and marks: 1. Individual components must bear the UL Component Recognition marking

(backwards UR symbol) for items such as wiring, power supplies, switches, etc. 2. Assembled equipment must bear the UL mark (UL inside of a circle) based on

published UL Standards for Safety.

D. Material and equipment testing: 1. Materials must be tested to applicable UL standards and shall have passed the

respective test requirements. 2. The listing and/or labeling will be accepted as evidence that the materials or

equipment conform to the applicable standards of that testing organization.

2.2 STANDARD PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment are generally selected from standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of products conforming to these Specifications.

B. Custom designed products or product modifications are project specific and require adherence to the design conditions.

16050-12

2.3 CONDITION OF MATERIALS AND APPURTENANCES

A. All conduit, conductors, fixtures, panelboards, and other material systems must be new unless otherwise specified.

B. Replace any equipment injured or damaged in transit from the factory, during delivery to premises, while in storage on premises, while being erected and installed, or while being tested, until time of final completion, without extra cost to Owner.

PART 3 · EXECUTION

3.1 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT

A. Install equipment to allow ready access to parts requiring operation or service without disassembly of other equipment.

B. Maintain working clearances as required by the NEC as follows: 1. NEC working clearances shall be maintained as directed by Article 110. 2. Working clearances required by the NEC are minimum standards. Provide

additional clearance where needed or where indicated on the Drawings. 3. Required working clearances shall be maintained for at least the following general

categories of equipment: a) Disconnect and safety switches (front of equipment). b) Panelboards (normally front of equipment). c) Enclosed transformer housing access plates (normally front of

transformer). d) HVAC and mechanical unit electrical access plates.

4. Contact Engineer for questions on interpretations of clearance requirements.

C. Provide adequate clear width for equipment maintenance. Minimum width is 30" for equipment operating at 600V or less.

D. Protect equipment against construction and weather damage.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Where it becomes necessary to cut through any wall, floor, or ceiling to permit installation or repair of any electrical work, such cutting must be approved by the Architect.

B. The Contractor is not permitted to cut or modify any structural members without the written permission of the Architect.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish.

B. At completion of the job, remove all tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and leave the area "broom clean".

16050-13

3.4 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS

A. Install conduit sleeves in a timely manner so as not to impede other trades. Moisture seal sleeves in a manner approved by the Architect.

B. Install pitch pans and flashing for roof penetrations that are compatible with the roofing systems. Roof penetrations are subject to the approval of the Architect.

3.5 SUPPORTS

A. Provide all supporting equipment necessary to erect the electrical system. This support may consist of, but is not limited to, items such as channels, structural members, ceiling support wires, brackets, anchors, inserts, and similar items.

B. Install supports in a safe and structurally sound manner paying attention to the mounting surface and structural characteristics. Any supporting methods in question must be called to the attention of the Architect or Engineer for resolution.

3.6 EQUIPMENT AND HOUSEKEEPING PADS

A. Where noted, each piece of floor mounted equipment, such as transformers, requires a neat cement-finished, structural grade concrete base.

B. Equipment located on upper floors not subject to water exposure may be installed directly on concrete floors provide rubber vibration pads between each of the transformer mounting feet and the floor surface.

C. Minimum requirements for equipment or housekeeping pads: 1. Pour bases not less than 4" high. Provide additional height if required by the

Drawings or to match extensions of existing pads. 2. Tool finish pads and provide a 3/4" chamfer along all exposed tops of sides. 3. Reinforce pad with #10 10X10 welded wire mesh placed in the center of the pad.

[Reinforce pad with #4 reinforcing bars laid 12" on center both ways and placed in the center of the pad. Keep bars at least 3" from the sides of the pads.]

4. Pin pads to floor with short lengths of re-bar extending at least 3" into the floor and at least 3" into the pad.

5. Pin pads to any adjacent existing concrete structures. 6. Minimum 28 day compressive strength of pad is 3,000 psi.

3.7 ELECTRIC CONTROL WIRING OF HVAC MOTORS AND MOTOR-OPERATED EQUIPMENT

A. Control wiring of HVAC motors and motor-operated equipment: 1. General requirements:

a) It is the intent of these specifications to provide a clear delineation of responsibilities for the providing of electrical control wiring.

b) Divisions 15 and 16 shall jointly coordinate with each other to insure that all control wiring is provided as described.

c) All required items shall be furnished under the contract, with responsibilities of specific items as described hereafter, or in Division 15 Specifications.

d) While these specifications indicate the contract responsibilities of the various Divisions, they do not prevent job-site mutually agreed upon revisions or modifications to these responsibilities provided that ultimate

16050-14

contract responsibilities are retained as described in the Specifications. 2. Responsibilities of Division 15 (Mechanical):

a) Furnish and set in place, ready for electrical connection, all HVAC motors and motor-operated HVAC equipment unless specifically noted otherwise.

b) Provide and set in place all HVAC control devices, such as relays, thermostats, electrically operated valves, control panels, and related items.

c) Provide and install all HVAC and energy management system control wiring.

3. Responsibilities of Division 16 (Electrical): a) Furnish, mount, and connect to safety and disconnect switches for

rooftop units, fan-coil units, and similar HVAC equipment not furnished from the factory with integral safety or disconnect switches.

b) Connect to any speed switches factory furnished on fractional horsepower fan-coil units and similar equipment. Division 16 is not required to provided field installed speed switches unless specifically noted on the Drawings.

c) Provide and install entry security system control wiring as noted on the Drawings and as follows: 1) Install wiring between the equipment and its associated control

point. 2) Install all control wiring in conduit inside walls. Control wiring

shall be installed in the same manner as data and communication wiring unless noted otherwise. Minimum conduit size is 1/2", except where connections at indoor equipment terminals allow use of 3/8" flex.

3) Install all control wiring in accordance with Section 16110 and 16120.

4) Coordinate with the Owner to obtain wiring diagrams for the installation of the control wiring.

5) Where conductor sizes and numbers to various control connections are indicated on the Drawings, these are for reference only and require coordination with the Owner. Division 16 shall ensure that all wiring is correct according to the selected equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Provide additional wiring or conductor sizes as required to satisfy specified functions or to connect to equipment furnished.

d) Provide relocated fire alarm system wiring for the Computer Room, as noted on the Drawings.

e) Refer to the Drawings for specific or unusual connection arrangements.

3.8 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION

A. Modify, remove and relocate all materials and items so indicated on the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All demolition of existing electrical facilities shall be performed by Division 16 unless noted or directed otherwise.

B. Conduct all removals and/or dismantling in a manner that produces maximum salvage. Salvaged materials remain the property of the Owner, and are to be delivered to such destination as directed by the Owner. After inspection, the Owner will retain whatever items or materials he desires. Remaining items or materials become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.

16050-15

C. Materials and items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to original or better condition.

D. Where items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be damaged before work . has been started, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal.

E. Remove wiring and equipment to be removed, salvaged, or relocated to points indicated, noted, or acceptable to the Engineer. Seal, cap, or tie off such services in a safe manner. Cover junction boxes, outlets, and related items that no longer serve electrical facilities

with appropriate covers or plates. Fill holes and voids and patch the adjacent area to produce a neat and finished appearance acceptable to the Architect.

F. Remodeled areas: 1. Where areas receive new electrical systems, the existing electrical systems no

longer in use (such as conduit, wiring, boxes, fixtures, panels, etc.) shall be completely removed from the remodeled areas.

2. Demolition shall be carefully done in order to avoid damaging any existing systems which will remain to serve electrical equipment or systems located in areas that are not to be replaced or remodeled.

3. Where existing walls, partitions, or similar items are removed, and these items are used to feed underfloor electrical systems that remain, the Contractor is responsible for re-routing electrical service to any outlets or equipment that remains.

4. Completely repair or replace any existing systems that are to remain if these existing systems are damaged during demolition of systems that will no longer be used.

3.9 DISPOSAL

A. Properly dispose of all electrical items not retained for reuse in the remodeled or new areas.

B. Items not retained by the Owner or Contractor for their use shall be disposed of in an official sanitary landfill or delivered to the local City refuse collection system, provided such items are suitable for ordinary disposal.

C. Disposal shall conform to the EPA "Universal Waste Rule" and in accordance with applicable State of Texas and Federal regulations and statutes. Refer to Chapter 335 of the most recent TNRCC rules and regulations for details.

3.10 CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications for details regarding the construction of the electrical systems.

B. Verify voltage, phase, ampacity, and connection requirements of all electrically operated equipment furnished by other trades. If the actual equipment furnished varies materially from that intended for connection, notify the Architect or Engineer for resolution of connection details.

C. Verify rotation of all motor operated equipment or other equipment that is rotation sensitive. Rotation shall be verified prior to voltage application to equipment unless approved otherwise.

16050-16

D. Carefully examine all documentation furnished with electrical equipment prior to installing connections and operating equipment.

E. Any equipment requiring certification, testing, calibration, or similar work by others prior to normal operation shall have such work performed by certified individuals or manufacturers prior to operation of the equipment.

3.11 WARRANTY DOCUMENTATION

A. Deliver all warranty documentation to the Owner after acceptance of the building by the Owner.

B. Documentation shall include sufficient information including manufacturer, local representative, type and model numbers of equipment, date of Owner's acceptance, length of warranty period, and similar data.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING

A. Properly mark disconnect switches, panelboards, switchboards, special purpose device plates, designated receptacles, junction boxes, outlet boxes, etc., to identify their service or designation.

B. Labels: 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Covers of outlet boxes mounted above the ceiling line shall be markes with the circuit and panel numbers of conductors installed inside of the outlet box. Marking may be made through a permanent black ink marker. Engraved nameplate standards: a) Constructed from laminated phenolic plastic. b) Either black with white core or white with black core. c) Character style Sans Serif, Arial, or similar. d) Characters at least 5/16" high for smaller plates and at least 3/4" high for

larger plates. e) Attached with one of the following methods:

1) Minimum of 2 chrome plated or stainless steel screws. 2) Permanent cement such as 3M "Plastic and Emblem Adhesive." 3) Standard adhesive strips on back of nameplates shall not be

used. Lighting panelboards: Provide an engraved label indicating the panel name and voltage. Power and distribution panelboards: Provide an engraved label indicating the panel name. Provide engraved labels for each circuit breaker and switch position as well as main, spares and spaces. Typed directory cards are not acceptable. Switchboards: Provide an engraved label indicating the switchboard name. Provide engraved labels for each circuit breaker and switch position as well as main, spares and spaces. Typed directory cards are not acceptable. Starter and disconnect switches: Provide an engraved label indicating the load controlled.

7. Miscellaneous equipment: Provide an engraved label where appropriate, required, or designated by the Engineer for additional equipment such as special junction boxes, remote control devices, multi-gang wall switches, and related items of electrical equipment.

16050-17

C. Provide typed interior door index card identifying all circuits in lighting and appliance panel boards.

D. Identify emergency electrical system junction boxes with red paint or appropriate labels. Extend labeling to junction boxes and similar enclosures per NEC 700-9(a).

3.13 CONDITIONS OF EQUIPMENT AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Prior to the time of acceptance, inspect all installed systems to assure that all construction is complete and premises are clean.

B. Insure that all lighting fixtures are operating and that lenses and reflectors are free of dust, debris, and fingerprints.

C. Lighting fixture lamps must be new or do not have significantly reduced lifetimes.

D. Switchboards and panelboards must have all conductors neatly formed, laced and made-up tight.

E. Equipment enclosures and plates shall be cleaned of stray paint, dust, grease and visible fingerprints.

F. All circuit directories and labels are in place.

G. All scratched surfaces are touched-up with paint matching original paint type and color. Where paint cannot be matched, repaint the entire surface in a color and manner approved by the Architect.

H. Equipment lock keys shall be delivered to the Owner and not left in enclosures.

I. Spare lamps and spare ballasts have been delivered to Owner and a signed receipt obtained.

END OF SECTION

16050-18

PART 1 ·GENERAL


SECTION 16060

GROUNDING

A. Extent of Work as shown on the Drawings and described in these Specifications.

PART 2 • PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Furnish connectors by manufacturers regularly engaged in production of grounding terminals and equipment.

B. Compression connectors: Burndy.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Connectors for attaching to structural steel and metallic water lines: 1. Structural steel: Exothermically welded or compression attachment. 2. Metallic water lines: Copper straps, studs attached to couplings, or exothermic

weld where allowed by the line installer.

B. Use mechanical lugs, wire terminals, or bonding screws to bond ground wires to metallic junction boxes and panelboards.

PART 3 • EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Completely ground the electrical system including all electrical receptacles, lighting fixtures, equipment, conduits, support, cabinets, and metal enclosed electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC and as shown or indicated on the Drawings.

B. Thoroughly clean all contact surfaces before connections are made to insure good metal to metal contact.

3.2 RACEWAY GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Install a separate insulated grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway, whether the raceway is metallic and non-metallic, where the line voltage of the energized conductors exceeds 30VAC.

B. All grounding conductors shall be insulated and sized as noted on the Drawings or per Article 250 of the NEC with a minimum grounding conductor size of #12AWG unless noted otherwise.

3.3 MAIN GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR AND BONDING JUMPER

A. The service and main panelboard for the building has previously been established. Do no bond the 480V system neutral to ground at any additional points.

3.4 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Where noted on the Drawings, provide compression or exothermic weld connections to building structural steel.

16060-1

B. Either Burndy "HyGround" compression connection system or Cadweld exothermic welding system may be used for connection of copper conductors to copper conductors, or for connection of copper conductors to steel components.

C. Follow manufacturer's guidelines for installing all components of the system.

3.5 TRANSFORMER GROUNDS

A. Ground the secondary neutral of all dry-type transformers. See Section 16460 for details of grounding the transformer neutral and case.

B. Transformer grounds and bonds shall normally be made inside the transformer enclosure where they are readily accessible for inspection.

C. Grounding conductor shall be sized as per NEC or as noted on the Drawings.

D. Install a continuous conductor from the transformer case ground to adjacent structural steel.

END OF SECTION

16060-2

SECTION 16111

RACEWAYS

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. This section describes raceway systems to be utilized in this project. Provide as shown on the Drawings and described in these Specifications.

B. Raceways include both metallic and non-metallic enclosed channels expressly designed for holding present or future wires, cables, conductors, including conduit, tubing, wireways, gutters, cable tray, and related items.

C. Install all wiring and cables in raceways unless specifically noted otherwise in the Section 16120 or other related sections of this Specification.

D. Fire sealing: 1. Fire sealing is required for all raceway penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors

that are fire rated. 2. This Section includes the requirements for fire sealing of all electrical raceways,

cabling, wiring, or other related items, regardless of whether the conductors are installed in raceways or are free-wired.

1.2 EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

A. ANSI Standards: 1. C80.1 Rigid steel conduit. 2. C80.3 Electrical metallic conduit.

B. NEMA Standards:

C.

1. RN 1 PVC coated rigid steel conduit. 2. TC 3 PVC conduit fittings. 3. TC 6 PVC conduit. 4. VE 1 Cable Trays. 5. VE 2 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines.

UL Standards: 1. UL 6 2. UL 797

Rigid Steel Conduit. Electrical Metallic Conduit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with this Specification as required by Section 16050.

PART 2 • PRODUCTS


A. Steel conduit: 1. LTV Steel Tubular Products. 2. Allied Tube and Conduit. 3. Republic Conduit. 4. Wheatland Tube Co.

B. PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings: 1. "Piasti-Bond Red" by Robroy Industries.

16111-1

2. Others as approved by Engineer.

C. PVC nonmetallic conduit: 1. Prime (Carlon). 2. J-M Pipe. 3. Can-Tex. 4. TerraCon. 5. Others as approved by Engineer.

D. Flexible metal conduit: 1. Alflex. 2. Others as approved by Engineer.

E. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: 1. Anaconda. 2. Others as approved by Engineer.

F. Wireways and gutters: 1. Square D. 2. Hoffmann. 3. Circle AW. 4. Others as approved by Engineer.

G. Cable tray: 1. P-W. 2. B-Line. 3. MP Husky. 4. Thomas & Betts. 5. Chalfant. 6. Others as approved by Engineer.

H. Conduit fittings: 1. Metal raceway:

a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. c. Others as approved by Engineer.

2. PVC plastic raceway: a. Prime (Carlon). b. J-M Pipe. c. Can-Tex. d. Others as approved by Engineer.

I. Conduit supports: 1. Unistrut. 2. Eristrut. 3. B-Line. 4. Caddy. 5. Others as approved by Engineer.

J. Fire sealing materials (for all types of raceways): 1. CSD Sealing Systems. 2. Metacaulk. 3. Hilti. 4. Wiremold. 5. Others as approved by Engineer.

K. Corrosion protective tape: 1. 3M. 2. Plymouth/Bishop.

16111-2

L. Floor-to-floor sleeves: 1. Hilti. 2. Specified Technologies. 3. Other manufacturers as approved by the Engineer.

M. Conduit supports on roof: 1. Erico "Pipe Pier". 2. B-Line "C Series." 3. Miro Industries "Conduit Supports." 4. Field fabricated assemblies as specified. 5. Others as approved by Engineer.

2.2 MATERIALS-GENERAL

A. Minimum requirements: 1. All new materials, none used. 2. UL listed. 3. No smaller than 1 /2" trade size except where noted under flexible metal conduit.

B. Raceways prohibited: 1. Any aluminum rigid conduit, tubing, or flexible conduit. 2. ENT conduit. 3. EMT conduit. 4. IMC conduit. 5. Type MC or BX cable. 6. RTRC conduit. 7. HOPE conduit.

C. Provide only the following types of raceways unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings.

D. For the purposes of conduit material selection only, conduits connecting to motors, HVAC type equipment, such as condensing units, air handlers, chillers, rooftop units, exhaust fans, and similar equipment shall be considered "branch circuits" and not "feeders."

2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT or "Thin Wall")

A. Usage restrictions per NEC.

B. Used for above-grade wiring only. EMT is not permitted in slabs or below grade.

C. Used to enclose: 1. General use above-grade wiring for lighting, receptacle and equipment branch

circuit conductors. 2. General equipment feeds. 3. Fire alarm and related wiring or cabling. 4. Thermostat, security, and control wiring. 5. Similar types of wiring unless noted otherwise in the specifications or on the

Drawings.

D. Galvanized mild strip steel with interior UL approved coating.

E. Fittings: 1. The following types of fittings, couplings, and connectors may be used:

a. Die-cast non-insulated zinc compression type. b. Steel non-insulated compression type.

2. The following types of fittings, couplings, and connectors are prohibited: a. Expanded conduit ends with factory pre-installed set-screw attachments. b. Indentor type. c. Set-screw type.

16111-3

2.4 RIGID METALLIC STEEL CONDUIT (RIGID, GRC, or RMC)


B. Used for: 1. Above-grade panel feeder runs. 2. Runs in any areas subject to damage. 3. Runs in elevator or sump pits. 4. Below grade raceways only where completely protected against corrosion.

C. Low carbon steel, hot dipped galvanized inside and out, with threads galvanized after cutting.

D. Fittings: 1. All joints made with threaded couplings with 3/4" taper per foot dies installed

wrench tight. 2. Provide unions in lieu of couplings where required due to installation space or for

final attachment of rigid conduit runs. 3. Straight runs of conduit may utilize factory installed couplings (such as Allied

"quick coupling") instead of standard separate couplings. 4. Set-screw type fittings are prohibited.

E. Slab or below grade installations: 1. Use only where protected with an exterior corrosion protective layer. 2. Coating may be field or factory applied. 3. Factory applied coating requirements:

a. Permanently fused to galvanized steel surface. Coatings that require the galvanized surface to be compromised prior to application of the coating are not acceptable.

b. Smooth and continuous. c. Comply with NEMA RN1 and applicable ASTM standards for immersion

in boiling water and application of humidity and acetone. d. Exterior coating:

1) Field strippable. 2) Nominal 40 mil thickness of polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 3) Applied after the surface has been primed to receive the coating.

e. Interior coating: 1) Permanently coated. 2) Nominal 2 mil thickness of polyurethane. 3) Resistant to abrasion from pulling of conductors through conduit.

4. Use for ells or bends in rigid PVC conduit runs where pulling conductors into the conduit may damage or pull through plastic ells (see Part 3--Execution).

F. Coated rigid steel: 1. Clean the steel surfaces of grease, oil, or other contaminants and prime for

coating application. 2. Add a 40 mil PVC plastic coating, free of blisters, bubbles, and pinholes,

permanently fused to the entire exterior surface except for the threads. 3. The coating adhesion properties shall be greater than the coating itself. 4. Conduit shall be verified to meet PVC-001 performance standard of the Electrical

Testing Laboratory (ETL). 5. Include an interior conduit coating of polyurethane for internal corrosion

resistance. 6. Provide a clear polyurethane coating of factory threads. 7. Couplings and fittings:

a. Similar internal and external coatings as conduit.

16111-4

b. Flexible square-cut PVC skirts or sleeves extending at least one pipe diameter (or 2", whichever is less) to completely seal the conduit system.

c. Couplings require longitudinal ribs to allow use of installation tools without damaging the coating.

8. Comply with: a. ANSI C80.1. b. UL Standard #6. c. NEMA Standard 5-19.

9. Provide touch-up compound for field treatment of scars or tears.

2.5 FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (Flex or "Greenfield")

A. Usage restrictions: 1. As per NEC Article 348. 2. Flexible metallic conduit shall not be used as the general wiring system. 3. Flexible metallic conduit shall not be used to "daisy-chain" branch circuit

connections to recessed lighting fixtures except for inaccessible ceiling locations where approved by the Engineer.

4. The Engineer shall be consulted on all questions regarding the use of flexible conduit and shall interpret the intent of the Specifications regarding locations for which flexible conduit is allowed.

B. Approved for general use in the following situations or locations: 1. Vibration isolation for all interior dry location motor operated equipment such as

fan powered boxes, unit heaters, and exhaust fans where the connected horsepower is less than 3/4HP.

2. lnterwiring of millwork and cabinets for feeds to receptacles, outlet boxes, and under cabinet low profile lighting fixtures.

3. Final whip connections to recessed interior lighting fixtures, smoke detectors, and similar equipment installed in accessible ceiling tiles that can be removed for maintenance or accessibility to the ceiling space.

4. Locations where equipment, ductwork, structure, or other hindrance makes it impractical or impossible to install straight or offset tubing or conduit. This provision does not provide for the use of flexible conduit where improper prior planning or delay in conduit installation makes the location subsequently inconvenient for the use of straight or offset runs of conduit or tubing.

C. The use of flexible conduit in old work is extended to include installation of conduits fished in existing walls or other special or unusual situations approved by the Engineer.

D. Use of 3/8" flexible conduit in lieu of 1/2" trade size: 1. Local Code restrictions prohibiting the use of 3/8" flexible conduit take precedent

over NEC allowed use of 3/8" flex conduit. 2. Provided local Code allows, the minimum flexible conduit size may be reduced

from 1/2" to 3/8" where installed for any of the following conditions: a. Final whip connections to recessed single circuit and non-split-wired

interior lighting fixtures mounted only in accessible ceilings. b. Connections to equipment with motors rated less than 1/6HP, motorized

fire dampers, and similar equipment. c. Final connections to mechanical system controls, where raceways for

mechanical controls are installed under Division 16. 3. Additional restrictions effecting use and installation of 3/8" flex:

a. Conduit must not contain more than 3 #12AWG or smaller insulated conductors.

b. Conduit may serve no more than one light fixture. c. Length of flex is limited to 6 feet. d. Restrictions of NEC 350-10 are met.

16111-5

E. Constructed of interlocking galvanized steel.

F. Used with fittings specifically approved for use with flex.

2.6 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (Liquid-tight)


B. Used for: 1. Final connections to vibration-producing equipment such as motors rated 3/4HP

or more. 2. Final connections to all exterior motorized equipment. 3. Final connections to dry-type transformers.

C. Constructed with a sunlight resistant non-metallic jacket over an inner flexible metallic core.

D. Conduit without an inner metallic core (all plastic construction) is prohibited.

E. Used with water-tight fittings approved for use with liquid-tight conduit.

F. Generally limited to six feet lengths.

G. Internal grounding conductor required for all lengths.

H. For installations in air-handling plenums (free air return above ceilings or inside airhandllers ), utilize low or zero halogen emission liquid-tight flex conduit with polyurethane jacket, such as Anaconda Sealtite ZHUA.

2.7 RIGID NONMETALLIC PVC CONDUIT (PVC)

A. Usage restrictions per NEC Article 352.

B. General requirements: 1. Polyvinyl chloride compound. 2. Schedule 40 wall thickness. 3. Flame retardant type. 4. Resistant to bending and cracking. 5. UV resistant.

C. Used for horizontal runs of underslab or underground conduits. Vertical risers and all ells installed below grade must be rigid steel installed as noted previously.

D. No above ground installation.

E. Couplings: 1. Trenching operations: Couplings and fitting designed for permanent glued

connection to the conduit. 2. Trenchless operations (direct horizontal bores): Utilize joints with factory-provided

rounded belled ends fitted with internal 0-ring and locking spline system.

2.8 WIREWAYS AND GUTTERS

A. Used in limited locations for raceways for power conductors and cables where indicated on the Drawings. Wireways and gutters shall not be used for the general wiring system.

B. Wireways and gutters shall comply with Article 376 of the NEC.

C. Enclosures: 1. NEMA 1 with hinged covers, for indoor non-hazardous dry locations. 2. NEMA 3R with raintight construction for outdoor use with no direct hose

application of water.

D. General requirements:

16111-6

E.

1. Construct of code gauge steel. 2. Square in cross-section. 3. Provide knockouts for NEMA 1 construction only if required for multiple conduit

entries into the wireway. Wireways for straight runs without conduit attachments shall not have knockouts.

4. Smooth interior finish to avoid snagging conductors. 5. Complete with the necessary painted steel fittings, including:

a. Angles, tees, 90 degree elbows, sweep elbows, and junctions. b. Flanges, connectors, adapters, telescoping fittings, reducers, and

brackets. c. Vertical separation barriers. d. End closure plates. e. Related items needed to form a complete raceway system.

6. Finished with a gray polyester powder coat paint applied to phosphatized surfaces inside and out.

Size: 1. 2.

3.

Minimum size is nominal 4" x 4" cross-section. Consult the Drawings for indication of wireway and gutter sizes, cross-sectional areas, lengths, etc. Enclosures shall have a maximum fill of 20%, or as required to comply with NEC requirements.

2.9 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Support all conduits in accordance with NEC.

B. No conduit shall be free-hung for horizontal spans not exceeding five feet (for conduit 1.5" and smaller) or ten feet (for conduits larger than 1.5") without the Engineer's permission.

C. Vertical conduits shall be supported at distances not exceeding 10 feet.

D. Secure within 24" of all junction and outlet boxes with method other than box itself.

E. Rack in groups where conduits run in the same general location to provide a neat and workmanlike appearance.

F. Provide as follows: 1. Painted steel or cadmium plated for general use. 2. Galvanized or zinc steel clamps where single conduits are attached to surfaces. 3. Utilize galvanized or epoxy painted struts where multiple parallel conduit runs are

attached to surfaces.

2.10 FIRE SEALING REQUIREMENTS

A. All electrical penetrations through fire rated walls, floors, and ceilings shall be fire sealed to prevent the propagation of smoke and fire, regardless of whether they are enclosed by a raceway or not.

B. Provide fire sealing in all locations required by applicable Codes and utilize materials suitable for the intended service.

C. Fire sealing shall be provided for both raceway and free-wired low voltage cabling through fire walls or fire barriers.

D. Generally required UL ratings: 1. Floors:

a. Utilize FA rating for concrete floors less than 5 inches thick. b. Utilize FB rating for concrete floors more than 5 inches thick.

2. Walls: a. Utilize WL rating for framed walls.

16111-7

b. Utilize WJ rating for concrete or masonry walls less than 8 inches thick. c. Utilize WK ratings for concrete or masonry walls more than 8 inches

thick.

E. Putties and sealants: 1. Utilize for openings of less than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Generally preferred method for sealing conduit penetrations through walls,

ceilings, and floors. 3. May be manufactured in caulk tubes, sticks, buckets, or similar manner to allow

easy field insertion for fire stopping. 4. Communication wiring and similar seals must remain permanently soft to allow

reuse and re-entry into the sealed opening. Seals for permanent conduit penetrations may become hard after installation.

5. Do not use materials that give off toxic fumes when curing. 6. UL listed for the same rating as the wall the raceway penetrates (typically 1 or 2

hours).

F. Pipe wrap: 1. Utilize for conduit penetrations of walls, floors, and ceilings. 2. May be used instead of putties and sealants where approved by the Engineer. 3. Intumescent type that expands upon being heated.

G. Wall penetration assemblies: 1. Utilize for grouped low voltage cable horizontal penetration of fire walls. 2. Provided With steel sleeve, channel, or conduit raceway between spaces. 3. Include adjustable entrance and exit flanges that gently grip the data,

communication, and control cables that utilize the penetration. 4. Continuously reusable for removing and adding additional cabling without

removing fire seal material. 5. Provide rectangular flange on both sides of the wall that is filled with intumescent

material that expands and seals the penetration during a fire. 6. Gangable or individually mounted. 7. Fire rating of penetration assembly must equal or exceed that of the floor or wall

that is penetrated. 8. Equal to Wiremold "Fiamestopper," STI "EZ Path" series, or Hilti "Speed Sleeve."

H. Floor-to-floor conduit and cable sleeves: 1. Provide fire stop assembly where above-grade concrete floors are existing.

Assembly requirements: a. Steel sleeve with integral rubber gasket and/or intumescent ring of fire

stopping material to provide both fire and smoke sealing. b. Suitable for replacement of cabling once installed without requiring

replacement of assembly or removal of fire seal caulk c. Suitable for use in floors between 2.5" and 6" of thickness. d. Fire rating of penetration assembly must equal or exceed that of the floor

or wall that is penetrated. e. Resistance to normal temperatures up to 100 deg. C. f. Equal to STI "EZ Path 33" series.

2.11 CORROSION PROTECTIVE TAPE

A. General requirements: 1. Use for any metallic conduit installed in concrete or below grade. 2. Pressure sensitive PVC based type suitable for direct burial applications. 3. Impact resistant. 4. Resistant to moisture, acids, salt, and alkalies.

B. Equal to Scotch #50 or #51.

16111-8

2.12 CABLE TRAYS

A. Usage restrictions per NEC and compliance with NEC Article 392.

B. Used as open raceways for: 1. Telephone cables. 2. Data cables. 3. Low voltage control system wiring.

C. Do not use for: 1. Fire alarm system cables and wiring. 2. Any wiring operating at over 70V RMS nominal, such as service entrance, feeder,

or branch circuit wiring. 3. Any non-plenum rated cables installed in plenum environments.

D. Wire basket cable tray: 1. General Requirements:

a. Wire mesh cable tray constructed of 0.16" diameter mill-galvanized or plated steel wires attached in a 2" X 2" spacing.

b. Tray shall be 12" wide (unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings) with 4" high sides.

c. Furnished in standard 10 ft. section lengths. Cut to fit for shorter lengths. 2. Complete with all required "fittings" as follows:

a. Hangers: 1) Trapeze hangers for center support (12" wide trade size) or edge

support (24" wide trade size). Hangers shall have retaining tabs to hold tray wires.

2) Heavy duty braced wall bracket where tray is attached to side wall. Include hold-down clamps to attach tray to bracket and install bracket under bottom of tray.

b. Horizontal tees, corners, bends, reducers, and angles are indicated on the Drawings in their approximate location. Exact placement will depend on avoidance of ceiling obstructions such as structure, ductwork, and piping.

c. Dropouts for transition to data racks or similar terminations. d. Splice plates or brackets for joining sections and fittings. Hardware for

splice plates shall be hardened plated steel bolts and nuts. e. Inside radius corner shields. f. Reducing splices.

3. Weight and support criteria:

PART 3- EXECUTION

a. 12" X 4" tray: Support 85 lbs/lf for 5 ft. support spacing and 33 lbs/lf for 7 ft. support spacing.

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install all wiring in NEC approved raceways (unless specifically approved otherwise) sized as shown on the Drawings, or, if not sized on the Drawings, in accordance with NEC conduit fill tables.

B. Install raceway systems in a neat, straight, and workmanlike manner complete with all J-boxes and pull boxes as necessary or noted on plans.

C. Raceway general installation notes: 1. All raceways are to be concealed unless noted or approved otherwise. 2. Run concealed conduits as follows:

16111-9

a. Straight and parallel to building lines where installed in walls and above ceiling lines.

b. In a direct line (unless interferences with other trades prevent) where installed under slabs or below grade.

c. Do not run conduit horizontally in concrete block (CMU) walls, whether cells are filled or unfilled. Conduits must run vertically inside the CMU cells and be fed from overhead or underground, as appropriate.

3. Exposed raceways: a. Install only at right angles to the building lines. b. Install only in the following locations:

a. Mechanical rooms and boiler rooms. b. Electrical and telephone rooms. c. Elevator equipment rooms.

c. Difficulty in installing concealed conduit in existing or new construction is not in itself reason for installing surface raceways in lieu of concealed conduit.

d. Confirm the exact routing of any exposed raceways in the field with the Architect or Engineer prior to roughing in.

D. Mechanical details of conduit and raceway installation: 1. Make all cuts squarely, ream after cutting, and butt conduits solidly into fittings. 2. All conduit and raceway systems must be mechanically continuous and installed

complete before conductors are pulled. 3. Bend conduit with approved bending devices. Remove and replace deformed or

damaged conduit. 4. Temporarily plug openings if conductors are not immediately installed in the

raceway. Install plugs to exclude plaster or other foreign materials. 5. Treat field cut rigid steel conduit threads subject to moisture with paint-on or

spray-on galvanizing equal to "Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound."

E. When a metallic conduit enters an enclosure, provide an insulated throat connector and or an insulating bushing where the conduit contains conductors sized #4AWG or larger.

F. Do not run conduit or raceway adjacent to steam piping or hot vent piping unless authorization is provided.

G. No conduit shall be run in the corrugated metal roof decking immediately below the roofing material, per NEC 300.4(E), whether EMT conduit is installed or not. Conduit shall be installed in the joist space below the decking. This provision does not apply to conduits installed in metal decking in multi-story buildings where the decking is not part of the roof structure.

H. Conductor sets: 1. Run feeder conductor sets in individual conduits enclosing the associated phase,

neutral, and grounding conductors for each set. 2. Each branch circuit whose load is connected phase-to-neutral shall have a

separate designated neutral run full-length with the circuit. Do not combine neutrals.

3. Run branch circuits generally in individual conduits. When branch circuits run in common directions or serve loads within common areas, the conductors may be combined as follows (grounding conductors are not counted in the total) where THHN/THWN conductors are used: a. Lighting circuits: Maximum of 6 #1 OAWG or smaller current carrying

conductors in a single conduit. b. Receptacle circuits: Maximum of 9 #1 OAWG or smaller current carrying

conductors in a single conduit.

16111-10

4. Install conductor sets sized #8AWG and larger in individual conduits unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

5. Separate emergency and normal branch conduits from each other with separate conduits ..

I. Sleeves: 1. Install where noted on the Drawings. 2. Provide for conduit and cable runs in the existing floor. 3. Refer to the manufacturer's directions for specific installation requirements.

3.2 RACEWAY SUPPORTS AND HANGERS

A. Securely fasten all conduits and raceways in place at intervals not exceeding those recommended by NEMA or as required by NEC. Attachment materials or equipment shall be structurally and cosmetically compatible with the surface that the conduit or raceway is attached to.

B. General requirements of supports and hangers: 1. The use of perforated iron for suspending conduits or horizontal structural

supports will not be permitted. 2. Surfaces of bolts, screws, anchors, threaded rods, and similar equipment shall be

galvanized or plated. 3. Surfaces of strut, horizontal hangers, or similar materials shall be galvanized or

painted. 4. Multiple runs of conduit in the same general directions shall be grouped together

and jointly supported with horizontal structural supports suspended with threaded rods. Supports shall be provided by Unistrut, 8-Line, or equivalent.

5. Support from structural members as follows: a. Provide supports capable of supporting the fully loaded weight of the

conduit or conduit rack. b. Attach to steel bars joists by bolting threaded rods through the gap

between the bottom chord flanges. c. Attach to steel beam flanges with beam clamps or by bolting through the

beam flanges. d. Attach to cast-in-place concrete with drilled inserts set into the concrete

with epoxy.

C. Conduits and raceways installed above removable ceilings: 1. Install conduits and raceways to allow sufficient clearance for ceiling panel and

fixture removal or insertion. 2. Support the conduit or raceway system independently of the ceiling system. Do

not support by hangers attached to ceiling support wires unless the ceiling suspension system is expressly permitted by the ceiling manufacturer to support the conduit or raceway system and the Architect or Engineer has provided authorization.

3. Conduits and raceways shall not be supported by the ceiling grid itself under any circumstances.

D. Do not support conduit or raceways from mechanical piping or equipment unless specifically authorized.

E. Steel conduit installed on roof: 1. Do not install without prior authorization. Coordinate with roofing materials to

avoid damage to membrane. 2. Provide EMT conduit where not subject to damage. 3. Provide rigid steel conduit where subject to damage or where used for physical

support, such as equipment or lighting fixtures. 4. Where authorized for installation, with one of the following methods:

16111-11

3.3 FIRE SEALING

a. Field constructed supports: 1) Spud gravel back at support location and place 18" x 18"

modified bitumen sheet loose on roof. Do not mop into roof surface.

2) Provide 11-1 /2" x 12" x 2" redwood block flat on top of sheet and attach to sheet with three 3" deck screws with screw heads on bottom of sheet. Place 11-1/2" dimension perpendicular to conduit run. Do not use CCA yellow pine blocks in lieu of redwood.

3) Provide two 4" x 4" x 12" long redwood blocks on top of bottom block. Attach blocks together with three 5/16" x 6" long lag bolts, washers, and nuts. Recess nuts and bolt heads. Do not use CCA yellow pine blocks in lieu of redwood.

4) Attach a 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal cover to the top of the top block. Sheet metal shall overlap block by approximately 1/2" on all sides and have edges turned down to form drip edge. Fasten sheet metal to top block with minimum of two #1 0 X 1-1/2" plated wood screws.

5) Place two hole minimum 1" wide plated straps over each conduit. Oversize strap to prevent tight fit around conduit and allow for

movement. Attach straps to top of sheet metal with two #1 0 X 1-1/2" plated wood screws.

6) Space supports at a maximum of 8 feet on center. b. Pre-constructed supports:

1) Spud gravel back at support location and place 18" x 18" modified bitumen sheet loose on roof. Do not mop into roof surface.

2) Provide Erico "Pipe Pier," Miro Industries "Conduit Supports" or approved equal pre-assembled pipe support complete with preformed strut. Attach conduit to strut with channel clamps. Attach support to bitumen sheet with mastic as recommended by the manufacturer.

3) Attach clamps to strut of correct size to properly attach to conduits.

4) Space supports at a maximum of 8 feet on center, or less if so recommended by the manufacturer.

A. Install fire sealing in all locations required by applicable Codes.

B. Fire sealing shall be installed for all raceway and sleeve penetrations of fire rated walls, ceilings, or floors above grade.

C. Fire sealing shall consist of fire rated putty, sealants, boards, poured or sprayed materials, pillows, or sheets of fire sealing material of required sizes and quantities to completely and effectively seal the associated fire barriers.

D. Wall penetrations of conduit shall generally be sealed with putty or caulk type sealant. Thoroughly seal penetration to avoid any air spaces around the wall penetrations.

E. Floor penetrations shall be sealed as follows: 1. Provide pre-manufactured firestop assembly instead of field fabrication method

noted previously. 2. Assembly shall be STI EX-Path 33 or equal by Hilti, or other approved by the

Engineer. 3. Cut opening through decking and Install metal deck adapter for assembly.

16111-12

4. Support assembly prior to pour to prevent movement.

F. Install all fire seal materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NEC Article 300-21.

3.4 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Carefully plan excavations for electrical systems in advance, paying particular attention to other utilities in the project area, both existing and new. Use hand and/or machine excavation cautiously to prevent damage to installed systems. The Contractor is responsible for repairing all damages caused as a result of excavation.

B. Standard conduit depths: 1. Below concrete building slabs:

a. Conduits installed under sidewalks, driveways, porches, and similar areas outside of the main building slab shall maintain the minimum depths listed above.

b. Conduit installed under the main building slab:

C. Ditch backfill:

1) Do not install horizontal conduit runs in the slab itself. 2) Place conduit in sand cushion region below the building slab or

place in the lower soil below the sand cushion. 3) Conduits placed in the lower soil shall have their surrounding

ditch area filled with compacted sand with the bottom of the conduit placed at least 1" above the bottom of the ditch soil.

4) Adjust conduit depth so there is adequate room to turn up risers so that risers are vertical after passing through the top surface of the slab.

1. Backfill with excavated material: a. Start backfill with a layer of sand or select excavated material which is

void of rock, rock chips, metallic fragments, and similar items which might damage the conduit.

b. Compact the remaining depth of trench to 95% of the original soil compaction or as required by other divisions of the Specifications that may take precedence.

3.5 PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Bends and offsets: 1. Make any PVC field offsets with a hot box bender specifically approved for the

purpose. 2. PVC offsets of less than 45 degrees may be field or factory made. 3. Install factory PVC bend where angle of bend is 45 degrees or more. 4. Provide rigid steel or IMC factory ell or offset in conduit run, instead of PVC,

where: a. Conduits 2" trade size or larger. b. Length of run exceeds 125ft. c. Ropes larger than 1/4" diameter are used for pulling conductors. d. Any location where the installation of the conductors may pull through the

interior wall of PVC elbows or offsets.

B. Transition from plastic to steel conduit: 1. Install plastic conduit only below the slab or grade. Do not install plastic conduit

above grade. 2. Where the plastic conduit terminates in a factory ell or field bend prior to turning

up, the ell or bend shall be wrapped steel conduit.

16111-13

3. Where the plastic conduit runs horizontally and transitions to steel conduit through a footing or wall, plastic conduit may be utilized outside of the footing or wall, with a wrapped steel section extending at least 6" from the exterior footing or wall surface.

4. Where concrete encased plastic conduit enters a wall, provide dowels, steel sleeves, or suitable support at the transition to prevent future settlement of the encasement.

C. Protection of steel fittings, couplings, elbows, and offsets utilized below grade in PVC conduit runs:

D.

1. Protect metallic conduit and fittings with either factory applied coating or field applied coating.

2. Coatings or fitting skirts shall extend past the metallic conduit or fittings onto the PVC conduit run to make a watertight seal.

3. Field applied tape coatings:

Joints: 1.

a. Overall coating must be a minimum of 20 mils thickness. b. Provide at least one half-lapped layer of Scotch #50 (1 0 mil) tape or one

layer of Scotch #51 (20 mil) tape with overlapped edges. c. Prime conduit with Scotch Pipe Primer (or equal) prior to application of

tape.

Standard direct burial application: a. Thoroughly clean conduit and fitting or coupling prior to application of

glue. b. Utilize solvent type glue compound which will provide a watertight

permanent joint by welding both PVC surfaces together. c. Do not use aerosol or spray-on joint compound.

3.6 WIREWAYS AND GUTTERS

A. Furnish and install the wireway and gutter systems indicated on the Drawings or as required to complete the electrical installation.

B. Wireways do not substitute for conduit systems, and shall only be provided where noted on the Drawings or with the Engineer's permission.

C. Plan the installation so that runs are straight and parallel to building lines, are adequately supported, and provide a complete system for enclosing the associated conductors and cables.

D. Maximum fill shall not exceed 20% of the available area.

E. Support horizontal runs inside building with Unistrut hangers and all-thread rods securely attached to the building structure. General horizontal supports shall not exceed 10ft. apart. Support vertical wireways within 5 ft. of wireway ends, and no more than 10 ft. intervals for straight runs.

F. Include all fittings and related items required for form all turns, and install closure plates at the ends of deadend runs.

G. Provide miscellaneous connectors, brackets, closure plates, etc. required to form an endto-end enclosed raceway system.

H. Where the wireway contains larger conductors with limited flexibility, bends shall be made with long-sweep elbows.

I. Where wireways enter electrical enclosures, provide insulating material at the metal contact surface to prevent abrasion of the conductor insulation.

16111-14

J. Field drill conduit attachments to the wireway or gutter. Where multiple conduits enter shorter sections of the wireway or gutter, raceways factor-furnished with knockouts may be used with the Engineer's permission.

K. Coordinate with the Engineer to determine all specifics of the installation.

3.7 CABLE TRAYS

A. Coordinate installation with other trades and systems, especially HVAC and fire sprinkler systems.

B. Install per Article 392 of the NEC.

C. Support systems: 1. Wire basket cable tray (suspended):

a. Support tray with factory-provided trapeze hangers on the bottom of the cable tray section.

b. Suspend 12" wide tray with center 3/8" trade size all-thread type rod. c. Suspend 24" wide tray with two 3/8" trade size all-thread rods per hanger. d. Connect rods with epoxy set inserts in concrete surfaces or from either

trapeze hangers or welded plates from bar joists. e. Install hangers at maximum 7ft. intervals. Refer to previous

specifications on 5 ft. interval supports for increased load-carrying capacity.

f. Install supports within 2ft. of any wye, tee, ell, offset, or reducer.

D. Install all angles, corners, dropouts, and similar fittings as noted on the Drawings or as required.

E. Install all offsets, vertical corners, and similar fittings to miss structural, mechanical, or similar obstacles.

F. Field install vertical tray dividers. Utilize clamps or self-tapping metal screws to attach dividers to bottom rungs.

G. Attach conduit indicated to run from side of cable tray as follows: 1. Attach conduit to top of tray side extrusion with suitable pressure clamp or bolted

strap. 2. Use insulating bushing on conduit stubbed to side of cable tray.

H. Conductor installation: 1. Install each set of cables and conductors in a single pull. 2. Group as required to function and system served. 3. Cable ties:

a. Provide where required to prevent movement or to segregate cables. b. Standard nylon ties routed through the tray rungs and installed on

approximate 6ft. centers. c. Ties may be eliminated for data cable installations where the ties might

damage the conductor properties.

I. Tray bonding and grounding conductor: 1. Bonding shall provide metallic continuity of the cable tray system only. Grounding

provisions (either via the tray or separate grounding conductors) shall be provided where the cable tray contains power conductors and the grounding system is relied on for the current return path.

2. Bonding purposes: a. For bonding purposes, the manufacturer's clamps and attachment

equipment may be used to provide a continuous metallic bond, provide that the clamps and attachments are UL Listed for that purpose.

16111-15

b. If trays are utilized only for low voltage conductors that have limited energy capacity (such as data and communication cables), this only requires a bonding jumper or suitable clamp or bracket between sections.

c. Bonding conductor size is #10AWG. d. Provide a #1 OAWG jumper and conduit grounding bushings where tray

transitions to conduit across inaccessible ceiling. 3. Grounding purposes:

a. For grounding conductor purposes, the tray metallic area shall be the equivalent grounding conductor for the maximum overcurrent device that feeds power conductors in the tray. See NEC Articles 250 and 392, and Table 250.122 for minimum grounding conductor sizes required.

b. A separate grounding conductor shall be installed unless all of the following conditions are met: 1) The tray is constructed of steel or aluminum. 2) The tray sections are bonded with appropriate grounding fittings

or rated slice plates. 3) Cable tray sections and fittings are identified for grounding

purposes. 4) Tray cross-sectional area conforms to NEC Table 392.7(B).

c. Where a separate tray grounding conductor is required, install grounding conductor and supplemental ground bonds as follows: 1) Bond to tray at intervals not to exceed 6 feet. Bond by attaching

plated connector to grounding conductor and then attaching connector to tray.

2) Provide an additional bond to grounded systems such as cold water lines, electrical conduit, or other suitable methods to provide continuous grounding path.

3) Bond to building grounding system at both ends of cable tray system run.

4) Cable tray runs greater than 150ft. in total length (end-to-end) require at least one additional ground bond at the mid-point of the tray length.

END OF SECTION

16111-16

SECTION 16123

WIRES AND CABLES 600V AND BELOW

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. This section describes cables and wires rated 600 volts or less.

B. Extent of Work as shown on the Drawings and described in these Specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with this Specification if required by Section 16050.

PART 2 · PRODUCTS


A. Service entrance, feeder, and branch circuit conductors: 1. Southwire. 2. Encore. 3. Essex. 4. Triangle. 5. Encore. 6. Capital. 7. Senator. 8. American Insulated Wire (AIW). 9. United Copper Industries (THHN/THWN only). 10. Others as approved by Engineer.

B. Communication or specialty wiring and cables (refer to Drawings or special sections of the Specifications for details): 1. Belden. 2. Alpha. 3. West Penn. 4. Coleman.

C. Conductor splice connectors smaller than #6AWG ("wire nuts"): 1. Dry and damp locations:

a. Scotch. b. Burndy. c. Buchanan. d. 3M. e. Wago Corp.

2. Wet locations: a. King Technology (silicon filled). b. Buchanan (epoxy filled).

D. Conductor splice connectors #6AWG and larger (power distribution blocks): 1. Square D. 2. Bussmann. 3. NSI industries. 4. Others as approved by Engineer.

E. Tape:

16123-1

1. 3M. 2. Plymouth/Bishop.

F. Conductor markers: 1. Brady. 2. Grafoplast Wiremarkers. 3. Other as approved by Engineer.

G. Pulling compound: 1. Ideal. 2. 3M. 3. American Polywater.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Requirements of all wire and cable conductors: 1. Soft drawn annealed copper based upon 98% conductivity. 2. Tinned or untinned in accordance with established standards for the type of

insulation around the conductors. 3. Uniform in circular cross-section and continuous without splice except at junction

or outlet boxes.

B. Cables prohibited: 1. Type BX or AC cable. 2. Type NM cable. 3. Type MC cable.

C. Requirements of all wire and cable insulation: 1. Permanent marking approximately every two feet indicating conductor size,

voltage, and temperature rating. 2. Color code with wiring insulation or provide taped termination markings to indicate

the following color codes: a. 208Y/120V wye system feeder and branch circuit conductors:

1) Phase conductors black, red, and blue for phases A, B, and C. 2) Neutrals colored white. 3) Grounding conductors colored green.

b. 480Y/277V wye system feeder and branch circuit conductors: 1) Phase conductors brown, orange, yellow for phases A, B, and C. 2) Neutrals colored gray. 3) Grounding conductors colored green.

c. Specialty wiring: 1) Additional colors may be used where practical to distinguish

additional circuitry or for separate types of circuits (such as control, fire alarm, etc.).

2) Others colors where noted, approved by the Engineer, or required to meet codes.

D. Feeder and branch circuit conductor construction standards: 1. Sized per the American Wire Gauge. 2. Solid per ASTM B3 for #12AWG and smaller power and lighting conductors. 3. Solid or Class B stranded (per ASTM B8) for #1 OAWG. 4. Class B stranded per ASTM B8 for conductors larger than #1 OAWG. 5. Single conductor, 600V insulation, UL Listed. 6. Install only in approved raceways or conduit. 7. Not smaller than #12 AWG. 8. Insulation type for general use conductors: THHN/THWN. Note that conductors

with insulation such as Southwire "SIMpull" reduces or eliminates lubrication and

16123-2

provides superior resistance to bunching and tearing of the nylon jacket when pulled around bends. As such, this type of insulation is preferred.

2.3 LOW VOLTAGE (LESS THAN 90VAC) CABLES

A. Communication, control, fire alarm, and related types of wires and cables are covered by this Specification.

B. See other sections of these Specifications for the types of conductors, wires, and cables for fire alarm, sound system, or telephone/data cables.

C. Requirements for thermostat and mechanical system control wires and cables installed under Division 16: 1. Minimum #18AWG where operating at a voltage of 30V (nominal) or less. 2. Minimum #16AWG for sound systems operating at either 25V or 70V nominal. 3. Minimum #12AWG for general use circuits where operating at a voltage of

greater than 30V (nominal). 4. Size, type, and material as called for under these Specifications or as noted on

the Drawings. 5. Install in raceways unless all of the following conditions are present:

a. Wiring is operated at a nominal voltage of 30V or less. b. Wiring is installed indoors in dry locations. c. Wiring is installed in non-air handling plenums. See (E.3) below.

D. Control wiring may be run without conduit in air-handling plenums (not duct work) when conditions (2.d.1) and (2.d.2) noted immediately above are met and when overall insulation jacket is a low smoke Teflon covered (or other similar type) recognized by NEC Article 725.

E. Label control wiring with wrap-around permanent numbered or lettered markers. Install markers on both control equipment terminals and terminal strip connection points.

2.4 WIRE PULLING LUBRICATION

A. Utilize for longer pulls, or where construction conditions indicated that the cable or conductor may be damaged during installation due to excessive friction.

B. General requirements: 1. UL listed, wax based. 2. Compatible with cable jacket. Do not use lubricant that will damage the

conductors insulation. 3. Capability of staying on conductor insulation when pulled through wet conduits. 4. Equal to 3M "WLX."

2.5 WIRE CONNECTORS

A. Must meet UL standards.

B. 600VAC insulation rating.

C. #8AWG and smaller dry location joints made with insulated compression spring "wire nuts." Other connection methods, such as Wago push-wire connectors, may also be used.

D. #8AWG and smaller wet location joints made with insulated silicon or epoxy filled waterproof compression spring "wire nuts."

E. Larger than #8AWG connections: 1. Do not use unless specifically noted on the Drawings or with Engineer's special

permission. Difficulty in installing the entire circuit as one run does not constitute permission to splice conductors.

2. Feeder taps (where permitted):

16123-3

2.6 FIRE SEALING

a. Use barriered connector blocks for conductor taps. b. Rated for up to 600V operation. c. Coordinate feeder and branch circuit taps sizes to select correct block

type.

A. See Section 16111 for fire sealing requirements and methods.

B. Fire sealing shall be provided for penetrations through walls, ceilings, and floors that are fire rated, regardless of whether the conductors are installed in raceways or are freewired.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL CONDUCTOR AND CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Pulling conductors into conduits and raceways: 1. Do not exceed the wire or cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tension

when installing wires or cables in raceways. 2. Do not pull wire into a conduit until all work which could cause damage is

complete. 3. Remove conductors pulled into the wrong raceway or cut too short to terminate

and do not reinstall them. Conductors shall not be inserted into a conduit where other conductors are already installed.

4. Provide adequate lubricant where necessary.

B. Joints and splices: 1. Service entrance and feeder conductors:

a. Install service entrance and feeder conductors their entire length as a continuous run without splicing.

b. Do not splice in pull boxes, even if pull boxes are indicated on the Drawings or required by the NEG, unless specifically so approved by the Engineer.

2. Branch circuit splices: a. Install only where accessible in junction boxes, pull boxes, equipment

enclosures, or similar locations. b. Materials used must meet UL standards. c. 600VAC insulation rating. d. Wire nut type joints and splices:

1) Dry location joints with conductors #8AWG and smaller: insulated compression spring "wire nuts."

2) Wet location joints with conductors #8AWG and smaller: insulated silicon filled waterproof compression spring "wire nuts."

3) Wet location conductor epoxy filled "wire nuts" shall be made with enough slack to allow enough lead length for a minimum of one removal and re-termination.

e. Tape any exposed conductors with multiple layers of insulating friction tape.

C. Properly tag and identify all branch circuit conductors as follows: 1. Use vinyl cloth wrap around for dry locations. 2. Use heat shrink type wrap for wet locations. 3. Indicate circuit number for wiring terminated in panelboards. 4. Indicate circuit number and panel designation for wiring terminated on application

device.

16123-4

D. Leave at least 6" conductor tails at each outlet for the installation of devices or fixtures.

3.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT NEUTRALS

A. All multi-wire branch circuits serving phase-to-neutral loads shall have a separate neutral provided for each energized pole. Neutrals shall not be shared.

B. Where a single piece of equipment is supplied by a multi-pole (two or three pole) circuit breaker, the circuit may have a single neutral.

3.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT SIZING

A. Minimum conductor size is #12AWG for all circuits operating at a nominal voltage of 120VAC or greater.

B. Requirements for increased conductor sizing: 1. Where conductor sizes to mechanical equipment, panelboards, or similar

equipment are upsized from their NEC minimums due to voltage drop considerations, the particular size indicated on the Drawings shall be maintained throughout from the circuit source to its load side connection.

2. Where branch circuit conductor sizes of general use receptacle circuits are upsized from #12AWG due to voltage drop considerations, the larger size shall be maintained from the circuit source to the last junction box in the circuit run provided the final receptacle connection is 20 feet or less in length from the last junction box.

3. Where branch circuit conductor sizes of lighting fixture circuits are upsized from #12AWG due to voltage drop considerations, the larger size shall be maintained from the circuit source to the last junction box in the circuit run, provided that: a. Where taps to interior lighting fixtures are made from interior above

ceiling junction boxes, the conductor size may be reduced to #12AWG if the taps are 1 0 feet or less in length.

b. Where interior lighting fixtures are field tandem wired or the body of fixtures is used as branch circuit raceways, the upsized conductor shall be maintained throughout the circuit.

c. Where taps in exterior lighting fixtures are made in pole bases and run inside the pole to the luminaire, the taps may be reduced to #12AWG provided this conductor size does not exceed 12 amps. For greater loads, upsize to #10AWG or larger, as required.

C. Lighting circuits: 1. All exit or emergency lighting circuits: Minimum #1 OAWG. 2. 120V interior lighting circuits over 120 feet in total length: Minimum #1 OAWG. 3. 277V interior lighting circuits over 225 feet in total length: Minimum #1 OAWG. 4. 208V or 277V exterior building lighting circuits: Minimum #12AWG or as sized on

the Drawings. 5. Total circuit length is defined as the total distance from the power source to the

last lighting fixture on the circuit.

D. Power and receptacle circuits: 1. 120V receptacle circuits over 150 feet in total length: Minimum #1 OAWG. 2. 208V power circuits sized as noted. 3. 277V and 480V power circuits sized as noted. 4. Total circuit length is defined as the total distance from the power source to the

last power connection to the circuit.

END OF SECTION

16123-5

SECTION 16130

BOXES

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. This section describes outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, floor boxes and mounting heights.

B. Extent of Work as required by the Drawings and these Specifications.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. NEMA Standards: 1. OS-1 Sheet metal outlet boxes, covers, and supports. 2. FB-1 Cast boxes and fittings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data for floor outlet boxes and trims or special boxes in accordance with Section 16050.

B. Submit manufacturer's data for standard outlet boxes if required by Section 16050.

PART 2- PRODUCTS


A. Recessed device boxes: 1. Steel City. 2. Raco. 3. Cooper/Crouse-Hinds. 4. Appleton.

B. Pull boxes and special junction boxes (larger than nominal 4" X 4"): 1. Hoffman. 2. Wiegmann. 3. Milbank. 4. Others as approved by the Engineer.

C. Floor outlet boxes: 1. Hubbell. 2. Walker. 3. Steel City.

D. Cast boxes and bodies: 1. Cooper/Crouse-Hinds. 2. Appleton.

E. Recessed device box supports: 1. Caddy. 2. Others as approved by the Engineer.

2.2 INTERIOR OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Standard interior outlet boxes for connection to concealed conduit raceways, or for exposed surface mounted conduit raceways in mechanical spaces, electrical rooms, and similar non-public areas:

16130-1

1. General requirements: a. Of proper size and shape for conduits and conductors entering them. b. ULand NEC listed for their application. c. Constructed of code gauge steel. d. Galvanized or plated. e. Complete with conduit knockouts (boxes 4" square and smaller).

2. A minimum of 1-1/2" deep unless the following conditions are met: a. Construction requires a smaller depth box. b. Engineer specifically approves the use of such shallow boxes. c. Depth is not reduced below 1-1/4".

3. Box construction: a. Formed (drawn) one piece, for single gang boxes. b. Formed (drawn) one piece or stamped and welded for double gang

boxes. c. Formed (drawn), stamped and welded, or sectional type for boxes

greater than 2 gang. d. Masonry type stamped and welded boxes (with continuous overlapping

device screw attachment trim) may be used where recessed in concrete or concrete block (CMU) wall construction.

4. Box size: a. 4" square for up to two devices and solid ganged boxes for over two

devices. b. Single gang "handy boxes" may be used for device boxes in limited areas

(such cabinet work) only with the Engineer's permission. Do not use bevel corner boxes.

c. 4-11 /16" square boxes for specific devices (such as fire alarm equipment) where required. Consult with manufacturer to determine use and location of special boxes.

5. Where boxes are installed in steel stud walls, provide support brackets to prevent movement of the box within the wall. Utilize box supports as follows: a. If box is installed between studs, provide Caddy RBS or H series of

brackets. b. If box is installed adjacent to a stud, provide Caddy FMBS (floor support)

or TEB (side support) brackets. 6. Include steel partitions between box sections where required by operating voltage

between switches greater than 300V.

B. Standard interior outlet boxes for connection to surface mounted two piece raceway systems: 1. Stamped enamel painted steel. 2. Of proper size and shape for surface raceways and conductors entering them. 3. ULand NEC listed for their application. 4. A minimum of 1-1/2" deep unless a shallower device box is approved. 5. Single gang unless used for two devices.

C. Interior junction boxes mounted above the ceiling line for connection and distribution of branch circuit wiring to receptacles, lighting fixtures, and small motor loads shall be of the same type as standard 4" square outlet boxes except that they shall have flat steel covers.

2.3 INTERIOR POWER AND COMMUNICATION BOXES

A. As an alternate, interior communication boxes with integral receptacle where television, video monitor, or similar services may be integrate into one box, as an alternate to standard separate boxes. Usage of this multi-purpose type of box shall be subject to Engineer's approval.

16130-2

B. Requirements: 1. Two gang. 2. Integral white faceplate and recessed steel junction box with knockouts. 3. Recessed 15A 125V duplex receptacle and adjacent coax connector and RJ-45

data jack. 4. Equal to P&S TV2MW.

2.4 CAST BOXES

A. Where specified on the Drawings or required for surface mounted exterior or wet interior locations, provide cast outlet boxes.

B. Cast outlet box standards: 1. Threaded hub type with drilled mounting lugs. 2. Constructed of ferrous (malleable iron) alloy. 3. Equal to Crouse-Hinds "Condulet" or Appleton "Unilet" type. Wiring device outlet

boxes equal to type FD. 4. Provide with plugs for all unused openings, gaskets, and covers compatible with

the function of the box. 5. Where required to be coated for corrosion resistance, provide as follows:

a. Permanently fused to galvanized surface. Coatings that require the galvanized surface to be compromised prior to application of the coating are not acceptable.

b. Smooth and continuous. c. Comply with NEMA RN1 and applicable ASTM standards for immersion

in boiling water and application of humidity and acetone. d. Exterior coating:

1) Field strippable. 2) Nominal 40 mil thickness of polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 3) Applied after the surface has been primed to receive the coating.

e. Interior coating: 1) Permanently coated. 2) Nominal 2 mil thickness of polyurethane. 3) Resistant to abrasion from pulling of conductors through conduit.

2.5 INTERIOR FLOOR BOXES

A. Provide where indicated on the Drawings.

B. General requirements: 1. Cast iron, Class 1 watertight, concrete tight, for installation at grade level in

concrete floors. 2. Concrete tight steel with corrosion resistant finish for installation in floors above

grade level. 3. Stamped steel for installation above grade level and in raised wood floors. 4. Fully adjustable both before and after the concrete pour. 5. Floor boxes shall be sealed to avoid the entry of scrub water through the box

cover or flange per UL514A after June, 2003.

C. Rectangular shape, with compartments as noted, where the box has more than one device or outlet.

D. Trims: 1.

2.

3.

Complete with metal floor covering flange and cover compatible with floor surface. Do not use plastic trim. Provide any trim gaskets, leveling screws, or other miscellaneous hardware necessary to complete the floor box. Provide brushed aluminum finish unless noted otherwise.

16130-3

4. Provide inserts or brackets under cover to hold and secure devices used. 5. Covers (unless noted otherwise on the Drawings):

a. Duplex receptacles: Individual flush duplex flap type with turn-lock screws to secure flaps.

b. GFCI receptacles: Single GFCI flap cover. c. Unused sections: Double concentric round combination 2-1/8" x 1 ". d. Data and telephone: Single cover with dual slide openings and jacks

mounted below cover surface. e. Specialty jacks, inserts, or connectors: Single GFCI flap cover with

appropriate inserts.

2.6 HANGERS AND FITTINGS

A. All fittings, hangers, fastenings, supports, etc., attached to boxes shall be of sufficient strength to readily support the equipment attached to them.

B. All inserts installed into poured concretes floors shall be epoxy-filled type equal to Hilti. Inserts installed in the sides of concrete or block walls may be standard expansion type unless block wall cells are unfilled.

C. Support and protection equipment for standard materials (provide as specified or approved equal): 1. Protection plates for conduit or cables installed in steel or wood studs: Caddy

304B2. 2. Conduit attachments or support clips: Caddy "M," "P," or "CO" series. 3. Conduit clips for support wires: Caddy "K" or "PCS" series. 4. Conduit attachments to strut: Caddy "SCH" series. 5. Conduit attachments to beam clamps: Caddy "BS" series. 6. Box mounting brackets: Caddy "H" series. 7. Multiple box mounting brackets: Caddy "RBS" series.

2.7 PULL BOXES AND LARGE JUNCTION BOXES

A. Install: 1. 2. 3.

Where noted on the Drawings. Where the total number of bends exceeds 360 degrees. At other locations required by the NEC.

B. Use boxes constructed of code gauge steel with standard size knockouts or suitable for field drilling.

C. Provide junction or pull boxes required by the Drawings or by codes larger than the standard 4" square where required.

PART 3 ·EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION LOCATIONS

A. Refer to the Drawings for the general location of boxes and outlets.

B. Switch boxes near doors: 1. Install close to trim when located by doors. 2. Place wall switch outlets at door locations on the lock side of the door. If no

usable wall space adjacent to the lock side jamb is available, place switch outlets on the wall against which the door swings and in a location accessible after the door is fully opened.

C. Boxes required by code due to conduit bends are generally not indicated on the Drawings.

16130-4

D. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the details of all rooms, spaces, and construction requirements so that the installation of outlets and other electrical equipment shall not interfere with work of other trades or render the outlets or equipment inaccessible for maintenance or repair.

E. Any outlet, box, or related item may be relocated within 10 feet of its indicated location without additional cost to others.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Close unused openings with knock-out closures.

B. Properly support to prevent movement.

C. Reduced in size if necessary when indicated to be installed in window mullions or other areas requiring narrower or smaller boxes. Substitutions require the Engineer's approval.

3.3 WALL OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Offset to reduce sound transmission between rooms.

B. Outlet boxes in smoke control walls (such as egress corridor walls) shall be offset at least 24" from each other where mounted on opposite side of the wall. If smoke control wall outlet boxes are not placed at least 24" apart, then the rear of the box shall be covered with a fire rated pad (such as "Metacaulk Box Guard") which will expand and seal off the box in the event of a fire, or must be completely covered with a fire rated putty along the top, bottom, and sides of the box.

C. If new switches, receptacles, or similar devices are installed in existing outlet boxes, the following shall be provided: 1. Existing outlet boxes must be of sufficient size to accommodate new devices. 2. Existing outlet boxes must be of correct heights to conform with ADA and similar

code heights. See subsequent information for correct mounting heights. Existing boxes that do not meet the new mounting height requirements shall not be reused for new devices or shall be moved to the new correct mounting heights.

3.4 RECESSED BOXES

A. Install so that device and/or coverplates shall be tight and plumb with wall finish.

B. Box supports are required of all interior switch and receptacle boxes unless excluded by the Engineer.

C. Install with device box supports equal to Caddy "H" series "Quick-mount" for interior use.

D. Boxes recessed in masonry walls may use the mortar fill or block sides to support the boxes, provided the fill or sides are in close contact with the boxes and permanently prevent movement.

E. Ganging boxes: 1. Gang where possible. 2. Where interior multiple receptacle, switch, or communication outlets are indicated

on the Drawings, boxes to be closely grouped, use Caddy "SGB" series of box brackets.

3. Do not widely space outlets indicated on the Drawings to be grouped.

F. Covers and rings: 1. Cover with 1/2" raised galvanized device covers for exposed conduit work. 2. Furnish with raised galvanized plaster rings for concealed conduit work. 3. Provide single gang rings for single device mounts even if box is double gang.

16130-5

3.5 CEILING BOXES

A. Install so that device and/or coverplates shall be tight and plumb with ceiling line or tight to exposed structural mounting.

B. Furnish with raised galvanized plaster rings for concealed box installation in plaster, wood, or gypboard ceilings.

C. Furnish 4" square or octagonal 4" nominal sized boxes for connecting to standard fixtures.

D. Structurally support boxes used for hanging lighting fixtures or other items in accordance with the Drawings and NEC Articles 410.

3.6 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Mounting heights of outlets: The height of each outlet shall be in accordance with the Specifications and as directed by Architect for special decor or other architectural features. Heights are given above finished floor to the center of the outlet box unless noted otherwise.

B. Standard Mounting Heights (See (C) below for additional mounting details): 1. Wall switches 46"-48" 2. Wall occupancy sensors 46"-48" 3. Receptacles--General use 18" 4. Receptacles--Storage 24" 5. Receptacles--Cabinet work Above splash 6. Receptacles-Sinks Above lip of sink 7. Desk Telephone/Data 18" 8. Disconnect Switches 48"-60" 9. Fire Alarm Horn/Strobes Minimum of 80" to bottom of lens; maximum

of 92" to the top of the lens 10. Fire Alarm Pull Stations 46"-48" to centerline

C. Locate outlet boxes at different heights from those noted above as follows: 1. Switch boxes in close proximity to each other shall be set at the same height to

satisfy the most restrictive condition so at to avoid a staggered appearance. 2. Minimum height of receptacles and communication outlets is 15". This minimum

height is for the lowest operable part of the receptacle, and reflects the final height after all floor finishes (such as carpet) have been installed. For vertically mounted duplex wall outlets, this places the center of the box at no less than 16.5" AFF assuming vinyl tile (carpet or thicker floor covering will increase this height). For horizontally mounted duplex receptacles, this places the center of the box at no less than 15.5" AFF, again assuming vinyl tile (carpet or thicker floor covering will increase this height).

3.7 FLOOR BOXES

A. Field verify the exact location of all floor outlet boxes with the Architect or Owner before concrete pours.

B. Support all boxes adequately during concrete pours to prevent displacement.

C. Trims shall be flush with floor covering and not installed on top of floor covering.

END OF SECTION

16130-6

PART 1 -GENERAL


SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES

A. This section describes wiring devices for this project.

B. Provide as shown on the Drawings and described in these Specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with Section 16050 demonstrating compliance with this Specification for the following characteristics or each type or class of device: 1. Catalog number. 2. Ampere rating. 3. Voltage rating. 4. NEMA configuration. 5. Blade type. 6. Color. 7. Other significant information.

B. Submit manufacturer's cut sheets for device plates indicating: 1. Plate material, grade or alloy, and surface texture. 2. Plate color (where applicable). 3. Plate opening configuration.

PART 2 ·PRODUCTS


A. Hubbell.

B. Leviton.

C. Pass & Seymour (P&S).

D. Cooper (Arrow Hart).


A. Supply wiring devices of the quality established by the listed equipment catalog numbers.

B. Minimum standards for all devices rated up to 20A: 1. Back or side-wired Specification grade. Push-in wiring terminal are not

acceptable. 2. Plated, rust-resistant mounting straps. 3. Large head brass screws for attaching conductors of up to #1 OAWG. 4. Captive mounting strap screws.

2.3 RECEPTACLES

A. General requirements: 1. Grounding type. 2. Double-wipe or triple-wipe plug attachment contacts.

B. General convenience receptacles (20A or less): 1. Duplex type.

16140-1

2. Provide with self-grounding clip on mounting strap. 3. Flat face flush with plate. 4. Nylon face.

C. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFI or GFCI) receptacles: 1. Listing requirements:

a. UL 943 Surge Requirements for a UL 3KA/6KV voltage surge test at 100 times.

b. UL listed as a Class A ground fault protective device that trips at a ground fault current level of 6 milliamps or more.

c. Meet additional 2006 UL requirements for ground fault receptacles. 2. Have "test" and "reset" push buttons on the face of the receptacle. 3. Rectangular face. 4. Meet the requirements of UL 943, including:

a. Prevent functioning if miswired (reversed line/load). b. Increased corrosion and moisture resistance. c. Overvoltage and surge test. d. Improved radio frequency immunity.

D. Devices greater than 20A: 1. Simplex type. 2. Grounding type unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES:

A. General requirements: 1. Quiet type. 2. Rated for use at 120-277VAC. 3. Rated for 20A unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 4. Silver alloy contacts. 5. Plated (not galvanized) mounting strip with self-grounding clip mounted at screw

end of strap. 6. Permanently lubricated spring and pivot points.

B. See Section 16510 for requirements for dimmer switches.

2.5 DEVICE COLORS

A. White finish is the standard color for all switches and receptacles unless noted.

B. Install brown or black finish devices on dark colored surfaces or where receptacles are of higher amperage rating than 20A.

C. Coordinate with the Architect where special surfaces are encountered.

2.6 SCHEDULE OF DEVICES

A. Schedule of Standard Devices includes device numbers for Hubbell for the purpose of setting a quality standard.

B. Cross-reference: Hubbell 5352 series of receptacles are considered equivalent to other manufacturer's 5362 series. Hubbell 1200 series of switches are considered equivalent to other manufacturer's 1200 series.

C. Schedule of Standard Devices: SPST Wall Switch, 20A: DPST Wall Switch, 20A: 3-Way Wall Switch, 20A: 4-Way Wall Switch, 20A: Simplex Receptacle: Duplex Receptacle, 20A:

16140-2

#HBL 1221 #HBL 1222 #HBL1223 #HBL 1224 Type as noted #5352

2.7

Duplex Receptacle, EWC, 20A: Duplex Receptacle, GFI, 20A:

COVERPLATES

#5352 #GF5352A

A. Provide all device plates as standard size. Large sizes may be provided to conceal installation irregularities only where specifically approved by the Architect or Engineer.

B. Wet or damp location installations shall conform to NEC Article 406.8 with the following provisions: 1. Damp locations:

a. Double "flap" covers (one flap per receptacle plug-in position) that are weatherproof in the closed or sealed position for non-GFCI receptacles.

b. Single "flap" covers that are weatherproof in the closed or sealed position for GFCI receptacles.

c. Installed only in protected locations not subject to direct contact with water.

2. Exterior and all interior wet locations: a. Provide GFCI receptacles in these locations. b. Single covers that are weatherproof when cord plugs are installed in the

receptacle. c. Provide covers with gaskets or grooves that prevent the entry of moisture

between the cover and the device. d. Covers shall be manufactured by Leviton, Taymac, or approved equal.

C. Interior locations: 1. #430 alloy .030" minimum thickness smooth or brushed stainless steel plates for

use in standard mechanical rooms, machine rooms, storage areas, and similar locations.

2. Nylon or high impact hospital grade plastic plates (standard plastic or phenolic plates are not acceptable) for other areas.

D. Coverplates in special areas will require being coordinated as to color of exposed parts and coverplates. Coordinate with the Architect prior to installation of these types of plates.


3.1 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION

A. General device installation requirements: 1. All devices and plates plumb and parallel to adjacent surfaces or trim. 2. Mount switches with the long dimension of the device vertical. 3. Mount general convenience receptacles with the long dimension vertical with the

ground pin on the bottom. 4. Where receptacles are installed over counter splashes or in exterior locations,

install horizontally. 5. Device face must be flush with the finished trim coverplates and plates must be

tight to surfaces over which they are installed.

B. Receptacles: 1. Generally install by a pigtail connection to the branch circuit, where the branch

circuit is fed-through the outlet box. 2. Where the receptacle is the last outlet on the branch circuit, connect the branch

circuit conductors directly to the last receptacle. 3. GFCI receptacles:

16140-3

a. Install where noted on the Drawings or where required by Code, all exterior locations, including wall and roof receptacles, within 6 feet of sinks, in elevator pits and elevator machine rooms.

b. GFCI receptacles shall be pigtailed to branch circuit conductors and not be installed in "feed-through" applications unless specifically noted otherwise.

c. Unless the branch circuit is protected by a GFCI circuit breaker in the panel board feeding the branch circuit, provide GFCI receptacles at the following locations, whether specifically indicated on the Drawings or not.

C. Switches:

D.

1. Connect switches to the proper circuits and lighting fixtures as indicated on the Drawings. Consult the Engineer for interpretations of fixture switching if required.

2. Where more than one switch occurs in one outlet box and causes 300V or more to exist between devices (typical for two or more snap switches on separate branch circuits in a 480Y/277V system), a barrier must be provided for isolation to meet NEC 404.8(8) requirements.

3. Snap (toggle) switches may be used for disconnect of smaller single phase motor and equipment loads rated 277V and below where switches are rated for motor use. Refer to Section 16440 for details.

Plates: 1. 2.

3.

Use single piece plates for all ganged device locations. Where coverplates do not completely conceal the rough openings for the devices, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to patch, paint, etc., around the opening to the satisfaction of the A/E. Refer to Section 16050 for labeling.

END OF SECTION

16140-4

SECTION 16170

MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS

PART 1 · GENERAL


A. Extent of Work as shown on the Drawings and indicated in these Specifications.

B. Furnish and install the following disconnects: 1. Enclosed circuit breakers and molded case switches required for external

disconnection of motors or other loads. 2. Fusible or non-fusible enclosed safety switches required for external

disconnection of motors or other loads.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with the Drawings and

these Specifications in accordance with Section 16050. 2. Include as a minimum the following data:

a. Designation of motor(s) or load(s) for which disconnect is intended. b. Horsepower and current rating. c. Voltage and Phase. d. Construction (heavy duty or general duty). e. Enclosure type. f. Fuse, molded case switch, or circuit breaker size. g. Dimensions.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall provide all coordination with any trade for whom the Contractor is furnishing a disconnect.

PART 2 • PRODUCTS


A. Disconnects: 1. Square D Co. (to match existing equipment in facility).

2.2 MATERIALS

A. House switches in proper NEMA enclosures. Provide enclosures as follows if not noted otherwise on the Drawings: 1. NEMA 1 for dry interior locations. 2. NEMA 3R for wet or damp interior or exterior locations.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the voltage of the switch depending on the load controlled.

C. Safety switch requirements: 1. Horsepower rated for use as a motor disconnect. 2. Capable of interrupting the locked rotor current of the load served. 3. Dead-front construction. 4. Steel exterior disconnect handles that are not a part of the cover. Curved wire or

rod type handles are not acceptable. 5. Quick-make, quick-break over-center toggle action to preclude contact teasing.

16170-1

6. Individual open switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open.

7. All current carrying parts plated by electrolytic process. 8. General duty where:

a. Rated for a nominal voltage of 240VAC or less. b. Rated 400A or less.

9. Heavy duty with blade arc suppressor where: a. Rated for a nominal voltage above 240VAC. b. Rated above 400A. c. Required to be furnished to accommodate Class R fuse rejection clips

(see below). d. Noted on the Drawings.

10. Provide Class R fuse rejection clips if the switch is designated as fusible type and is rated 600A and below.

D. Circuit breaker and molded case switch (MCS) requirements: 1. Rated 240VAC or 480VAC as required by the system served. 2. Multi-pole, common trip, trip-free, quick-make, quick-break, with over-center

toggle mechanism and common operating handle. 3. Unit mounted with line and load side lugs. 4. Mounting enclosure that:

a. Completely encloses the switch. b. Has a hinged swing-up front cover with cover stops. c. Has a removable dead-front interior steel panel, accessible only with the

front cover open, to prevent exposure to the wiring and line and load side terminals.

d. Has a front cover with lockable provisions where noted or required. 5. Provide thermal-magnetic trip elements for circuit breaker construction. 6. Delete thermal portion of trip for molded case switch (MCS) construction. 7. Provide short circuit protection for the switch itself by instantaneous operation

under high levels of current.

E. Snap (toggle) switch requirements: 1. Snap (toggle) switch requirements:

PART 3 ·EXECUTION

a. Single phase 115V or 277V fractional horsepower motors, variable air volume fan-powered boxes, electric duct heaters, and related items that do not require an external (Contractor furnished) starter may use a general use 120-277V rated snap switch or manual motor starter (as indicated) for the disconnect means where local code allows and the Drawings specifically indicate.

b. Minimum snap switch ampacity as follows: 1) Rated for motor use. 2) Rated minimum of 15A. 3) Rated minimum of 20A for full load currents of 1 OA to 15A. 4) Provide enclosed safety switch or MCS for loads greater than

15A. c. Refer to Section 16140 for snap switch specifications.

3.1 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION:

A. Furnish and install motor, circuit, and equipment disconnects required for all electrically operated equipment unless said disconnects are furnished under another Division of the Specifications or are furnished as an integral part of the equipment.

16170-2

B. Mount disconnect switches, circuit breakers, molded case switches, and related items adjacent to the equipment controlled unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

C. Provide proper structural support for the disconnecting equipment. Support may include Unistrut type channels, brackets, steel angles, factory-made support shelves, proper anchoring to concrete, steel, or masonry walls, or other support suitable to the Architect and Engineer.

END OF SECTION

16170-3

SECTION 16440

ELECTRICAL COORDINATION, SHORT-CIRCUIT

AND ARC-FLASH STUDY

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Provide a computer-generated electrical coordination, short-circuit, and arc-flash study for the project.

B. Include all equipment arc-flash labels.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. IEEE 1584.

B. IEEE Color Book series, where applicable.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings proving conformance to these Specifications and the Project Drawings in accordance with Section 16050.

B. Include specific information called out under each and every item of equipment.

PART 2- PRODUCTS


A. Prior to the energization of the new electrical system, provide a computer-generated numerical and graphical coordination, short circuit, and arc-flash study.

B. Study shall show all pertinent electrical conditions and short circuit levels as well as recommended settings of all breaker adjustments.

C. The study, as a minimum, shall include the following data. See the one-line short-circuit diagram in the Drawings for all items to be included.

D. Provide short-circuit levels for the following locations: 1. Utility primary side. 2. Utility transformer, including KVA, voltages, and impedance. 3. Utility service lateral cable. 4. Meter/CT cabinet. 5. Outdoor existing main switchboards. 6. Indoor existing switchboards. 7. Existing automatic transfer switch and generator. 8. Distribution panelboards. 9. New and existing panelboards detailed on the one-line diagram. ·10. Dry-type transformers.

E. Tabular data including short circuit levels at each tap or connection point with the actual short circuit and withstand ratings of the equipment.

F. Note circuit breaker types and trip setting recommendations and associated graphical curves.

G. Include short circuit withstand ratings of all equipment including comparison with calculated levels.

16440-1

H. Provide new arc-flash labels for the following locations, in accordance with IEEE 1584. The existing main outdoor switchboard and the indoor switchboards presently have labels. 1. Indoor existing switchboards. 2. Existing automatic transfer switch and generator. 3. Distribution panelboards. 4. New and existing panelboards detailed on the one-line diagram. 5. Dry-type transformers.


3.1 STUDY SUBMITTAL

A. Provide the submittal in sufficient time to be evaluated and corrected by the Engineer.

B. At the request of the study provider, the Engineer will review a preview copy of the submittal if desired, and make all correction and recommendations prior to the printing of all final corrected copies.

C. Provide three copies of the corrected study to the Engineer.

3.2 SITE APPLICATION

A. Adjust electronic trip or magnetic trip circuit breakers as directed.

B. Install arc-flash labels on all associated pieces of electrical equipment.

END OF SECTION

16440-2

PART 1 ·GENERAL


SECTION 16442

PANELBOARDS


1.2 STANDARDS

A. NEMA Standards: 1. AB-1 Molded case circuit breakers and switches. 2. PB-1 Panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with this Specification and the Drawings in accordance with Section 16050. Information on each panel shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Voltage, phase, and number of wires. 2. Schedule or description of each panel indicating number, trip (or size), number of

poles, and type of circuit protective devices. 3. Protective device terminal ratings. 4. Integrated interrupting capacity of the panel. 5. Bus material and bus bar or main lug ampacity. 6. Ground bars. 7. RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting rating. 8. Enclosure mounting and details of construction. 9. Identification plates if supplied by manufacturer. 10. All dimensions.

PART 2- PRODUCTS


A. Square D Co. (to match existing equipment in facility).

2.2 PRODUCT STANDARDS

A. Lighting and appliance panelboards: 1. 208Y/120V circuit breaker panelboards:

a. Up to 400A mains ratings, use SquareD type NO (provided that the specified frame size of breaker can be accommodated).

b. Above 400A mains ratings, use Square D 1-Line, or where noted. 2. 480Y/277V lighting panelboards:

a. Circuit breaker type up to 225A mains ratings, use Square D type NF, or 1-Line where noted.

b. Over 225A mains ratings, use Square D 1-Line.

B. Power and distribution panelboards: 1. Circuit breaker type equal to Square D 1-Line.

C. Panels manufactured with "load center" type construction are not acceptable.

2.3 PANELBOARD CONSTRUCTION

A. General requirements:

16442-1

1. Dead front construction enclosing the bus assembly. 2. Contain NEC sized wire gutters. 3. Circuits numbered with odd numbers down the left hand side and even numbers

down the right hand side. 4. Rated for the proper voltage and ampacity as noted on the Drawings.

B. Enclosures: 1. Code gauge steel. 2. Exposed covers and trim finished in ANSI #49 baked gray enamel. 3. No smaller than 20" in width unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 4. No larger than the space for which they were designed to fit. Where panelboards

exceed the size of the specified equipment, the Contractor shall verify that adequate mounting space is available before purchasing the panelboards.

C. Bussing: 1. Distributed phase or phase sequence type with adjacent poles connected on

different phases. 2. The size and ratings called for on the Drawings. 3. Copper only with copper connections to the breakers. 4. Main lugs provided as copper or plated aluminum screw compression type. 5. Full length complete with all breakers, and spare mounting space noted on the

Drawings.

D. Interiors:

E.

1. Furnish with copper ground bar(s). 2. Screw compression attachment of wiring to the neutral or ground buses. 3. Provide full size insulated solid neutral.

Covers: 1. 2.

Surface mounted covers as indicated on the Drawings. Circuit breaker panelboard covers: a. Provide door-in-door type of construction for all lighting and appliance

circuit breaker panelboards. b. Provide door-in-door type of construction for power and distribution circuit

breaker panelboards where noted on the Drawings. c. No exposed hinges or screws. d. No ventilation openings for lighting panelboards. e. Door requirements:

1) Equipped with a minimum of two concealed hinges. 2) Equipped with a spring return latch and key lock with all locks

keyed alike. 3) Metal framed directory on inside of door with a heavy clear

plastic cover and paper directory card matching the number of panelboard circuits.

F. Feeder circuit breaker frames rated less than 400A: 1. Rated 480VAC or 240VAC, as required. 2. Ampere trip rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3. 3 pole, molded case type construction. 4. Group mounted. 5. A minimum of 80% rated. 6. Quick-make, quick-break, common trip, trip-free, and handle position trip

indicating. 7. A short circuit interrupting equal to or exceeding that indicated on the Drawings. 8. Trip unit as follows:

a. Thermal magnetic type. b. Fixed thermal trip rating.

16442-2

c. Adjustable magnetic (instantaneous) trip where frame size is above 100A.

d. Provide "mission-critical" style breakers, with delayed instantaneous trip function, where noted on the Drawings.

e. See the Drawings for frame and ampacity sizes required.

G. Branch circuit breakers: 1. Trip-free, quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, common trip, and

trip-indicating. 2. Operate instantaneously at more than 10 times the breaker handle rating. 3. Connect to the bus by bolt-on connections. 4. Individually rated for at least the minimum panelboard interrupting capacity (AIC)

rating without series ratings. Minimum breaker AIC ratings as follows: a. 10,000 amps at 240VAC and 120/240VAC. b. 14,000 amps at 277/480 and 480VAC. c. Internal fuses installed inside circuit breakers to meet the required

interrupting rating are not allowed. 5. Terminals rated for at least 75 degrees C. 6. Main breakers:

a. Separately mount main breakers above 1 OOA frame size (do not group mount) to physically indicate their separation from the feeder/distribution breakers in the panelboard.

b. Backfed group mounted main breakers (rated 1 OOA and below) must be provided with bolt-on connection to the bus or frame retainer clip to comply with NEC 408.36(D).

7. Special ratings: a. Twenty amp single pole breakers used for switching duty shall be labeled

"SWD." b. Breakers used for switching high intensity discharge or LED lighting shall

be labeled "HID." c. Breakers serving dwelling bath receptacles not individually GFCI rates

shall be fed with ground fault circuit interrupter type breakers labeled "GFCI."

H. Markings and labels: 1. Engraved exterior labels:

a. Provide a black-and-white engraved nameplate indicating the project designation of each panelboard.

b. Mount on the exterior door cover. c. Label may be factory or field provided.

2. Interior labels: a. Provide a permanent nameplate installed on the interior dead-front metal

panel that covers the circuit breakers. b. Labels may be adhesive paper or stamped metal bradded to interior

breaker cover. c. Labels must state, as a minimum, a description of the particular panel

characteristics including manufacturer, series, voltage, ampacity, phase, no. of wires, and similar pertinent data.

d. If factory labels do not state this information, provide an engraved label on the front of the panel to supplement the factory label information.

3. Lighting and appliance circuit breaker panel directories: a. Install in a clear plastic sheath mounted to the inside of the panel door. b. Directory shall be typewritten on a paper label that includes the following

information for each load: 1) Circuit number.

16442-3

2) Load served. 3) Location, if appropriate. 4) Do not use temporary architectural room numbers for directory

unless approved by the Engineer. Instead, utilize permanent locations or permanent room identifiers.

4. Circuit numbers:

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

a. Lighting and appliance panelboards: 1) Provide permanent markings of the circuit number of the

panel board. 2) Markings may be engraved, adhesive type, embossed in the

breaker cover, or inserted into slots in the breaker cover. 3) Locate circuit numbers adjacent to the circuit breaker on the

breaker cover. 4) Stick-on numbers attached to the circuit breaker itself are not

acceptable. b. Power panelboards:

1) Provide engraved labels adjacent to the circuit breaker. 2) Labels shall indicate load served. 3) Circuit number designations may be combined with the breaker

engraved label if desired.

A. Prior to setting panels, coordinate with all other trades having work in the area. Verify that conduits have adequate space to leave and enter the panel and that clearance is adequate to meet applicable codes.

B. Install panels plumb and level with the highest device handle not more than 6'-0" above finished floor.

C. Securely fasten panels to the mounting surface or structural members of the wall. Provide additional supports as required for a secure installation.

D. Install wiring inside panels with neat rounded corners.

E. Provide a means of keeping unauthorized personnel from being exposed to live panels during construction when panel fronts have not been installed.

F. Panelboard loads are generally circuited to provide balanced loading for connected loads. Connect to specified circuit locations unless the Engineer directs that the loads be re

circuited to allow for revised loading or balancing.

G. Provide flash protection warning label to comply with NEC 110.16. Label may be factory or field provided. Provide additional field-applied labels indicating the actual arc-flash values present (see Section 16440 for details).

H. Install all panel designation labels, directories, and nameplates.

END OF SECTION

16442-4

SECTION 16461

DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 ·GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section describes the work required to furnish and install all dry type transformers required on this project.

B. Provide as shown on the Drawings and described in these Specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with Section 16050.

B. Include details on: 1. Voltage ratings of primary and secondary. 2. Winding connections. 3. Representative impedance. 4. Temperature rise above ambient. 5. Primary taps. 6. Sound levels. 7. Winding materials. 8. Enclosure NEMA type. 9. All dimensions. 10. Any special features such as shields or K factor ratings.

PART 2 ·PRODUCTS


A. Transformers: 1. Square D Co. (to match existing equipment in facility).

B. Vibration isolators: 1. Vibration Mountings & Controls (VM&C). 2. Vibration Isolation. 3. Others as approved by the Engineer.

2.2 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. Core construction: 1. Construct of high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic

permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. 2. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the core steel saturation

point. 3. Clamp core laminations together with structural steel angles. 4. Visibly ground the core of the transformer to the enclosure by means of a

flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI standards.

B. Coil construction: 1. Use 2 windings per phase. 2. Continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with

nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. 3. Winding BIL level shall meet or exceed minimum NEMA standards.

16461-1

4. Provide a minimum of four 2-1/2% full capacity primary taps per phase for transformers rated 15KVA and above.

C. Winding temperature rise requirements: 1. All insulating materials, regardless of specified temperature rise, must meet

NEMA ST20 standards for a 220 deg. C UL component recognized insulation system.

2. 115 deg. Crise transformers shall be capable of carrying a 15% continuous overload without exceeding a 150 deg. Crise in a 40 deg. C ambient.

3. 150 deg. C rise transformers shall be capable of carrying their continuous rated load without exceeding a 150 deg. Crise in a 40 deg. C ambient.

4. Standard temperature rise requirements: a. 15KVA and above: 150 deg. C. temperature rise. b. If so noted on the Drawings, provide 115 deg. C. temperature rise

transformers 15KVA and above.

D. Winding connections: 1. Connect three phase transformers 480VAC 3 wire delta primary and

208Y/120VAC 4 wire wye secondary. 2. Primary winding taps:

a. Provide a minimum of two 2-1/2% fully rated taps above rated voltage and a minimum of two 2-1/2% fully rated taps below rated voltage for all transformers rated 15KVA and greater.

b. Connect to the center (nominal primary voltage) tap unless directed otherwise.

E. Enclosures: 1. Bolt the completed core and coil to the base of the enclosure via rubber

vibration-absorbing mounts. No metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure is permitted.

2. Enclosure types: a. Heavy gauge, sheet steel, ventilated NEMA 2 for 15KVA and larger. b. Design ventilating openings to prevent accidental access to live parts

in accordance with UL, NEMA, and National Electrical Code standards for ventilated enclosures.

3. Floor mount. 4. Degrease, clean, phosphatize, prime, and paint the entire enclosure with a

grey, baked enamel. 5. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 3

deg. Crise above a 40 deg. C ambient.

F. Sound levels: 1. For environments such as mechanical rooms, basement equipment rooms,

storage rooms not adjacent to occupied spaces, and transformers installed above lay-in acoustical ceiling tiles manufacturer shall guarantee that dry-type transformer(s) shall not exceed the following sound levels: a. 45dBA for transformers 15-50 KV A. b. 50dBA for transformers 51-150KVA.

2. For environments such as office areas, storage rooms adjacent to occupied spaces, hospitals, schools, and similar locations, manufacturer shall guarantee that dry-type transformer(s) shall exceed the following sound levels: a. 42dBA for transformers 15-50 KVA. b. 47dBA for transformers 51-150KVA.

G. Non-linear load (K-factor) transformers: 1. Provide where noted on the Drawings.

16461-2

2. Features: a. Rated 480-208Y/120V three phase, dry type, 60Hz fundamental. b. Conform to UL 1561 for a "K" rating of 13 or greater. c. Supply rated 60Hz current with a maximum of 150% nonlinear load

when loaded to 100% of fundamental current. d. Neutral construction capable of carrying 200% of fundamental rated

phase current. e. Electrostatic grounded aluminum shield between primary and

secondary windings. f. Maximum hot spot temperature of 220 deg. C. g. Taps, terminations, and enclosure per standard construction. h. Maximum sound levels not to exceed 5 dBA above those of standard

non K-factor transformers.

2.3 PRIMARY DISCONNECT

A. Where the transformer is located in a different room other than where the feeder originates, and the feeder disconnect is not visible, a primary disconnect switch at the transformer location is required.

B. See Section 16170 for additional requirements for disconnects.

2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Provide vibration isolators for any dry-type transformers set on existing concrete floors, other than for high-noise locations such as mechanical rooms.

B. Isolators shall be field provided and in addition to any internal vibration or sound isolation provided by the manufacturer.

C. Provide a minimum of 4 isolators per transformer, normally located near the transformer corners.

D. Isolators shall be rated by their manufacturer to support their portion of the total transformer weight plus a minimum 25% safety factor for uneven loading.

E. If the transformer case flange is unable to support an isolator point load without deflection, install an additional structural angle down this flange to add rigidity to the flange.

F. Types required: 1. In direct contact with the first floor slab or where suspended from structure:

Molded neoprene conical type equal to VM&C R or RD series.


3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Assure NEC clearance on all sides for adequate ventilation.

B. Install primary (if required) disconnect and secondary overcurrent protection equipment.

3.2 CONDUIT CONNECTIONS

A. Conduits must enter sides or bottom of enclosure. Do not install conduit into top of transformer enclosure.

B. Use a minimum of 18" of liquid-tight flexible conduit for both primary and secondary side connections where conduits enter sides of transformer.

16461-3

C. Conduits entering bottom of enclosure: 1. Utilize only for floor mounted transformers. 2. Stub above the floor or pad level and provided with an insulating bushing.

Conduit stub-up shall be high enough off floor or pad to prevent direct exposure of conductors from front or side of enclosure.

3. Provide a grounding bushing with grounding jumper from bushing to transformer case. Size jumper the same as the enclosed feeder grounding conductor.

D. Check that primary coil taps are correct as follows: 1. Measure the no-load voltage at the transformer secondary terminals with

the transformer energized, the building HVAC and other major equipment operating, but no load on the equipment. The no-load voltage should be at least 120V for a nominal 208Y/120V secondary transformer.

2. Connect system load to the transformer. Load shall ideally be at least 35% of the nameplate rating of the transformer. Measure transformer secondary voltage.

3. If the voltage is below 117V, turn off the transformer and decrease the primary side taps at lease one 2.5% tap. Measure the output voltage under load again and adjust if necessary.

4. Consult the Engineer with any additional questions about and adjust if necessary.

3.3 MOUNTING AND VIBRATION CONTROL

A. Remove or loosen (as required) internal shipping hold-down clamps or bolts to allow the transformer core and coil assembly to provide internal vibration and sound isolation from the transformer case.

B. Transformer mounted on concrete floor or on concrete housekeeping pads: 1. Provide reinforced concrete housekeeping pad for transformers that are floor

mounted. Pads may be omitted where indicated on the Drawings, or above grade level only by approval of the Engineer .

2. Minimum pad height is 4". 3. Pin to the underlying floor slab. 4. Internal reinforcing:

a. Center horizontally in the pad. b. Reinforcing shall terminate no closer than 2" to the outside edge of

the pad. c. Utilize minimum 3,000# concrete. d. Provide either #1 0/10 welded wire mesh or #3 steel reinforcing rods

set 12" on center both ways. 6. Install vibration isolation as follows:

a. For floor mounted equipment on first floor concrete slabs near offices areas and similar location where noise control is important, provide molded rubber isolation bushings (one per corner) between the steel case flange and the housekeeping pad or floor.

3.4 TRANSFORMER GROUNDING

A. Transformer case ground: 1. Install ground lug or ground bar bonded to inside of transformer case for

receiving all grounding and bonding conductors. 2. Bond case to structural steel or cold water line where available. If these

grounding points are not available, utilize primary and secondary grounding

16461-4

conductors for the ground attachment. Ref. NEC Article 250 for sizing of grounding conductor related to secondary phase conductors, except that the maximum size required shall be #3/0AWG unless larger is indicated on the Drawings.

3. Attach primary and secondary feeder grounding conductors to transformer case ground lug or ground bar.

B. Ground wye connected secondaries of dry type transformers with a properly sized bonding jumper as follows:

1. Install a bonding jumper in one of the following locations: a. Between the transformer secondary neutral bar or pad (usually

designated as "XO") and the case ground point in the transformer. b. Between the neutral bar or pad and the ground bar in the first panel

downstream of the transformer if the panel main circuit breaker or fusible switch serves as the transformer secondary disconnect.

c. Between the neutral bar or neutral conductors and the ground bar in the secondary circuit breaker or fuse disconnect if no main downstream panelboard circuit breaker or fusible disconnect is installed.

2. Do not bond the transformer secondary neutral (grounded conductor) to the ground in more than one location.

3. Reference NEC Table 250.122 for sizing of jumper in relationship to secondary phase conductor size. Minimum size of bonding jumper is #8AWG.

4. Install the grounding electrode conductor from the transformer to a structural steel member of the building, to a grounded metal cold water pipe within 5 feet of the point entrance of the cold water pipe into the building, or to other suitable electrodes as per NEC 250.30 and 250.52 if structural steel or local cold water piping is not available.

5. Where the dry type transformer is located adjacent to the service entrance point, a bond from the grounding connection at the transformer to the service entrance equipment building main grounding electrode conductor may be utilized without requiring a separate connection back to the grounding electrode(s) provided that the transformer grounding conductor is not larger than the service entrance grounding conductor.

6. Check building receptacle circuit voltage of neutral-to-ground to insure that neutral is properly bonded to ground.

C. Ground any electrostatic shield to the transformer ground point.

END OF SECTION

16461-5

PART 1 · GENERAL


SECTION 16491

FUSES

A. This section describes fuses required for this project.

B. Provide as shown on the Drawings and described in the Specifications.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. NEMA Standards: 1. FU-1 Fuses.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050.

B. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with this Specification. Include the following information: 1. Device's catalogue number. 2. Ampere rating. 3. Voltage rating. 4. UL Class. 5. Physical fuse construction. 6. Dimensions. 7. Interrupting rating. 8. Other significant information.

1.4 EQUIPMENT COORDINATION

A. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating with other trades and equipment suppliers to verify exact load and connection requirements.

B. Reasonable modifications shall be made without cost to the Owner to the specified fuse sizes if dictated by the exact equipment selected.

C. See Part 3-Execution for possible changes required by modifications to specified HVAC or motor-operated equipment.

PART 2- PRODUCTS


A. Fuses: 1. Bussmann (Buss). 2. Littelfuse. 3. Mersen (Ferraz-Shawmut). 4. CEFCO.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. UL listed for 250VAC, 300VAC, or 600VAC as required by the voltage of the system on which the fuse is installed.

B. Fuses rated 600A and below: 1. UL Class RK5:

16491-1

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

a. Rejection feature. b. Dual element time delay with copper link short circuit sections. c. Current limiting. d. Capable of interrupting a 200,000A RMS symmetrical short circuit when

applied at the rated fuse voltage. e. Equal to Buss FRN-R or FRS-R, as required for the operating voltage. f. Used for protection of:

1) HVAC equipment and motors. 2) Transformers. 3) Feeder circuits.

A. Install fuses in all disconnect switches and other equipment indicated on the Drawings or required by the equipment served.

3.2 FUSE SIZES

A. Fuse sizes for HVAC and motor operated equipment: 1. Approximate fuse sizes are indicated on the Drawings and are based on

estimated equipment characteristics of the specified mechanical equipment. 2. Field determine exact HVAC equipment provided and size fuses for equipment

that is actually installed, paying close attention to the equipment label. 3. Provide increased fuse or disconnect sizes if required to accommodate larger

equipment than that originally specified. 4. Costs for increasing disconnect ampacity, fuse cartridge size, or other similar

changes shall be compensated by Division 15 where selection, purchase, and installation of electrically larger or more demanding equipment is made at the discretion of Division 15.

5. Equipment data shall be interpreted by the Engineer as necessary where recommended fuse size deviates from the estimated sizes shown on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

16491-2

SECTION 16500

LIGHTING FIXTURES

PART 1 ·GENERAL



B. Prior to submittal, examine Architect's reflected ceiling plan in detail and insure that every fixture submitted has proper mounting accessories for ceiling and layout indicated.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. ANSI Standards: 1. C81 Lampholders. 2. C82.11 High Frequency fluorescent lamp ballasts. 3. C82.4 HID lamp ballasts. 4. LE 4 Recessed luminaires.

B. CBM standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with these Specifications and the schedule on the Drawings in accordance with Section 16050.

PART 2- PRODUCTS


A. Magnetic HID ballasts: 1. Advance Transformer Co. 2. Universal. 3. Others as approved or noted.

B. Electronic fluorescent ballasts: 1. Advance Transformer Co. 2. Universal. 3. General Electric. 4. Osram Sylvania. 5. Lutron. 6. Others as approved or noted.

C. Fixtures: 1. As scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Substitutions according to Section 16050. Prior approval is required for

substitutes.

2.2 GENERAL FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide hangers, hardware, supports, grid attachment clips, canopy extensions, and related items as required by applicable codes and standards.

B. Provide factory or field assembled frames for recessed gypboard or plaster mounted fixtures.

C. Furnish fixtures with specified or scheduled finishes.

16500-1

D. Diffusers shall be of the thickness as specified in the Fixture Schedule on the Drawings. If no thickness is specified, the minimum diffuser thickness is 0.125" (0.140" nominal thickness).

E. All painted fixtures shall be painted after fabrication.

F. Troffers shall have cam or spring loaded latches on their door frames (as specified on the Drawing Fixture Schedule). Do not provide "lift and shift" door frames.

2.3 GENERAL BALLAST REQUIREMENTS

A. UL listed for specific applications.

B. ETLICBM certified and NEMA labeled where certification and labeling is available for the particular type or class of ballast.

C. Dry type that contain no insulating fluids. Specifically indicate on the label that the ballast contains no PCBs.

D. Rated for operation at the nominal branch circuit voltage applied to the ballast. Refer to Drawings for details on connections to branch circuits. Proper lamp operation shall be maintained for an input voltage of +/-1 0% of the nominal ballast voltage.

E. Sound rated "A" where used in indoor locations and where sound rating is available.

F. HID ballasts shall comply with the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007.

G. High power factor type (93% or greater) complete with internal capacitors where required.

H. Provide integral disconnect switches for all linear and compact fluorescent ballasts unless noted otherwise, to comply with NEC 41 0.73(G) for all affected fluorescent ballasts.

I. Color coded leads for input and output circuit connections.

J. Metallic or plastic case.

2.4 BALLAST WARRANTY

A. Magnetic type warranted for proper operation for at least 2 years from the data of acceptance of the project by the Owner.

B. Electronic type warranted for proper operation for at least 5 years from the data of acceptance of the project by the Owner.

2.5 MAGNETIC BALLASTS

A. HID (metal halide) fixture ballast requirements: 1. Comply with the EISA Energy Act of 2007 as follows:

a. Provide for all 150W-500W HID ballasts except regulated lag type and 480V rated.

b. Minimum efficiencies as follows: 1) Magnetic probe start, 150-500W: 94% 2) Pulse start, 150-500W: 88% 3) Non-pulse start electronic, 150-250W: 90% 4) Non-pulse start electronic, 251-500W: 92%

2. Isolated for vibration. 3. Not to exceed 90 deg. C operating temperature. 4. Suitable for 0 deg. F. operation when installed in exterior fixtures. 5. Provide igniter for proper high pressure sodium lamp starting sequence. 6. Equal to Advance, Valmont, or GE/Magnetek.

2.6 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A. General requirements:

16500-2

1. High frequency operation (20KHz or greater). 2. Lamp crest factor of 1.7 or less. 3. Total harmonic distortion of 10% or less unless noted otherwise. 4. Minimum ballast factor of 0.87. 5. Transient immunity to voltage surges as specified by ANSI C62.41, Category A1. 6. Operate lamps with no visible flicker (<5% flicker index). 7. Tolerate sustained short circuit and open circuit conditions without ballast failure. 8. Class "P" protected by either a thermal switch for over-temperature protection or

inherent thermal protection incorporated in the circuitry. 9. Electronic ballasts may use standard magnetic ballast sized enclosures or may

be provided in low profile enclosures, at the manufacturer's option.

B. Non-dimming and dimming linear T8 lamp ballast general requirements: 1. Rated for operation of 265mA lamps. 2. Maximum ballast inputs for an enclosed fixture as follows:

a. One nominal 4 foot T8 rapid start lamp: 1) 32W. 2) 0.30A at 120V or 0.135A at 277V.

b. Two nominal 4 foot T8 rapid start lamps: 1) 63W. 2) 0.52A at 120V or 0.225A at 277V.

3. Rapid start operation, as noted on the Drawing Fixture Schedule. 4. Designed for full compatibility with the specified fixture lamp(s). 5. Components packaged in same housing as standard magnetic ballast unless

approved otherwise. 6. Guaranteed for a minimum of two years from any defects. 7. Ballasts per fixture as follows:

a. Provide 2 separate ballasts for split-wired fixtures. Refer to the Drawings to determine which fixtures are split-wired. Split-wired fixtures shall be connected with the outboard lamps operated separately from the inboard lamp(s).

b. To minimize the Owner's inventory of ballasts, a single ballast shall not operate more than 2 lamps in any fixture unless noted otherwise on the Fixture Schedule. Single "universal" ballasts that operate from 1 to 4 lamps without modification may be used in a fixture with up to 4 lamps provided that the fixture is not split-wired.

8. Pre-approved non-dimming ballasts: a. Advance "Improved" Mark V or "Centium" series. b. Magnetek "Triad" or "Low Profile High Performance" series. c. Motorola #MX-RN-T8-1 LL series. d. Osram Sylvania "Quicktronic" series. e. General Electric "UitraMax" series.

C. Additional requirements for dimming linear fluorescent T8 lamp electronic ballasts: 1. Include all general requirements for electronic fluorescent ballasts. 2. Ballast shall dim in a smooth continuous range from 100% down to 10% or less of

nominal lamp lumen output. 3. Dimming shall be complete throughout the range without producing noticeable

flicker. 4. Control ballast through the following method:

a. Control of two separate low voltage (0-1 OV) control leads (Separate low voltage control).

5. All dimming ballasts provided on a project for the same type of lamp construction (i.e., T8) must have the same type of ballast control.

6. Compatible with wall dimmer controls.

16500-3

7. Where both dimming and non-dimming ballasts are provided in the same fixture, the dimming ballast shall operate the inside lamp(s) unless noted otherwise.

8. Pre-approved ballasts: a. Lutron:

1) "HI-Lume" series. 2) "EC0-1 0" series (T8).

b. Advance: 1) "Mark VII Controllable" series. 2) "Mark X Architectural" series.

c. Osram Sylvania Quicktronic. d. GE Cat. #BX32R.

D. Additional requirements for dimming compact fluorescent ballasts (refer to B. above for general requirements of all linear fluorescent electronic ballasts): 1. Provide same characteristics as standard electronic ballasts except for dimming

capability. 2. Ballast shall dim in a smooth continuous range from 100% down to at least 10%

of nominal lamp lumen output. 3. Dimming shall be complete throughout the range without producing noticeable

flicker. 4. Control ballast through the following method:

a. Control of two separate low voltage (0-1 OV) control leads. 5. Compatible with wall dimmer controls. 6. Pre-approved ballasts:

a. Lutron "HI-Lume" series. b. Prescolite "lntelect" series. c. Advance "Mark X" series.

2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMP SOCKETS

A. Linear fluorescent lamp sockets: 1. Rapid-start type lamp operation. 2. Two wire operation (instant start single wire or jumpered sockets are not

allowed). 3. Locking feature to inhibit inadvertent removal of lamps.

B. Compact fluorescent fixture sockets: 1. Provide molded socket to match specified requirements and lamp pin

arrangement. 2. All sockets shall be designed for operation on electronic ballasts (generally 4 pin

instead of 2 pin) unless noted or required to be otherwise.

2.8 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Refer to the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Drawings for specific details.

B. General requirements: 1. Fixtures shall comply with the following UL standards, where applicable:

a. UL 1598C (retrofit packages). b. UL 8750 (new fixtures). c. IES LM-79 (Testing for energy use, light output and color temperature). d. IES LM-80 (Testing of light sources). e. U.S. Department of Energy CALiPER testing certification, where

available. 2. Testing under IES shall be for a minimum of 6,000 hours, with lifetimes projected

from this information. 3. Testing results for individual fixture types shall be submitted to the Engineer when

requested.

16500-4

C. LED fixtures shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a minimum of three years.

D. Heat dissipation from all LED fixtures, modules or drivers shall be controlled via passive convection methods. No fans shall be required for proper operation.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install all fixtures complete as herein specified and as called for in the Fixture Schedule on the Drawings.

B. Interferences: Carefully examine the complete areas as well as each individual room where fixtures are to be installed for interference with piping, beams, ducts, etc. Where any such interferences occur, provide fixtures with proper type suspension to overcome such interferences.

C. The fixtures in each room or area must all be hung the same distance above the floor except where noted.

D. Unless otherwise directed, must not be hidden or obstructed, wholly, or in part, by any piping, ducts, etc., running directly under the fixtures.

E. Where the bodies of fluorescent fixtures are used as raceways for branch circuit wiring, use wiring with an insulation rating of at least 90 deg. C. Carefully and securely clamp wiring within the fixture body to positively prevent contact of the wires with the ballast.

F. Clean all fixtures and leave free of any dirt, dust, grease, etc., at the completion of the job.

G. Install open downlights utilizing horizontal PL type fluorescent lamps so that lamps are consistently parallel (or perpendicular) to room walls.

3.2 INTERIOR FIXTURE SUPPORT AND WIRING

A. Provide fixtures with any mounting accessories or supports required. Items required for support may include structural supports, mounting bolts, beam clamps, suspension items, or similar materials required to suspend and/or support the fixtures.

B. Recessed mounted fixtures installed in lay-in ceilings: 1. Attach to lay-in grid with clips as required by NEC 41 0-16(C). 2. Connect the fixtures to the branch circuit wiring system by short lengths of flexible

metal conduit ("whips") to allow easy removal and servicing of the fixtures. 3. No more than one fixture may be served by a single flexible whip. Do not "daisy

chain" between fixtures with flexible conduit. 4. Do not connect the lighting fixture to the branch circuit wiring system with EMT or

other rigid conduit means. 5. Feed whips from permanently mounted junction boxes above the ceiling lines. An

individual junction box shall serve no more than four recessed fixtures. 6. Support surface and recessed linear fluorescent fixtures by means other than the

ceiling grid where the fixtures are of a weight greater than the grid can support. In these cases, provide at least two independent support wires connected to diagonal corners of the fixtures, and run directly from the corner connection to the permanent structure.

7. Provide downlight fixture suspension bars equal to Caddy "517" series.

C. Recessed mounted fixtures installed in gypboard or plaster ceilings: 1. Junction boxes feeding lighting fixtures shall not be installed above inaccessible

ceilings.

16500-5

2. Connect fixtures to the branch circuit wiring system in one of the following methods: a. If fixtures can be completely serviced from below, including ballast

replacement, or if there is not equipment above the ceiling line that would require removal of the fixture for servicing of equipment, EMT or similar rigid steel conduit or tubing may be used to connect between fixtures.

b. If fixtures require removal for servicing, or if other equipment located above the ceiling line requires removal of the fixture for servicing of equipment, flexible metal conduit shall be used to interconnect the fixtures.

3. Troffers: a. Include a support frame on all four sides of the fixture. Frame may be

field fabricated or supplied by the lighting fixture manufacturer. b. Field fabricated support frames may include metal wall studs or ceiling

splines turned edge-wise and screwed or bolted to the ceiling, or other suitable methods approved by the A/E.

4. Downlights: a. Include flat mounting pan with fixture components. b. Attach to ceiling structure with slips, bolts, anchors, or extendable bars.

Do not lay on top of ceiling surface without attaching to permanent structure or ceiling suspension members.

c. Provide any required trim extension for recessed downlights reflector cones in needed due to thick ceiling surfaces.

D. Surface mounted fixtures: 1. On grid ceilings attach to the ceiling with grid clips (Caddy "4G" series or equal) or

other adequate support mechanism. Support fixtures that exceed the weight capabilities of the grid by directly anchoring the fixture to the structure in at least two locations on diagonal ends of the fixture.

2. On non-accessible ceilings (such as gypboard) support by means of sheet metal brackets, steel channel or angles, or similar means installed above the permanent ceiling line and bolted through the ceiling material to the fixture housing. Do not attach surface mounted fixtures on gypboard with only toggle bolts or screw anchors unless specifically so approved by the Engineer.

3. On masonry walls support independently of the back box or junction box with masonry anchors unless the box has been specifically listed for such application. Support fixtures longer than two feet by masonry anchors at each end of the

fixture in addition to any intermediate support required. 4. Under counter or under cabinet task lighting fixtures:

a. Mount fixtures so that the top of the fixture is securely attached to the bottom of the upper cabinet or counter top.

b. Do not mount with back of fixture against back wall. c. Back of fixture is defined as the side if the fixture opposite the lensed

side.

E. Suspended fixtures: 1. Cable suspension:

a. Concrete structure: 1) Install inserts into the bottom of structural concrete beams,

braces, tee legs, tee flanges, box or carton formed floors, or poured concretes floors shall be epoxy-filled type equal to Hilti. Do not provide standard expansion inserts.

2) Inserts installed into the sides of poured concrete walls may be either standard expansion type or epoxy-filled inserts.

b. Metal structure:

16500-6

1) Coordinate with the Architect to determine load bearing capacity of corrugated metal decks or similar materials.

2) Provide rigid attachment to the metal deck materials. 3) If deck materials are not capable of adequate support of the

fixtures, install additional steel channels, angles, beams, or similar structural reinforcing materials to support the fixtures and their hanging mechanism.

3.3 EXIT AND EMERGENCY FIXTURES

A. Exit signs: 1. Exit signs shall generally be ceiling or wall mounted as indicated on the Drawings

and Fixture Schedule or as required by the mounting surfaces and wall treatments.

2. The Contractor is responsible for verifying door schedules and room finishes to insure proper clearances from obstructions such as door openings.

B. Connect exit and emergency fixtures to unswitched lighting circuit from panel lock-on circuit breaker(s).

C. Exit and emergency fixtures that are uncircuited on the Drawings shall be uniformly balanced between the available number of emergency/exit lighting circuits.

D. Minimum conductor size for all exit circuits is #1 OAWG.

3.4 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Connect fixture ballast to correct voltage tap. Install "wire nuts" or other suitable protection for any unused leads on multi-tap HID ballasts.

B. Wall mounted fixtures: 1. Provide cast junction boxes for surface mounted fixtures. 2. Provide gaskets for recessed junction boxes. 3. Boxes shall be approved for either damp or wet location installation (as required).

3.5 DIMMABLE FLUORESCENT FIXTURES

A. Low voltage control leads are generally not indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor is responsible for surveying the actual ballasts provided with the fixtures to determine which additional control or switchable conductors, if any, will be required.

B. See Section 16510 for control equipment for dimmable fluorescent fixtures.

3.6 SPARE BALLASTS

A. Provide spare ballasts directly to the Owner at the completion of the project. Ballasts shall be new and in the original boxes. Obtain a receipt from the Owner for delivery of the spare ballasts to his care.

B. Spare ballasts are for Owner's spare stock only and are not to be used by the Contractor for replacement of ballasts installed in lighting fixtures on the project that are defective or have shortened lifetimes and require replacement during the warranty period.

C. All ballasts shall be the same as those provided in the particular fixtures furnished on the project.

D. Provide the following spare ballasts: 1. 4 T8 4ft. linear 1 lamp fluorescent ballasts. 2. 12 T8 4 ft. linear 2 lamp fluorescent ballasts. 3. 2 T 4 32W compact fluorescent ballasts (if LED option is not taken). 4. 8 T4 42W compact fluorescent ballasts (if LED option is not taken). 5. 1 150W mogul base metal halide ballast.

16500-7

6. 1 400W mogul base metal halide ballast.

END OF SECTION

16500-8

SECTION 16505

LAMPS AND LIGHT SOURCES

PART 1 ·GENERAL



1.2 STANDARDS

A. ANSI Standar·ds: 1. C78 Series: Incandescent, fluorescent, and HID lamps.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 • PRODUCTS


A. General Electric Co.

B. Philips.

C. Osram Sylvania.

D. Venture Lighting (metal halide only).


A. All fluorescent and HID lamps shall be of the specified or scheduled size, type, and color as noted on the Drawings.

B. Lamps shall be the standard product of the manufacturer providing the product.

C. Lamps shall meet federal energy efficiency guidelines in terms of minimum color rendering index and average lamp efficacy as measured in lumens per watt.

D. Refer to Drawings and Fixture Schedule for further details.

2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Refer to the Drawings for details on the general color temperature of lamps. All lamps in the building shall be of the same color unless noted otherwise.

B. Nominal energy saving F32 lamps shall be T8 medium bi-pin, rapid start, with nominal lengths of 2, 3, or 4 foot as scheduled, capable of being operated with electronic ballasts.

C. Refer to the drawings for requirements of compact fluorescent and biax lamps. Verify pin number on all compact fluorescent lamps.

D. All lamps containing mercury or other potentially toxic metals shall meet Current Federal EPA TCLP standards to allow disposal of used lamps by standard means.

2.4 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) LAMPS

A. Metal halide lamp requirements: 1. Rated mounting position provided as required by the fixture in which they are

installed.

16505-1

2. Standard lumen output type unless noted otherwise. 3. Pulse start. 4. Clear envelopes where installed in typical outdoor fixtures unless fixture supports

require the use of coated lamps to prevent support arm shadows. 5. Mogul base where rated above 1 OOW. 6. Rated for use in either open or enclosed fixtures to match their installation unless

self-extinguishing lamps are used in open fixtures normally requiring an enclosed lamp.

7. Provide one of the following for open type light fixtures: a. A containment barrier (typically a heavy glass shroud) around the arc

tube, or b. A base modification that prevents a non-shrouded lamp for being

installed in a standard socket. 8. Equal to General Electric "Pulse-Arc" series.

2.5 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LIGHT SOURCES:

A. LED light sources shall comply with the following general requirements. Refer to the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Drawings for additional information.

B. General requirements: 1. See Lighting Fixture Schedule for minimum initial lumen output required for each

LED product. 2. Minimum lamp lifetime shall be 50,000 hours unless noted otherwise. LED

lifetime shall be stated based on reaching L70 (70% of initial lighting output) as a minimum (L80 or L90 ratings are preferred).

3. Luminous efficacy shall be 80 lumens per watt minimum. 4. Color temperatures required are noted on the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the

Drawings. In general, interior fixture temperature is 4,000 or 4,100 deg. K and exterior fixture temperature is 5,000 deg. K. Stated color temperatures shall be within a maximum of 2 MacAdam ellipses of each other.

5. Color rendering index (CRI) shall not be less than 80. 6. Drivers shall be integral with the display and designed for line voltage input with

lower LED array output (voltage and nominal ampacity in milliamps) as required to produce rated initial light output.


3.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install all lamps and lighting sources complete as herein specified and as called for in the Fixture Schedule on the Drawings.

B. Clean all lamps and leave free of any dirt, dust, grease, etc., at the completion of the job.

C. Coat exterior lamp bases with an inhibitor to prevent base from corroding to the socket.

3.2 SPARE LAMPS

A. Provide spare lamps directly to the Owner at the completion of the project. Lamps shall be new and in the original boxes. Obtain a receipt from the Owner for delivery of the spare lamps to his care.

B. Spare lamps are for Owner's spare stock only and are not to be used by the Contractor for replacement of lamps installed in lighting fixtures on the project that are defective or have shortened lifetimes and require replacement during the warranty period.

16505-2

C. Provide certification from the Owner that all spare lamps were delivered to and accepted by the Owner. Do not leave spare lamps in the building in closets or similar spaces without specific approval.

D. Spare lamps shall be the same exact type as furnished on the project. Provide the following types of lamps: 1. 48 4ft. T8 linear fluorescent lamps. 2. 4 triple tube 32W T4 compact fluorescent lamps (unless LED option is taken). 3. 12 triple tube 42W T4 compact fluorescent lamps (unless LED option is taken). 4. 3 clear 150W mogul base incandescent lamps. 5. 6 clear 400W mogul base metal halide lamps.

END OF SECTION

16505-3

SECTION 16510 LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 ·GENERAL



B. Refer to Section 16500 for coordination and additional details.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1.3 EXTENDED WARRANTIES

A. Wall and ceiling mounted occupancy sensors shall be warranted for a minimum of 2 years from date of installation and acceptance by the Owner. Provide documentation to Owner identifying components so covered.

PART 2 • PRODUCTS


A. Lighting control panels: 1. Watt-Stopper. 2. Hubbell. 3. Douglas. 4. Others as PRE-approved by Engineer.

B. Wall-box type LED and fluorescent dimmers: 1. Lutron. 2. Others as approved.

C. Occupancy and daylight sensors: 1. Watt Stopper. 2. Novitas. 3. Hubbell. 4. Others as approved by Engineer.

2.2 OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS

A. General requirements: 1. Occupancy sensors shall operate in the following modes:

a. Automatic "ON." b. Automatic "OFF." c. Manual "OFF" where control station is accessible.

2. Vacancy sensors shall operate in the following modes: a. Manual "ON." b. Automatic "OFF." c. Manual "OFF" where control station is accessible.

3. Technology: a. Utilize passive infrared technology for smaller offices, storage rooms, and

similar areas. b. Utilize ultrasonic technology for restrooms and areas of significant

occupant movements.

16510-1

c. Utilize combination passive infrared/ultrasonic technology for areas such as classrooms, workrooms, and other areas in which occupancy requires more sophisticated detection, or where noted on the Drawings.

4. Mount as follows: a. Wall mount in the same location as the standard room entrance lighting

switch in smaller single occupancy rooms. To utilize wall mounted sensors, the room must meet the following criteria: 1) Rectangular shaped of 200 sq. ft. or less. 2) Normally used by single occupant. 3) Unobstructed view of occupant from standard wall switch

location. 4) Do not use for irregularly shaped rooms, rooms with wall

partitions that block sensor operation, longer hallways, or rooms larger than 200 sq. ft.

b. Ceiling mount in all other occupancies. 5. Sensor operation and requirements:

a. Self contained, operated at line lighting voltage (120VAC or 277VAC), for wall mounted locations as defined previously. Rating shall be 20A minimum for ballast loads and 16A minimum for incandescent loads.

b. Sensor shall operate at 24VDC (approx. 14-30 ma) for ceiling mount installations. Include power packs or similar devices to operate the actual lighting circuits controlled by the sensor.

c. LED in face of sensor that activates to indicate motion or presence of occupant.

d. Provide built-in: 1) Automatic detection and energization (non-time-delay) upon

sensing occupant. 2) Field adjustable Off time delay. 3) Field adjustable sensitivity.

B. Types of sensors: 1. Wall mounted passive infrared sensors:

a. Manual On/Off control switch in faceplate. b. Line voltage type, operating at a voltage rating of 1 00-300V. c. Minimum wattage control capacity of 800W. d. 180 degree motion sensing. e. Able to detect vertical and horizontal motion. f. Color of plate shall match color of standard wiring devices. g. Learning feature to allow sensor to automatically adjust to occupancy

habits, including variable 5-30 minute "Off" time delay that is automatically adjusted.

h. Resumption of "auto" operation 5 minutes after interior motion is no longer detected (to allow for deliberate turning off of room lights for conference or presentation modes).

i. Operational behavior selectable through DIP switches. j. Capable of being used in 3-way switching applications without requiring

different devices. k. Equal to Watt Stopper #PW-100.

2. Restroom sensors for rooms with stalls: a. Ultrasonic solid state high frequency (25KHz or higher) type. b. 360 degree coverage. c. Equal to Watt Stopper #W-500A or #W-1 OOOA as required by area

covered. 3. Large office and classroom sensors:

a. Operation:

16510-2

1) Sensor shall turn on with dual technology (either passive infrared and ultrasonic) sensing presence in the space.

2) Sensor shall stay on if either an infrared or ultrasonic sense is maintained.

3) Sensor shall turn off when neither infrared or ultrasonic technology senses presence, and after the manually adjustable time delay (up to 20 minutes after no occupancy is sensed).

4) Sensor shall self-adjust over time to occupancy type. b. Wide angle lens. c. Complete with any required adjustable mounting ceiling brackets. d. Equal to Watt Stopper DT-300 series.

4. Hallway sensors: a. Ultrasonic only technology. b. Utilize long range narrow dispersion angle lens for detection of

occupancy in longer hallways. c. Complete with any required adjustable mounting ceiling brackets. d. Equal to Watt Stopper W-200H or WT-2255.

C. Relays or "power packs" shall be used with low voltage sensors to control the lighting circuits as follows: 1. Provide 24VDC unswitched power to operate sensors. 2. Be controlled b 24VDC input from sensors. 3. Include single normally open electro-mechanical or solid state output contact

rated at 20A, 120VAC [277VAC]. 4. Equal to the following Watt Stopper "power pack" components:

a. A 120-EP for 120V "master" applications. b. A277-EP for 277V "master" applications. c. S-120/277/347-EP for "slave" applications where more than 1 lighting

circuit is controlled by the sensor.

D. System control (low voltage) wiring: 1. Low voltage multi-conductor cable between sensor and controls. 2. Minimum #24AWG copper conductors. 3. Conduit is required where wiring is installed in walls. 4. Conduit is required where wiring is installed in ceiling spaces unless:

a. Ceiling is not a return air plenum. b. Plenum rated cable is installed in return air plenum.

E. System performance requirements: 1. Sensors and associated relays, if used, shall perform in a completely acceptable

manner based upon the intended function of the space or room which they control.

2. Anticipated use of room is defined by the room title. Unusual or multiple use rooms shall have their operation defined by the Engineer.

3. Siting of sensing devices is critical to proper operation and shall be confirmed with the Engineer prior to installation.

4. Manufacturer's standard sensor products are not necessarily substitutable on a one-for-one basis with those indicated or specified. Manufacturer shall submit adequate number of sensors, devices, or additional equipment required to perform the intended functions.

2.3 DAYLIGHT SENSORS

A. General requirements: 1. Technology:

a. Utilize photoconductive technology for obtaining control information for spaces or open areas subject to significant amounts of natural daylight.

16510-3

b. Low voltage detector combined with line voltage rated relay or power pack.

c. Include power packs or similar devices to operate the actual lighting circuits controlled by the sensor.

2. Sensor operation and requirements: a. Sensor shall operate at 24VDC, 120mA maximum. b. Mounting on wall or ceiling as indicated. c. Light input window to measure ambient lighting level. d. Control range of approximately 10 to 200 footcandles. e. LED in face of sensor that activates to indicate On or Off operation of

sensor. f. Provide built-in:

1) Field adjustable dead-band to control cycling. 2) Field adjustable sensitivity.

g. Equal to Watt-Stopper LS-100 controller.

B. Relays or "power packs" shall be used with low voltage sensors to control the lighting circuits as follows: 1. Provide 24VDC unswitched power to operate sensors. 2. Be controlled by a 24VDC input from sensors. 3. Include single normally open electro-mechanical or solid state output contact

rated at 20A, 120VAC. 4. Equal to the following Watt Stopper "power pack" components:

a. A120-EP for 120V "master" applications.

C. System control (low voltage) wiring: 1. Low voltage multi-conductor cable between sensor and controls. 2. Minimum #24AWG copper conductors. 3. Conduit is required where wiring is installed in walls. 4. Conduit is required where wiring is installed in ceiling spaces unless:

a. Ceiling is not a return air plenum. b. Plenum rated cable is installed in return air plenum.

D. System performance requirements: 1. Sensors and associated relays, if used, shall perform in a completely acceptable

manner based upon the intended function of the space which they control. 2. Siting of daylight sensing devices is critical to proper operation and shall be

confirmed with the Engineer prior to installation. 3. Manufacturer's standard sensor products are not necessarily substitutable on a

one-for-one basis with those indicated or specified. Manufacturer shall submit adequate number of sensors, devices, or additional equipment required to perform the intended functions.

2.4 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL

A. Provide the lighting control panel for the control of interior and/or exterior lighting fixtures.

B. Control panel requirements: 1. Self-contained with all power supplies, relays, contactors, control interfaces, and

other equipment as required for a fully-functioning control system. 2. Enclosure:

a. Surface mounted. b. Constructed of code gauge steel,. c. Include steel barriers (voltage dividers) separating the control (low

voltage) components and wiring from the live voltage components and wiring.

d. Hinged, lockable door to provide deadfront construction.

16510-4

e. Factory standard knockouts to allow the entrance of branch circuit conduits.

f. All exposed steel parts painted in an ANSI gray finish. 3. Control transformer:

a. Provide an internal Class 2 transformer to provide 24V control power. b. Size transformer to operate relays simultaneously. c. Transformer shall be current-limiting or internally fused to prevent

damage from a secondary short circuit. 4. Relays:

a. Molded case construction with screw-terminal load connections. b. Equipped for snap-on DIN rail mounting. c. Rated for at least 30,000 operations. d. Two wire latching type e. Manually and electrically operable. f. Cover indicator showing position of contacts .. g. Suitable for all types of lighting loads up to 20A rated capacity, including i

HID loads. h. Open/close electrical operation via 24V momentary application of control

voltage. i. Single pole for phase-to-neutral loads and Two pole for phase-to-phase

loads. j. See Drawings for additional information.

5. Control panel: a. LCD display with membrane or switch type keypad. b. Electronic 365 day astronomic feature. c. Integrated with exterior photosensor when used for exterior lighting

control. d. Password protected. e. Capable of controlling relays or in groups, for either photosensor, time

clock, or astronomic, or a combination of these modes. f. Minimum of 8 separately programmable outputs. g. Minimum of 50 events/week. h. Capable of daylight savings time and holiday recognition. i. Non-volatile memory. j. Fixed or removable mounting. k. Interface with remote manually-operated low-voltage wall switches.

6. Include remote exterior photosensor when exterior lighting control is required. 7. Include "relay scanner" component to allow the relays to be operated in groups. If

the control panel provides both group and individual control, via the software, then a scanner is not required.

C. Control switches: 1. Provide one or more low voltage (24V) control switches where noted on the

Drawings. 2. Control switches shall be ganged where noted. 3. Momentary contact type. 4. LED pilot light for each switch 5. Compatible with standard switch box mounting dimensions.

D. Watt Stopper, Hubbell, or Douglas.

2.5 DIMMER SWITCHES

A. General requirements: 1. Solid state, UL listed. 2. Slide-type operation.

16510-5

3. Flush wall mount "wall box" type. 4. All exposed parts in one gang or area shall be matching and of one manufacturer. 5. Furnish with positive "On-Off' position. Units without positive line voltage

disconnect are not acceptable.

B. Electronic fluorescent ballast and LED dimmer switches: 1. Rated 120VAC or 277VAC as required by the ballast or LED driver that the switch

is dimming. 2. Compatible with the specified dimming ballast or LED driver. 3. Provide the following methods of control: Control of two separate low voltage (0-

1 OV) control leads (low voltage control). 4. Complete with any ancillary equipment, such as relays or dimming modules,

where required if the dimmer switch itself cannot adequately power the number of ballasts and fixtures indicated on the Drawings.

5. Utilize square-law dimming technology. 6. Dimming range from 100% down to 10% or less of nominal light output of the

ballast. 7. Line voltage dimmers:

a. Complete with pigtails for field connections to two-wire or three-wire line voltage ballasts.

b. Equal to Nova T series. 8. 0-10V dimmers:

a. Include pigtails for field power connections to dimmer ballast or LED driver.

b. Include internal relay for positive "OFF" control of power circuit. c. Include two low voltage pigtails for field connection to control cable. d. Adjustable high and low end trim. e. Minimum rating of 8A at either 120V or 277V. For loads larger than 8A,

provide power pack/relay in addition to switch. f. Equal to Lutron Nova T NTSTV-DV (stand-alone application). Include

Lutron PP-DV or equal power pack for circuit loads greater than 8A unless dimmer is individually rated for circuit load.

9. Contractor must verify compatibility of dimmer control with ballast manufacturer or LED driver prior to installation of dimmer switches.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install all lighting controls complete as herein specified and as called for on the Drawings.

B. Clean all controls and leave free of any dirt, dust, grease, etc., at the completion of the job.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor is responsible for verifying door schedules and room finishes to insure proper clearances from obstructions such as door openings.

B. Interferences: 1. Carefully examine the complete areas as well as each individual room where

controls are to be installed for interference with structure, wall finishes, bulletin boards, and similar items.

2. Revise or relocate, after approval by the Engineer, items which conflict with structure, finishes, or equipment.

16510-6

C. Thermostats: 1. Coordinate with mechanical drawings to determine any conflicts with wall

mounted thermostats adjacent to or above dimmer switches producing heat while in the dimmed mode.

2. Relocate dimmer switches or coordinate with Division 15 to relocate wall thermostats to avoid false temperature sensing by thermostats.

3.3 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. The complete lighting control system shall be commissioned by the sales agency, factory authorized personnel or other appropriate personnel. Preliminary adjustments made by the installing electrician do not satisfy this requirement.

B. The Contractor shall include with his bid all associated costs for personnel, travel expenses, and per diem to accomplish the commissioning process.

C. Contact the Engineer or Owner regarding actual or proposed building operation to determine relay On/off times and related adjustments.

D. Lighting control elements to be commissioned and adjusted include, but are not limited to, the following types of devices: 1. Occupancy sensors. 2. Daylight sensors. 3. Roof photosensor. 4. Control panels.

E. Wiring diagrams: 1. The commissioning agent shall provide a full and complete wiring diagram based

on building CAD drawings, showing each and every control device, its connection to power circuits, and the associated interconnecting control wiring and type.

2. Locations and types of devices may deviate from those indicated on the Construction Drawings provided the replacement materials and methods are equal to, or superior to, those originally design.

3. Wiring diagrams and any equipment changes shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer.

F. Provide complete setting, programming and testing to insure that lighting control panel and all sensor system is properly functioning. If equipment as installed fails to perform as required, Contractor shall relocate existing sensors or add additional sensor(s) to make the control system function properly with anticipated use of the space( s ).

G. After completion of the installation, the agent or factory technician shall provide a minimum of two continuous hours of instruction to Owner's personnel in the operation and setting of the equipment.

3.4 EXTERIOR FIXTURE CONTROLS

A. Photosensor: 1. Roof mount and orient to the north for proper operation. 2. Provide control wiring as follows:

a. Two low voltage control wires to lighting control panel. b. Verify circuitry prior to installation and provide any additional installation

wiring needed. 3. Set photocell operating sensitivity to allow operation from dusk to dawn.

B. Verify proper fixture circuiting and switching.

3.5 DIMMERS

A. Wall box style dimmers:

16510-7

1. Select dimmer switch voltage rating according to the voltage of the lighting circuit controlled.

2. Select dimmer switch wattage rating as previously described. 3. Install flush mounted in new and existing walls unless surface mounting is

specifically approved by the Engineer. 4. Connect all power wiring between dimmers and load controlled. 5. Connect all ballast control wiring between dimmers and electronic ballast

controlled by dimmers. 6. Coordinate dimmer type with specific load control to provide a proper interface.

3.6 DAYLIGHT AND OCCUPANCY SENSORS AND CONTROLS

A. Wall mount single small room self-contained occupancy sensors in same location as normal room light switch. Connect to line voltage lighting circuit.

B. Ceiling mount all occupancy or daylight sensors as follows: 1. Locate restroom sensors over the stall door line-up. 2. Locate office and classroom sensors in center of room or in corner of room as

directed. Provide with proper lens to sense occupancy in either square or rectangular pattern as required by the area served.

C. Install relays or "power packs" in or adjacent to junction boxes to allow makeup of wiring. Mount relay junction boxes as follows:

1. In accessible ceiling spaces, mount in ceiling space adjacent to sensor. 2. In substantially inaccessible ceilings (such as gypboard, concealed spline, or

similar types), mount as follows in the following order of priority: a. Adjacent to ceiling access door where door is provided. b. In wall switch box where On/Off wall switches are provided. c. In junction box located where normal wall switch would be located if wall

switches are not provided. d. Alternate location as approved by Engineer.

D. Install and connect all power and control wiring.

E. Adjust sensor and controls as follows: 1. Adjust sensitivity of each sensor. 2. Adjust Off time delay of each photosensor. 3. Adjust dead-band of daylight sensor. 4. Sensors may require additional adjustments after space or room occupancy and

occupant behavior have been established.

F. Provide complete testing to insure sensor system is properly functioning. If equipment as installed fails to perform as required, Contractor shall relocate existing sensors or add additional sensor(s) to make the control system function properly with anticipated use of the space(s).

G. See Drawings to determine if standard wall switches shall be installed in any areas served by occupancy sensors. If so, connect wall switches ahead of the power to the relays or "power packs" and in series with the relay or "power pack" output relay to allow definite On/Off power control to the sensor system.

3.7 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS

A. Wall mount the lighting control panel in the location noted on the Drawings.

B. Connect line and load sides to the various relays and lighting contactors that control power switching in the unit.

C. Ceiling mount all occupancy or daylight sensors as follows: 1. Locate restroom sensors over the stall door line-up.

16510-8

2. Locate office and classroom sensors in center of room or in corner of room as directed. Provide with proper lens to sense occupancy in either square or rectangular pattern as required by the area served.

3. Locate daylight sensors where shown on the Drawings and orient to face north. 4. Connect all control wiring between the control panel and the various sensors.

D. Program the control panel and adjust sensor and controls as follows: 1. Adjust sensitivity and deadbands of each sensor. 2. Program ON times. 3. Program OFF times. 4. Sensors may require additional adjustments after space occupancy and occupant

behavior have been established. Include the cost of any associated changes with the bid.

E. Provide complete factory-technician setting, programming, and testing to insure that lighting control panel and all sensor system is properly functioning. If equipment as installed fails to perform as required, Contractor shall relocate existing sensors or add additional sensor(s) to make the control system function properly with anticipated use of the space(s). After completion of the installation, factory technician shall provide a minimum of two continuous hours of instruction to Owner's personnel in the operation and setting of the equipment.

END OF SECTION

16510-9

SECTION 16721

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 ·GENERAL


A Relocated an existing Computer Room Notifier RP-1 001 Pre-Action fire alarm system that is electrically supervised, conventional, and low voltage, along with the associated components.


A Contractor must be a firm normally engaged in fire alarm and detection work and shall be factory authorized by Notifier to install and service that particular product line.

B. All components of the system, and their installation, shall conform to the approval requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories and the National Fire Protection Association.

1.3 STANDARDS AND CODES

A The fire alarm system shall comply with the following codes and standards: 1. NFPA 72. 2. NEC Article 760. 3. Applicable UL listings.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A Conduit requirements: 1. Minimum conduit size is 1 /2". 2. Fill shall not exceed that indicated by the National Electrical Code. 3. All conduit above grade shall be EMT, except that approved flex or liquid-tight flex

connections may be used for short equipment connection whips.

B. Wires and cables: 1. All wiring shall be copper only. 2. Use individually insulated type THHN conductors, except that fire alarm system

cables may be used in conduit is appropriately sized. 3. Utilize solid conductors for #16AWG and below. 4. #14AWG and above may be solid or stranded. 5. Minimum sizes:

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

a. #14AWG for signal devices, except where noted. b. #16AWG for non-addressable initiation devices and connections to flow

switches and similar equipment. c. All conductors to be per the manufacturer's requirements.

A General: 1. Installation shall comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code and NFPA

72.

16721-1

2. All new wiring shall be installed in conduit. 3. Coordinate all device mounting with other trades. 4. Contact Engineer for resolution if the indicated location of devices conflicts with

work of other trades. 5. Connect all initiation, notification, and annunciation wiring so that the conductors

are broken at the device and not wrapped around a termination screw.

B. Relocate the following components and extend existing wiring as required: 1. Remove pre-action fire alarm panel from present hallway and relocate to interior

Computer Room wall. Provide any required re-labeling or sequence of operation notification required.

2. Remove fire-alarm pull station and relocate to interior Computer Room wall. 3. Remove horn/strobe assembly and relocated to interior Computer Room wall.

C. Test the existing equipment, including all smoke detectors, for proper operation and serviceability. Notify the Engineer of any items not complying with required Code items, or no longer functional.

END OF SECTION

16721-2

SECTION 16740

TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS

PART 1 ·GENERAL


A. This section describes the work and equipment required to furnish and install the following: 1. Establishment of telephone service terminal board, grounding, and required

electrical outlets. 2. An in-house telephone and data cable raceway system, including outlet boxes

and conduit and cable trays. 3. A complete in-house telephone and data cable system, including wiring, cabling,

outlet jacks, patch panels, punch down blocks, equipment racks, and similar items.

B. All switching units, desk or wall instruments, servers, routers, hubs, and similar items will be furnished and installed by others.

C. Provide a submittal at the completion of the project to verify that all cabling requiring testing was field tested after installation and complies with the standards noted herein.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Furnish all components for the complete system as outline in the Description of Work and as further defined in this Section of the Specifications and other applicable sections of Division 16.

B. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Raceways: See Section 16111. 2. Copper telephone and data cables:

a. Systimax. b. Panduit. c. Mohawk. d. Belden. e. Approved equal.

3. Category 6 components: a. Berk-Tek. b. Systimax. c. Panduit. d. Suttle. e. Leviton. f. Allentel. g. Ortronics. h. Approved equal.

4. Prefabricated fire-seal sleeves: a. Hilti. b. STI. c. Others as approved by Engineer.

167 40-1

2.2 RACEWAY AND OUTLET SYSTEMS

A. Refer to Section 16111 for general details on the types and installation of raceways and conduit systems.

B. Conduit: 1. In-house distribution conduits:

a. Schedule 40 PVC for all underground conduits. b. EMT for above grade distribution conduits. c. Flexible steel only where approved by Engineer in cabinet work or similar

locations. d. Conduits shall serve only one telephone or data outlet and shall not be

"daisy-chained" between outlets. e. A complete conduit enclosed wiring system is not required and shall be

run: 1) In non-return air plenums from the outlet box to above the

accessible ceiling space. 2) To adjacent accessible ceiling space if ceiling material is plaster,

gypboard, or other inaccessible surface. 3) In return air plenums from the outlet box full length to the terminal

board unless plenum rated cable is used. f. Install a full length pull wire or pull tape in all conduits not presently

receiving wiring or cabling. g. Provide conduits to outlet boxes as follows:

C. Outlet boxes: 1. Size:

1) One 3/4" conduit to each outlet designated as a telephone or data outlet.

2) Two 3/4" conduits to each outlet designated as a combination data and telephone outlet.

a. Standard size is 4" square. b. Single gang boxes may be provided in limited space locations such as

cabinetwork, but only with the Engineer's permission. c. Plaster rings:

1) Provide single gang plaster rings for outlets designated as telephone or data outlet, or for a combination of telephone and data outlet.

2) Provide double gang plaster rings for outlets designated as combination telephone and data outlets that have more than 4 sets of cable terminations.

d. Combine data and telephone outlets into a single box where practical, including locations where separate boxes are indicated on the Drawings as adjacent to each other.

e. Outlet plates: 1) If a conduit only system is provided, install blank plates in all

locations in which the Owner does not provide his own data or telephone plates.

2) Plates with jacks: a) Plates shall be nylon type construction to match or be

similar to receptacle plates. b) Plate color shall match color of receptacles in same area

or room. c) All plates shall be modular type with inserts for a

minimum of 4 jack or fiber optic termination positions.

16740-2

d) Telephone outlet: RJ-11 or RJ-45 (as required), 8 wire modular jack, EIA 568B wiring termination. Provide rear punch-down connecting block.

e) Copper data outlet: RJ-45 8 wire EIA 568B modular jack. Provide rear punch-down connecting block.

2.3 COPPER CABLES AND WIRING

A. Telephone and data wiring general requirements: 1. Unshielded twisted pair (UTP). 2. Solid copper conductors. 3. Individually insulated conductors per industry standard telephone type color

coding. 4. Unfilled with overall insulating jacket as follows:

a. PVC where installed in conduit full length or where installed in non-air return plenums.

b. Teflon or other approved plenum rated cable insulation when installed in return air plenums.

5. Meet the following standards and codes: a. UL Subject 444. b. NEC Article 800.

B. Telephone cables: 1. For present voice traffic with future conversion to data use:

a. Tested and certified to comply with the requirements of EIAITIA Category 6 data transmission.

b. Four twisted pairs of #24AWG conductors. c. White colored jacket.

C. Data cables (Category 6): 1. Tested and certified to comply with the requirements of EIA!TIA Standard 568A

Category 6 data transmission (250Mhz/1 gigabiUsec Ethernet use). Cables shall operate satisfactorily in both Category 5e and Category 6 modes.

2. Tested and certified to comply with Category 6 data transmission. 3. ANSI/TIAIEIA-568-B.2-1 compliance. 4. 4 twisted pairs of #23AWG. 5. Blue colored jacket. 6. Nominal 100 ohm unshielded. 7. Maximum attenuation in dB/1 00 meters as follows:

a. 2.0 dB @ 1 MHz. b. 6.5 dB@ 10 MHz. c. 9.3 dB @ 20 MHz. d. 22 dB@ 100 MHz.

8. Near end maximum crosstalk (NEXT) in db at 100 meters length: a. 62 db@ 1 MHz. b. 47 dB@ 10 MHz. c. 42 dB @ 20 MHz. d. 32 dB@ 100 MHz.

2.4 TERMINAL BOARD REQUIREMENTS

A. Terminal board in Computer Room is existing, and will be modified by the Owner as needed.

2.5 DATA RACK (DISTRIBUTION FRAME) REQUIREMENTS

A. Open bay type without side or top panels or door, are existing and shall be relocated as noted on the Drawings.

16740-3

B. Attachments: 1. Bolt base plates to raised floor, in manner similar to existing construction. 2. Bolt horizontal frame supports to back wall, in manner similar to existing

construction.

C. Include two rack-mounted power strips for the equipment rack, each furnished with: 1. 30A 120VAC rated strip with resettable single pole circuit breaker. 2. LCD or LED amperage display monitor. 3. Surge suppression. 4. A minimum of twelve 20A receptacles. Each receptacle shall be furnished with

accidental disconnect shield (hood).

D. Patch panels: 1. Unshielded twisted pair (UTP) terminations:

a. Punch-down rear wiring terminations. b. Modular RJ-45 jack front terminations. c. Rack mount 48 channel (jack) construction. d. Equal to Mod-Tap IDC series. e. Provide adequate number to receive incoming and outgoing cables plus

at least 50% spares for future use. f. Rated for the same data transmission speed as the cable to which the

patch panel is attached. g. Provide 2U wire management tray between each 48 jack patch panel.

E. lnteroperability and backward compatibility: 1. All components, including jacks, patch cables, main cables, and distribution

frames, must meet interoperability standards. 2. No component may compromise the integrity of the entire system by offering sub

standard performance. 3. Where horizontal or vertical cabling is specified to a higher standard than the

equipment it is connected to (i.e., Category 6 cabling used on a present Category 3 operational level system), then the portions of the system specified to meet the higher standards shall be tested and certified to meet the higher standard.

2.6 FLOOR AND FIRE WALL PENETRATIONS

A. Where fire walls are penetrated by cabling not installed in conduit, provide either a conduit sleeve or a prefabricated manufactured sleeve.

B. Conduit sleeves for fire seals: Provide a conduit sleeve of steel EMT or GRC through the fire wall, with lengths equal to the wall thickness plus a minimum of 2" on each side of the fire wall.

C. Utilize pre-fabricated sleeves for fire seals. Provide a rectangular manufactured sleeve equal to STI EZ-Path 33.

PART 3 · EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Unless approved otherwise by the Engineer or Owner, the installers shall be certified in the installation of communication systems.

B. Installers shall be certified by BICSI's Telecommunications Cabling Installation and Training and Registration Program as follows: 1. Installer Level 1: All installers shall be qualified for this certification level and shall

have passed a national test including the following levels of skill: a. Cable pulling.

16740-4

b. Cable termination. c. Outlet installation. d. Firestopping. e. Testing. f. Retrofits. g. Applicable codes and standards.

2. Installer Level 2: At least one of the installation team shall be qualified for this certification level and shall have passed a national test including the following additional levels of skill above Level 1: a. Two years job experience. b. Site surveys. c. Construction of communication closets. d. Grounding infrastructure. e. Cable splicing f. Diagnostic testing.

3. Technician Level: The operator of the installation company, or the installing foreman, shall be qualified for this certification level and shall have passed a national test including the following additional levels of skill above Level 2: a. Five years job experience. b. Develop Job Plans. c. Knowledge of Local Area Networks.

4. Provide, with the submittal, qualification statement for the personnel to be assigned to the project.

3.2 DISTRIBUTION RACKS

A. Install the relocated distributions racks where indicated on the Drawings.

B. Bolt racks to floor and attach to rear wall.

C. Install grounded outlet strips and branch circuit connections to building wiring system.

D. Install one #6 insulated ground bonding conductor between the electrical service entrance equipment and each distribution rack. Bond to ground straps or screws on the equipment.

3.3 RACEWAYS

A. Install in-house telephone and data raceway systems, including conduit, cable trays were noted, junction boxes, outlet boxes, and plates.

B. Provide pull wires in all raceways not currently receiving conductors.

C. Install terminal board power and grounding connections for rooms or locations other than the telephone utility service entrance point.

3.4 FIRE WALL PENETRATIONS

A. Conduit penetrations: 1. Install conduit sleeve through the fire wall and fire-caulk on each side of the fire

wall penetration. 2. Install the data and telephone cables through the sleeve, then fire-seal the interior

of the sleeve on each end with fire caulk or other acceptable method.

B. Prefabricated sleeve penetrations: 1. Sleeve size shall accommodate, as a minimum, the present number of cables

plus 25% future growth. 2. Core-drill fire wall and insert sleeve. 3. Spin on flanges and attached to each side of the fire wall.

167 40-5

4. Route cables through the open sleeve, and close back once final pulls are completed.

3.6 CABLING SYSTEMS

C. Install in-house telephone and data wiring system including: 1. Telephone and data wiring. 2. Jacks and connectors. 3. Patch panels.

D. Telephone and copper data cable runs: 1. Install complete without splice in a "star" pattern between outlet and source

termination point. 2. Distance shall not exceed 100 meters for Category 6 cabling. Contact Engineer if

potential lengths will exceed this maximum distance. 3. Conduit or raceways:

a. Install in conduit inside walls and across fire or smoke barriers. b. Install in conduit or cable trays above ceilings where noted on the

Drawings or in these Specifications. 4. Pulling tension and bends:

a. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended pulling tension. b. Cable bend radius shall not exceed 4 times the cable diameter for copper

cables and shall not exceed 15 times the cable diameter for fiber optic cables.

c. Avoid excessive stress, strain, or bending of cables. d. Kinked cable shall be regarded as damaged and replaced full length. e. Provide extra slack near all termination points.

5. Installation of cables without conduit above ceiling lines: a. Coordinate with HVAC system installation to insure that cables installed

in all areas with free air return are either installed within metallic conduit or are provided with plenum rated insulation.

b. Route copper cabling at least 12" from fluorescent or HID lighting fixtures, 6" from power circuits, and 42" from transformers and motors.

c. Space supports 48"-60" apart. d. Utilize Minerallac 648 series modified "J" hooks with wide surface plastic

saddles for cable support. Do not use standard "J" hooks unless approved by the Engineer.

e. Do not support cables with tie wraps or brindle rings. f. Any tie wraps used to secure cables to "J" hooks shall be plenum rated

where the cable insulation is required to be plenum rated. g. Do not support cables from suspended ceiling support wires unless the

ceiling supports are specifically rated for such use (ref. NEC 300-11) or if support wires are provided separately from ceiling grid supports.

h. Open ceiling runs require cables to be installed in conduit. See Drawings for additional details.

E. Cable terminations: 1. Data racks:

a. Install UTP patch panels and cable management trays. b. Mount fiber optic patch panels above UTP panels. c. Terminate all UTP conductors on rear of patch panels unless noted

otherwise. d. Mount and connect power strips. e. Patch cables will be provided and installed by others.

2. Jacks:

16740-6

a. Terminate telephone cables on RJ-11 modular snap-in jacks installed in outlet plates.

b. Terminate copper data cables on RJ-45 EIA568B modular snap-in jacks install in outlet plates.

c. Telephone and data copper cables may utilize a common outlet plate. d. Provide space for marking the termination as to cable identification.

3. Copper data cable terminations: a. Category 6 cabling:

1) Do not remove more than W' of cable insulation at termination point.

2) Keep conductors twisted with 1/4-1/2" of the termination point at racks, terminal boards, and outlets.

b. Utilize EIA 568B termination sequence for both telephone and data cable terminations.

F. Cable identification: 1. Identify each cable termination at the data rack patch panel with proper types of

machine-printed labels indicating location, floor, cable type, and/or other appropriate designation.

2. Utilize a systematic labeling system that does not depend on the architectural room number on the Drawings.

3. Numbering shall be sequential. Identify types of cables by present use (i.e., "D" for data, "T" for telephone, or similar nomenclature).

4. Cable labels: a. Wrap-around type installed on the cable within 6-12" of its termination,

where visible in outlet boxes. b. The same labeling shall be utilized for both source and end sides of each

cable.

G. Cable testing: 1. All copper cabling shall be initially tested for:

a. Continuity. b. Correct labeling.

2. Functional wiring testing for copper UTP cables: a. Test for shorts. b. Test for proper pin-out and reversed pairs (wiremap ). c. Utilize a broad frequency test instrument to insure proper operation as

follows: 1) Up to 550 MHz for Category 6.

d. Testing of UTP cables shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA TSB-67. e. Test for:

1) Attenuation. 2) Near end cross talk. 3) Far end cross talk. 4) Total cable length (not to exceed 100 meters for Category 5e or

6 cabling). f. Repair or replace any defective cables, terminations, or splices. g. Minimum standards for cabling and terminations:

1) Category 6 (250 MHz test):: a) Attenuation: 36 dB. b) NEXT: 33.1 dB. c) Power-sum NEXT: 30.2 dB. d) ACR: -2.9 dB. e) Power-sum ACR: -5.8 dB. f) ELFEXT: 15.3 dB.

16740-7

g) Power-sum ELFEXT: 12.3 dB. h) Return loss: 8 dB. i) Propagation loss: 546 nsec. j) Skew delay: 50 nsec.

END OF SECTION

16740-8

SECTION 16950

TESTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Provide all work required to test the electrical systems as required by these Specifications.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The following systems will require written test reports submitted to the Engineer: 1. Coordination and arc-flash study and associated equipment labels. 2. Fire alarm systems (for publicly required documentation). 3. Certification of data and telephone cables and associated system connections.

B. Test all wiring installed or connected by Division 16 for absence from damage, short circuits, accidental grounding, and continuity. Report any instances of improper installation to the Engineer.

C. Test all remaining electrical equipment and systems. Perform equipment and system tests on site with equipment in installed position and as left for permanent use. The Contractor may keep his own notes as to the scope of items tested, date of tests, and a record of his findings provided they are complete, accurate, and reproducible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Where required, certify that tests were performed, that systems tested performed successfully, and list conditions and names of persons present.

B. Telephone and data cables requiring to be certified require written test reports submitted to the Engineer for his evaluation.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide all test equipment, temporary wiring, labor, etc., required to fully perform required or requested testing.

B. No additional compensation will be given to the Contractor for testing of electrical systems installed under this division of the specifications.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 REQUIRED TESTS

A. Conductor megger tests: 1. After wires and cables are installed in conduits or raceways, but before being

connected to devices and equipment, test the wiring systems for unintentional shorts, open circuits, or grounds by means of an approved type of portable "megger" instrument.

2. Do not subject ground fault or arcing fault circuit interrupter type breakers or receptacles to megger tests.

B. Electrical measurements:

16950-1

1. With the system energized, make line voltage and current measurements at all switchboards, panelboards, motors, HVAC equipment, and other electrically operated equipment under full load conditions.

2. Notify Engineer of all unusual readings or results, such as voltages above or below normal bands or operation or currents that exceed equipment or conductor ratings.

C. Equipment tests and adjustments: 1. Test feeder circuits to ensure that panelboards and related equipment are

connected to the proper feeder breakers or switches. 2. Compare actual conductors installed with those required on the Drawings. Notify

the Engineer of any deviation from the Drawings. 3. Check all branch circuits to determine if wiring is connected to the proper circuit

and identified correctly on the panelboard circuit label. 4. Test all branch circuit receptacles for proper polarity and to make sure that they

are correctly energized. 5. Check dry-type transformer output voltages. Ensure that neutrals are properly

grounded to the system ground. Adjust taps if necessary. See Section 16461 for additional information.

6. Check lighting fixtures for proper Iamping and full light output from all lamps. 7. Set any circuit breakers with adjustable trip functions to the values selected by the

Engineer or recommended by the manufacturer. 8. Test other items of electrical equipment to insure that each and every one is

properly connected and that voltage is properly applied to the device. 9. Make any other special tests where specified under other Sections of Division 16.

D. Remove and replace any electrical wiring that is damaged by unintentional grounding or shorting, faulty connection, or during the testing process.

E. Special system testing: 1. Fire alarm system shall be tested by the system installer or supplier. 2. Telephone and data cables shall be tested as per their applicable section.

Provide written certification test reports for the Engineer's review. 3. Refer to other Sections of the Specifications for performance requirements of

these systems. 4. Any portion of these systems that require programming, setting, initialization,

identification, or related work shall be performed by the Contractor to place the system in complete, adjusted working order.

F. Submit three copies of all required written tests, certified by the Contractor for approval. Test data shall include the name of the building, location, Architect and Engineer, Contractor's name, equipment supplier, and other pertinent data required.

G. Provide any instruction to the Owner or Owner's Representative regarding operation of equipment, systems, or features, and assist as required in informing and educating the Owner regarding the electrical equipment's operating parameters.

H. Demonstrate the proper operation of all the electrical systems in the presence of the Architect, the Engineer, or the Architect's designated representative. All systems shall perform to the Owner's complete satisfaction.

END OF SECTION

16950-2